r.W!!;i..-. .. mm . ,,,ii,,v vs.„.vs^B«ll!|»»iHJ^»y .-^ -K^,,^kJL l^ Q/tXlxL^ PREFACE. In the first week of May, 1898, while the people of the United States were eagerly watching events in Cuba, while the attention of all was turned toward the island that promised to be the focal point in the pending Spanish-American war, this message flashed across the sea from the distant islands of the Western Pacific : "Not one Spanish fiag files in Manila Bay to-day. Not one Spanish warship floats, except as our prize." The brilliant victory that Admiral Dewey won over the Spanish fleet in the Philippines aroused the United States to the highest pitch of enthusiasm. For the moment Cuba was forgotten, and all public interest was directed toward this distant fighting center. Patriotism ran high. The "stars and stripes" and Admiral Dewey's picture were everywhere displayed. Praise of the man was heard on all sides. No such deed of valor and skilled manoeuvering had been known since the days of Farragut, and for a time it was thought that the battle of Manila Bay would end the war. To-day the war is ended. Messages telling of brilliant and surpris- ing victories are no longer sent from south and east; bulletins are no longer posted in the streets; but, while the American nation is bravely assuming the "White Man's Burden," the result of its great conquest, it becomes the part of History to commemorate the events of the war, of which the first and most decisive took place on that pleasant May morn- ing when the people of Manila and Oavite awoke to find the American squadron at their doors. It has seemed to me desirable, in this recital of the heroic deeds of a 10 PREFACE. man like Dewey, to begin with a narration of that one of the incidents in his career that will be longest remembered, one that will be insep- arably linked with not only the story of his life but with the history of his country. I make no apology, therefore, for allowing the early events in Admiral Dewey's life to be placed after the great victory that has made him famous throughout the world. I have heard it called strange that no one who knew Dewey prior to the battle of Manila Bay had any presentiment that he would develop into one of the extraordinary naval commanders of modern times. There is a trite but, nevertheless, probably true saying that "the world knows nothing of its greatest men." Admiral Dewey is not an accident; he is the natural product of his own strong individuality and the system by which the officers of the navy of the United States are trained. He has passed through a school in which the necessity to act upon the in- spiration of an instant is combined with the knowledge of how to wait with infinite patience j. ^ the arrival of the right time to act. It is altogether probable that, if there had been no war with Spain, Admiral Dewey would have reached the retiring age next December without having done anything that would have made his countrymen remember him with greater interest or gratitude than they would have felt for any one of a dozen other navy officers of his time. But all his life had been a preparation for just the opportunity that came to him. When other officers of his grade were suggested fpr the command of the Asiatic station in the latter part of 1897, no one cared to have it. It was offered to Dewey and he accepted it — not because he fore- saw an opportunity to win. fame, but because he believed an officer should always be ready for any duty that might be required of him. When at last the time for action drew near, he prepared for it in such a thorough manner that nothing was left to chance. Having com- pleted every preparation that forethought, skill and experience could suggest, Dewey's one object was to get within reach of the enemy at the earliest possible moment. There was where the spirit of the natural sea-fighter came out and compelled success. It is true that his squadron 'hjt^.iM^yL l^ v)i 7 AGUINALDO, tlie Ingnrgent I^eader of the FUiplnoB. To his people he ranks as a Bolivar, a Toussainl I^'Ouverture or aWashington. History must decide where he is to be placed. This work includes a sketch of his life and per- sonality, with an estimate oi his character. PREFACE. 13 was much stronger than that of the Spaniards; but the difference in , their merely material force cut no figure in the result. It is no exag- geration to say that if Montojo had had Dewey's fleet and if Dewey had had Montojo's, it would still have been the colors of the United States that would hay been the only ensign afloat in Manila Bay at the close of the action. It is because Admiral Dewey is a type of the American who compels and deserves the admiration of not only his own countrymen but of the people of every nation who hold dear courage and capacity, delicacy and strength, that his name will go down to posterity as one of the noblest of this century. Chicago, April, 1899. THE GIFT OF A NATION. The above picture is a photograph of the sword and belt ordered by Congress to be given Admiral Dewey as a token of the nation's gratitude. It is richly embellished with precious stones. GENERAL THOMAS ANDERSON TABLE OF CONTENTS. CHAPTER I. FROM HONG KONG TO MANILA. Page. Commodore Dewey in Command of the Asiatic Squadron — How the Story of the "Maine" Disaster Was Obtained — Putting the Fleet in Readiness for Battle — A Race from Tokio to Join Dewey — Leaving Hong Kong in Deference to Neutrality Laws — A Rendez- vous in Mirs Bay — The Voyage to Manila — Night Drills and Emergency Calls — The Final War Council — Nearing the Day of Battle— In Manila Bay 23 CHAPTER n. THE BATTLE OF MANILA BAY. First Glimpse of the Enemy's Fleet at Cavite— Dewey Reserves His Fire — "You May Fire When You Are Ready, Captain Gridley" — The Story of the Conflict— That Withdrawal for Breakfast- Resuming the Attack — Dewey's Official Report to the Navy De- partment — Dewey Fulfills His Instructions — How Captain Grid- ley Told the Tale — A Spanish Account of Our Victory 38 CHAPTER in. AFTER THE BATTLE. Receiving the Surrender of Cavite Arsenal — Quibbles and Evasions to Meet — A Case for Haste — Journey to Hong Kong to Send Dis- patches — Capture of the Callao — Routine of Blockade Duty in Manila Bay — Arrival of Aguinaldo from Hong Kong — Estab- lishing a Government at Cavite — Three Important Proclamations — Filipino Victories over the Spanish — Their Treatment of Span- ish Prisoners — Insurgents Invest Manila 66 15 16 TABLE OF CONTENTS. CHAPTER IV. PREPARING TO TAKE MANILA, The American People Rise to an Emergency — General Merritt Chosen to Command an Expedition to the Philippines — Gathering an Army at San Francisco — Complications with the Germans in Manila Bay— Another Spanish Gunboat Captured — Prisoners Become a Nuisance — Arrival of Transports and Troops — First Battle Ashore — Ready to Take Manila 86 CHAPTER V. MERRITT AND DEWEY CAPTURE MANILA. Approach of the Time when Waiting Was to End — Efforts to Obtain a Surrender Without an Engagement Fail — Story of the Battle of August 13 — Dramatic and Picturesque Features of the Assault on the Fortifications — Taking Possession of the City — The Part Played by the Navy — Captured Spanish Gunboats Distinguish Themselves — Organizing the New Regime in Manila — ^Waiting for the Declaration of Peace 103 CHAPTER VL ANCESTRY .AND CHILDHOOD OF GEORGE DEWEY. "The Child is the Father of the Man" — Origin of the Dewey Family — Nine Generations Born in America — The Grandfather of the Admiral — Dewey's Father and His Traits — Stories of the Home Life and the Youth of the Coming Hero — Boyish Pranks and Their Punishment— A Voyage in a Buggy— School Life and Schoolmates— Appointment to the Naval Academy at Annapolis. . .121 CHAPTER VIL GEORGE DEWEY IN THE CIVIL WAR. Four Years in the Naval Academy at Annapolis— Incidents of Cadet Life — A Cruise on the European Station — Rapid Promotion for the Young Officer— Outbreak of the Rebellion — Executive OfScer TABLE OF CONTENTS. 17 of the "Mississippi" — Bravery of Dewey When His Vessel Was Destroyed — ^Mentioned in Offlcial Eeports — ^Service With Far- ragut — At the Taking of Fort Fisher — What Admiral Porter Thought— The End of the War 135 CHAPTER VIII. DEWEY FROM WAR TO WAR. When the Civil War Ended — On the European Station — ^Incidents of the Cruise — ^Marriage and Bereavement of Dewey — Service in Asiatic Waters — Successive Promotions — Shore Duty in Wash- ington — Ordered to Command the Asiatic Squadron — The Thanks of the Nation — Presents and Honors — Dewey an Admiral , . . 151 CHAPTER IX. THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS IN HISTORY. The Orient Always an Object of Interest and Desire — Writers of Authority on the Philippines — ^Magellan's Famous Voyage under the Flag of Spain — The Ladrones Discovered — Arrival at Min- danao — Relations with the Natives — ^Legaspi Sails from Mexico for the Philippines — The Subjugation of the Islands — Revolt and Insurrfection — ^The British Invasion 167 CHAPTER X. ISLAND GEOGRAPHY, CONDITIONS AND RESOURCES. The Native Tribes of the Philippines — Islands Comprising the Group — Climatic Conditions— Safeguards Against Disease — Earthquakes and Volcanoes — Animal and Vegetable Life — Land and Water Reptiles — Beasts and Birds in Countless Numbers — Extensive Pearl Fisheries — Mineral Wealth of the Islands — Chinese Inter- ests in the Mines — Valuable Discoveries and Future Develop- ment ,185 18 TABLE OF CONTENTS, CHAPTER XL MANILA AND LUZON UNDEE THE SPANISH REGIME. The Walls of the Ancient City — Picturesque Parks and Public Grounds — The Chinese and Their Work — Tragic Memories of the Lunetta — Beauties of the Night — Amusements of the Natives — ^Italian Opera and American Circus — Spanish Bull Fights and English Horse Races — The Hotels of the City — Native Shops and Their Keepers — ^The Town of Cavite — Steamship Service of the Island . . 202 CHAPTER XIL THE CENTRAL ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAGO. The Visayan Archipelago — On an Island Steamer — A Typical Spanish Town — A Fort Without a Gun — Yellovp Journalism in the Phil- ippines — Beautiful Women Who Smoke — Cebu and Its Commer- cial Importance — The Island of Panay — The Sulu Sea and Its Boundaries — Primitive Modes of Life in Palawan — Among the Savage Tribes 214 CHAPTER Xm. SULU AND MINDANAO, THE HOME OF THE MOROS. Origin of the Sulu Mohammedans — A War for Supremacy — Fighting the Pirates — Insurrections in the Islands — An Efficient Governor — Where the Slave Trade Flourishes — How to Govern the Sulus — An Island Comparatively Unknown — Construction of the Native Houses — Peculiar Systems of Local Government — Hos- pitality of the Filipinos 232 CHAPTER XIV. THE FILIPINOS AND THEIR CHARACTERISTICS. Savage Tribes in the Islands— The Original Inhabitants— The Com- mencement of the Insurrections — Native Weapons and How They are Used — Picturesque Dress of Men and Women — Religious Ceremonies — Beliefs of the Morros— 'Some Civilized Character- istics—A Tribe of Head Hunters— How Some of the Natives Live,. . 247 TABLE OP CONTENTS. 19 CHAPTER XV. COMMERCIAL AND NATIVE INDUSTRIES. New Fields for American Enterprise— Where Rope is Made— Needs of the Hemp Growers— An Opportunity for Inventors— Magnitude of the Sugar Industry— The Tobacco Factories of Manila— In- fluence of the Chinese in Industrial Matters — Window Panes Made From Shells— The Uses of the Bamboo— Rice the Prin- cipal Article of Food — How to Reach the Islands 260 CHAPTER XVL AGUINALDO, THE LEADER OF THE FILIPINOS. Personality and Career of the Most Notable Man in the Philippines — The Last Insurrection Against the Spanish and How It Termi- nated — Bribery and the Consequences — Varying Opinions of Aguinaldo — A Word About the American Consuls — Relations with Army and Navy — General Merritt and the Filipino Admin- istration 273 CHAPTER XVIL FRICTION BETWEEN AMERICANS AND FILIPINOS. Complications Are Threatened from the Beginning — The Germans and the Insurgents — Affair of the Steamer Filipinas — Recognizing the Insurgent Flag — How Dewey Dealt with Aguinaldo — Aguin- aldo and His Forces Required to Leave Manila — Picturesque March Through the City — Filipino Congress in Session at Malolos 287 CHAPTER XVIIL FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. An Appeal from the Junta Patriotica at Hong Kong to the American People — Charges of Bad Faith — General Merritt's Opinion of the Filipinos — General Otis Tries to Secure the Release of Spanish 2Q TABLE OF CONTENTS. Prisoners Held by the Insurgents— Our Expedition to Iloilo — President McKinley's Instructions to the American Authorities in Manila— A Manifesto from Aguinaldo— The Filipino Cabinet — Agoncillo in Washington— President McKinley Appoints a Commission .299 CHAPTER XIX. OUE WAR WITH THE FILIPINOS. (Commencement of Hostilities Between Americans and Filipinos — The Advance of the Americans— Old Men and Children in the Trenches— Shells from Dewey's Fleet — A Filipino Proclama- tion — Manila on Fire — Cessation of Hostilities — Arrival of the Philippine Commission — The Attack on Pasig — Aguinaldo in the Trenches — Arrival of the Oregon 323 CHAPTER XX. CAMPAIGNING IN LUZON. The Fighting Continues — Burning Native Huts — Many Killed on Both Sides — The Advance on Malolos — Lawton Captures Santa Cruz — Our Men Wade Ashore Under Fire — In the Hands of the Enemy — General Lawton Evacuates the Captured Towns — General Otis' Opinion — Revival of Confidence Among the Fili- pinos 346 CHAPTER XXL THE PEACE COMMISSION MEETS HOSTILITY. The Personnel of the Commission — Proclamation to the Filipinos — As- surances of Good Will — The Supremacy of the United States to. Be Enforced — Honest Civil Service Promised — Industrial Pur- suits to Be Encouraged — The Public School System — Opinions of Leading Filipinos — No Cessation of Warfare 364 Poems of Dewey and the Philippines 373 CHAPTER XXII. CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. Brave Americans Fall in Battle— The Death of Colonel Stotzenberg — Calumpit Taken— Brilliant Work of the Kansas Regiment — How Colonel Funston Swam the River— Representatives of Aguinaldo Ask a Truce — General Otis' Ultimatum — A Local Filipino Government Receives American Sanction— Natives Return to Their Homes 392 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. PAGB Frontispiece No. 1 — Admiral George Dewey. Frontispiece No. 2 — ^Group of Dewey, Ms Father, Grandfather and Son, showing four generations. The Author, Joseph L. Stickney 11 Emilio Aguinaldo ^ 12 Dewey, Gridley and Laraiberton 21 Reproduction of Rare Map 22 View of Baltimore in Action 39 View of Spanish Ships 39 View of the American Fleet 40 On Board The Olympia 40 The Spanish Cruiser Isla de Luzon '. 49 The Olympia at Anchor 49 Map of Manila and Surroundings 50 Map of Manila Continued 51 The Baltimore Going Into the Second Fight 52 View of a Corner of the Cavite Arsenal 52 Three Active Men — Gridley, Lamberton and Rees 61 The Olympia's Men Cheering the Baltimore During the Battle of Manila Bay 61 Cavite Arsenal Gate 62 The Wreck of the Castilla 62 After the Battle 79 Boats of the Cruiser Boston 79 The Concord 80 Damage to the Boston 80 Forward Turret of The Olympia 89 Starboard Side of The Olympia Quarterdeck 89 Headquarters of the Cavite Arsenal 90 Where the White Flag was Hoisted 90 Looting Cavite 91 Burying Spanish Dead After the Battle 91 Protecting the Ammunition 92 The Forward Turret and Bridge of The Olympia 92 The Raleigh 101 Military Mass in Dahalican 102 21 22 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. After Dewey's Guns Fired 119 Filipino Intrenchments 119 A Spanish Bombardment 120 Birthplace of Admiral George Dewey 129 Admiral George Dewey's Wife (Deceased) 130 Group — Two Brothers and Sister 131 Brother's House and University Building 132 Dewey in a Runaway 141 Dewey Saving Life of Sailor 142 Dewey Leaving the Burning Mississippi 159 View in Cemetery 160 Manila Wharf 169 The Main Street in Manila 170 Gun Foundry at Manila 171 Zapote Bridge 172 Destruction Wrought by Bombardment. 181 Very Deliberate and Quite Characteristic of Spain 182 Near the Philippine Islands, showing Spanish Gunboat Leyte 199 Perforated by Shells 200 Aguinaldo (taken when younger in age and experience) 200 Convent Used as a Magazine 217 A Beautiful Home and Park 218 EJntrance to Cavite 235 Aguinaldo's Camp 236 Captain Charles V. Gridley (Deceased) 253 Group of Filipino Officers, including General Aguinaldo 254 Aguinaldo's Secretary 271 A Company of Filipino Soldiers 272 A Defense 289 Former Home of the Captain General of the Philippines 290 Red Cross Hospital in the Philippines 307 View of Cavite 308 General E. S. Otis 325 General Wesley Merritt 326 General Arthur MacArthur 343 General William Lawton 344 General Loyd Wheaton 361 General Francis V. Greene 362 General Charles King 379 View of Pasig River and Surroundings 380 Public Square and Church at Paco 397 The Roads a Novelty to Americans 398 A Pretty Piece of Architecture 415 Country Road in the Philippine Islands 416 Copyrighted, 1899, by Joseph L. Stickney. DEWEY, GRIDLEY, LAMBERTON Commodore Dewey receiving reports from Captain Gridley and Commander Lamberton a few minutes after the fleet hauled oflE "for breakfast '' during the battle of Manila Bay. Back of the group is seen the chase of the after 5-inch gun, which was in the Commodore's cabin, and above that gun is a 6-pounder, protected by hammocks. •- i-:^-/^\Tilt. REPRODUCTION OF RARE MAP Taken from the chart-house of the Spanish cruiser Isla de Luzon the morning after the battle, while she was still burning. It was the chart used by the navigator of that vessel during the fight, found by Mr. Stickney, just as it had been abandoned when the Petrel drove the crew ashore. This is probably the only chart used by the Spaniards during the battle, saved from the fire that destroyed them, after they were sunk. CHAPTER L FROM HONG KONG TO MANILA. Commodore Dewey in Command of the Asiatic Squadron — How the Story of the "Maine" Disaster Was Obtained — Putting the Fleet in Readiness for Battle — A Race from Tokio to Join Dewey — ^Leaving Hong Kong in Deference to Neutrality Laws — A Rendezvous in Mirs Bay — The Voyage to Manila — Night Drills and Emergency Calls — The Final War Council — Nearing the Day of Battle — In Manila Bay. Without treating the subject in a technical way, I purpose giving an account of Commodore (now Admiral) Dewey's operations in the Phil- ippines, from the time when war with Spain was declared to the occupa- tion of the city of Manila. To most of these events I was an eye-witness, and I was in a position to learn what may be called the "inside history" of every important occurrence in the bay. Shortly after the explosion that destroyed the Maine, Commodore Dewey received orders to concentrate the Asiatic squadron at Hong Kong. Without professing to tell any state secrets, I may say that this rendezvous was made as a precautionary move in case the investiga- tion into the cause of the Maine's (destruction should result in war with Spain. Accordingly the Flagship Olympia, the Boston, the Ra- leigh and the Concord, cruisers, and the gunboat Petrel, assembled in the harbor of Hong Kong before the middle of March, 1898. The Monocacy, the only remaining vessel on the Asiatic station, was left in Shanghai because she was not sufficiently seaworthy to make even a short cruise. As I was not with Commodore Dewey at this time, I can speak about his acts prior to my joining him only from information obtained from his officers; but as to its absolute accuracy there can be no question. When the news of the destruction of the Maine was received on the Asiatic station, the news agency that serves the Far East with dis- patches from the United States and Europe sent such meager and un- satisfactory reports that the officers of the squadron in Hong Kong subscribed a sufficient sum of money to have a full account cabled to 23 24 FKOM HONG KONG TO MANILA. them. Wishing an accurate and unbiased story, they asked Col. W. L. Church, editor of the Army and Navy Journal, of New York, to send them the admitted facts concerning the disaster to the Maine, and within ten days they had all the information that wa" -"hen obtainable. Dewey's Opinion of the Maine Disaster. Commodore Dewey was too well versed in all the technical questions involved to have any doubt about the real cause of the explosion. He made all his plans upon the probability that the court of investigation would lay the disaster at the door of the Spaniards and that there could be only one result of such a finding — namely, war between the United States and Spain, To be ready for that emergency he made every prep- aration that skill and experience could suggest. His ships were docked, that their bottoms might be cleaned; their bunkers were kept filled with coal; provisions were ordered in ample quantities, so that they might leave port at any time with supplies sufficient to feed the crews for three months, and every piece of mechanism, whether in the propelling machinery or at the guns, was overhauled and put in complete order for effective and continuous work. As the relations between the two powers became more and more strained, the Commodore asked and ob- tained leave to charter a supply ship and a collier. The British steamer Zafiro was taken for the supply vessel, and the British steamer Nanshan, laden with 3,000 tons of the best Welsh coal, was chartered as the collier. How thoroughly Commodore Dewey made his preparations may be understood by a comparison of the dates of his movements against the Spanish forces in the Philippines. War was declared on Monday, April 25th, and on Wednesday, April 27th, he sailed for Manila, having waited two days solely on account of the coming of the United States Consul at Manila, who, he had been informed, would bring him im- portant facts concerning the Spanish fleet and the defences of Manila. It was just before this time that my own preparations to take part in the Manila campaign were made. I had gone to Japan to keep a look- out upon the British, Japanese and Russian fleets in the Far East, be- cause there were such indications of tension among the Western powers that it was desirable to be in the neighborhood of Asiatic waters for any war that might occur between Eussia and Great Britain. FROM HONG KONG TO MANILA'. 25 Arranging to Join Dewey. Being in Tokio, Japan, I cabled to Commodore Dewey on Saturday, April 9tli, as follows: "The Secretary of the Navy gives me permission to accompany your squadron to the Philippines if you do not object. May I go with you, agreeing not to send while with you any news except when approved by you? If yes, shall I come immediately? Stickney, Imperial Hotel." I received next day the following reply, dated Hong Kong: "Yes; come immediately. Dewey." On Monday, April 11th, the cruiser Baltimore, bringing ammunition for Dewey's ships, entered the harbor of Yokohama just as I was em- barking in the mail steamer China for Hong Kong, and I was thus as- sured of joining the Commodore before he sailed for the Philippines, because I knew he would wait for the Baltimore; and, as the latter was going to remain in Yokohama long enough to fill up with coal, it was a practical certainty that the China would reach Hong Kong first. I had as a shipmate in the China Captain (then Commander) B. P. Lamberton, United States Navy, who was under orders to report to Commodore Dewey, to take command of the cruiser Boston. As fog and storm de- layed the China two days over her schedule time*between Yokohama and Hong Kong, we were both seriously apprehensive that we should find our squadron gone to Mirs Bay when we reached our destination, as we had been informed in Shanghai that Commodore Dewey had already withdrawn to that bay, about thirty miles north of Hong Kong— in- formation which we found to be incorrect. The First Sight of War Preparations. Entering the harbor of Hong Kong in a moderate gale after night- fall on Thursday, April 21st, the China was obliged to anchor below Lye Moon Pass, far down the bay, and we were unable to learn whether or not our ships were in the harbor; but, as we went to the China's moor- ing buoy at daylight next morning and the long stretch of the man-of- war anchorage opened into view, we saw seven grim vessels moored in line, apart from the white painted hulls of the British squadron. And simultaneously the same thought flashed through our minds, and tO' 26 FROM HONG KONG TO MANILA. geiher we cried: "They're grey! They're grey! This meaiiiS war!" For, instead of the brilliant white, that had made our ships such con- spicuous features of the Yokohama harbor, when I had last seen them there, every one wore a garb of olive grey — the recognized war paint of the navy. But we were in time for the battle, and our hearts were glad. And presently, through the fog-laden atmosphere that obscured the view of the lower bay, we saw ^ great white ship forge into the harbor flying the "stars and stripes" and making signals to the Olympia. It was the Baltimore, just arriving from Yokohama. The curtain was about to rise on a war drama of which all the world was to furnish the spectators. Events began to move fast enough now. The Baltimore had been lying in Honolulu a long time, and her bottom was covered with seaweed and barnacles to such an extent as to reduce her speed very seriously. In preparation for her arrival, therefore, permission had been obtained to dock this fine cruiser as soon as she reached Hong Kong, and before sunrise next morning she was floated into dock at Kowloon, just across the harbor. The forethought which Commodore Dewey showed in laying his plans was equalled only by the rapidity with which he and. his subordinates executed them. The English navy officers, who have a pretty good reputation for skill in the management of ships and seamen, were surprised at the prompt handling of the Baltimore and the amount of work done by her men. On Sunday, April 23d, she came out of dock, her bottom cleaned and coated with anti-fouling com- pound and her upper hull repainted with the war color of bluish grey. From Hong Kong to Manila. Acting Governor Black issued a proclamation Saturday evening in which he announced the neutrality of Great Britain and laid down the rules which the warships of the United States and Spain would have to obey in Hong Kong waters. In accordance therewith Commodore Dewey sent most of his squadron out of the harbor on Sunday, and all the American cruisers were anchored in Mirs Bay on Monday, April 24th. The Commodore was all ready for action that day, but he wished to await the arrival of the United States consul at Manila, Mr. O. F. Williams, who was then on his way from Manila to Hong Kong. Commodore Dewey's orders when he sailed from Mirs Bay were brief FROM HONG KONG TO MANILA. 27 but explicit. He was instructed to proceed to the PMiippine Islands and do Ms utmost to capture or destroy the Spanish naval force in those waters. During the battle in which he completely accomplished the tasJi set him he kept those orders so literally in mind that, for a long time after the Spanish batteries had begun to show that they could do better shooting than was being done by the Spanish cruisers, the Com- modore refused to turn any of his fire upon them. ''We'll sink the ships first," he said, "and then we'll finish off the shore guns." Augustin's Bombastic Proclamation, One of the curiosities of the day was the issuance by Captain-General Augustin of a proclamation concerning the coming of our fleet. It was couched in such extravagant and absurd language that many people refused to believe that it was really issued by the Spanish commander- in-chief. Having obtained a copy of the Spanish newspaper in Manila in which it was officially published, I present herewith, in fac-simile, that part of the paper containing it, with a translation into English. ESP ANGLES: EXTRAOEDINAEY PROCLA- MATION BY THE GGV- Entre Espafia y los Estados- ERNOR-GENERAL OF Unidos de la America del Norte THE PHILIPPINES, se han roto las hostilidades. Llego el momento de demostrar "Spaniards. — al mundo que nos sobran alientos "Between Spain and the United para veneer 4 los que, fingi^ndose States of North America hostilities amigos leales, aprovecharon nues- have broken out. tras desgracias y explotaron nues- "The moment has arrived to tra hidalgula utilizando medios prove to the world that we possess que las naciones cultas reputan the spirit to conquer those who, por reprobados € indignos. jretending to be loyal friends, take El pueblo norte-americano, advantage of our misfortunes and formado por todas las excrecencias abuse our hospitality, using means sociales, agot6 nuestra paciencia y which civilized nations count un- ha provocado la guerra con sus worthy and disreputable. 28 FKOM HONG KONG TO MANILA. p^rfidas maquinaciones, con sus actos de deslealtad, con sus atentados al derecho de gentes j d las convenciones internacionales. La lucha serd, breve y decisiva. El Dios de las victorias nos la con- cedera tan brillante y completa como demandan la razon y la justicia de nuestra causa. Espana, que cuenta con las simpatlas de todas las Naciones, saldrd triun- fante de esta nueva prueba, humi- llando y haciendo enmudecer k los aventureros de aquellos Estados que, sin cohesion y sin historia, solo ofrecen k la humanidad tradi- ciones vergonzosas y el espect^culo ingrato de unas Cimaras en que aparecen unidas la procacidad y la difamacion, la cobardia y el cinismo. Una escuaara, tripulada por gentes advenedizas, sin instruc- cion ni disciplina, se dispone k venir k este arcMpi61ago con el descabellado prop6sito de arreba- taros cuanto significa vida, honor y libertad. Pret^ndese inspirar k los marinos norte-americanos el coraje de que son incapaces, en- comenddndolcs, como realizable empresa, la de sustituir con el pro- testantismo la religion catolica que profesais, trataros como tribus refractarias a la civilizacion, apoderarse de vuestras riquezas como si OS fuese desconocido el derecho de propiedad, arrebataros, "The North American people, constituted of all the social ex- cresences, have exhausted our pa- tience and provoked war with their perfidious machinations, with their acts of treachery, with their outrages against the law of nations and international conven- tions. "The struggle will be short and decisive. The God of Victories will give us one as brilliant and com plete as the righteousness and jus tice of our cause demand. Spain which counts upon the sympathies of all the nations, will emerge tri umphantly from this war test humiliating and blasting the ad venturers from those States that, without cohesion and without a history, offer to humanity only in famous traditions and the ungrate ful spectacle of Chambers in which appear united insolence and defa- mation, cowardice and cynicism. A Very Bad lot, These Americans. "A squadron manned by for- eigners, possessing neither instruc- tion nor discipline, is preparing to come to this archipelago with the ruffianly intention of robbing us of all that means life, honor, and liberty. Pretending to be inspired by a courage of which they are in- capable, the North American sea- men undertake as an enterprise capable of realization ths substitu- FROM HONG KONG TO MANILA. 29 en fin, las personas que consideren utiles para tripular sus bar cos 6 ser explotadas en faenas agrlcolas 6 trabajos industriales. jVanos prop6sitos! ; Kidiculos alardes! Vuestra indomable bravura basta k impedir que osen intentar siquiera realizarlos. No consen- tir^is, no, que se escarnezca la f6 que profesais, ni que plantas im- plas hollen el tempi o del Dios ver- dadero, ni que la incredulidad der- roque las santas imagenes que adorais; no profanaran los agre- sores las tumbas de Tuestros pa- dres: no satisfard,n sus impudicas pasiones 4 costa del honor de vues- tras esposas 6 hijas; no os arreba- tardn los bienes que vuestra virtud acumulo para asegurar vuestra vida; no realizar^n, n6, ninguno de esos crimenes acariciados por su maldad j su codicia, porque vuestro valor j vuestro patriotismo bastan para escarmentar y abatir al pueblo que, llamdndose civiliza- do y culto, emplea el exterminio con los indigenas de la America del Norte sin procurar atraerlos k la vida de la civilizacion y del pro- greso. I Filipinos! preparaos k la lucha, y unidos cuantos cobija la gloriosa bandera espanola, siem- pre cubierta de laureles, peleemos con el convencimiento de que la victoria coronard nuestros esfuer- tion of Protestantism for the Cath- olic religion you profess, to treat you as tribes refractory to civiliza- tion, to take possession of your riches as if they were unac- quainted with the rights of prop- erty, and to kidnap those persons whom they consider useful to man their ships or to be exploited in agricultural or industrial labor. "Vain designs ! Eidiculous boastings ! "Your indomitable bravery will suf&ce to frustrate the attempt to carry them into realization. You will not allow the faith you pro- fess to be made a mock of impious hands to be placed on the tempk; of the true God, the images you adore to be thrown down by un- belief. The aggressors shall not profane the tombs of your fathers, they shall not gratify their lustful passions at the cost of your wives' and daughters' honor, or appro- priate the property that your in- dustry has accumulated as a pro- vision for your old age. No, they shall not perpetrate any of the crimes inspired by their wicked- ness and covetousness, because your valor and patriotism will suffice to punish and abase the people that, claiming to be civil- ized and cultivated, have extermi- nated the natives of North Ameri- ca instead of bringing to them the life of civilization and of progress. 30 FROM HONG KONG TO MANILA. zos J contestemos 4 las intima- "Philipinos, prepare for the cioties de nuestros enemigos con la struggle and, united under the decision del cristiano y del patrio- glorious Spanish flag, which is ta al grito de iVivaEspana! ever covered with laurels, let us Manila, 23 de Abril de 1898. fight with the conviction that vic- Vuestro General, tory will crown our efforts, and to Basilio Augustin y Davila. the calls of our enemies let us op- pose with the decision of the Christian and the patriot the cry of 'Viva Espana.' "Manila, 23d April, 1898. "Your General, "Basilio Augustin Davila," About noon on Wednesday the consul reached Mirs Bay, and prompt- ly the signal was made: "Get under way." During the time since it had become apparent that war was inevitable the squadron had been engaged in preparations for an immediate fight, and the signal was answered with an alacrity that showed how welcome was the order to the ships' companies. At two o'clock the fiagship Olympia led the way out of Mirs Bay, followed by the Baltimore, the Raleigh, the Petrel, the Concord and the Boston, in the order named, while in a separate line were the dispatch-boat McOulloch, the Zafiro and the Nanshan. The slow speed of eight knots was set by the flagship, because the colliers were deeply laden, and it was not wise to push them to their best speed in the long, moderate sea then running. The course Avas laid for Cape Bolinao, near the northern end of the island of Luzon, and we ran out of the ground swell before Thursday night, although there was still enough motion on the smaller ships to keep their decks wet and far from comfortable. Wednesday midnight the Commodore waked the boys up with a call to "quarters for_action," just to see how quickly they could get their ships ready to meet the enemy. As the rapid and stirring notes of the bugle rang through the Olympia, followed by the hoarse call of the boatswain's mates, the silent beehive was instantaneously transformed into a scene of the greatest activity. The watch already on deck promptly began to clear the bat- tery for service. The watch below, roused out of their early sleep, quickly dropped from their hammocks or sprang from the deck where FEOM HONG KONG TO MANILA. 31 they had been sleeping and hustled into their clothes. Soon they began appearing on the upper deck, each carrying twp hammocks, to be stowed in the nettings or packed around the small rapid-fire pieces as a pro- tection against musketry. A Test of Readiness for Battle. The sea fastenings of the guns were hastily cast loose, the training levers shipped, the sights uncovered, the elevating screws worked and the sponge and rammer placed ready for use. In the powder division the magazines were opened, the hatches of the shell rooms taken off, the electric battle lanterns turned on and put in their proper places, the division tubs filled with water and the ammunition hoists set at work whipping up powder and shell. The master's division went to the wheel and the lead, hung up the battle lanterns and swiftly swung the search lights around to be sure that they were in easy working condition. The signalmen cleared away the Ardois lights and got out the Coston signals, ready to communicate with the other ships of the fleet as.' occa- sion might require. The engineer's division gathered at their stations in the fire rooms and engine rooms, ready to fire up under all boilers and put on any pressure of steam up to the maximum limit as called upon, at the same time closing the watertight compartment doors and starting the forced-draft air blowers. Throughout the ship there was continuous movement and preparation, carried forward in silence and generally in darkness, the only noises being those caused by the working of the machinery and the guns. Suddenly, out of the silent gloom, the voice of the executive officer, Lieutenant Eees, was heard: "Man the starboard battery! Pivot to starboard !" The heavy turrets swung around on their centers till their guns pointed off to starboard, and the men quickly took their places at the guns on the starboard side of the ship. When each division officer had satisfied himself that not one small detail of preparation had been overlooked, he went to the upper deck where the executive officer was standing and reported his division. The ship's writer, acting as clerk for the executive — in the absence of naval cadets in the Olympia — took note of the time when each division officer made his report, thus keeping a record by which the captain could judge the promptitude of his crew in all its departments. 32 FROM HONG KONG TO MANILA. Spirited Work on the Olympia. In just seven minutes from the first note on the bugle, Lieutenant Eees reported to the captain: "The ship is cleared for action, sir." A rapid drill at the guns — "going through the motions" of loading and firing at an imaginary enemy, first on one side and then on the other — kept the men on the jump for twenty minutes, and then came the order : "Secure!" With a rapidity like to that with which the guns had been cast loose, the crew returned to the magazines and shell-rooms the ammunition that had been brought on deck, replaced the temporary fittings that had been removed and secured the guns for sea. Again the division ofiicers had a brisk rivalry to be first in reporting their divisions secured, and when they had made their reports the executive officer sent word to the captain, "All secure, sir." This was followed by "Retreat!" sounded on the bugle, and the men left their battle sta- tions to resume the usual routine of the night watches. During the slow run across the China Sea, the men in our ships were exercised in all the duties pertaining to battle except the actual firing of the guns. There was never a moment after the time the "hands were turned to" — the navy phrase that indicates the waking up of every one aboard and the stowing of all hammocks in the nettings — when the crews were not busy about something that would be of use to them in the fight that was now so near at hand. When twilight hour came it was a fairly well tired-out lot of jackies that carried their hammocks be- low to get a night's rest, broken, of course, by the regular sea watches. Patriotic Music at Sea. At the hour when the officers dined in the evening the band mus- tered on the deck just forward of the Commodore's cabin and played popular airs, the selections being made usually from the light comic operas and stirring march movements of favorite composers; but on Thursday, the day after leaving Mirs Bay, Bandmaster Valifuoco select- ed the music with special reference to rousing the patriotism of the "boys in blue," choosing many of the airs that had been popular in the north during our civil war. These were all favorably received, but it was not till the band struck up "Yankee Doodle" that the boys cheered. When the concert closed with "The Star Spangled Banner," the voices FEOM HONG KONG TO MANILA. 33 of at least fifty men took up the words of each verse, the young ap- prentices being particularly noticeable in the lead, and the chorus spread through the ship from forecastle to cabin with an enthusiasm , that carried with it the hearts of all on board. Land was sighted Saturday morning, April 30th, the squadron hav- ing arrived off Cape Bolinao, near the north end of the Island of Luzon. That forenoon the Boston and the Concord were sent ahead of the rest of the fleet to enter Subig Bay, which is about thirty miles north of the entrance to Manila Bay. As it was thought that perhaps the Spanish squadron might have moved up to this bay, the Baltimore was sent to reinforce the other two vessels a little before noon. As the remaining ships came down the coast at easy speed, several small schooners were sighted along the shore and the Commodore or- dered the Zafiro to overhaul one of them to see whether she could give us news concerning the Spanish defences at Manila. When the Zafiro returned from this duty signal was made to her to come within hail of the flagship. Her captain, misgauging his speed as he came close alongside the Olympia, shot ahead and then made the mistake of putting his helm the wrong way. In consequence, the Zafiro swung straight across the flagship's bows, and a collision seemed inevitable. Lieu- tenant Strife, the officer of the deck — ^that is, the officer having charge of the handling of the Olympia during that watch— was equal to the emergency. He quickly put the Olympia's helm over also, and the two vessels glided past each other without touching. As the Olympia's bow just cleared the Zafiro's stern by a distance of not more than three or four feet, the Commodore said to Captain Gridley : Commodore Dewey's Way. "Who has the deck. Captain Gridley?" and then, when informed, he added: "Give my compliments to Lieutenant Strife and tell him that I noticed and appreciated his coolness and skill in handling the ship so as to avoid a collision." It was not a matter of much moment in itself,, since Strife did no more than his duty, but the incident was illustrative of Dewey's way of dealing with his officers. When we arrived off the entrance to Subig Bay, early in the after- noon, the Boston, the Baltimore and the Concord came out of the bay 34 FKOM HONG KONG TO MANILA. and reported that the Spaniards had neither ships nor shore guns in the harbor. Our course for Manila was resumed. Now the final prep- arations for battle were made. All woodwork that could be removed without injury to the working of the vessels was thrown overboard, and it was interesting to see the men coming on deck in a steady stream, carrying in their arms tables, chairs, doors and bulkheads, which they would pitch into the sea as though they were enjoying the opportunity to dismantle the interior of their ship. In fact, the seamen were glad to get rid of everj'thing that might endanger their lives by fire. In the Olympia the men had a number of board tables, made to swing from the beams above the berth deck, upon which they served their meals. The executive officer gave an order that these mess-tables should be "put over the side," meaning that they should be hung outside the ship by ropes in a position where, even if they should catch on fire, they would endanger nothing else. But the seamen chose to interpret the order to mean that the tables should go overboard, and the result was that, after the battle, the jackies had to eat either standing or lying down, since they had no tables. Giving His Captains Their Final Orders. A few miles north of the entrance to Manila Bay, Commodore Dewey stopped his flagship and made signal for commanding officers to repair on board. When every gig had been called away, and the captain of each ship was steering in solitary state toward the Olympia, no one needed to be told that we were on the eve of battle. "They're comin'," said one of the old seamen, "to hear the 'old man's' last word before we go at the Dons." "Not his last word," said one of the younger men. "Perhaps not his," was the reply, "but it's near our last words some of us are. There'll be many an eye will look at that sunset to-night that'll never see another." But such prophets of sorrow were rare. As a rule our men went into the action of Manila Bay with their minds more set upon revenge than foreboding. The sun went down on a sea as calm as if storm were unknown the deep sapphire surface being unruffled by even a ripple. Heaps of clouds in the southeast were colored in all the gorgeous pageantry of a tropical PROM HONG KONG TO MANILA. 35 brilliancy, and some of the more imaginative minds were able to see cloud-shapes that resembled the Maine. The war council was of short duration. Commodore Dewey had de- cided on his plans before it met, and he took little time in giving to each captain his duties for the night and next day. By seven o'clock the gigs were all hoisted at their davits, the flagship was again under way, and long before dark every vessel had taken her station, ready to run by the batteries at the mouth of the bay or to fight her passage, as circumstances might require. Aside from one light at the very stern of each ship, intended as a guide for the next in line, not a glimmer was to be seen aboard any craft in the fleet. As I looked astern from the Olympia's taffrail, I could just get a faint suggestion of a ghostly shape where the Baltimore grimly held her course on our port quarter, while the Raleigh, somewhat further away on our starboard quarter^ could be seen by only the sharpest eyes when the moon was wholly unob- scured by cloud. Entering Manila Bay. The Commodore decided to waste no time in useless delay; but, re- gardless of hidden mines and shore batteries, led the way into the harbor. With all lights out, and the crews at the guns, the warships in their grey war paint turned silently toward the Boca Grande, the larger entrance to the bay, the flagship, Olympia, leading. Following closely, in the order that was retained during the battle of the suc- ceeding day, came the Baltimore, the Raleigh, the Petrel, the Concord, and the Boston. As the fleet approached the entrance it moved as slowly as was compatible with keeping the formation of the line. Half of the crew of each gun were allowed to sleep alongside their stations in order that they might be better fitted for what was to come. Except for the sleep- less eye on the bridge of the Olympia, and the alert gaze of the officers on watch, the ships seemed to slumber, as did the city and the forts. It was at 9:45 o'clock that the men were sent to their guns, but there was little needed in the way of preparation for battle. On the shore north of the other channel — Boca Chica, as it is named — we had seen a bright light, but there was no stir perceptible to indicate that we had been discovered by the Spaniards. Opposite the middle of Corregidor — 36 FEOM HONG KONG TO MANILA. the island that lies in the entrance to the bay — another light now began to flash at interrals, as if making signals, and soon the flight of a rocket from this island told us that we had been discovered. "We ought to hare a shot from Corregidor very soon now," said the Commodore; and having been already sighted, our ships were permitted to increase their speed to eight knots. The Olympia could have moved at a 15-knot gait Avithout any unusual effort, and all the warships could have made about twelve knots; but it would not have been safe for the fighting craft to run away from the non-combatant column led by the revenue cutter McCulloch, and as the Nanshan and the Zafiro were not capable of doing much better than eight knots that speed was never exceeded. Into the yawning blackness between Corregidor and the lone rock that is called El Fraile — the Monk — we passed, and still no hostile demonstration from the Spanish guns and torpedoes. The moon was now hidden in the western clouds, and the solemn stillness of the Olympia, as we steamed along in the complete darkness, made the passage of the entrance probably the most oppressive time of our whole operations. The First Shot from the Spaniards. On, on crept the mighty engines of war, but the batterieis on shore gave no sign. Suddenly when the flagship had passed a mile beyond Corregidor Island, a gun boomed out, and a shell went screaming over the Ealeigh and the Olympia, soon followed by a second. Three ships, the Ealeigh, the Concord and the Boston, replied, apparently with effect, for the firing ceased, and again the batteries lay silent. As Commodore Dewey had planned, the fleet arrived within five miles of Manila at daybreak. What must have been the astonishment in the Spanish lines when the sun rose, and they looked out on the Ameri- can ships that had come in during the night! While, as yet, the fleet retained the appearance of calm that had characterized its approach, now many eyes on board lighted with the fire of war, as they sighted" the Spanish fleet, under command of Rear Admiral Montojo, lying off Cavite, and realized that the battle was at hand. During most of the battle the Spanish vessels were moving about at full speed. The Spaniards had a well equipped navy yard" called Cavite Arsenal, which had put the ships in first-rate fighting trim, and FROM HONG KONG TO MANILA. 37 on Sangley Point they had two strong batteries containing three 6.2-inch and one 4.7-inch guns; so that, when we take into account the advantages that the Spaniards had in position, in their opportunities to lay mines, and in their knowledge of the bay, it may be seen that it was no trifling task that confronted the fleet. With the American flag flying from all mastheads, the ships moved on. No excitement was visible; the quiet man on the bridge of the Olympia was as unmoved, apparently, as though he were sailing into a peaceful harbor. For the first time in many years the stars and stripes were being borne aggressively into a foreign port. It was an epoch in history. The rapid changes of scene and the whole picturesque effect was something never to be forgotten. The underlying meaning of it all was too great to be readily understood. Nineteenth century civili- zation and fifteenth century medisevalism lay confronting each other. CHAPTER n. THE BATTLE OF MANILA BAY, First Glimpse of the Enemy's Fleet at Cavite — Dewey Reserves His Fire — "You May Fire When You Are Ready, Captain Gridley" — The Story of the Conflict — That Withdrawal for Breakfast — Resuming the At- tack — Dewey's Official Report to the Navy Department — Dewey Fulfills His Instructions — How Captain Gridley Told the Tale — A Spanish Account of Our Victory. As the ships passed in front of Manila, action was begun by the Spaniards. Three batteries, mounting guns powerful enough to send shells to the distance of five miles, opened fire. The Concord replied, but Commodore Dewey, after two shots, made signal to stop firing, since there was danger of the shells carrying destruction and death into the crowded city beyond. At six minutes past five o'clock, when nearing Cavite, there was a splash and roar, and two great jets of water were thrown high in air ahead of the flagship. The fleet had come upon the first of the sub- marine mines. Of course it was possible and probable that the whole harbor was filled with torpedoes. At any moment they were liable to explode beneath the 'ships; but Commodore Dewey had foreseen this when he entered the bay, and it did not now cause him to change his plans. Moreover, he had fought with Farragut at New Orleans and at Mobile, and submarine mines had no terrors for him. Contrary to ex- pectation no more mines exploded, and it is believed that no others had been placed by the Spaniards. We regarded these explosions as a sort of "bluff," intended to make us imagine that there might be other mines in front of Cavite. "They ain't so good at blowing up snips that come with their fighting clothes on as they are at murdering a crew in time of peace," said one of the Olympia's petty officers, as he saw the column of water and smoke subsiding ahead of us; and this reference to the Maine showed what was uppermost in the minds of our men as they were moving on for their first chance to avenge the crime perpetrated in Havana last February. 38 r i ^'*^"^ 1 |m -~^ 1 '' r ^^ ' * 4 m '■ \ 1 ij «' . ' *■ 1 0) a •d ■" 31 ►=, "" (3 a o S C/5 ^ isers had t. to g !>.S o 2 « K 1 V. g i^ the Span uzon afte umed by (Th ^ hJ ^ O J3 ••« -K m tograp e Isla and pa 1— 1 2 ja > -t- S CI G rt ^m cJ ^ oj rt te M Sg ^•a 2 O h <; O I— I < w H o w l-H > .2 § c3 Id (B .S o a> d hi X/l o iH Hi (DO ^ -M +5 H fl ^ "cfl P* bio tfl eg cS < o i q & o ;■ z 2 O B ^ S ^ a " (0 u (U ■d c o &> •° d tn bo .= s (1) ^ in ^ ■■- O •d si (U J3 fiS S .B " V a M a g I y 01 ^ a p. ^ S P bo m s <; u I— I ^ Pi i w >, •°. ti, •s" ^ a > (U (U — I O I w H a) 2 , •C o ^ cs *• 'a 3 <+-! O O m "U P£ "S "iS S s a « ^ "^ « ^« « <« S •- ^ S a & g J) .2 « 5 •a 'S.-^ Eh ^^ u n 5 a 3 5 c i=» - e > " i S " s 4 « 3 O S O Ox; _: o •- ♦; a m *« o > 2 -O J3 J3 ^ tia . u u u ^ C -S 3 3 O JJ » xcaOHSuuG l:u C w w H % u m re H o J ^ W & =. O •s •§ u a II •§1 a "3 ^ &< ■1 oi t o w a X ■>. H lU O ci H Wl Z Tl il 1 ss W -T- cs >• ^-^ t-* O' • tn c/3 -a a THE BATTtE OP MANH^A BAY. 53 "All right, Purdy," said the Commodore, "we won't fight on the 3d; but when we do fight, you'll have another kind of May anniversary to think about; remember tha:t, my man." The Commodore knew positively when his attack would be made; for he had resolved to allow nothing to delay him. He knew the exact distance to Manila and the speed his squadron would make; hence, on the afternoon of our sailing from Mirs Bay, he told me that the battle would take place on Sunday, May 1st. How the Admiral Appointed His Aide As a non-combatant, I felt that I had a right to no privileges except those granted me by the Admiral. On Saturday I asked him if I might be allowed a position on the forward bridge, if a battle should be' fought. He answered: "I think you'll be satisfied." After the council of war, when the officers had returned to their respective ships, he sent for me to come to the quarter deck, and said: "Mr. Stickney, Mr. Caldwell [his naval secretary] has volunteered for duty at the guns, and I have decided to appoint you my aide. You will take station with me on the forward bridge." He paused and then added with a quizzical twinkle in his eye: "Satisfied?" During the first hour of the fight, as I stood near him on the bridge, I saw a torpedo boat come creeping out from behind Sangley Point and called his attention to her. / "You look after her," he answered; "I have no time to bother with torpedo boats. Let me know when you've finished her." / Her commander must have been ignorant of modern guns or utterly indifferent to death, fdr not till twice hit by the secondary battery, did this daring craft turn back and reach the beach just in time to save her crew from drowning. In a case where every vessel was as efficient as were the American ships during the battle of Manila, it is difficult to draw distinctions, but when they passed each other close aboard, after the action, the heartiest cheers, after those for the Commodore, were those given for the little Petrel. 54 THE BATTLE OF MANILA BAY. Casualties of the Battle. x The only Americans wounded were on board the Baltimore — eight in number, all slightly, except two men, each of whom had a leg broken. As each captain reported on the flagship, he was eagerly asked: "How many killed?" And while each man could not conceal his satisfaction at the condition of his ship and crew, he was also desirous that this should be understood to be no proof that he had not been in danger. It was feared that some casualties might have taken place on the Boston, as she had been on fire, but her report was equally satisfactory, and the men on the Olympia cheered loudly. Nevertheless, there was great suffering among our men during the fight, owing to the terrific heat, and some of those shut up below would undoubtedly have succumbed had it not been for the excitement of battle. In the arsenal grounds a number of bodies of Spaniards were found unburied on Monday morning. A Roman Catholic priest was called in to read the burial service. The bodies presented a horrible sight. The head of one had been almost wholly carried away by a shell. Another had been struck in the stomach by a large projectile which had cut everything away to the backbone. One very large man, apparently an officer, was not only mangled but swollen out of all proportion to his real size. To add to the horror several lean, wolf -like dogs had already visited the scene. The victory in Manila Bay was one of the most remarkable in the history of the world. Not an American was killed, and at night, after the battle, every American ship was fit to go into a similar action on the succeeding day. The result was almost incomprehensible, but it is probably what may be expected in all the affairs of life, where coolness and wisdom hold the balance against bravado and inefficiency. Admiral Dewey's Official Beport. The following is the account of the battle of Manila sent by Admiral Dewey to the navy department at Washington. It was not made public until June 14th •- "Flagship Olympia, Cavite, May 4, 1898. "The squadron left Mirs Bay on April 27th. Arrived off Bolinao on the morning of April 30th, and, finding no vessels there, proceeded down THE BATTLE OF MANILA BAY. 55 the coast and arrived off the entrance to Manila Bay on the same after- noon. The Boston and Concord were sent to reconnoitre Port Subig. A thorough search of the port was made by the Boston and the Con- cord, but the Spanish fleet was not found. "Entered the soutli channel at half-past eleven p. m., steaming in column at eight knots. After half the squadron had passed, a battery on the south side of the channel opened fire, none of the shots taking effect. The Boston and the Concord returned the fire. The squadron proceeded across the bay at slow speed, arrived off Manila at daybreak, and was fired upon at a quarter past five a. m. by three batteries at Manila and two near Cavite, also by the Spanish fleet anchored in an approximately east and west line across the mouth of Bakor Bay, with their left in shoal water in Canacao Bay. "The squadron then proceeded to the attack, the flagship Olympia, under my personal direction, leading, followed at a distance by the Baltimore, the Ealeigh, the Petrel, the Concord and the Boston, in the order named, which formation was maintained throughout the action. The squadron opened flre at nineteen minutes of six a. m. While ad- vancing to the attack' two mines exploded ahead of the flagship too far to be effective. "The squadron maintained a continuous and precise fire, at ranges varying from 5,000 to 2,000 yards approximately parallel to that of the Spanish fleet. The enemy's flre was vigorous but generally ineffective. "Early in the engagement, two launches put out toward the Olympia with the apparent intention of using torpedoes. One was sunk and the other disabled by our fire and beached before an opportunity occurred to fire torpedoes. Driving the Reina Cristina Back. "At seven a. m. the Spanish flagship, Reina Cristina, made a des- perate attempt to leave the line and come out to engage at short range, but was received with such galling flre, the entire battery of the Olympia being concentrated upon her, that she was barely able to return to the shelter of the point. Fires started in her by our shells at this time were not extinguished until she sank. "The three batteries at Manila had kept up a continuous fire from the beginning of the engagement, which fire was not returned by this 56 THE BATTLE OF MAI^HI/A BAY. squadron. The first of these batteries was situated on the south mole head, at the entrance to the Pasig River; the second, on the south bastion of the walled city of Manila, and the third at Malate, about one- half mile further south. "At this point I sent a message to the Governor-General to the effect that if the batteries did not cease firing the city would be shelled. This had the effect of silencing them. "At twenty-five minutes to eight a. m. I ceased firing and withdrew the squadron for breakfast. At sixteen minutes past eleven a. m. re- turned to the attack. By this time, the Spanish flagship and almost the entire Spanish fleet were in flames. "At half-past twelve p. m. the squadron ceased firing, the batteries being silenced and the ships sunk, burnt and deserted. At twenty min- utes to one p. m. the squadron returned and anchored off Manila, the Petrel being left behind to complete the destruction of the smaller gun- boats, which were behind the point of Oavite. This duty was per- formed by Commander E. P. Wood in the most expeditious and com- plete manner possible. Vessels Lost by the Enemy. "Tbe Spanish lost the following vessels : Sunk, Eeina Oristinaj Oas* tilla, Don Antonio de Ulloa. Burnt, Don Juan de Austria, Isla de Luzon, Isla de Cuba, General Lezo, Marques del Duero, El Correo, Velasco and Isla de Mindanao (transport). Captured, Rapido and Her- cules (tugs) and several small launches. "I am unable to obtain complete accounts of the enemy's killed and wounded, but believe their losses to be very heavy. The Reina Oristina alone had 150 killed — including the captain — and ninety wounded. "I am happy to report that the damage done to the squadron under my command was inconsiderable. There were none killed, and only seven men in the squadron very slightly wounded. "Several of the vessels were struck, and even penetrated, but the damage was of the slightest, and the squadron is in as good condition now as before the battle. "I beg to state to the department that I doubt if any commander- in-chief was ever served by more loyal, efficient and gallant captains than those of the squadron now under my command. THE BATTLE OF MANILA BAY. 57 "Chptain Frank Wildes, commanding the Boston, volunteered to re- main in command of his vessel, although his relief arrived before leaving Hong Kong. Assistant Surgeon Kindleberger, of the Olympia, and Gunner J. C. Evans, of the Boston, also volunteered to remain after orders detaching them had arrived. The Commodore's StaflF. "The conduct of my personal staff was excellent. Commander B. P. Lamberton, chief of staff, was a volunteer for that position, and gave me most excellent assistance, and Lieutenant Brumby, flag lieutenant, and Ensign W. P. Scott, aide, performed their duties as signal officers in a highly creditable manner. "The Olympia being short of officers for the battery. Ensign H. H. Caldwell, flag secretary, volunteered for and was assigned to a sub- division of the 5-inch battery. "Mr. J. L. Stickney, formerly an officer in the United States navy, and now correspondent for the New York Herald, volunteered for duty as my aide and rendered valuable services. "I desire specially to mention the coolness of Lieutenant C. G. Calkins, the navigator of the Olympia, who came under my personal observation, being on the bridge with me throughout the entire action, and giving the ranges to the guns with an accuracy that was proven by the excellency of the firing. "On May 2, the day following the engagement, the squadron again went to Cavite, where it remains. "On the 3d the military forces evacuated the Cavite arsenal, which was taken possession of by a landing party. On the same day the Ra- leigh and Baltimore secured the surrender of the batteries on Oorregidor Island, paroling the garrison and destroying the guns. On the morning of May 4 the transport Manila, which had been aground in Bakor Bay, was towed off and made a prize." Captain Gridley's Account of the Battle. Below is a short account of the Battle of Manila, given by Captain Gridley of the flagship Olympia, who bore a conspicuous part in the battle, and died about a month afterward. 58 THE BATTLE OF MANILA BAY. "My Dear Mother: "Excuse pencil, but I am writing on the deck aft, under the awning, and ink is not handy. Well, we have won a splendid victory over the Spaniards. We left Hong Kong on April 25, Mirs Bay, April 27, and arrived off Manila Bay at midnight on April 30. We steamed in with our lights all out, and by daylight we were off Manila, where we found the Spanish fleet, or rather, at Cavite, seven miles from Manila. We attacked them at once, the Olympia leading, and, being flagship, she was of course the principal target, but we (our fleet) were too much for them, and after fighting two and a half hours, hauled off for breakfast, giving them another hour of it afterward. We sacceeded in burning, sinking and destroying their entire force. They were also assisted by shore batteries. Their loss was very heavy, one ship, the Oastilla, losing 130 killed, including the captain. "And now as to ourselves. We did not lose a man in our whole fleet, and had only six wounded, and none of them seriously. It seems a miracle. Everybody fought like heroes, as they are. The Olympia was struck seven or eight times, but only slightly injured, hardly worth speaking of. "Stickney, New York Herald correspondent, and a former naval officer, was on board by permission of the department and acted during the battle as Dewey's secretary. His account in the Herald will be full and complete, so you had better get it. His reports will go in the same mail as this. "We have cut the cable and can only communicate via Hong Kong. The McCulloch will go over in a day or two, carrying Commodore Dewey's dispatches and this mail and .bringing our mail I hope. I am truly thankful to our Heavenly Father for His protection during our battle, and shall give Him daily thanks. Manila, of course, we have blockaded. We can't take the city, as we have no troops to hold it. "Give my love to all and accept a large share for yourself. "Your lo-^ing son, "CHARLEY." Captain Gridley did not mention his own part in the great battle, an indication of modesty characteristic of this brave officer and most lovable man THE BATTLE OF MANILA BAY. 59 From the Spanish Point of View. The following is the story of the Battle of Manila from the Spanish standpoint. It was published in the Diario de Manila, the leading news- paper of the city, on May 4, the first time it was issued after the de- struction of the Spanish fleet: "When the enemy's squadron was sighted in perfect line of battle through the clouds of the misty dawn on the morning of May 1, gloom and surprise were general among the people of Manila. "At last these ships had strained their boldness to the point of ap- pearing on our coasts and defying our batteries, which showed more courage and valor than effect when they opened fire upon the squadron. "It needs something more than courage to make projectiles pene- trate, indeed it does. The inequality of our batteries, compared with those of the American squadron which alarmed the inhabitants of Manila at five o'clock in the morning, was enough to transform the tran- quil character of our tropical temperament. "While ladies and children in carriages or on foot fled in fright to seek refuge in the outlying suburbs and adjacent villages around the capital from the dangers multiplied by their imaginations, every man, from the most stately personage to the most humble workman, mer- chants, mechanics, Spaniards, natives, soldiers, civilians, all, we repeat, sought their stations and put on their arms, confident that never should the enemy land at Manila unless he passed over their corpses. Superior Strength of Americans. "Although from the first moment the strength of the enemy's armor and the power of his guns demonstrated that his ships were invulner- able to our energies and our armaments, the hostile squadron would never have entered our bay had not its safety been guaranteed by its manifest superiority. "The city walls, the church towers, the tops of the high buildings and all the high places convenient for observation, were occupied by those who were not retained by their military duties within the walls, on the bridges or at the advanced posts. 60 THE BATTLE OF MANILA BAY. "The slightest details of the enemy's ships were eagerly noted as they advanced toward Cavite, in a line parallel with the beaches of Manila, as though they had just come out of Pasig River. "There were no gaps in the line, but the curious public hardly realized the disparity between their great guns and the pieces mounted on our fortifications. Some had glasses and others were without, but all seemed to discern with their eyes these strangers, who, while brave, were not called upon to show their courage, since the range of their guns and the weakness of our batteries enabled them to preserve immunity while doing us as much harm as they pleased. "All who appreciated the impunity with which the hostile ships man- oeuvered, as if on a harmless parade, were full of such rage and desper- ation as belong to a brave man who can make no use of his courage and to whom there remains no remedy except an honorable death rather than cowardly inactivity. Wishing for a Fight Ashore. "A soldier of the first battalion of Cazadores gazed at the squadron sweeping over the waters out of reach of the fire of our batteries and then turned toward Heaven saying: 'If the Holy Mary would turn that sea into land the Yankees would find out how we can charge in double time.' And a crouching native, staring at the ships, said: 'Just let them come ashore and give us a whack at them.' "On they stood at full speed, in column of battle, heading for Cavite, with a decision due to a sense of safety and a firm assurance of success. For more than an hour and a half the bombardment held in suspense those whose souls followed the unequal struggle in which a Spanish ship went down with glorious banners flying. "What was going on in the waters of Cavite? From Manila we saw through glasses two squadrons almost mingled in clouds of smoke. This was not a triumph for our side, considering the weakness of our batteries, for once alongside the enemy the cry of 'boarders away' and the flash of cold steel might have enabled our devoted seamen to disturb the calmness in which the watches and instruments were regulating and directing those engines of destruction. "In the blindness of our rage how can we paint the heroic deeds of prowess or the wave of valor which burst forth from the men of w ar? w IE H O Pi m w X u CO a, o W H s ™ ai H M c3 C O ^ 1 « m ca bp 1 H< o S o" f^ ^ §^ p^d o a DZ bo (U 1 2 •° .9 0) "S. S5 t-i t; bo H "-.a J ii^ ^ < •^^ m > o a S «^ :3 3 w ti Hj ^ •a2^ w a: "d -d t. o a <» z bo c4 n getting Lamberton ympia just 1 si- ^ K s t-H ■3 H 5 S a, S U) u < nJ <: ^"§5 1 w 8l"S S m s a^ s i Pi y was ley, Co pper dec Q E o 1 Stickne Q Grid n the u O Mr. Capta Rees :^ •Si kJ s U g J »— 1 C/1 M " < L) 2 4! >, O tS m 01 5 ^H u5 fc ri2 J O O 13 £ ^ rM Si 1^ ■ftrt u ry, ■S trl s ^ ■s" w O M MR b£ DC >» H ta " H < w < w H Cli m If ■£ a :3 ^ THE BATTLE OE MANILA BAY. 6^ Those who fought beneath the Spanish flag bore themselves like men, as the chosen sons of our native land who dare measure forces and not yield to a superior force in the hands of the enemy, who rather die with- out ships than live in ships which have surrendered. "To name those who distinguished themselves in the battle would require the publication of the entire muster rolls of our ships from captain to cabin boy. To these victorious seamen of ours we offer our congratulations; laurels for the living and prayers for the dead, and for all our deepest gratitude. Enthusiastic Spectators, "When the hostile squadron turned toward Cavite the crew of the steamer Mindanao heard drums beating to quarters and answered with enthusiasm with three rounds of cheers for the King, for the Queen Regent, and for Spain, which was echoed along our line. "Later and until a quarter to five o'clock absolute silence reigned. Everything was ready. The idea of death was lost in the ardor for the fray, and every eye was fixed on the battle flags waving at our mast- heads in perfect and majestic order. Why should we deny this? "The nine Yankee ships advanced in battle array. The Olympia, bearing the Admiral's flag, led the column, followed by the other ships, steering at full speed toward Cavite. "The Olympia opened fire, and an instant reply came from the bat- tery on the mole, which kept on firing at five-minute intervals, ,while the ironclad shaped her course for the Gristina and the Oastilla. Into both of these she poured a steady and rapid fire, seconded by the ships which followed in her wake. "Another ship which directed a heavy fire on our line was the Balti- more, and so the cannonade went on 'until a quarter to eight. "At that moment the Juan de Austria advanced against the enemy intending to board the Olympia, and if a tremendous broadside had not stopped her self-devoted charge both ships might perhaps have sunk to the bottom. "The c'aptain of the Cristina, seeing that the resolute attempt of his consort had failed, advanced at full speed until within about; two hun- dred yards of the Olympia, aiming to ram her. 64 THE BATTLE OP MANILA BAY. Did Not Like Our Shells. "Then a shower of projectiles swept over the bridge and decks, filling the ship with dead and wounded. A dense column of smoke from the bow compartment showed that incendiary projectiles, such as the law of God and man prohibits, had set fire to the cruiser. "The ship, still keeping up her fire on the enemy, withdrew toward the arsenal, where she was sunk to keep her from falling into the hands of the Yankees. The desperation of the men of the Cristina was aggravated by the sight of the Castilla, which was also in a blaze from the similar use of incendiary projectiles. "The principal ships of our little squadron having thus been put out of action, the Yankee vessels, some of them badly crippled by the fire of our ships and the batteries of Point Sangley, stood out toward the entrance of the bay, ceasing their fire and occupying themselves with re- pairing their injuries until ten o'clock, when they began a second attack to complete their work of destruction. "In this second assault the fire at the arsenal was extinguished, and they continued to cannonade the blazing gunboats. One gunboat, which seemed to have nothing more venturesome to undertake, detached herself from the squadron and set herself to riddle the mail steamer Mindanao. "Now that his ships were in flames Admiral Montojo, who had shown his flag as long as there was a vessel afloat, landed, and the hostilities ceased. "The only Spanish ship which had not been destroyed by fire or by the enemy's projectiles sank herself so that she could in no wise be taken. "The killed are: The captain, chaplain, clerk and boatswain of the Cristina, the captains of the Castilla and the Ulloa, the executive oflicer and chief engineer and second surgeon of the Cristina, a lieutenant of the Juan de Austria, the paymaster of the Ulloa and the chief engineer of the Juan de Austria. "That battery that did most harm to the enemy was one on Sangley Point, made up of Hontoria guns. From one of these came a shot which the Boston received, while four ships, which had altogether sixty-five guns, were pouring their fire on this battery to reduce it to silence. THE BATTLE OF MANILA BAY. Praise for Spanish Gunners. 65 "One gun having been crippled, the other kept on playing, firing whenever damage could be done and avoiding waste of ammunition! To one of its shots must be attributed the hurt which turned the Baltimore from the fight. This gun must have greatly annoyed the Yankees, to judge by the efforts they made to silence its fire, following it up till six gunners had been killed and four wounded. "On this account it is proposed to demand the bestowal of laurel wreathed crosses of San Fernando on the valiant gunners who served this battery. "The Luneta battery at Manila, which assailed the Yankee ships with much vigor, was the object of the enemy's special attention, as he stood past the fortifications of Manila, heading for Cavite. Guns were also mounted at the entrance to the bay, on Corregidor and Caballo Islands, on El Fraile Eock, on the south shore at Point Kestigua, and at Mari- veles, Punta Gorda and Point Gasisi, on the north shore. "The guns on Corregidor Island were about six inches in caliber, sim- ilar to the guns mounted on the rock and on Point Restigua. Other batteries had guns of smaller caliber and of short range. "Doubtless the civil commission arranged to obtain supplies for the city, but it is certain that since Sunday there has been a great scarcity of everything, and speculators have got what prices they cared to ask for articles of prime necessity. "The great masses of the rural population of the Philippines, as well as the leaders of the nation, have responded like loyal sons of Spain, sharing our pains and assisting our labors. "Admiral Montojo has received a telegram of congratulation from the Minister of Marine, who in his own name, and in the name of the Queen Eegent of Spain, felicitates the navy of this archipelago for its gallant behavior on the day of the Cavite battle in these terms: 'Honor and glory to the Spanish fleet which fought so heroically on that day!' " CHAPTER III. AFTEIf THE BATTLE. Receiving the Surrender of Cavite Arsenal — Quibbles and Evasions to Meet — A Case for Haste — Journey to Hong Kong to Send Dispatches — Cap- ture of the Callao — Routine of Bloclvade Duty in Manila Bay — Arrival of Aguinaldo from Hong Kong — Establishing a Government at Cavite — Three Important Proclamations — Filipino Victories over the Spanish — Their Treatment of Spanish Prisoners — Insurgents Invest Manila. Early on the morning after the battle Commodore Dewey ordered Commander Lamberton and. myself to go to Cavite arsenal and take pos- session. As the white flag had been hoisted the day before, in token of complete surrender, this should have been a mere formality; but it was soon proved to us that no dependence can be placed in the Spaniard. Aware of the treacherous character of the Spanish people. Commander Lamberton, before leaving the Petrel, which had brought us over from the Olympia, ordered Commander Wood to keep his men at the guns, and to open fire upon the arsenal if we should not return within an hour. It was then exactly nine o'clock. . When we had approached within five hundred yards we discovered that the arsenal was still occupied by about eight hundred Spanish infanteria de marina (corresponding to our marines), all armed with Mauser magazine rifles. Admiral Montojo, having been wounded, had been carried, to Manila, and Captain Sostoa of the Spanish navy, next in rank to the Ad- miral, was in command. This gentleman met us at the wharf and took us to the arsenal headquarters, together with Lieutenant A. N. Wood, of the Petrel, who had accompanied us. We had no sooner reached the place, than it was surrounded by an armed guard. Dealing with Spanish Officers. '^Why," asked Captain Lamberton, "do we flnd the arsenal filled with armed men, when the white flag was run up yesterday, in token of com- plete surrender?" 66 AFTER THE BATTLE. 67 With much suayity and the manner of a man whose actions have been completely misunderstood, Captain Sostoa replied in Spanish: "We hoisted the white flag yesterday only that we might have time to remove the women and children to a place of safety." Commander Lamberton answered: "That is not the construction we Americans put upon an action of that kind. When the Spanish colors were lowered, and the white flag raised in their place, we under- stood it to mean but one thing — unconditional surrender. Moreover, the women and children should not have been here anyhow. They should have been removed to a place of safety before the fight began." "But," replied Captain Sostoa, "we did not have time to do that. If the Americans had not come so early in the morning affairs could have been arranged differently." Commander Lamberton reminded him that the Spaniards had fired the first shot. "However," he continued, "we are not here to waste time in discuss- ing past events. I come as Admiral Dewey's representative, to take possession of the arsenal. The Spaniards here must surrender a^ prisoners of war, or our ships will again open fire." "But I am not at liberty to submit to these terms," said Captain Sostoa. "Such an act is not in my power, and I must consult my superior officers before I take so important a step." Commander Lamberton, comprehending the subterfuge, answered: "We refuse to recognize any authority other than that of the senior officer stationed at this post. You are that man and must immediately comply with Admiral Dewey's conditions." The Conditions of Surrender. Seeing that further delay was useless. Captain Sostoa requested that the terms of surrender might be put down in writing. Accordingly I wrote the following : "Without further delay all Spanish officers and men must be with- drawn and no buildings nor stores must be injured. Admiral Dewey does not wish to continue hostilities with the Spanish naval forces. The Spanish officers will be paroled, and the forces at the arsenal must deliver up all their small arms." Again Captain Sostoa pleaded for delay. We had been so absorbed fig AFTER THE BATTLE. in the discussion that vre had not noted the amount of time we had already spent at the arsenal, but I suddenly remembered the orders that had been left with the Petrel to fire in an hour if before that we had not returned to the wharf. As it was within onlj^ a few minutes of the limit it is needless to say that we considered it advisable to cut the dis- cussion short and get away before we should be exposed to the Petrel's shells. Commander Lamberton then gave Captain Sostoa two hours in which to act, but said: "If the white flag of unconditional surrender is not again hoisted before noon, hostilities will be reopened." We then hurried back to the Petrel and started across the bay to give our report to the Commodore. The white flag was raised at 10:45 o'clock, but the Spaniards did not carry out their agi'eement to the letter. When we went in the after- noon to take possession, we found that every seaman and marine had been marched off the Cavite peninsula to the mainland and had carried his Mauser rifle with him. During the evening of the same day in which we made our trip to the Spanish arsenal Admiral Dewey sent the merchantship Zafiro a short distance down the bay to cut the cable. We were not able to use it, as we had no instruments with which to work it, and the Governor would not permit the cable company to transmit our messages fi'om the regular station in Manila. After the destruction of the Spanish fleet, Commodore Dewey moored his squadron in the bay just off the end of Sangley Point, near Cavite. On May 5th he sent the dispatch boat McOulloch to Hong Kong with dis- patches for the government, and I took passage in her in order to send my cable messages to the newspaper with which I was then connected. The Callao Runs into a Hot Place. A few days later the little Spanish gunboat Callao came into Manila Bay flying the Spanish flag in the face of our whole fleet, and, when two or three of our vessels began popping away at her with their G-pounders, she paid no attention to this unusual reception but steamed right on toward the Olympia as though indifferent to results. But when one of our shells ripped her awning clear across from one side of the little craft to the other. Lieutenant 3\ni, whi ciinr.najKlca the AFTER THE BATTLE. 69 Callao, began to think there was something dangerous in our vessels. Then the "stars and stripes" at the peak or flagstaff of each of our ships caught his eje, and he hauled down his colors to find out what it all meant. He said afterward that he supposed he had got in the range of some of his own vessels engaged in target practice. He had been cruising for several months in the southern part of the archipelago and had not known that there was even talk about the possibility of war between the United States and Spain. When the McOulloch arrived in Hong Kong, May 7th, and the news of Dewey's great victory was made public in the United States, the ex- citement reached such a height that we who were so far away could not, until long afterward, comprehend why our people at home should have been so much moved. Immediately the President promoted Commodore Dewey to be a rear admiral, and when the McCtilloch arrived in Manila Bay on Tuesday, May 10th, the broad blue flag bearing two white stars was hoisted at the Olympia's mainmast head, and a salute of thirteen guns was fired by every warship in the bay, including the French cruiser Bruix and the British cruiser Immortality, which had arrived in the bay two or three days after the battle. Life During the Blockade. Admiral Dewey was now blockading the Bay of Manila, but was making no hostile demonstration against the city. In fact, there was an unexpressed understanding that, if the fleet did not fire at the city, the forts would not fire at the fleet. But there was no reason why this nominal armistice should continue any longer than it suited the con- venience or the interests of either of the combatants, and therefore we had to be prepared to meet any form of attack at all hours of the ^af or night. Torpedoes might have been used with a considerable hope of success against our vessels if we had relaxed our vigilance in the least. Consequently we were always on the alert. At this time I wrote the following account of the usual routine of each night aboard the ships of our squadron: "Dead calm is over the whole sheet of water that stretches between our squadron and the City of Manila. A humid heat has made the ships almost unbearably sultry all day. But now the sun is nearing the horizon, and a faint ripple on the water, two or three miles away, 70 AFTER THE BATTLE. shows that at last we are to have an at least temporary relief. Heavy clouds are banked up to the northward, and, as the sun drops out of sight, the exquisite colors of a Philippine sunset reach half way to the zenith before the quickly oncoming night cuts short the panorama. Widespread flashes of heat lightning, varied by the forked bolts of a distant thunder storm, keep the west aglow at intervals. Then all brightness dies out, and the impenetrable gloom of a tropical night closes down over the ships. What will it bring forth ? Ten miles away lie the forces of a defeated and sullen enemy. Since the battle of May 1st not a move against us has been made. All the bombast and bravado of the Governor-General has had no deed to back it up. There are, we are told, several thousand troops under the Spanish colors in Manila, besides a large body of seamen and marines, whom we drove out of Cavite. It cannot be possible that, among so many brave men — and they do not lack for daring when properly led — there are not a score or two capable of risking their lives to destroy our ships. At any rate, our admiral does not intend to take any chances; and, when night falls over the bay, the squadron prepares for its protection, exactly as though we were in the presence of an alert and determined foe. Night Scenes in Manila Bay. "Just before the last of daylight disappears, a swift steam launch or one of the captured tug-boats shoots away from the Olympia, passing around the squadron and giving the countersign for the night. By the time it has finished its circuit the deep darkness has fallen, and woe be to the boat that then ventures within gunshot of any of our vessels ! Even the picket-boat that we keep out for our own protection does not care to roam about too near the forbidden waters, for an over- hasty lookout might hail and then fire, without waiting for a reply. In the first few nights there were several such incidents to enliven the existence of the young officers on picket duty, but, fortunately, no one was hurt. "All the night one-half of each ship's company is on watch along- side the guns of the secondary battery — that is, the 6-pounder, 3-poundei' and 1-pounder rapid-firers and the automatic machine guns. At several points on each side of the ship are posted the keenest-eyed seamen of the watch. No glow of light is visible from any part of the vessel after AFTER THE BATTLE. 71 I eight o'clock, but two or three men stand around each searchlight, ready, at a word from the officer of the deck, to turn a concentrated pencil of blinding electric rays upon any object within a range of 2,000 yards. Every few minutes these lights sweep the waters of the bay. The lights sometimes fall upon one of the remaining merchant vessels that have not yet succeeded in getting enough ballast aboard to enable them to go to sea, and the effect is magical. Under a sky of dense blue the horizon and the atmosphere just above the water seem of a Stygian blackness, when suddenly a pencil of brightness shoots out from the side of one of our vessels and falls upon a full rigged ship, bringing into fairy outlines all the hull, masts, spars and rigging of the craft, silhouetted against an inky darkness, like a transformation scene in a spectacular play. This never occurs to a warship, as it is contrary to naval etiquette to throw a searchlight upon a man-of-war. Ready for Any Emergency. "The guns of the main battery are loaded with shrapnel and the smaller pieces with either shell or shrapnel. The 1-pounders and the automatic machine guns in the military tops are also manned, with an ample supply of ammunition at hand. "These precautions are taken nightly — not because there is a special alarm concerning torpedo attempts, but because it is the custom of American naval officers to take nothing for granted in war time. The men not stationed as lookouts are allowed to sleep beside their guns, and of the officers only the one in charge of the watch is required to be on deck, "The moon is almost a negligible quantity. It is after three o'clock in the morning before it rises, so that the greater part of the night is as dark as Erebus. If ever the Spaniards intend to attack us they will do it before a new moon begins to rise early and light up the bay for a continually lengthening period of time. Every one on shipboard is a little more on the qui vive than has been deemed necessary before. More and more frequently the searchlights are swept over the face of the water, and the captain sleeps with an even greater readiness to waken than usual. "About ten minutes before the beginning of the first watch — that is, the time between eight o'clock and midnight— four red lights sud- 72 :4.FTER THE BATTLE. denly flash into being along the backstay of the flagship's mainmast. This is the general call, and every vessel replies by turning the same arrangement of lights upon her Ardois signal system. Eapidly the red and white lanterns are turned on and off aboard the Olympia, whik' the other vessels repeat each combination as it appears on the flag- ship's mast, until we have read the message: 'Have reason to expect torpedo attack. Be ready.' As the message has been sent by the common 'wig-wag' code, with which most of the seamen and ap- prentices are familiar, the whole squadron instantly knows its purport, and there is a little buzz of interest throughout the vessels. The effect is not noticeable except on close scrutiny, however. There is no excite- ment, no noise, and, apparently, no change in the arrangements usually made. But a careful and experienced observer will see that the execu- tive officer is going through the ship giving personal attention to the selection of lookouts at the more important posts ; that the navigator is inspecting each searchlight and, battle lantern to be sure that the electric current is working satisfactorily; that each division officer is supervis- ing the loading of his guns and the working of all the battery mechan- ism; that a specially fast launch has been detailed for picket duty; that the men — ^without being so ordered — are grouping 'round their guns in fighting rig— a pair of trousers only— with no thought of sleeping until the other watch comes on at midnight; and, finally, that the captain is pacing the bridge in cool contemplation of all the work, giving frequent orders in low tones, showing that nothing has escaped his ceaseless vigil- ance. Watching for Spanish Torpedoes. "In the dense darkness the Concord and the Callao get underway— as we learn next day — but no one knows of this manoeuver at the time, for no light betrays their movement, either from within or without. It is not necessary nor proper to say where they go or what they do, for there is no telling of war secrets countenanced in this command. It is enough to say that it would have been a very sad night for any Spanish torpedero who had tried to get within range of our ships that night— or any other night, for that matter. "The ship is as dark and as silent as the grave. The night wears on with no sign that there is anything on foot out of the usual run of blockade routine, except that the searchlights are ceaselessly active, AFTER THE BATTLE. 73 sweeping the sea in every direction. The clouds pile up heavier and denser, and the heat grovi^s more and more oppressive, until the accumu- lating storm bursts in tropical fury directly over the squadron. Vivid flashes of lightning so dazzle the eye that the arc rays seem like mere tallow candles. Accompanied by terrific thunder and a deluge of rain the storm hangs close above our mastheads, as though resolved to give our enemy every chance that he could wish for a favorable moment in which to steal upon us unawares. "Through the masses of rain, now driven fiercely in our faces by the squall attending the cloud storm, it is impossible for the searchlights to penetrate far. The light is so diffused and refracted by the rain drops that its rays are stopped at a distance of 500 or 600 yards. Now, if ever, is the time for a watchful and vindictive foe to come at us. Search Lights IneflFective During the Storm. "Suddenly the forward searchlight falls upon something on the port bow. In this work it is not necessary to differentiate between objects and determine what they are; It is enough if the light touches some- thing that forms a contrast with the sullen, greenish grey of the water. A dozen eyes are following the sweep of the light. Half a dozen guns swing quickly around till they bear on the point where the rays touch the water. The captain speaks a word in a voice-tube, and away aft on the poop deck the officer in command at that place gives a low order to the men at the after light, which quickly veers around till it, too, is focused on the spot where the forward one is pointed. It is nothing— merely the wreck of an old boat that has been floating about the bay ever since May 1st. Other similarly unimportant discoveries are made, but they bear witness to the watchfulness of our seamen, and are, therefore, not as unimportant as they may seem. Nearly every man is wet all over, and the breeze — now fresh and cool — makes the remainder of the watch anything but comfortable; but there is no relaxation of the vigil. "And so wears the night away. Dawn comes upon a calm sea, blue sky and zephyrlike airs off the land. No enemy has appeared, and no disturbance has made an even temporary excitement. The ships' com- panies take up the customary work of the morning without a murmur, 74 AFTER THE BATTLE. apparently indifferent to the strain and hardship of ,a whole night of waiting for the torpedo that never came." A Voyage with Aguinaldo. On May 17th the McCulloch, having returned to Hong Kong with dis- patches, again sailed for Manila Bay, having on board as passengers, with the consent of Admiral Dewey, Emilio Aguinaldo and about forty of his subordinate followers, who had begged permission to come to Cavite and resume their insurrection against the Spaniards. I re- turned to the fleet myself in the McCnlloch on this trip, and was thus able to make Aguinaldo's acquaintance under very favorable circum- stances. General Aguinaldo landed in Cavite May 19th and issued three proclamations on May 24th. In the first, he gave as the reason for his return to Luzon the fact that the Spaniards seemed powerless in the hands of the priests, who constantly placed obstacles in the way of progress. None of the promised reforms in the government had been carried out. He also stated that he had surrendered his arms and handed over a strong army believing it would be more beneficial to the country than carrying on an insurrection with poor resources. Now, he said, as the great and powerful United States had come forward to offer disinterested protection that the natives might gain liberty for their country, he had returned to command the army, and proposed to estab- lish a dictatorship, with an advisory council, until the islands were com- pletely independent. In the second proclamation he forbade all negotiations for peace be- ' tween the rebels and the Spaniards, in view of the failure, both civil and military, of all previous negotiations. He also announced that all Spaniards coming to parley without credentials and a flag of truce would be shot as spies. If a Filipino undertook such a commission he would be condemned to be hanged with the placard "Traitor to his country" attached to his body, Aguinaldo's Proclamation to the Filipinos. The third and most important proclamation, because of its humane intentions, addressed directly to the Filipinos, read as follows: AFTER THE BATTLE. 75 "The great North American nation, a lover of true liberty, and there- fore desirous of liberating our country from the tyranny and despotism to which it has been subjected by its rulers, has decided to give us disin- terested protection, considering us sufficiently able and civilized to gov- ern ourselves. "In order to retain this high opinion of the never to be too highly praised and great nation of North America, we should abominate such acts as pillage and robbery of every description, and acts of violence against persons and property. "To avoid international complications during the campaign, I decree: "1. Lives and property of all foreigners are to be respected, includ- ing Chinese and those Spaniards who neither directly nor indirectly have taken up arms against us. "2, The lives and property of our enemies who lay down their arms are to be equally respected. "3. In the same way, all hospitals and all ambulances, together with the persons and effects therein, as well as their staffs, are to be respected, unless they show themselves hostile. "4. Those who disobey what is set forth in the three former articles shall be tried by summary courtmartial and shot, if by such disobedi- ence there has been caused assassination, fires, robbery, or violence." Aguinaldo's Movements against the Spanish. As the prospects for fighting between the United States naval forces and the Spanish troops on shore were now practically nil, I devoted my "'time to watching the proceedings of the Filipinos under Aguinaldo. Within a week after his arrival in Oavite he had about 1,000 men under arms. Admiral Dewey gave him a large number of Mauser rifles and a considerable quantity of ammunition, captured from the Spaniards, and in a day or two a small steamer called the Faon— an assumed name, by the way — came into port from Canton, bringing about 3,000 stand of Remington breechloading rifles and a large stock of cartridges for these pieces. On the night of May 26th Aguinaldo sent 600 men across Bakor Bay to land between the detachment of Spaniards who were holding Oa- vite .Viejo (Old Cavite) and the detachment quartered in the powder magazine, a little to the east of Cavite Viejo. The garrison in each 76 AFTEE THE BATTLE. of these strong positions was about 300 men, so that the insurgents were represented by a force equal to that of their enemy. But, while the Spaniards had fully 1,000 men and several pieces of artillery within easy call of both these positions, the natives had no artillery and no possibility of getting reinforcements. Once landed on the Old Oavite side of Bakor Bay, they must fight it out for themselves. On the morning of May 28th a detachment of Spaniards attacked the insurgents and were not only repulsed but forced to surrender, the insurgents capturing in two skirmishes 418 Spaniards, including fifteen officers. The country where these affairs took place was covered with a thick tropical undergrowth, while numerous streams and swamps per- mitted no military order to be maintained. Watching a Battle from the Bay. On May 29th, before the sun had yet risen. General Aguinaldo rein- forced his troops on the mainland with about one thousand men. I ex- pected to witness a charge over the narrow neck of land that connects Cavite peninsula with the mainland, where the Spaniards were known to have at least one field gun and the bulk of their troops. Before noon, however. General Aguinaldo told me he had changed his plan, because the Spaniards held the peninsula with such a large force that he feared an assault would not be successful. If he failed he would not be able to reinforce his men on the other side of the bay without taking great chances from the Mausers of the Spaniards stationed at the Bakor magazine and at Old Oavite. Also, in case the Spaniards should bring heavy reinforcements from Manila, his men would be caught between two fires, where they might all be captured or killed. As this was the situation he refused to give me any assistance to get to the front, and would not even give me a guide to show me where to land my boat on the other side. I then tried to cross the neck of land leading from the peninsula to the mainland, but having drawn the fire of the Spaniards as soon as I came out from the cover of the trees, where I was wholly exposed on a narrow sandy beach, I returned to Oavite to ask Aguinaldo again for a boat and guide. As nothing could persuade him to alter his decision I hired a native canoe and started to cross the bay without a guide. When nearing the shore between Old Oavite and Bakor, zip! the Mauser AFTER TI-IE BATTLE. 77 bullets gave warning that the Spaniards were watching for the approach of boats from the rebel side. Filipinos against Spanish. Suddenly a sharp pattering fire, followed by the continuous rattle of a machine gun, broke out on the extreme right of the Spanish posi- tion.. It was evident that the Spanish troops from Manila were coming down the road well back from the bay. As I was only about a mile from the magazine on the beach I could hear the cheers of the Spanish soldiers stationed there, and see them waving their hats wildly in the air in ex- pectation of the reinforcements from Manila. The steady rattle of the machine gun continued for twenty minutes and showed that a hot action was in progress. Then it stopped as suddenly as it had begun. Present- ly a slender column of smoke rose in the air near the scene of the fight. It was evidently a signal to Aguinaldo in Cavite. As I was intently watching the events on shore I did not notice what was happening behind me and was suddenly surprieed to hear the roar of a heavy gun. I could tell by the scream of the projectile as it passed over me that it came from a rifled gun of large calibre, and for a moment I thought the Petrel must have entered into the fight. I could not discover where the shot struck; but looking back to CJavite, I distinguished a group of rebels surrounding four muzzle-loading rifles that pointed toward the Spaniards from the Cavite wall. In front of the guns a long stovepipe was throwing out a column of signal smoke like the one on the beach near me. This was the plan Aguinaldo had been keeping in reserve, and he was now letting his men at the front know he was ready to take part in the fight. With the aid of strong glasses, I was able to watch the movements of both parties far better than from any point on shore. For two miles along the water I could see brown-skinned men, wearing very few clothes, running toward the Spanish positions. The rebels took ad- vantage of every point of cover, and in groups of ten or twenty they would make short rushes. Victory for the Insurgents. The shots from Mauser rifles that came skipping into the water in large numbers told me that there must be many Spaniards out of sight 1 78 AFTEE THE BATTLE. inland, whose firing was more commendable for its rapidity than for its accuracy. Oncie in a while a man would fall on the beach. Some- times he would lie motionless and again he would crawl painfully to cover. Unfortunately the sky was so overcast that I was unable to take any photographs. Meantime the Spaniards had stopped cheering, but I could see that at all their posts they were keeping more tenaciously under cover than were the insurgents and were thus saving themselves from many casualties. All this time a field piece at Bakor Church was firing frequently and trying to sweep the beach to the westward. At ten minutes past two o'clock one of the heavy guns of the Cavite battery roared out again, and this time the shot struck the water close to the magazine. Its effect was positively ludicrous. Twenty men seized a flagstaff about thirty feet long, bearing a large, white flag, and raised it to a standing position. They were in such haste that they lost their hold and it fell to the ground. A second time they lifted it, and a second time it fell. But finally with a third attempt it was elevated in plain sight of the Cavite guns. The Spanish garrison, however, tried to escape to Bakor with all their arms and a quantity of stores that they took from the magazine buildings, but they were captured and forced to surrender. Like ants now, the little brown men swarmed along the beach toward Bakor Church. This was the only place where the Spaniards seemed to be strong except at Old Cavite. It was evident that the rebels were pressing upon them harder from the land side than from the beach; for, while the field piece fired a few shots and reports of rifles were frequent, fewer bullets came in my direction. Bakor Church Carried by Assault. On an arched stone bridge near Old Cavite the rebels raised their fl^g, and presently another rebel force was seen pursuing about fifty Spaniards along the beach. These men surrendered far to the left of the general fighting ground, and were marched back toward Bakor. On toward Manila a great column of smoke rose in the air to the height of a thousand feet, showing that the Spaniards retreating in that direction had fired the town of Las Pinas. Upon the Spanish position at Bakor Church frequent charges were Ifr^^^^^H 9^1 1 ' 1ft n .-. qCj|W|CLfci.«^ '^^^^^^^1 '*.'' ' t " jly ^ S '!^H t /_ i^Hbs^^ol^^^H^H 2 O H CO O m CO u m X h O CO, 'Z o m ^ a< (U l-i .a 00 +-■ t« g nl ■^ 1^ ° -J >.a £ u O -d g^ o u z o u •d § a" •I AFTER THE BATTLE. 81 made, and I saw many men fall either dead or wounded. Some of the latter would drag themselves down to the water's edge to bathe their wounds. At last a sayage assault was made upon the church. Once, twice, the field piece spoke, and then was silent. The rattle of the rifles, which had been more rapid for a time, stopped simultaneously, and suddenly all was quiet. No one remained on the beach but the dead and wounded Filipinos. In a few moments two or three wounded men staggered to their feet, waved their hats in the air, and then sank down, exhausted but vic- torious. Presently the rebel flag — a band of red above and blue below, with half a white diamond near the flagstaff — fluttered from the roof of Bakor Church. Everything on the beach had been captured except Old Cavite. As night was coming on and as there were indications of a typhoon, which rapidly passed over Luzon within the next thirty-six hours, I reluctantly returned to the fleet. Later, when I visited some of the Spanish oflScers who had been captured in previous skirmishes, I found that the rebels treated their prisoners with consideration and gave them comfortable quarters. Allowed to Go to the Front. On June 2 Aguinaldo gave me a pass through all his lines, and that day I took a native canoe and crossed the bay to the rebel camp near Old Cavite. There I sought out Brigadier-General Tomas Mascado, who was in comrfi.and of the troops. A guide to the front was provided for me, and when I reached the bridge where the rebel flag had been hoisted a few days before I found that it had been barricaded with large stonee taken from the coping on the rebel side. The insurgents had wholly surrounded the solid stone church at Old Cavite and had pre- pared to starve out the garrison. The country about here was most difficult to cross on account of the thick tropical growth with which it was covered. There were few roads penetrating this dense mass of vegetation, and the water was every- where covered with heavy green slime. As I passed through several villages I saw many natives idling about the low thatched houses, and nil looked half starved. The young men, however, who formed the bulk of the rebel fighting material, were enthusiastic and brave. S2 AFTER THE BATTLE. Being an American and haying no right to take any part in the operations of the natives against the Spaniards, I was interested in mere- ly the news features of the campaign that was then going on in Cavite Province. While I expected to go wherever it might be necessary or desirable for me to go, in order to witness the fighting, I had promised Aguinaldo, when he gave me my pass, that I would not run any un- necessary risks and particularly that I would not go to the Old C'avite bridge; because, he said, the fighting at that point was likely to be very hot, and, if I should be killed, my death might have a bad influence upon the Filipino cause. When, therefore, my pony stopped at the in- cline to a bridge about noon, I walked forward to the stone barricade that was built across the bridge at the highest point of its arch. I had crossed several bridges en route to this one, and therefore I did not connect this particular bridge with the warning Aguinaldo had given me. The heat was intense and the stillness of the tropical noon per- vaded everything. Perhaps a dozen natives were in the barricade, look- ing through the portholes that had been left between the large stones, and near a road-side house there were many Filipino soldiers loung- ing in the shade of bamboo sheds covered with coarse straw mats. In front of the house was a new Krupp field-piece, unlimbered. Within Short Range of the Enemy. I noticed that the soldiers were greatly interested in me, and as I went up the incline of the bridge they all stood up and saluted, while one or two said they would call an officer. I was accustomed to receiv- ing the salutes of the Filipino soldiers, as they knew me to be an American serving with our fleet, and it was natural that they should suppose me to be an officer of our navy. But on this occasion they showed a great deal more curiosity and respect combined than I had ever before noticed. On looking through the loop-holes in the stone barricade, I saw that I had, unintentionally, broken my promise to Aguinaldo and that I was on the crest of the bridge where I had seen such a hot flght in progress only a few hours before, when I was watch- ing the shore from the poop-deck of the Petrel. About 200 yards away was the church of Old Cavite, and I could easily distinguish the features of the Spanish marines who were watching the rebel barricade over the top of the church parapet. I had walked "into the lion's den" without AFTER THE BATTLE. 83 the slightest suspicion that 1 Tias approaching the advance posts of the insurgent position. As the distance was an easy point-blank range for the Mauser rifle, I felt that, as a non-combatant, I had no business there. But, of course, I was anxious to see what was going on; and, besides, it would hare been impossible for me to withdraw until I had done what I came to do — namely, learn the situation and get what information the Filipinos in the fighting line were able to give me. Looted Articles from Caivite. So I unslung my camera and asked the soldiers to group themselves in rear of the barricade so that I could take their pictures. Only one or two of them spoke Spanish, and they not fluently, so that I had some difficulty in getting matters arranged to suit me. But they brought me from the house near the bridge a black walnut table and a very com- fortable bent-wood Vienna chair, and one of the older men held over my head, to shield me from the almost intolerable rays of the sun, a fine silk umbrella. All of these articles were a part of the "loot" taken out of Cavite and San Eoque. A great number of the natives crowded into the narrow space on the bridge, anxious to see what the "Americanong" was going to do. I may here remark that my photograph was a failure, because my films had been spoiled by the climate. However, after getting a large amount of interesting information from Captain Sallafranca, who was in command of the post, temporarily, and after attempting to get a photo of the bridge barricade, I was ready to continue my trip through the rebel lines around the Spanish posi- tion in Old bavite. As I rose from my comfortable chair and turned my eyes toward, the bay, I saw the Petrel about a mile and a half away, lying off Cavite. As I mentioned before, I had been aboard the Petrel earlier in the day, watching the fierce fighting that had then been going on at this bridge; and, thinking that perhaps some of the Petrel's officers might have their glasses still turned on the bridge, it occurred to me that I would let them see that I was there. Accordingly, as I stood up, I waved my white helmet tv/o or three times toward the Petrel. It must be remembered that it was as peaceful and quiet in that neighborhood as a country church-yard on Sunday. Not a shot had been fired since I arrived at the bridge, and momentarily I had forgotten that I was within point-blank range of 2.50 Mauser rifies. 84 AFTER THE BATTLE. This T^'iis one of the usual conditions at that time of year, for the heat was so overpowering that there was seldom any fighting between ten o'clock in the forenoon and sunset. The Spaniards Open Fire. But the Spaniards in Old Cavite church had, evidently, become dis- turbed at the unusual gathering of men behind the Filipino barricade, for they had massed nearly their whole force opposite our position, probably fearing a sudden charge. When, therefore, they saw my hel- met waved three times, they felt sure the rush was about to begin; and bang! br-r-r-r started off the rolling fire of their Mausers; and ping! ping! ping! came the shower of their bullets on the rocks around us. The air seemed full of little whirring scorpions, and as I sat down again in my chair to chronicle the incidents passing before me — and, incidentally, of course, not to expose myself any more than was neces- sary to the swarm of projectiles whistling close about me^ — it seemed impossible that any of us in that redoubt would ever come out of it unhurt. For, although the barricade gave considerable protection, the port-holes were si^; inches high by three inches wide, and one side of the bridge was wholly unprotected because the stones had been removed to make a place for the field gun, which had been used to shell the church earlier in the day. The Filipinos returned the Spanish fire promptly, and their men flocked into the redoubt in such numbers that they soon silenced the Spaniards. And, except for one man, who went by picking a lot of loose teeth out of his mouth, where a bullet had raked his jaw, and another, who was shot in the leg, there were no casualties on our side. Having vraited till the firing had wholly ceased, I moved away to the left of the rebel lines to see General Mascado, kindly but firmly declining the invitation of Captain Sallafranca to train the field-piece on the church and show his men how to aim it. He told me that they had fired twelve shots at the church at that short range and had hit it only three times. As the piece had been captured from the Spaniards at Imus only that morning, it was not strange that they should have been unfamiliar with its use. This little experience gave me a good idea of the inefficiency of the Spanish force, for at the distance of 200 yards they ought to have killed and wounded a large number of the natives, in spite of the pro- tection afforded by the stones. AFTER THE BATTLE. SS All the Spaniards Surrender. Five (lays later the garrison in Old Cavite cliureh surrendered un- conditionally, and by that time not one Spaniard was left uneaptured in Cavite Province. Aguinaklo's men bad taken tbem in one datacb- ment after anotber, and the net result was tbat about 1,600 Spaniards became tbe prisoners of an equal number of Filipinos. It is easy to see bow tbese victories encouraged tbe natives and made tbem imagine tbat tbey were irresistible. Thousands of rein- forcements flocked to Aguinaldo, and be was able to arm tbem partly Viitb tbe rifles be bad captured from the Spaniards and partly with Remingtons, bought in Hong Kong and shipped to him in chartered craft from Canton or Amoy. From this time until tbe arrival of the first detachment of United States troops, on the 30tb of June, Aguinaldo maintained his head- quarters in Cavite, but his troops were continualh^ pressing the Span- iards back upon Manila. Every night fierce musketry fire was beard along tbe road tbat ran around tbe bay from Cavite to Manila, and every fight showed that the native troops had made considerable ad- vance in their position beyond that of the preceding night. It was not long before they reached tbe fort near tbe beach at Malate, one of Manila's suburbs, and then they continued their movement for invest- ing the city to the east and north. CHAPTER IV. PEEPARING TO TAKE MANILA. ' The American People Rise to an Emergency — ^General Meriitt Chosen to Command an Expedition to the Philippines — Gathering an Army at San Francisco — Complications with the Gemuans in Manila Bay — Another Spanish Gunboat Captured — Prisoners Become a. Nuisance — Arrival of Transports and Troops — First Battle Ashore — Ready to Take Manila. By Dewey's victory in Manila Bay, there were suddenly created obli- gations to be met by the United States such as had never been con- templated by the people, and hardly by the administration. The coun- try rose to meet them with notable enthusiasm and promptitude. Con- sidered in its influence upon our national standing among the Euro- pean powers, perhaps no feature of the year's history was of greater impor-tance than this. It was accepted instantly that a military expe- dition was demanded in order to follow up the advantages gained in the naval victory. Without delay, Major-General Wesley Merritt was. appointed to the command of the proposed expedition and the details of the plans involved were formulated as rapidly as possible. San Francisco was made the port where this army was to be mobil- ized and whence it should sail on the long voyage across the Pacific ocean. General Merritt desired that as large a part as possible of his force be made up of regulars, as it was known that the Spanish soldiers in the Philippines were the pick of the Castilian army. Nevertheless, the need of picked men of our regiments for the Cuban campaign was equally imperative, so in the end volunteers predominated among those who were sent to San Francisco. Mobilization at San Francisco. In the city by the Golden Gate thousands of men gathered during May and June, encamping in the beautiful military reservation known 86 PREPAEING TO TAKE MANILA. 87 as the Presidio, where they were drilled energetically and instructed in all details possible of the service that was to be required of them. Most of the volunteers assigned to the Philippine expedition, were those in the regiments from the western states, in order to shorten the rail- way journey necessary to bring them to the port of embarkation. The Pacific ports were ransacked by quartermasters-general in order to find transports for the long voyage; but at last all preparations were complete and the expedition began to sail. During the period of waiting, while the army was mobilizing in San Francisco and while it was making the journey in the troopships, the navy had to wait, inactive so far as visible progress was concerned, sometimes impatient at the tedium of the service, but always perform- ing duties hardly less essential than the more spectacular ones of early May. The complications with the Germans in Manila Bay at one time threatened to take a serious form and Admiral Dewey had another opportunity to demonstrate his readiness to meet any emergency. Peculiar Actions of the Germans. Within a few days after the battle of May 1, German men-of-war began to arrive, until finally seven warships out of the eight which Germany had in the far east were there. Vice- Admiral Von Diederichs, who commanded the Asiatic squadron, was with his flagship among thg number. The significance of this demonstration created much specula- tion and concern. When it is considered that Germany, Austria and Portugal delayed their expressions of neutrality to an alarming limit, the massing of German ships at this critical time was regarded as significant. Ac- cording to an unwritten law of international courtesy it is unusual for more than two or three ships of a foreign power to gather in a block- aded port, iiie German interests in Manila were not so extensive as to require a great force to protect them. It was equally improbable that the Germans were there merely to witness the last act of Admiral Dewey's brilliant tragedy. The theory of curiosity could hardly justify them in leaving Kiau-Chou at a time when the Russian and English relations are so strained. Vice- Admiral Von Diederichs said that Germany was making a dem- onstration in Manila bay for the purpose of benefiting the trade rela- 88 PREPARING TO TAKE MANILA. tions between Manila and his own country. The exact connection be- tween cause and effect in this instance was somewhat obscure. The Spaniards in Manila, according to the Diario de Manila, looked on the Germans as being their friends and sympathizers, and the advent of Germany's fleet as encouragement to Spanish interests. The Ger- mans saluted the Spanish flag on several occasions after Admiral Dewey established his blockade. This was apparently intended as evidence of special friendliness to Spain. Neither the English nor French saluted the Spanish flag, and only in one instance did the Japan- ese salute it. Finally, after a series of annoyances from the Germans, Admiral Dewey requested from Admiral Diederichs an explanation of Germany's position in the Philippines. He also protested against the German admiral's disregard of the American blockade of Manila. Admiral Dewey Asks an Explanation. The German naval officers had taken pains to show particular friend- liness toward the Spaniards. The German officers had visited the Spanish fortifications and trenches and the Manila newspapers had asserted that the presence before the city of so many German ships enabled the Spanish authorities and the people of Manila to regard the American fleet with complacency. Finally the German admiral told Admiral Dewey that three of his ships were to depart, but they went only as far as Mariveles, Subig bay and Cebu. On June 27 the McOuUoch met the Irene, one of the German fleet, at Corregidor island, preparing to enter the bay, and signaled to her: "We wish to communicate with you." The Irene paid no attention to the signal, and proceeded on her way until a small boat was sent out to her from the McCulloch. The captain of the Irene explained the matter by saying that he had misunderstood the signal. The action of the Irene in interfering with an attack by the insur- gent vessel, Filipinas, on the Spanish garrison at Isla Grande, in Subig bay, was in line with the attitude adopted by the German naval officers. As soon as the insurgents reported the matter to Admiral Dewey he dispatched the Ealeigh and Concord to Subig bay and captured the Spanish garrison, the Irene departing hastily on the arrival of the American warships. Pi w Q O < o z §^ So ZCtJ u H U3 2 J ■a .g' a, " o OS-" t; ■" " S >^S fcta o||1 ^ a o otJ.a >, .a J) . , o O ■ffi 1 ^ «4-l 1 O ^ s w S rt •M "^ 'n 6 d S t d "S Q W H I— I O X CO <; < 2 2 ,a o S3 M 3 a •9 ■« .Sf ^ e M J c w H I— I ■g, W ■= Oe! I ^ (U b oj C! O S (D S Pi . 1^ . ^ v ^ I IS ja d «> g ^ a 2 35 ^ -d 22l l-H U w fc <; < (1) c! J2 E ta bo g ■K '.J- -o a '3 bfl-S ^ -^ |:§ 2 S ^ ^« u to S ^ > p. I- fc ^ ^ 3 ■t-t o "p. ;-• lU S "3 Q w ID H Q o W X H M O ■a o > -^ o o .5- E ni >. a 5a 0) p E C ■e s o "^ o i^l ^ H a U s W ■s H £ O 0) "5 J3 a - E -r^ gi ID -y S* m ■g « <" ft J) c o o 3 .S -a -^ ■d ^ J3 .a - " m ^ l.o 5 go o +-» ^ g 2 " 3 -^ 'S 2 2 ft^ 1! •° 3 m " ID PI ft 2 ^ .S "d M in 5-8 &.! PREPARING TO TAKE MANILA. 93 At last Admiral Dewey sent an officer to the German flagship with a request that Admiral Diederichs ma]s:e a statement of the German atti- tude in the matter of the blockade of Manila. At the same time he delivered a protest against various actions by German officers, such as have been mentioned here. The German admiral sent an immediate explanation. Two days later, however, he sent a protest to Admiral Dewey against the action of American officers in boarding German ships coming to Manila from Mariveles. He cited the incident of the Mc- CuUoch and the Irene at Corregidor. Admiral Dewey replied to this very courteously but firmly. He pointed out to the German admiral that international law gave to the commander of a blockading fleet authority to communicate with all the ships entering a blockaded port. As international law permitted warships to fly any flag they chose in order to deceive an enemy, the nationality of vessels entering the bay could not be determined abso- lutely without communicating with them. He announced his intention to communicate with all ships entering the bay. For the German admiral's further information Admiral Dewey told him that if Germany was at peace with the United States the German naval officers would have to change their methods, and that if Germany was at war with his nation he desired to know it at once in order that he might act accordingly. With little delay the German changed his point of view and mann&r of conduct, and harmony once more ruled when Dewey said the word. Capture of the Gunboat Leyte. One of the most interesting events of the period of waiting was the capture of the Spanish gunboat Leyte which came to Manila bay and chanced capture, because that was the only escape that offered from an exceedingly dangerous position elsewhere. About 4:30 o'clock on the afternoon of June 29 the Boston sighted smoke near the northern shore of Manila bay. She signaled the flag- ship, and in a few minutes the order was signaled to the McOulloch to get under way and communicate with a Spanish steamer bearing north by west. The McCulloch's anchor was hastily hove up and the vessel steamed out toward the distant cloud of smoke. The stranger was heading for Manila, but when she approached the foreign man-of-war 94 PREPARIXG TO TAKE MANILA. anchorage slie slowed down. On the McCulloch there was great ex- citement. This move was interpreted to ndean that the Spaniard was going to stand and fight instead of attempting to run into the Manila harbor. General quarters was sounded, guns were manned, ammunition was hurriedly got up and everything was ready for the battle that all felt sure was to follow. The Spanish flag by this time could be made out flying from the staff of the stranger. Over on one side, just beyond the foreign ship, were the Manila batteries of 8- inch and 6-inch Krupp guns, and the distance was very short for guns of their caliber and range. It was felt that an attempt to take a Spanish prize under the Spanish forts would precipitate an indignant fire from shore. The Spaniard lay waiting, and the yellow and red ensign flaunted impudently from her stern. As the McCulloch bore down on her a white flag appeared at the Spaniard's foremast. A half-mile away the officers and crews of the German and other foreign ships were looking on as at a drama. The officers of the American ship prepared to send a boat off to communicate with the Spanish ship, but a pulling boat in the meantime had left the gangway ladder of the latter. A Spanish officer sat in the stern, and when he reached the McCulloch there was a reception waiting him that was quite Chesterfieldian. Two side boys were at the gangway and every courtesy due to the rank of a captain was given him. He was very nervous and perhaps did not ex- pect the kindly greetings that awaited him. His name was Emmanuel Peral, and his vessel was the gunboat Leyte, and there were 183 Spaniards on her. The Spaniards were from Pampanga province, and as the rebels had become more active and ag- gressive they had been forced to leave the town of San Fernando and attempt an escape down the Pampanga river, with three rafts, or cascos, in tow, and 800 fugitives on board of them. Since June 14 they had been trying to reach the bay, but the rebels had harassed and obstructed them until nearly all of the fugitives were suffering from sickness and hunger. They were driven to desperation when they succeeded in reaching the mouth of the river. The three cas- cos, with 800 people on board, were left behind, and the Leyte steamed across, hoping to land the sick in Manila. As they drew up toward the harbor the McCulloch was seen to be bearing down on them. So they decided to surrender and make no further attempt to reach the Pasig, although they easily had time to do it. Their cannon were PREPAEIN© TO TAKE MANILA. 9S throAvn overboard, so that no suspicion of hostility could be dir»et»d toward them, and a white flag was run up at the fore. Prisoners Were Not Wanted. Admiral Dewey offered to liberate the Spaniards on parole and send them into Manila, but this was refused on account of the disinclination of the Spanish authorities in Manila to take paroled prisoners. Admiral DeAvev did not want to keep them as American prisoners, and the Span- iards expressed a hope that if they were kept it would be as prisoners of the admiral and not of the insurgents. They did not want to be turned over to Aguinaldo. Finally it was determined to defer action until the next morning. The Leyte lay a short distance astern of the Olympia, where Admiral Dewey, in walking the quarterdeck, could study his latest capture. The Spaniards, with hardly any food remain- ing, were obliged to pass the night on their ship. When asked if they needed food they said that the very last morsel would be gone by morn- ing. Lieutenant Ridgely and Captain Peral gave them two bottles of wine, some cheese and biscuits and a few packages of cigarettes. The next day the Leyte was taken to Cavite and the prisoners disembarked. Sick, hungry and barefooted soldiers, mingled with hand- some officers and a number of children and women, made up the discon- solate, disheartened and discouraged passengers of the little gunboat. The governor of Pampangas, De Marcelina de la Mote Velarde, with fine, clear features and a uniform that showed how much it had been worn during the last few days, was one of the prisoners. There were over twenty officers, and every one carried his sword and small arms. There were between fifteen and twenty women and a few children, the rest of the great passenger list being made up of soldiers and sailors. When the ship steamed alongside the wharf near the arsenal twelve marines under Captain Williams were landed. These men were marched out on the dock and lined up in two parallel columns, six in each, about twenty feet apart. The Spanish soldiers, lugging their heavy knap- sacks and rifles, were drawn up in line between the American marines. The officers were allowed to stand in a group near the water end of the landing dock. The hold of the ship was searched and all the stragglers brought out. Then the men were marched a few hundred feet onward and the wpmen and children, the sick and the native sailors were taken 96 PEEPARING TO TAKE MANILA. off the vessel. Great piles of trunks were removed and two heavy strong boxes of silver coin. The amount in these boxes was said to be about 110,000, and the officers claimed that it was personal property. This was hardly believed, however. Another quantitj^ of money was found, and this was given ta the crew in payment of back wages by order of Admiral Dewey. These were the iirst prisoners taken and held by the admiral. The officers expressed themselves as preferring to be American prisoners with something to eat than to be over in Manila. They knew that the fact of their having surrendered their ship .and money unnecessarily was seen in Manila and that they would be shot if they entered the city. Arrival of First Troopships, It was on June 30 that the first of the transports reached Manila bay. On that day the troopships Gity of Peking, City of Sydney and Australia arrived from San Francisco under the convoy of the Charleston, which had made the trans-Pacific voyage with them, and the Baltimore which had been sent to the north of the island of Luzon to meet them. After calling at Honolulu they had touched at Guam in the Ladrone islands. Here the captain-general had surrendered to the Charleston, and the officers and soldiers of the Spanish garrison there had been taken aboard one of the transports as prisoners. The arrival of the troopships brought great rejoicing to the Ameri- can fleet and dismay to the people of Manila, who believed that an immediate attack would be made on the city, which probably was to be destroyed by bombardment. The transports named brought General Thomas M. Anderson of the United States army, who had with him four companies of the 14th infantry of the regular army and the 1st California and 1st Oregon regiments of volunteers. The next troop- ships, under General Frank V. Greene, arrived July 17; General Merritt himself came on July 25, and when General MacArthur's quota arrived on July 30 the force was considered complete, though it has been re- enforced often since that time. Disembarkation was hastened as rapidly as possible and Oavite be- came an exceedingly busy place. Drills were kept up faithfully and the men were prepared for whatever emergency might arise. General Anderson requested Aguinaldo to evacuate Cavite, as there was not PREPARING TO TAKE MANILA. 97 sufficient room in the town for our own troops, and the Filipino dic- tat©r removed his headquarters to Bakor, just across the bay of Bakor. At this place Aguinaldo called together a number of natives upon whosfe loyalty to himself he could depend and organized a provisional gov- ernment. He ceased to sign himself "dictator," and appointed a "cabi- net." These men assumed the executive authority of the Filipino re- public, but Aguinaldo remained, as before, the sole power in the Filipino camp. Manila was finally fully surrounded by the rebel troops, and fighting at long range and without much effect went on every night. It was impossible for the insurgents to take the city either by siege or by assault, and so during the month of July the Spaniards were on the defensive against the natives. The troops of the United States were advanced from Cavite to Paranaque, only a short distance from the walls of Manila, and preparations were made by the United States forces for compelling the surrender of the city to General Merritt. First Engagement of American Troops. The first clash of arms between Spanish and American land forces in the Philippines resulted in the killing of ten Americans and the wounding of forty-three. The Spanish loss was not known. The con- flict occurred late in the night of July 31. It was the result of a reported effort on the part of the enemy to flank the American trenches near Malate, an effort which failed, if, indeed, it was ever intended. The fight was a vicious one, but the men who were having their baptism of fire never flinched. They showed the stuff of which they were made, as truly as they did two weeks later when Manila was the objective point. The engagement occurred in the midst of a driving rain, ac- companying a furious typhoon which had been raging for severSTl days and the conditions were peculiarly trying. When finally the men of the three fleets of troopships were disem- barked and placed in position, General Merritt calculated that the time had come for final action. He had about 8,500 men ready to attack the city of Manila. He and Admiral Dewey united in a joint letter to the Spanish commander-in-chief, under date of August 7, notifying him that operatioas might begin at any time after forty-eight hours, or 98 PRErARING TO TAKE MANILA. sooner if made necessary by an attack on his part, and that all non- combatants should therefore be removed from the cLtj. In replying, GoTernor-General Jaudenes said in part: "As your notice is sent for the purpose of providing for the safety of non-com- batants, I give thanks to your excellencies for the humane sentiment 30U have shown, and state that, finding myself surrounded by insur rectionary forces, I am without places of refuge for the increased num> ber of wounded, sick, women and children who are now lodged within the walls." Dewey and Merritt Demand Surrender. Two days later a second letter was sent to the captain-general by Admiral Dewej- and General Merritt, reading as follows: "The Governor-General and Captain-General of the Philippines. "Sir: The inevitable suffering in store for the wounded, sick, women and children, in the event that it becomes our duty to reduce the defenses of the walled town in which they are gathered, will, we feel assured, appeal successfully to the sympathies of a general capable of making the determined and prolonged resistance which your excel- lency has exhibited after the loss of your naval forces and without hope of succor. "We therefore submit, without prejudice to the high sentiments of honor and duty which your excellency entertains, that, surrounded on every side as you are by a constantly increasing force, with a powerful fleet in your front and deprived of all prospect of reinforcement and assistance, a most useless sacrifice of life would result in the event of an attack, and therefore every consideration of humanity makes it imperative that you should not subject your city to the horrors of a bombardment. Accordingly, we demand the surrender of the city of Manila and the Spanish forces under your command." As the time approached marking the expiration of the forty-eight- hour respite granted to Manila by General Merritt and Admiral Dewey before the attack the enthusiasm on the ships was tremendous. Men on the sick list begged to be taken off and those who were unfit for heavy work asked to be assigned to lighter duties. Men who would have been PREPARING TO TAKE MANILA. 99 hopelcfssly ill if the ship was to be coaled now developed wonderful vitality and convalescence. A few thoughtful veterans got their fare- well letters written, but the great majority prepared for a picnic. When the Battle Was Expected. It was announced that the navy and army would get under head- way Wednesday noon, August 10. General orders were issued and the refuge ships and foreign war vessels anchored off the city began to move away to positions of safety. Ten or twelve refuge ships thronged with women and children from Manila were taken down to Mariveles bay. The foreign war vessels moved out of range. The German admiral sent word asking Admiral Dewey where he should anchor, and was told that he might anchor any place he chose so long as he was not in range. Then came a curious thing. The English ships — ■ the Immortality, Iphigenia, Pygmy and Plover — and the Japanese ship, the Naniwa, steamed over and joined the American ships at their anchorage off Cavite. The German and French warships withdrew in an opposite direction until they were well out of range. There could hardly have been a more eloquent exposition of the sympathetic lean- ings of the different nations, and the English, American and Japanese alliance which had been so frequently mentioned seemed a reality in Manila bay. At 9 o'clock on the morning of August 10 all was suppressed excite- ment. The ships were stripped and only the work of taking down the awnings remained. This was soon done and full steam pressure was raised for the work of turning the heavy screws. Shortly before 10 o'clock General Merritt came aboard and asked for a delay, stating that the army was not ready. The disappointment that this caused was extreme and the line drawn between the navy and army was never moi^e sharp and vivid. The last dispatches had indi- cated that peace was so imminent that already every ship that came into the bay was apprehensively regarded as a probable bearer of the unwelcome news that hostilities should cease. To those who had lived on shipboard for months just in sight of the city lights the thought of being denied the pleasure of riding up and down the Luneta was something very trying. The fleet was signaled to bank fires and the commanders and cap- 100 PREPARING TO TAKE MANILA. tains were told that twenty-four hours' notice would be given before a general movement would be made. The Baltimore then began coaling from the Q^rus, and the situation seemed to have relaxed from the critical to the commonplace routine of the old blockading days. On Friday, August 12, orders were sent out for all ships to pre- pare to get under way at 9 o'clock the following morning. The army was ready. H I CHAPTER V. MEBRITT AND DEWEY CAPTURE MANILA. Approach of the Time when Waiting Was to End— Efforts to Obtain a Sur- render Without an Engagement Fail — Story of the Battle of August 13 — Dramatic and Picturesque Features of the Assault on the Forti- fications — Taking Possession of the City— The Part Played by the Navy — Captured Spanish Gunboats Distinguish Themselves — Organ- izing the New Regime in Manila — Waiting for the Declaration of Peace. The most concise story of the taking of Manila is that included in the official report cabled by General Merritt to the war department at Washington. It read as follows: "Hong Kong, August 18.— Adjutant-General, Washington: Manila, August 13. — On the 7th inst. Admiral Dewey joined me in a forty-eight- hour notification to the Spanish commander to remove non-combatants from the city. On the same date a reply was received expressing thanks for the humane sentiments, and stating that the Spanish were without places of refuge for non-combatants now within the walled town. On the 9th inst. we sent a joint note inviting a,ttention to suffering in store for the sick and non-combatants in case it became our duty to reduce the defenses, also setting forth the hopeless condition of the Spanish forces, surrounded on all sides, with a fleet in front and no prospect of re-enforcements, and demanded surrender as due to every consideration of humanity. On the same date we received a reply admitting their situation, but stating the council of defense declared the request for surrender could not be granted, but offered to consult the government if time was granted necessary for communication via Hong Kong. A joiait note was sent in reply declining. On the 13th joined with the navy in attack, with the following result: After about half an hour's accu- rate shelling of the Spanish lines, MacArthur's brigade, on the right, and Greene's on the left, under Anderson, made a vigorous attack and car- ried the Spanish works. Loss not accurately known — about fifty in all. 103 104 MERRITT AND DEWEY CAPTURE MANILA. Behavior of troops excellent; co-operation of the navy most valuable. Troops advanced rapidly on walled city, upon which a white flag was shown, and the town capitulated. Troops occupy Malate, 'Binondo and the walled city of San Miguel. All important centers protected. Insur- gents kept out. No disorder nor pillage. "MEERITT." Just Before the Capture of the City. The facts are there but the details are not. The details themselves were highly interesting. The Spaniards knew they were whipped weeks before the battle. There was nothing to be expected from their long and stubborn obstinacy except the possibility that peace might be declared before the Americans had captured the city. They were hemmed in on the south and the sea by the American troops and by the insurgents on the east and north. For more than three months little food had been received, and they had been gradually reduced to tinned meats and then to rice and grain. Business was choked to a standstill and one by one the shops were closed. The only places that thrived were the caf^s, which daily held their throngs of Spanish officers cursing their misfor- tune and heaping their wrath on the Americans and the natives for obvious reasons; on the Englisli because of the latter's sympathy with the United States; on the Germans because no help was given and on Spain because she had apparently deserted them. The water works then fell into the hands of Aguinaldo's men and no water came to rid the town of its stenches and bring relief to the sick. Sickness came on quickly with the stopping of the water supply, the hospitals were filled and then the churches, and finally other public buildings. Over 3,000 sick and wounded soldiers were in the walled city when it fell. The sanitation was wretched, and the prolonged diet of rice and coarse foods told fearfully on the delicate stomachs of the sick. A sentiment in favor of surrender sprang up. Captain-General Augustin was convinced of the folly of further resistance. The archbishop, who had always been regarded as the most bitterly opposed to submission, was said to have favored it from the first. Madrid routed Augustin and appointed Gen- eral Jaudenes his military successor because the latter was understood to favor fighting for his beloved flag and mother country as long as a drop of blood flowed in his subordinates' veins. The newspapers printed MEEEITT AND DEWEY CAPTUEE MANILA. 105 fearful things about the Americans and rioted in the most shameless fabrication of official telegrams. The soldiers had been deceived into believing that a fleet from Spain was expected for over a month, and each detachment of American troopships vi'as heralded as the long- expected relief expedition until they v^^ere seen to join the ships of the admiral's fleet. Negotiations for Surrender. A feeling of discontent spread among the soldiers, and Admiral Dewey, acting through the Belgian consul, Mr. Edward Andr^, as in- termediary, began a series of communications with Governor Augustin which promised to result in the peaceful transfer of the Philippines without bloodshed. The admiral believed that such a transfer could be accomplished, and he hoped that by delaying until an overwhelming force arrived the Spaniards would submit and the American forces es- cape without losing a single man. At any time he could have taken the city. Had it been necessary to make a move it may be certain that he would have made it without waiting a moment. But acting on the belief that the same result could be obtained by diplomacy and patience, and feeling that there was no immediate hurry before the Monterey arrived, he was gradually reaching a satisfactory understand- * ing with the Spanish authorities. General Greene, at this nervous crisis, when the scales were waver- ing, crowded his lines up against the Spanish works at Malate and pre- cipitated the general night fight of July 31, in which the ultimate death list reached a dozen, with a long roll of wounded. At that time it seemed that the admiral would be forced to act with sledge-hammer aggressiveness, but he still clung to the hope that the city could be taken by diplomatic negotiations and a general attack avoided. On the night of August 1 another American was killed in the trenches and two more were wounded. The American troops were ordered not to answer the Spanish firing unless the Spaniards came out to storm the trenches, which to any one familiar with the conditions was very improbable. There was a general feeling that the advancing of our troops had been an unwise move, because nothing was gained by it which could not have been easily gained at any later time should the necessity arise. Night after night the killing continued — one or 106 MEERITT AND DEWEY CAPTURE MANILA. two or three a night, until the little bamboo and acacia and mango trees in the convent yard at Maricaban waved over nearly a score of new-made graves. Then began the exchange of correspondence between the American and Spanish commanders, ending with the demand for surrender which was made and refused. Saturday, August 13, was the day of the taking of Manila. Plan of the Day's Fighting. The army was divided into two brigades. General Greene had the 2d brigade and his men were strung along on the extreme right extend- ing to the beach. As his advance fighting line he had the Utah light artillery, with Captains Grant and Young; the 1st Colorado, under Colonel Irving Hale, and a battalion of the 3d artillery. The last- named, although in the firing line, was not under tire. Back of the firing line, in immediate support, was the 2d battalion of the 1st Cal- ifornia, under Colonel Smith and Major Sime. As reserves there were the 18th United States infantry, 1st California, 1st Nebraska, 10th Pennsylvania and a battalion of United States engineers. The 1st brigade, under General MacArthur, further inland, was distributed in a similar manner as firing line and reserves. The Astor battery, 13th Minnesota and 23d infantry were in front, with one battalion of the 14th infantry, two battalions of the 1st North Dakota, two battalions of the 1st Idaho and one battalion of the 1st Wyoming as reserves and support. The Spanish line of defenses consisted of a continuous intrench- ment, broken by three strongholds — the fort at Malate, blockhouse 14 and the fortified English cemetery. General Greene's brigade was to attack and take the first and strongest, while General MacArthur's brigade was to attack the blockhouse and cemetery. The entire field of operations covered little more than a square mile, but the Amer- icans had a fearful country to fight in. Barb-wire fences, bamboo jungles, paddy fields, swamps, streams and sharpened pickets had to be passed before reaching the Spanish line. The taking jat the trenches and fort at Malate by the 1st Colorado was the most brilliant and spectacular act of the day, but a savage ambuscade over at Singalon, near blockhouse 14, was the most deadly, for four men were killed in the Astor battery and 13th Minnesota and 23d infantry, while nearly MEERITT AND DEWEY CAPTURE MANILA. 107 thirty were wounded. Had it not been for the timely advance of the 13th Minnesota and 23d artillery the Astor battery would have been almost wiped out. Beginning the Advance on Manila. Early in the morning the two brigades began the advance from Camp Dewey. Every man carried rations for one day and went in light marching order. The story told by Major Bell of the bureau of in- formation, who acted as one of General Greene's aids during the day, gives a good idea of the operations of the 2d brigade. The men in the camp were up at 5 o'clock, ready for the start. General Babcock arrived from the Newport soon after the main body of troops had advanced from the camp, and he and Major Bell followed on horseback, soon passing the troops. Major Bell, sheltered by clumps of bamboo, crept up from the farthest American trench, where the Utah artillery, the 1st Colorado and a battalion of the 3d artillery were waiting the order to attack, along the beach to a position barely 500 yards from the fort at Malate, to make a reconnoissance of the Spanish guns. Two days before he had done the same and had re- ported that one of the Spanish guns had been removed. On this later reconnoissance it was his object to determine where that gun had been placed. Orders v^ere then given for four companies of the 1st Colorado to begin an advance. Two companies, and D, were sent out in front of the trenches, and two others, I and K, were sent along the beach under cover of the fire of Companies C and D. As C and D took their places out in a skirmish line in front of the trench, I and K, advanc- ing from the rear of the trenches, proceeded along in the surf at the beach, wading an intervening stream and boldly entering the fort. Companies C and D fell in behind; then came the 2d battalion of the 1st California, under Colonel Smith and Major Sime, who were in reserve behind the firing line, but who advanced directly behind the Colorado troops. A Race for the Spanish Colors, Major Bell was ahead of the Colorado soldiers, bent on reaching the fort first to take down the Spanish flag, but, the Spanish opening 108 MERRITT AND DEWEY CAPTURE MANILA. fire from their intrenchments, lie was called back to allow the Oolo- rados to fire several volleys. This cost him the flag, for Colonel McOoy and Adjutant Brooks, in the van of their troops, reached the Spanish position, dashed over the trenches, followed by a rushing mass of Colo- rado men, plunged into the old fort and took down the Spanish flag and hauled up the American. Just behind the Colorado men came the regimental band, wading the stream and playing their instruments with wonderful persistence and questionable harmony. The band made the hit of the day. The Colorado troops then began an advance toward the city, but the 1st California, by not stopping at the fort, had passed them and were carrying everything before them in a rush through Malate, with the Spaniards retreating in broken order and firing from dooryards and windows and from the protection of houses. A heavy fire met the 1st Colorados after passing the fort and seemed to come from the marshes over to the right of the road. It was in this fire that Charles Phoenix of Company I was killed and several others were wounded. Taking Care of the Insurgents. The four companies of the 1st California proceeded on through the Calle Eeal in Malate, Colonel Smith dropping guards at every house flying the English flag, to protect it from the insurgents, who were scrambling along in the wake of the Califomians' victorious advance. The insurgents were flring as they came along. It was here that Major Jones of the transportation department and Interpreter Finlay distinguished themselves. The insurgent firing had become hot for even the Americans, and Major Jones took an American flag, planted himself in the middle of the road and with drawn revolver stopped the entire advance of the insurgents. Captain O'Connor, with a small guard, advanced to the very city walls in the face of large bodies of Spanish soldiers and posted himself on the Puente Espana, the principal bridge of the city, leading from the business section to the walled city. The Californians advanced to the road leading around the walled city and intercepted the insurgents who were flocking in along the road from Santa Ana. The latter were flring on the retreating Spaniards, and the Californians came in direct line of the fire. The Spaniards were returning the insurgent fire, and the Americans were between MEBEITT AND DEWEY CAPTURE MANILA. 109 the two forces. It was here that Private Dunmore of Company B, 1st California, was killed and H. Ammerson wounded. The California men held their fire, and by doing so avoided a general conflict which would have been as disastrous as it would have been useless. The in. surgent advance was stopped. Colonel Smith then advanced to the roads leading from Paco and stopped another troop of insurgents who were attempting to enter the walled city. One pompous insurgent in a gorgeous uniform announced that they were going on, but when Major Bell drew his revolver and threatened to kill any one attempting to pass, the insurgent officer became submissive and polite. The Ameri- cans then formed in line and forced the insurgents up the street and into a side street. They next attempted to get in by another street, but were forestalled. General Greene Enters the City. General Greene came up under a scattering fire v/ith his staff and met a Spanish official who awaited him at one of the gates of the city. The general entered the city alone with the Spaniards aiid the arrange- ments for the occupation were made. Over to the north of the city there was hot fighting between the insurgents and the Spaniards, but the latter held them back. The Spaniards in those trenches remained at their guns, resisting the insurgents', until 7 P. M. the following day, and were among the last who gave up their arms. They complained at being compelled to fight after the city had surrendered. General MacArthur's brigade was having a hot fight over in the Singalon district. The Spanish deserted their trenches at the advance of the Americans, but retreated to dense clumps of bamboos and am- buscaded the Americans as the latter advanced. In was in this ambus- cade that August Thollen of the 23d infantry. Sergeants Cremins and Holmes of the Astor battery and Archie Patterson of the 13th Min- nesota were killed and a great number wounded. The Minnesota men, the Astor battery and the 23d infantry did brilliant work in this sec- tion, and their record in the fight is the most brilliant of the day. As MacArthur's brigade in regular order swept the Spaniards out of blockhouse No. 14 and the English cemetery, driving them back, the brigade fell in behind General Greene's brigade and entered Malate from the east. 110 MERRITT AND DEWEY CAPTURE MANILA. The Battle as Seen from the Bay. At 9 o'clock sharp the Olympia's engines began to throb, and as the flagship moved slowly forward the national ensign floated from all mastheads. The Charleston, which had been lying near Malate for several days, steamed slowly over and joined the squadron, and a few minutes more saw the Olympia, Baltimore, Monterey, Charleston, Boston, Petrel, Ealeigh, McCiiUoch, Callao, Barcelo, Zafiro and the Kwonghoi bear- ing off toward Malate. It was a magnificent sight. When the Olympia passed the Immortality the band on the latter struck up a few bars of "See, the Conquering Hero Comes," swung into the swell of "Star- Spangled Banner" and then broke into the lively, inspiriting "El Oapi- tan." It was gi'eat. As the American ships left the ships in the Cavite anchorage the Immortality and Iphigenia got under way, and, steam- ing swiftly across to the German and French ships, took up their sta- tions directly between the German flagship and Admiral Dewey's ships. The German admiral as promptly got under way, and took a place in line with the Englishmen. It was only an incident, but the significance of the British move was tremendously appareht. Navy Begins Its Share of the Work. At 4,000 yards the order came to commence firing when ready, and at 9:35 o'clock the Olympia opened with a 6-pounder, and almost simultaneously one of the forward 8-inch guns crashed and every glass was turned toward the target. The shots fell short, due to a mistake in the range, which was caused by a miragic effect, making the shore line appear closer. The order was then given to get the 5-inch guns ready, and the range was made for 4,200 yards. Two 5-inch guns from Ensign Taylor's battery blazed out, then one of Stokely Morgan's 8-inch forward guns and then another 5-inch gun. Then came the order to cease firing. Up to this time— 9:50 o'clock— the Spaniards had not returned the fire, and it was suspected that they were reserving it for a closer range, or else, as appeared probable, the fort had been deserted. The Raleigh and Petrel had joined in, the Raleigh's magnificent battery of MERRITT AND DEWEY CAPTURE MANILA. Ill rapid fire 5-inch guns and the Petrel's 6-inch guns plowing holes in the landscape and altering the sky line of the fort. At 9:50 o'clock the army, which was advancing toward the fort, began firing, and the smoke from their volleys hung in white clouds over their position. Five minutes later there was almost incessant firing from the army, and masses of white smoke were seen leaping out from the fort and the Spanish trenches in answer. At 3,500 yards the order was given again on the Olympia to copamence firing, and at 10 o'clock she opened again, but the shots fell short and to the right. The rain now began to fall in a steady drizzle, and the Admiral and Lieu- tenant Brumby put on raincoats, the former changing his naval cap for a cloth traveling cap. Work of the Captured Gunboats. At 10 o'clock the Callao, very close in shore moving along parallel with the army's advance, was raking the Spanish trenches with a deadly fire from the machine guns. Lieutenant Tappan was doing wonderful work with the little gunboat, and several Spanish volleys were fired on him as the vessel advanced. A number of bullets struck her, but no one was hurt, and she kept up a steady grind- ing out from her Nordenfeldt and Hotchkiss. The little Barcelo, close behind, was pumping her machine guns in with magnificent effective- ness. Like the little Petrel in the battle of May 1, the Callao and Barcelo seemed to be in the thickest of the fight, and on account of their nearness to shore to be most aggressive and daring. From the Olympia the movements of the land forces now became distinguishable. Where a few moments before their position was marked only by the smoke which rose above the trees from the bat- teries and volley firing, now 't was plainly seen that a great number of soldiers were boldly advancing up the open beach and straggling for- ward in the heavy surf. It was a gallant sight to see the long line of brown uniforms streaming up the beach, some waist deep in the surf gashing out along the unprotected strip of sand which lay between them and the old fort, where the Spanish guns were expected to blaze out any minute in their faces. A scattering fire came from the Spanish trenches, and at 10:45 o'clock the troops on the beach stopped and answered with three volleys. 112 MERRITT AND DEWEY CAPTURE MANILA. Admiral Dewey Pays a Compliment. When they crossed the little stream about 200 yards in front of the fort, holding their guns high in the air to keep them from being soaked, with the regimental flag and national ensign flying bravely at the front, with their regimental band valiantly following and playing for dear life, there were thousands of eyes watching them from the ships with silent, almost breathless, anxiety. Slowly they drew nearer the fort, with the Mausers spattering along before them and the band playing. The Ad- miral said that it was the most gallant advance he had ever seen. The Colorado regimental band was playing "There'll Be a Hot Time in the Old Town To-night." Just before the troops reached the powder magazine there was a tremendous explosion and a dense column of black smoke sprang up behind the fort. It was thought that a mine concealed in the road had been exploded. The smoke hung in the air and it was seen that the explosion was followed by a fire. The fort was now deep in smoke from other explosions and the Spanish firing. As the troops advanced along the beach and approached nearer the fort the army signaled the fleet to cease firing. The fort was still silent. At 10:58 a storm of cheers broke out from the Olympia, for the soldiers had passed the zone of fire and were clambering over the Spanish trenches and swarming into the fort. Hardly a moment passed before the yellow and red flag was seen to be coming down, and the next minute the American flag was raised in its place. Preparing for the Surrender. This was evidently the time agreed upon for the city to surrender, for an order was at once given by the Admiral to fly our international signal, "Do you surrender?" At 11 o'clock it was fluttering from the forward signal halyards of the flagship. With the hoisting of this sig- nal came a general shifting of the positions of the fleet, and all the vessels, with the exception of the Callao, Concord and Barcelo, took their positions before the heavy batteries of Manila. The Monterey steamed to a very close range and waited. Every gun in the fleet that could be trained in that direction was pointed on the Manila guns. If MERRITT AND DEWEY CAPTURE MANILA. 113 any one of those four 9.2-inch Hontoria guns had let loose at least a hundred shells would have been launched in on them in less time than it takes to read about it. A huge Spanish flag was floating bravely over the city walls near one of the heavy batteries and it did not seem to come down with any particular haste. Nearly every one was watching that gorgeous piece of bunting and hoping that it would be lowered, but in its persistent waving there was certainly no indication of surrender or weakening. The Zaflro, with General Merritt, approached the Olympia, and as if by a preconcerted agreement the flagship signaled that Flag Lieutenant Brumby would report on board the Zaflro. At 11:45 the Admiral left the bridge to meet Consul Andr6, the Belgian representa- tive, whose launch had just reached the flagship. Lieutenant Brumby took the largest American flag on the ship and went aboard the launch. General Whittier of General Merritt's staff came over from the Zaflro in a pulling boat, and also went aboard the launch Trueno. A few minutes later the launch steamed away toward Manila, 1,500 yards away. At 12 o'clock the international signal "0. F. L.," meaning "hold conference," was hoisted over the city walls. Then followed a long wait. The officers and men on the ships had dinner, the guns were kept trained on the Manila batteries, and the big Spanish flag still swung in the breezes above the beleaguered city. Soon after 2 o'clock the Belgian consul's boat was seen to be re- turning. This seemed to mean that an agreement had not been reached, for the presence of the Spanish colors certainly did not look like capitulation. When the Good News Came. At 2:33 o'clock Lieutenant Brumby, climbing up the sea ladder to the Olympia's quarterdeck, called out to the Admiral: "Well, they've surrendered all right." The Admiral quickly answered, "Why don't they haul down that flag?" "They'll do that as soon as Merritt gets 600 or 700 men m there to protect them," explained Lieutenant Brumby. The Admiral then said: "Well, you go over and tell General Mer- ritt that I agree to anything." 114 MERRITT AND DEWEY CAPTURE MANILA. As the news passed that the city had surrendered, the rigging was manned and tremendous cheers broke out over the dull sea. All the ships of the fleet were cheering as the news was signaled. At 5:45 the Spanish flag in the city was seen slowly coming down, and a minute later the enormous American flag was hoisted in its place. Just as the huge flag went up, the sun, which through the greater por- tion of the day had been obscured, now burst through the clouds hang- ing over Manila and illuminated the banner with a blaze of light It was as opportune as the calcium light in the theater which falls on the center of the stage when the star enters. The ships of the fleet saluted the new flag with twenty-one guns each. In ten minutes 189 saluting charges were fired. At 6 o'clock the band on the flagship struck up "The Victory of Manila," and Manila was ours. American Soldiers in Manila. By 10 o'clock 10,000 soldiers were in the city. The 2d Oregon patrolled the walled city and guarded its nine entrances. General Greene marched his brigade around the walled city into Binondo. The 1st California was sent east to the fashionable official residence district of Malacanay, the 1st Colorado was sent into Tondo and the 1st Ne- braska was established on the north shore of, the Pasig river, Mac- Arthur's brigade patrolled Ermita and Malate. In the walled city the Spaniards had surrendered their arms at the governor's palace. By nightfall over 7,000 rifles had been surren- dered, and by the following evening nearly 1,000 more were turned in. The big American flag was hoisted by Lieutenant Brumby, and as the Oregonians entered from the Kwonghoi the afternoon of the fight their band struck up "The Star-Spangled Banner." The women wept as the Spanish ensign went down, and the soldiers cheered as the American flag went up. The night of the battle was quiet. Except for a few cases reported, of the insurgents looting the houses of Spaniards, there was no dis- order. The American soldiers at once began to fraternize with the Spanish soldiers. Terms of capitulation were agreed upon promptly between American and Spanish commanders and the occupation of the Spanish capital of the Philippines was complete. General Merritt's MEREITT AND DEWEY CAPTURE MANILA. 115 first great task after that of safely transporting an army across the Pacific was accomplished. His own report is but a just appreciation of the excellence of the work done by his men. Its expressions of ap- proval are no warmer than those given to General Merritt himself by those who know his work. It closed as follows: General Merritt Praises the Army. "Immediately after the surrender the Spanish colors on the sea front were hauled down and the American flag displayed and saluted by the guns of the navy. The 2d Oregon Regiment, which had pro- ceeded by sea from Oavite, was disembarked and entered the walled town as a provost guard, and the colonel was directed to receive the Spanish arms and deposit them in places of security. The town was filled with the troops of the enemy driven in from the entrenchments, regiments formed and standing in line in the streets, but the work of disarming proceeded quietly and nothing unpleasant occurred. "In leaving the subject of the operations of the 13th I desire here to record my appreciation of the admirable manner in which the orders for attack and the plan for occupation of the city were carried out by the troops exactly as contemplated. I submit that for troops to enter under fire a town covering a wide area, to rapidly deploy and guard all principal points in the extensive suburbs, to keep out the insurgent forces pressing for admission, to quietly disarm an army of Spaniards more than equal in numbers to the American troops, and finally by all this to prevent entirely all rapine, pillage, and disorder, and gain en- tire and complete possession of a city of 300,000 people filled with na- tives hostile to the European interests, and stirred up by the knowledge that their own people were fighting in the outside trenches, was an act which only the law-abiding, temperate, resolute American soldier, well and skillfully handled by his regimental and brigade commanders, could accomplish." President McKinley Sends Congratulations. As soon as possible for messages to pass by steamer between Manila and Hong Kong and by cable to and from Washington, the following were received from President McKinley: 116 ilEBRITT AND DEWEY CAPTURE MANILA. "Executive Mansion, Washington, D, C, August 21. — Admira] Dewey, Manila: Receive for yourself and the officers, sailors and ma- rines of your command my thanks and congratulations and those of the nation for the gallant conduct all have again so conspicuously dis- played. "WILLIAM Mckinley." "Executive Mansion, Washington, D. C, August 21. — Major-General Merritt, U. S. A., Manila : In my own behalf and for the nation I extend to you and the officers and men of your command sincere thanks and congratulations for the conspicuously gallant conduct displayed in your campaign. "WILLIAM McKINLEY." Formal Terms of Capitulation. The formal terms of capitulation signed by the American and Span- ish officers designated for that purpose at Manila were as follows: The undersigned, having been appointed a commission to determine the details of the capitulation of the city and defenses of Manila and its suburbs and the Spanish forces stationed therein, in accordance with agreement entered into the previous day by Major-General Wesley Merritt, United States Army, American commander-in-chief in the Philippines, and his excellency Don Fermin Jaudenes, acting general- in-chief of the Spanish army in the Philippines, have agreed upon the following : 1. The Spanish troops, European and native, capitulate with the city and defenses with all honors of war, depositing their arms in the places designated by the authorities of the United States, and remain- ing in the quarters designated and under the orders of their officers and subject to control of the aforesaid United States authorities, until the conclusion of a treaty of peace between the two belligerent nations. All persons included in the capitulation remain at liberty; the officers remaining in their respective homes, which shall be respected as long as they observe the regulations prescribed for their government and the laws in force. 2. Officers shall retain their side arms, horses and private Drop- MEBEITT AND DEWEY CAPTURE MANILA. 117 erty. All public horses and. public property of all kinds shall be turned over to the staff olHcers designated by the United States. 3. Complete returns in duplicate of men by organizations and full lists of public property and stores shall be rendered to the United States within ten days from this date. 4. All questions relating to the repatriation of officers and men of the Spanish forces and of their families and of the expenses which said repatriation may occasion shall be referred to the government of the United States at Washington. Spanish families may leave Manila at any time convenient to them. The return of the arms surrendered by the Spanish forces shall take place when they evacuate the city or when the American army evacuates. 5. Officers and men included in the capitulation shall be supplied by the United States according to their rank with rations and necessary aid, as though they were prisoners of war, until the conclusion of the treaty of peace between the United States and Spain. All the funds in the Spanish treasury and all other public funds shall be turned over to the authorities of the United States. 6. This city, its inhabitants, its churches and religious worship, its educational establishments and its private property of all descrip- tions are placed under the safeguard of the faith and honor of the Amer- ican army. F. W. GREENE, Brigadier-General of Volunteers, United States Army, B. P. LAMBEETON, Captain United States Navy. CHARLES A. WHITTIER, Lieutenant-Colonel and Inspector-General. E. H. CROWDER, Lieutenant-Colonel and Judge Advocate. NICHOLAS DE LA PENA, Auditor-General Excts. CARLOS REYES, Colonel de Ingineros. JOSE MARIA OLAQUEN, Felia de Estado Major. 118 MERRITT AND DEWEY CAPTURE MANILA. War with the Spanish Ended. The American army was encamped where most available for service in the event of any sort of an uprising or other emergency call. The commanding general assigned various officers of his staff to civic duties in the organization of a new regime. Spaniards, Americans and Filipinos dwelt side by side in a measure of peace and harmony. Major-General Merritt issued a proclamation to the people informing them that his intention was to protect them in all their rights. There remained only the necessity of waiting for peace to be declared to end all difficulties. But the Filipinos were yet to be reckoned with. Copyrighted, 1899, by Joseph L. Stickney, AFTER DEWEY'S GUNS FIRED. The face of the Malate battery, south of Manila, after the warships had fired upon it, August 13, 1898, the day Manila was taken. FILIPINO INTRENCHMENTS This picture shows a large, old-fashioned gun taken from Cavite arsenal before any difiSculties arose between the United States and the Filipinos. CHAPTER VI. ANCESTRY AND CHILDHOOD OF GEORGE DEWEY. "Th« Child Is the Father of the Man"— OFigin of the Dewey Family— Nine Generations Born in America— The Grandfather of the Admiral— Dewey's Father and His Traits— Stories of the Home Life and the Youth of the Coming Hero — Boyish Pranks and Their Punishment— A Voyage in a Buggy — School Life and Schoolmates — Appointment to the Naval Academy at Annapolis. The greatest biographers of the greatest men have recognized al- ways that there is a large element of vi^isdom and truth in tlie old adage, "The child is the father of the man." Every child contains within him in embryo the qualities that he displays in maturity. Environ- ment and training will develop certain latent qualities beyond others according as the influences are directed, but it is to be doubted if they can ever create in the man any capacity which was not born in him. Any study of man which fails to take cognizance of both environment and heredity will fail in completeness. So it is that although in America we are proud to feel that ancestry has little influence in establishing a man's station among his fellow men, and that each must be judged for himself by his own works, it is impossible to ignore the factor of family in discovering the source of the qualities which gain any station for their possessor. The American Deweys came to the colonies from England, but they were immigrants to England as well some generations earlier, for the family was of French extraction. In itte original form the name was spelled Deueua. Early records of the family show worthy service in many walks of life, one of the ancestors having been a successful general in the French armies. George Dewey a Real American. George Dewey is of the ninth generation from the first Dewey who came to America. This progenitor of the American branch of the family 131 122 ANCESTRY AND CHILDHOOD OF GEORGE DEWEY. emigrated from Sandwich in 1633, bearing his ancestral arms and motto, "To the conqueror a crown is due." He settled in Dorchester, in the Massachusetts Bay colony, and from there the family scattered, in later years one branch locating in New York and one in Vermont. It is from the latter that the great admiral is descended. One of the chief characteristics of these two elder branches of the family in America was their mathematical ability. They were keen business men as well, able to figure out the chances in enterprises involving great risk, and willing to take any risk necessary when the chances had been once satisfactorily calculated. Another character- istic was their exceeding independence. They preferred to make their own calculation and accept the responsibility for their own actions, rather than seek advice. They were not even clannish with their rela- tives, seeming to choose their friendships within or without the family, as was most congenial to them, irrespective of the degree of consan- guinity and not assuming intimacy in the family if there happened to be none. Admiral Dewey's Immediate Ancestry. Simeon Dewey, the grandfather of George Dewey, was born in Hanover, New Hampshire, when the people of America were learning the value of freedom and realizing that they could never submit to government from over the sea. In early manhood he bought a farm in Berlin, Vermont, only four miles from Montpelier, the capital of the Green Mountain state, and there the admiral's father was born in 1801. This grandfather, Simeon Dewey, was one of the long-lived members of the long-lived family. One anecdote relates that Mr. Charles Dewey, the admiral's brother, when in England some time ago, happened to hear a British theory for American degeneracy. "Americans," said the critic, "are undersized and die early because they live upon pork and icewater." Mr. Dewey hastened to thank his informant, replying that until then it had always been a mystery to him why his grandfather Simeon had been prematurely cut off at the early age of ninety-three. To him pork and ice-water were essentials. ANCESTRY AND CHILDHOOD OF GEORGE DEWEY, 123 Montpelier Becomes the Family Home. When tlie admiral's father, Julius Yemans Dewey, was twenty-one years old, in 1822, he left the farm and removed to Montpelier, settling there and marrying Miss Mary Perrin three years later. Of this union four children were born, Charles, Edward, George and Mary. The mother died when George was but five years old, but the father was married twice more before his own career on earth ended at the age of seventy-six years. Here in Montpelier, the capital of Vermont, George Dewey was born on December 26, 1837. The house of his birth still stands almost as it was then, a modest, neat New England home like thousands of others out of which have come strong men and women to do their part in the battles of life. Characteristics of Dewey's Fathei-. The father of the family was a man of the highest iHew England type, a man who must be credited with much of what his son became. He was worthy of observation for his sterling qualities. He had been a school-teacher in Montpelier and in that way had earned money which enabled him to study medicine and take his degree. It is still re- membered that he was an early riser and that he taught his children to follow his example. He was a man of deep religious convictions and as active and energetic in the practical work of the church as he was in all other duties that rose before him. He was the founder of Christ Episcopal church in Montpelier, where his children were baptized, con- firmed and went to Sunday school, George with the others. Family prayers and grace before meals were the practice of the Dewey home. Hymns were sung on Sunday evenings, the doctor leading the singing. Dr. Dewey a Valued Neighbor. Dr. Dewey possessed exactly the characteristics that make men remembered and loved wherever they live. He loved not only his own children but all children and this trait the admiral inherited from him. He told stories and brought sunshine with him wherever he went. 124 ANCESTRY AND CHILDHOOD OF GEORGE DEWEY. so that all over the surrounding country he was a welcome visitor in spite of the fact that his visits signalled the presence of sickness in the house. He was fond of music and poetry, the works of Burns, Shakespeare and Cowper standing first in his literary choice. The doctor was a busy man all his life. When by his practice he had earned and by careful administration had saved a considerable sum of money, he was fifty years of age. Then he organized the Na- tional life insurance company of Montpelier, which prospered under his direction until before his death he had seen it grow to be an institu- tion of great prosperity and some financial magnitude. He was still in active labor when he died in 1877. The Little City of Montpelier. The Montpelier into which George Dewey was born on the day after Christmas, 1837, was not immensely different from the Montpelier of to-day. There were the same white cottages with green blinds, the same picket fences, the same river and the same New England hills. The people were prosperous and thrifty as they are now. Fine elms lined the streets as they do to-day, and the town was clean and well- kept. The Deweys always have been leading men in the place, at the head of movements for education and improvement of all sorts. The cottage which was the admiral's birthplace has been moved from its former site just opposite the capitol building, to another posi- tion down the street. In former days the Onion river, now called the Winooski, ran just behind the house, and many of the tales of Dewey's childhood are connected with this river. One old friend in a reminiscent frame of mind recalls his first introduction to little George when he was brought from the river, a barefoot boy, to meet the stranger in the parlor. The boy was fortunate in having a loving sister Mary, two years younger than himself, who admired his prowess and impersonated whatever character was necessary to make his own play complete. They fished together and took mountain tramps together as other child- ren do to-day. GMldhood Books and Sports. George was not a great reader, but "Eobinson Crusoe" won his favor and suggested new games. Then when he was ten, his big twelve-year- old brother Charles gave him a "Life of Hannibal." A big snow-drift ANCESTRY AND CHILDHOOD OP GEOEGE DEWEY. 125 answered for the Alps, and the two younger children set to work to emulate the Carthaginian invader. Mary suffered a week's sickness in bed thereby, but George escaped unscathed from the adventure. By the oldet people of Moutpelier, George Dewey is remembered -as a good deal of a rogue. He was a harum-scarum lad, always in mischief, and more than one of his pranks are remembered to this day. He was the best swimmer among all the boys of his age and nothing was too reckless for him to undertake. At winter sports he was re- garded as one of the best in the village. In the summer one of his chief pleasures was climbing such trees as contained the earliest apples and the choicest cherries, and it was never observed that he was over particular whose orchard he visited. Young Dewey a Fighter. He was something of a fighter too, and while details are lacking of such contemporaneously trivial things as a boy's battles, yet the memory of the people of Montpelier is that George always was the victor. They declare that he was a born leader in everything that rose for discussion and execution. A favorite amusement of the youngsters was the giving of circuses, dramas and minstrel shows in the Dewey barn. George was impres- sario, director, prompter, business and stage manager and usually star of the performances. The same kind sister was at his service there as elsewhere, though she did not enjoy participating in the shows. On one occasion, however, she relates, the ten-year-old leading lady was missing and George drew her into service as an understudy to play the part at a moment's notice. To her protest that she did not know all the lines, he answered that that made no difference, as he would fire his pistol at any place where she stumbled and that would conceal her difficulty. The solution was a happy one. The audience was de- lighted at the interpolation, failing to discover the depth of the scheme, and the affair passed off without a hitch. Then the neighbors made a protest on the pistol feature of the play, and Dewey's father forbade further shows of the sort. The First Cruise of the Admiral. Among the stories related by his old friends at Montpelier is one of what has been known jocularly as the admiral's first cruise. Que 126 AXCESTKY AND CHILDHOOD OF &EORGE DEWEY. day when he was not more than eleven, says a writer in the Review of Reviews, he started out in his father's buggy, accompanied by his friend. Will Redfield, bent upon an overland trip of adventure — to drive the cows home, it has been said. But when they came to the Dog- river, which enters the Winooski some distance from the town, they found it higher than the oldest inhabitant ever had seen it, the ford impassable from recent rains. William prudently counseled turning back, but to this the future admiral would not listen. When Dewey went Ahead. "What man has done, man can do," he said, and went at the ford "four bells." Needless to say, he found no bottom; the superstructure of his frail craft, which in this case was the buggy body, went adrift and floated swiftly away toward Lake Champlain, while the admiral, serene as ever, and the thoroughly frightened William, clambered on board the horse and managed to land in safety. When the boy reached home, the doctor was away on a professional call, and an innate sense of strategy bade George go directly to bed, without waiting for supper. The father found him apparently asleep, but was not deceixrd, and immediately began to chide him for his rashness, when his son replied from the depths of the covers : "You ought to be thankful that my life wath thpared." When the School Teacher Whipped Dewey. When the time came for George Dewey to begin his school days, he was sent first to the Washington county grammar school in Montpelier. Like many another school it had a bad reputation for order and more than one teacher had been compelled to give up the effort to control the youngsters there. Young Dewey was not backward in the troubles. There seems no doubt that he was a "sassy," obstinate schoolboy and that he deserved the punishment that came to him at last. The person who "licked" him was a weak, undersized school teacher, weighing ninety pounds. This school teacher is now Major Z. K. Pang- born, editor of the Jersey City Journal, and this is the story he tells of how he took charge of the school, found it in a condition of chronic ANCESTRY AND CHILDHOOD OF GEORGE DEWEY. 127 revolt against authority, with Dewey as the ringleader, and of how he quelled the young rebels : "I took charge and for the first week there was no outbreak. George Dewey was one of the boldest and brightest of the younger lads, and above all things loved a fight. He was ever looking for trouble. He had the personal qualities of a leader, and while there was nothing you could call bad about him, he resented authority and evinced a sturdy determination not to submit to it unless it suited him. The Young Man Becomes Impudent. "The crisis arrived in this fashion. After the usual afternoon recess one Monday, Dewey did not return to the school room. I sent for him, but the messenger returned with the message that George had declared that he wasn't coming and that I might go to the devil. After school that day, George, who had climbed into the cupola of the old statehouse, amused himself by pelting the children with snowballs, and when I went out and commanded him to come down, he again advised me to go to the devil. "I was mad, and when I got home I spent the evening perfecting a plan of campaign for the next day. I first of all provided myself with a very substantial rawhide, and at a late hour that night took it to the school room and placed it over the ledge of the entrance door where it would be ready to my hand when I entered school next day. I also secured two or three round sticks of cord wood and placed them on top of the wood box in the school room where I could reach them easily. I then went to bed and slept like a baby, for I had resolved that when the rumpus started I would be the first to fire a broadside. "Dewey came to school the next day as if nothing had happened and took his place at his desk as demurely as any young miss of them all. His smile was both childlike and bland. I wasted no time in pre- liminaries, but as soon as the scholars were in their places, I summoned Dewey to the platform in a terrible voice. "He came with a sassy twinkle in his eyes, and seemed to survey my slender proportions with a contempt bordering on amusement. Then I began to talk. I summed up the head and front of his offending in a voice that brought ice to the window-panes, and wound up by saying that he must forthwith say he was sorry for having misbehaved him- 128 ANCESTRY AND CHILDHOOD OF GEORGE DEWEY. self, apologize both to me and to the school for what he had done and promise to be obedient and orderly in the future. I told him if he did not do this I should punish him then and there. A Defeat for the Puture Admiral. "Dewey laughed, and, if I remember aright, he once more invited me in quick, nervy sentences to go to the devil. The next instant, I and the rawhide were winding and tossing around Dewey like the fire of one of the warships that have made his name famous the world over. I was little and slender, but so also was the rawhide and the two of us so demoralized Dewey that almost before I was aware of it he was lying in a heap on the floor. He was bleeding from a wound in the hand, and whimpering as any boy would at receiving so tremendous a thrashing. He was conquered, while I glared over his prostrate form at the other rebellious spirits in the school. "For an instant they sat motionless, so extreme was their surprise. Then seven of them started up the defile formed by the row of desks, to have my blood. But I was ready for them. Seizing a stick of cord- wood from the firebox I dealt the first boy who crossed into my terri- tory a blow between the eyes that sent him to the floor with a crash. The others paused. " 'Sit down!' I roared, and down they all sat. "That ended the Dewey revolt." When quiet was restored, Mr. Pangborn told Dewey to go home, and the teacher went along, the rest of the pupils following. Dr. Dewey took culprit and dominie into his study and asked for the story, which was related. George took off his coat and showed the red stripes across his back. His father was a just man. He told the boy that he had no one to blame but himself for the punishment and that if it was not enough to teach him a lesson, another would be added to the one already given by Mr. Pangborn. There was no more trouble. Life in Johnson Academy. Young Dewey vvas too big-hearted to harbor resentment against the school-master who did not flinch from his duty, and they became great friends. A year later, when Mr. Pangborn went to the neighboring h Z o > w t-H. J W ou H Z O Q W O w O I— I Q < O W < ADMIRAL DEWEY'S WIFE (DECEASED) ADMIRAL DEWEY'S BROTHERS AND SISTER Hon. Charles Dewey. Mrs Mary P. (Dewey) Greeley. * Capt. Edward Dewey. RESIDENCE OF HON. CHARLES DEWEY, MONTPELIER, VT. AND NORWICH MILITARY SCHOOL, NORWICH, VT. George Dewey attended this school at the age of 17, and there formed the desire for military life which led him to enter the Naval Academy at Annapolis. ANCESTRY AND CHILDHOOD OF GEOEGE DEWEY. 133 town of Jolinson to establish an academy, George went there at his own request and entered the school. One of his old schoolmates at this academy tells the following story of an incident of those days: "Three or four of us, including George, used to go to school in company and we would meet daily a crowd of smaller boys on their way to the district school. They got into the habit of making it inter- esting for us whenever we met, by pelting us with snowballs and insult- ing remarks. Some of us were disposed to retaliate, but George would say, 'Oh, come along, boys. Never mind those little shavers.' "But the 'little shavers,' unable to appreciate such forbearance, seemed to imbibe the idea that we did not dare to attack them, on account of their superior numbers, so grew daily more annoying. One day an immense snowball hit George square on the side of his head, filling his ear with snow. "Handing me his books, in a twinkling he had caught the ringleader of our tormentors, and administered such a spanking as the chap would not forget in a hurry. If he is alive to-day he is probably proud of hav- ing been spanked by Dewey, though at the time he howled like mad. The crowd were so dazed at this sudden attack that they stood as if paralyzed, and George pushed several over into the snow, and scrubbed some faces cleaner than they were wont to be, I dare say, before the rest of the enemy gathered their wits enough to take to their heels. "'Father once told me,' said George, as he brushed off the snow and took his books again, 'never to fight unless I was obliged to. But if you have to fight, fight in earnest!' he said. "We had no further trouble with the district school boys that winter. The lesson Dewey gave them was as effectual, in its way, as the lessons he has given some boys of larger growth, at Manila." Planning to Enter the Navy. In 1852, when George Dewey was seventeen years of age, he went to the Norwich military school at Norwich, Vermont. It was there that he formed his admiration for military life and a wish to enter the Naval Academy at Annapolis. His father did not think much of sailors and said so with the utmost frankness, but he was unwilling to thwart the wish of his son and so consented. When Dewey mentioned the plan to one of his schoolmates, a boy named Spalding, he found that the 134 ANCESTRY AND CHILDHOOD OF GEORGE DEWEY. latter had a like ambition. Senator Foote of Vermont made the choice, giving Spalding the appointment and naming Dewey as the alternate. Then Spalding's mother interfered and vetoed the plan of her son, who consequently was withdrawn from competition. By such a narrow margin did the future admiral get into the navy at that time. His companion, finishing college, entered the ministry and now is the Rev. George B. Spalding of Syracuse, New York. He preached a war sermon from his pulpit after his old schoolmate's great victory. Montpelier Proud of Dewey. . With his departure from Montpelier to enter the Naval Academy, young Dewey's actual residence in that town was at an end. His two brothers still live there, the Hon. Charles Dewey, president of the insurance company which his father founded, and Mr. Edward Dewey, a director of the same company. The townspeople, however, never have lost sight of his career nor have they failed in pride at his success. When the news of his great victory came to that little city in Vermont, there was a celebration which in heartiness could not be excelled any- where, however much it may have been outdone in volume. The streets were illuminated, the buildings decorated with flags, and the people rejoiced in public meetings and in their homes that their distinguished former fellow townsman had gained such merited honor for himself in doing such noble service for his country. CHAPTER VII. GEORGE DEWEY IN THE CIVIL WAR. Pour Years in the Naval Academy at Annapolis — Incidents of Cadet Life — A Cruise on the European Station — Rapid Promotion for the Young OflQcer — Outbreak of the Rebellion — Executive OflScer of the "Missis- sippi" — Bravery of Dewey When His Vessel Was Destroyed — Men- tioned in Official Reports — Service With Parragut — At the Taking of Fort Pisher— What Admiral Porter Thought— The End of the War. There has been no period in the career of George Dewey in which he has failed to make his mark. As a boy in Vermont, just as it was in Manila bay, he was distinctly ready for any emergency. So it was dur- ing the intervening years. At the Annapolis Naval Academy he made a distinct impress by his clear individuality, and prepared the way for the distinctions he won in the war between the states. Dewey entered the naval academy in 1854 at the age of seventeen. His active, energetic life had brought him strength, endurance and me- dium height. He needed not to retire before any of his classmates in out- door exercises. By this time the line was clearly defined in the Naval Academy at Annapolis between boys of the North and of the South, just as it was at the Military Academy at West Point. Young Dewey was prompt to let his position be understood, and equally prompt about getting into trouble; The Southern faction discovered in him an uncompromising spirit, and a concerted effort was made to provoke a quarrel. The effort was successful beyond contemplation. Dewey accepted the appel- lation of "Yankee" without a word, for he was proud of it, but "dough face" failed to appeal to him, and other things more galling followed. George Dewey Challenged to a Duel. Finally the Vermont cadet waited one day for his tormentor as he was coming from the mess-room, knocked him down, and punished him dexterously. Not long afterward an inkstand was thrown at his head 135 136 GEORGE DEWEY IN THE CIVIL WAR. in the reading-room and another decisive victory for the "Yankee" followed fast. Hot Southern blood, however, was not willing to drop the matter at that point. The antagonist sent a challenge to Dewey, suggesting that he would prefer pistols at close range and that the duel must be to the death. The challenge was accepted promptly, principals and seconds were at the designated place of meeting, and they had actually paced off the distance and were ready to place the boys in position when some of their classmates, in alarm, informed the officers of the academy, who interfered in haste. These quarrels passed, the breaches were healed, and even in the times of partisan heat before the war Dewey became one of the most popular members of the class. What the Naval Academy Did for Dewey. When the Naval Academy class of 1858 was graduated fourteen re- ceived diplomas out of sixty-five boys who had begun the course to- gether. Of the fourteen, George Dewey, then not twenty-one years old, stood fifth in rank. He had not proved himself an exceptional student, but in seamanship and other technical branches he excelled. Although the school had been organized officially less than ten years when he entered it, and under its improved form less than five, its curriculum was excellent and the midshipmen of that day were taught not only how to hand, reef and steer, but also the higher branches of mathe- matics, the modern languages and, of course, gunnery and navigation. The student was required to stand upon his own merits. No favoritism was shown and no one but himself was to blame if he could not pass. Discipline was rigid. A high sense of honor was inculcated. It is no surprise that such men as Dewey come out of such ancestry and such environment. First Cruise After Graduation. The young midshipman's first cruise after graduation was aboard the old steam frigate "Wabash," under the command of Captain Barron of Virginia, who afterwards went with his state in the war and served in the Confederate navy. The "Wabash" was on the European station, most of the time in the Mediterranean, and Dewey saw those southern shores to good advantage. He made a visit to Jerusalem, cutting there GEORGE DEWEY IN THE CIVIL WAR. 137 an olive-wood cane, which he sent to his grandfather in Vermont. It is related that the old gentleman died with that cane by his side, Ms last words being a message of affection to the grandson who had sent it to him. In 1860 Dewey returned to Annapolis for his final examination. The two years had been fruitful of valuable experience. This time he led his fellows, a standing which, combined with his former one, gave him a final rating of third in his class and the rank of Passed Midship- man. He obtained a furlough and journeyed to his home in Vermont to visit his father before beginning another cruise. A Period of Rapid Promotion. In February, 1861, he received his first commission. Owing to the resignation of many Southern officers he was promoted to the grade of Master, a title no longer in use, corresponding to that of a lieutenant of the junior grade in the modern navy. Resting here in the old home- stead at Montpelier, the news came to him that civil war had begun. His furlough was at an end. Six days after Fort Sumter was fired on, April 18, 1861, Dewey received his commission as lieutenant and was assigned to duty aboard the "Mississippi," then lying in Boston harbor, a steamer of twelve guns, commanded by Captain Melancton Smith. In the organization of the United States Navy for the Civil War she was made a part of the West Gulf Blockading Squadron, under command of Captain David G. Farragut, and on January 20, 1862, the fleet sailed for the Gulf of Mexico, for the purpose of capturing the Confederate stronghold, the City of New Orleans. The first act of Flag-officer Farragut upon reaching the mouth of the Mississippi river was to dispatch his chief-of-staff. Captain Bell, up the river with two gunboats on a scouting expedition. After a careful study of the enemy's position, Captain Bell reported that the approach to the city was strongly fortified and that a dangerous and difficult undertak- ing was before them. The Defenses of New Orleans. The United States government had in former years erected two forts about thirty miles above the head of the passes— Jackson on the right 138 G-EOBGE DEWEY IN THE CIVIL WAR. or south bank, and St. Philip a little further up the stream on the left- Fort St. Philip was originally built by the Spaniards, but was remodeled and repaired by our government in 1812-15, and again in 1841 and fol- lowing years. Fort Jackson, the more formidable of the two, was built in 1824-32. The Confederate government took possession of these forts immediately after the commencement of the war and put them in thor- ough repair. When the Federal fleet arrived they found that a Confed- erate squadron of fifteen vessels, under Commodore J. K. Mitchell, was gathered just above the forts, and along the river banks were ranged 200 shai'pshooters to give the forts warning of the Federal's movements, and pick off men whenever opportunity offered. Large hulks were moored in line across the river, with heavy chains extending from one to the other. Eafts of logs were also used, and the passage between the forts was entirely closed. Facing a Difficult Task. The task that lay before Farragut and his fleet was to break through these obstructions, pass up the channel of the river between the forts, conquer the Confederate fleet, steam up to New Orleans, and demand the surrender of the city. Great difficulty was experienced in the very first step of the work in getting some of the bolats through the passes. In fact, the "Colorado," which drew twenty-two feet of water, could not be taken in at all, as there was but fifteen feet on the bar, and the "Mis- sissippi," after being lightened in every possible manner, was dragged over by tug-boats through a foot of mud. On the afternoon of April 17, the mortar-boats were placed in posi- tion and opened fire on the forts. The bombardment continued with little interruption for six days, when Farragut decided that the condi- tion of affairs warranted an attempt to pass the forts. According to sig- nal, on the morning of April 24, at 2 o'clock, the Federal fleet got under way. The enemy opened fire as soon as the head of the column of ad- vancing vessels came within range, but one by one they ran the gauntlet. Confederate Resistance to the Assault. Above the forts the Confederate gunboats were massed, and they brought a rapid and heavy fire to bear upon the attacking fleet, but they GEOaaE DEWEY IN THE CIVIL WAR. 139 being overmatched were easily disposed of. One hour and ten minutes after weighing anchor the vessels had passed the forts and Farragut was on his way to New Orleans. As the fleet was nearing quarantine, some distance above the fort^ the "Manassas," an iron-clad ram in the Confederate service was seen coming up the river in pursuit. Captain Smith was ordered to turn the "Mississippi" and run her down. The order was instantly obeyed, and the "Mississippi" started at full speed. It seemed certain that the ram would be annihilated by the shock of the contact, but when the "Mississippi" was within fifty yards of her she suddenly shifted her helm and dodged the blow. However, the man- euver resulted in disaster in another form, for she ran ashore, where Captain Smith's gunners poured two broadsides into her and sent her drifting down the river, a total wreck. Thus was accomplished one of the greatest feats in the history of naval warfare. Farragut started with seventeen wooden vessels against the swift current of a stream but little more than half a mile wide, be- tween two powerful earthworks that had been prepared for his coming, his course impeded by burning rafts, and meeting the enemy's fleet of fifteen vessels, two of them iron-clad, he either captured or destroyed them all. And all this with the actual loss of but one of his own squad- ron. Preparing to Attack New Orleans. On the morning of April 25, the fleet arrived at a point less than three miles below the City of New Orleans. Here was Jackson's old bat- tle-ground of January 8, 1815, and here Farragut's right-of-way was dis- puted by the Chalmette batteries. These works — on both sides of the riyer — mounted twenty heavy guns, and were prepared to receive the approaching vessels. However, they were silenced in short order, and at last the City of the Crescent was fairly under Federal guns. The haven had been reached at a cost to the fleet of thirty-seven men killed and 147 wounded. From this point resistance ceased, and about noon the fleet anchored off the city, which the retreat of the Confederate forces under General Lovell had left defenseless in the hands of the civil authorities. Meanwhile Lieutenant-Commander John Gurst had been sent to Fort Jackson under a flag of truce, to demand from its commander the im- mediate surrender of the forts and the remnants of the Confederate navy 140 GEORGE DEWEY IN THE CIVIL WAR. at that place. General Duncan, the commanding officer, refused to com- ply with the demand, whereupon Commander Porter opened a rapid mortar-fire upon Fort Jackson. This caused a mutiny among the garrison, who refused to be longer the targets of the conqueror's guns, and many deserted from the works and retreated up the xiver out of range. Finally, realizing that further resistance was worse than use- less, the Confederate general signified his willingness to surrender, and on the 29th the capitulation was signed. A Daring Visit to New Orleans. Immediately after reaching New Orleans Farragut sent Captain Bailey and Lieutenant Perkins on shore to demand from the mayor the surrender of the city. These two officers went on their perilous service without an escort, and passed through a crowd of vagabonds, thieves, ragpickers and all the inhabitants of the slums, paying no attention to the threats of the howling mob, but walking as steadily as if they had a regiment of soldiers at their backs. They reached the mayor's home, and were shown into his presence. "We have come," said Captain Bailey, "to demand the surrender of New Orleans. The state flag must be hauled down from the public buildings, and the United States flag must be hoisted there." "You have the power in your own hands," the mayor replied, "and can do as you please, but I doubt if there is a man in New Orleans who would haul down that flag without being assassinated on the spot." The officers returned to the flagship and reported the result of their mission. Soon after their return. Captain Charles H. Bell, with a guard of marines and two boat howitzers loaded with grape and cannister were landed, with instructions to pull down the Confederate flags and restore the Stars and Stripes to their accustomed places. The same mob met the marines at the levee, but gave way before them, and they marched to the state-house and to the custom-house, where Old Glory was flung to the breeze, amid the cheers of the boys in blue who were watching from the ships. Dewey's Service on the Mississippi. A few days afterward the steamers of the mortar flotilla towed the transports with Major-General Butler's army on board to New Orleans, DEWEY'S FIRST CRUISE When his father began to chide him for his rashness he replied, "You ought to be thankful that my life was spared." DEWEY SAVING THE LIFE OF A SAILOR AND THE EXPLOSION ON THE MISSISSIPPI GEORGE DEWEY IN THE CIVIL WAR 143 and under the guns of Farragut's squadron tlie troops landed, and order was re-established in the city. For several months the "Mississippi," in conjunction with other ves- sels of the fleet, patroled the river between New Orleans and Vicks- burg, frequently ascending the bayous, and doing good work for the Federal cause. Lieutenant Dewey was still second in rank aboard the "Mississippi," a favorite of the admiral, even then showing himself to be a man, not only of great personal bravery but of remarkable executive ability as well. From January, 1863, the "Mississippi" was employed in assisting General Banks to force his way into the interior of Louisiana, and bring- ing all of the country that could be secured under subjection. This was a difficult tas'k, for the enemy opposed the Federal forces at every step with a courage and determination very difficult to overcome. In March it was decided by Rear-Admiral Farragut and General Banks that the former should move with his fleet past Port Hudson, which was at that time well fortified with nineteen heavy guns bearing on the water approaches. General Banks was to make a diversion with his army against the forts, and the mortar flotilla was to open on the bat- teries prior to and during the passage of the fleet. Movement Against Port Hudson. Farragut brought with him from New Orleans for the purpose of passing Port Hudson the following vessels: Hartford, Captain J. S. Palmer 28 guns Richmond, Commander James Alden 25 " Monongahela, Captain J. P. McKinstry 11 " Mississippi, Captain Melancton Smith 19 " Essex, Commander O. H. B. Caldwell 7 " Albatross, Lieutenant-Commander J. E. Hart 7 " Genesee, Commander W. H. Macomb 8 " Kineo, Lieutenant-Commander John Waters 6 " Sachem, Lieutenant Amos Johnston 5 " Five mortar schooners ^ Total 121 guns The first four were sloops-of-war, the "Essex" a river iron-clad, the Other four were gunboats. The order of battle prescribed that each of 144 G-EOBGE DEWEY IN THE CIVIL WAR. the larger vessels — except the "Mississippi," which was a side-wheeler — should take a gunboat firmly lashed on the port side, away from the batteries, and that they should proceed up the river in the order named above, the Hartford in the lead. The mortar-boats were anchored near the east bank, about a mile below the batteries. The captains were reminded that the object of the movement was to pass the batteries with the least possible damage to their vessels, so as to secure as efficient a force as possible for patroling the river above. Desperate Night Engagement. At 9 o'clock, on the night of March 14, the signal was made for the ships to get into line, and as soon as this was accomplished the Hartford slowly steamed ahead. At 11 :20 p. m. two rockets were fired on the east bank, and almost immediately. the batteries opened fire. The fleet and the mortar-boats quickly answei'ed and for more than an hour the noise of 150 guns firing as rapidly as possible was incessant. The enemy built bonfires at different points, to perfect their aim, and these added to the illumination and enhanced the grandeur of the scene. The "Hartford" passed within one hundred yards of the muzzles of the enemy's guns, delivering an effective fire as she steamed up the river. The "Richmond," with the "Genesee'' as her consort, reached the last battery in safety, and was about to pass when a shot carried away the safety valves of her boilers and allowed so much steam to escape into her fire-room that she was entirely deprived of her motive power. Her consort was not able to drag both vessels against the current of the stream, and they were allowed to float down again below the forts, where they were anchored. The "Monongahela" and "Kineo," the next in line, also met with dis- aster. The firing from the "Hartford" and "Richmond" had by this time so filled the air with smoke that it was impossible to distinguish objects near by, and the pilots were completely at sea. At 11:30 the "Monongahela" grounded on the west shore of the river and was ex- posed to severe fire for nearly a half an hour. Her consort finally suc- ceeded in pulling her off, and she in turn drifted down the stream and anchored beside the "Richmond." aEOBGE DEWEY IN THE CIVIL WAR. 145 Loss of the " Mississippi." The "Mississippi" followed in the wake of the "Monongahela," tiring wherever her guns could be brought to bear. At 12:30 a. m. she grounded hard and fast, and it was found necessary to abandon her. Her engines were destroyed, small arms thrown overboard, the sick and wounded landed on the shore, and fires kindled in several parts of the ship. When these were well under way the captain left the ship, and with his crew in open boats went past the batteries to the fleet below. The task of getting the men to safety devolved on Lieutenant Dewey. Twice he went to the "Richmond" and twice came back, until at last he and Captain Smith stood alone on the deck. "Are you sure she will burn, Dewey?" the captain asked as he paused at the gangway. DeT^ey risked his life to go to the ward-room for a last look, and to- gether they left the ship, sorrowfully, with the shot splashing all around them. Captain Smith's report of the catastrophe was in part as follows: "Our approach was signalled by the rebels on the west bank of the river, and at 11 o'clock p. m. the batteries opened fire upon the flagship. At this time the 'Essex' engaged the lower batteries, the bomb-vessels com- menced shelling, the flagship opened flre, and the engagement became general as the vessels came in range. At 11:30 p. m. the 'Richmond' passed down the river and owing to the darkness and smoke was for some time taken for an enemy by the crew of the 'Mississippi,' who were with difllculty kept from firing into her. When the "Mississippi" Grounded. "The 'Monongahela,' which was the one next ahead, could not at this time be seen. Supposing that she had increased her speed, the order was given to 'go ahead fast,' that we might close up. We had now reached the last and most formidable batteries, and were congratulating ourselves upon having gained the turn, when the 'Mississippi' grounded and heeled over three streaks to port. The engine was immediately reversed and the port guns (which had not been fired) were run in, to bring her on an even keel ; after which her own fire from the starboard 146 GEORGE DEWEY IN THE CIVIL WAR. battery was recommenced. Tlie engine was backed for thirty-fiTe min- utes, and the steam was increased from 13 to 25 pounds, which was con- sidered by the chief engineer the greatest pressure the boilers would bear, when the pilot stated that it would be impossible to get the vessel off. I then ordered the port battery to be spiked, and the pivot-gun to be thrown overboard; but the latter was not accomplished before I deemed it most judicious and humane to abandon the vessel, as the enemy had obtained our range and we were exposed to the galling and cross-fire of three batteries, their shot hulling us frequently. Abandoning the Wrecked Vessel. "The sick and wounded were now ordered up, at which time we ceased firing, and three small boats (all we had) were immediately em- ployed in landing the crew, while preparations were being made to destroy the vessel. Up to this time the men had been working the guns in the most splendid style, and aiming at every flash, which was the only guide to the location of the rebel works. It was by no means certain that the officers and crew would not, even after landing, fall into the hands of the enemy, as musketry had been fired from the west shore on our passage up ; but, as this was of less consequence than the capture of the ship, the crew were directed to throw overboard all the small arms, the engineers ordered to destroy the engine, and the ship set on fire in the forward store-room. To be positive that this was effectually done, the yeoman was sent below to make an examination, when three shots entered the store-room, letting in the water and extinguishing the fiames. She was then fired in four different places aft between the decks; and, when the combustion had made sufficient progress to ren- der her destruction certain, I left the ship, accompanied by the first lieu- tenant, all having now been landed, and passed down to the 'Richmond' under the fire of the rebel batteries. High Praise for Lieutenant Dewey. "At 3 o'clock a. m. the 'Mississippi' was observed to be afloat and drifting slowly down the river, and at half past five she blew up, pro- ducing an awful concussion, which was felt for miles around. "I consider that I should be neglecting a most important duty should I omit to mention the coolness of my executive officer, Mr. Dewey, and aEORGE DEWEY IN THE CIVIL WAR. 147 the steady, fearless and gallant manner in which the officers and men of the 'Mississippi' defended her, and the orderly and quiet manner in which she was abandoned after being thirty-five minutes aground under the fire of the enemy's batteries." Dewey is next found in the capacity of first lieutenant of a gunboat used by the admiral as a dispatch boat. This established closer relations between the two men^ and Farragut formed a sincere regard for the young lieutenant. The Confederates had a trick of suddenly appearing on the high banks of the river with a field piece, firing point blank at any boat that might be within range, and disappearing as quickly as they came. Upon one of these occasions a shot came within a hair's- breadth of Dewey, and involuntarily he jumped aside trying to escape it. The admiral happened to be near at the time, and said : "Why don't you stand firm, lieutenant? Don't you know you can't jump quick enough?" When Admiral Farragut Dodged a Shot. Soon afterward Farragut dodged a shot under similar circum- stances. The lieutenant smiled but held his tongue. But the admiral had a guilty conscience. He cleared his throat, shifted his position and finally said: "Why, sir, you can't help it, sir. It's human nature, and there's an end to it!" Dewey was afterwards given the command of the "Monongahela," a post made vacant by the death of her commander, Abner Reed, who was killed by a rifie-shell fired from the batteries a few miles below Donald- sonville, La. This appointment was only temporary, however, as the lieutenant was shortly afterwards transferred to the steam gunboat "Agawam," which was attached to the North Atlantic Blockading Squadron. At the time of the two attacks on Fort Fisher he was first lieutenant of the "Colorado," Commodore Henry Knox Thatcher commanding. Operations Against Fort Fisher. At the entrance of Cape Fear River, North Carolina, the Confederates had erected a huge fortification, which was called Fort Fisher, and here the principal operations of the blockade runners were carried on, supply- ing the Southern armies with clothing, food, arms and munitions of war. 148 GEORGE DEWEY IN THE CIVIL WAR. It finally became evident to the United States Navy Department that unless these supplies were cut off the war would necessarily be greatly prolonged. The Secretary of the Navy made an application to the War Department, in September, 1864, for troops to co-operate with the navy in an attack on the Cape Fear River defenses, and being encouraged to expect assistance, began to assemble a proper force of vessels for the occasion. The command of the squadron was tendered to Eear-Admiral Farragut, but on account of failing health the offer was declined, and Rear- Admiral Porter was detached from the Mississippi squadron and assigned to the enviable position. By the 15th of October about one hundred ships of war were assem- bled at Hampton Roads. Many of them were from other squadrons, which had been depleted for the occasion; There was a great variety of vessels, as every class in the navy was represented, from the lofty frigate down to the fragile steamer taken from the merchant service; but all mounted good guns. Then came a delay in the attack, caused by the fact that the army co-operation which was so necessary to the success of the plan was not forthcoming at the time it had been promised. First Naval Attack on the Fortress. After a tedious delay of over tAvo months the forts were finally en- gaged by the fleet on December 24. During the heavy fire from the fleet an explosion took place within the main fort, and immediately flames Avere observed streaming high above the walls. The Federals were cer- tain that they had fired the barracks and other tenements connected with the forts. During the continuance of this blaze, which lasted for hours, not a gun was fired by the enemy, except from an isolated section of the fort called the "Mound Battery." The attack was resumed on the following day, and as the range was shorter the firing of the fleet was much more accurate. Commodore Thatcher in his official report of the siege says: "It is my belief that not a shot or shell Avas fired by the advanced line of ships that did not either penetrate the earthAvorks of the enemy or explode within them. On the first day, 1,5G9 projectiles were fired from the 'Colorado' into the fort. This ship ('Colorado') planted 230 shots into the enemy's works on the 25th, and exploded 990 shells." GEORGE DEWEY IN THE CIVIL WAR. 149 Admiral Porter was greatly disappointed in the support given him by the army in this affair, and claimed that had it been properly man- aged by General Butler, who was in command of the land forces, Fort Fisher could have been taken easily. Be that as it may, there can be no question regarding the good work done by the navy. Second Assault on Fort Fisher. About two weeks later a force of 8,000 men, under General Terry, was sent to assist the fleet in taking the fort. They were landed, on January 13, as fast as 120 boats could put them on shore. It was deter- mined before the army made its assault on the fort that there should be no guns within reach to impede its progress. At 9 a. m., on the 15th, the fleet was directed by signal to attack in three lines. The vessels all reached their stations about 11 a. m., and each opened fire when anchored. The fire was kept up furiously all day, and in the meantime the land forces were making a gallant struggle to carry the fort by storm. They chased the enemy from traverse to traverse until the Con- federates broke and fled in panic before them. Thus ended a battle in which the Confederates lost one of their safest strongholds, besides 1,800 men taken prisoners and 700 killed and wounded. Dewey Scores Another Triumph. Towards the end of this fight Admiral Porter signaled to Commo- dore Thatcher, of the "Colorado," to close in and silence a certain part of the works. The ship had already been struck several times by the shells of the enemy, and Dewey saw instantly the advantage to be gained by the move. "We shall be safer in there," he remarked, "and the works can be taken in fifteen minutes." The signal was obeyed and Dewey's prediction proved a correct one. When Admiral Porter came to congratulate Commodore Thatcher, the latter disclaimed any credit for the success of the maneuver, but gen- erously said : "You must thank Lieutenant Dewey, sir." Immediately after the Fort Fisher engagement Commodore Thatcher was named as acting rear-admiral, and a few weeks later was ordered to Mobile bay, where he relieved Farragut. He recommended Dewey for 150 GEORGE DEWEY IN THE GH'IL WAR. his fleet captaincy, but the department did not see fit to follow the sug- gestion. At the End of the War. However, March 3, 1865, his ability was recognized and his bravery rewarded by a commission as lieutenant-commander. Dewey thus reached in eleven years from the time he entered the academy a rank to attain which in time of peace frequently requires a service of thirty years. His association with Farragut, Porter, Thatcher, Smith and many other naval heroes of the times did much to give him a prac- tical knowledge of warfare on river and sea; and his natural ability, his fertility of resource, and his quickness of comprehension under try- ing circumstances, were qualities which he was then developing, and which brought him th-e praise of a world in after years. CHAPTER VIII. DEWEY FROM WAR TO WAR. When the Civil War Ended— On the European Station— Incidents of the Cruise — Marriage and Bereavement of Devi^ey — Service in Asiatic Waters — Successive Promotions — Shore Duty in Washington — Ordered to Command the Asiatic Squadron — The Thanks of the Nation — Presents and Honors — Dewey an Admiral. The qualities which Dewey demonstrated in the Civil War, and the reputation which he brought out of that conflict, gave him high standing in the estimation of his superior officers, and many creditable assign- ments fell to him in the years intervening before the next conflict in which he was to be engaged. Immediately following the war Lieutenant-Commander Dewey served for two years on the European station, first in the "Kearsarge," which had gained fame by sinking the Confederate cruiser "Alabama," and which was lost, thirty years later, on Roncador reef in the Caribbean sea. Next he was assigned to the frigate "Colorado," the flagship of the squadron, under command of Rear- Admiral Goldsborough. J. C. Wat- son, who was then a lieutenant-commander like Dewey, and who is now a rear-admiral, was one of Dewey's messmates in the same vessel. W. W. Stone, who was ship's writer on board the flagship, relates an inci- dent which involves not only the two lieutenant-commanders, but the admiral as well. An Irishman in this Story. Admiral Goldsborough's valet, John, who at one time had been a ser- vant of President Lincoln in the White House, was a witty but bungling Irishman. One morning the admiral sent word down to John that he wanted his glass, meaning, of course, his spyglass. John, as usual, how- ever, misunderstood, and came tramping up to the bridge with a goblet in his hand. "John, you're the devil's own valet," growled the admiral when he saw him coming. 151 152 DEWEY FROM WAR TO WAR. "Faith, sor, I didn't think I'd come to that same when I took service wid ye, sor." "Throw that blamed goblet overboard and go and get me my spy- glass as I told you, you infernal idiot." "Yes, sor," said John, calmly tossing the glass over the side. In doing so he narrowly escaped dashing it upon the upturned face of the executive officer, Lieutenant-Commander George Dewey. Mr. Dewey was on a tour of inspection, circling the frigate in one of the cutters. The "Colorado" had just arrived from Trieste. The passage down the Adriatic sea had been a stormy one, and the painstaking executive offi- cer of the vessel wanted to see for himself how the old ship looked after her battle with the waves. Dewey Wants to Know About It. "It was a lovely spring Sunday morning," says the narrator. "We had dropped anchor in the beautiful bay of Naples, and I had crept up into the mizzentopto drink in with boyish zest the delights of our glor- ious surroundings. Off our beam lay Ischia and Capri, standing like stern Koman sentinels on guard, at the horns of the bay. Ahead lay old Vesuvius, from whose grim apex I could see floating upward a hazy wreath, significant of the unrest beneath. I watched the old admiral with a great deal of interest. Had I been a kodak fiend I should then and there have forfeited my appointment by taking a snap shot at the irate officer as he glared at the sleek, unconcerned menial. " 'Go below, you blundering Irishman, before I have you tossed over after the glass.' The man disappeared with just the suspicion of a smirk on his innocent looking face. " 'Mr. Dewey would like to have you find out, sir, -who is heaving (Tockery over the side of the ship, sir,' one of the crew of the cutter said to Lieutenant-Commander John Crittenden Watson, at the time officer of the deck. The admiral overheard the message of the angry executive and laughed quietly. " 'Tell Mr. Dewey that it was the admiral, my man,' said he soberly; then, turning to Mr. Watson he remarked, 'He can't very well put th<' admiral in the brig, though I may deserve it.' ■• 'He may look around for a svibstitute, admiral,' answered Mr. Watson, smiling. DEWEY FROM WAR TO WAR. 153 " 'Oh, no, Dewey has too keen a sense of justice for that. Besides, I remember him saying once that he had no use for substitutes.' Dewey's Dignity Involved, "A few moments after this Mr. Dewey himself came over the star- board gangway, saluting the admiral with rather a haughty air. You see, a 32-pounder may spin merrily past a fellow's head aboard a man- o'-war and serve merely as a hook on which to hang the old time jest about a 'miss being as good as a mile,' but when a plain matter of fact, plebeian tumbler shoots past you, contrary to the articles of war and in direct violation of established naval etiquette, the circumstance that you have escaped mutilation is only an excrescence alongside of the glar- ing fact that your dignity has been very violently assaulted. "The admiral looked down and took in the situation. Descending to the quarter deck, he approached Dewey and said with a friendly air, 'I say, Dewey, did you ever read Handy Andy?' " 'Yes, sir,' rather shortly. " 'Well, now, I must have his cousin aboard.' And the admiral re- lated the glass incident. The two laughed over the blunder, Mr. Dewey having recovered his usual good nature by this time. When John Served President Lincoln. " 'You see, Dewey, I have a sort of interest in the fellow. The secre- tary recommended him to me as a good, faithful serving man. He had been attached to Mr. Lincoln as his personal attendant, and I took the scamp partly on that account. Ah, here he comes at last with my glass! John, did Mr. Lincoln ever score you for your awkwardness?' " 'No, sor, he never did. Many the time he tould me that it wor a mercy that we were tegither, because, said he, his mind wor taken off affairs of state by thinkin' did he wurruk harder tellin' me how to do things than if he wint and did them himself.' "'Doubtless, doubtless,' said the admiral, laughing. " 'I Avant you to remember, John,' said Mr. Dewey severely, 'that it is strictly against the rules of this ship to throw anything over the sides. You came very near striking me in the head with your glass tossing.-' " 'That wor a pity, sor.' 154 DEWEY PROM WAR TO WAR. "'A pity!' exclaimed Dewey savagely. 'By Jim, I'd have come up and had you put in double irons.' " 'No, sor, axin' yer pardon, I hope not.' " 'What's that?' roared the future admiral angrily. " 'Troth, sor, d'ye mind the mornin' tellin' me that ye wor to do the thinkin' an' I wor to obey orders, even if I bruk owners?' "The two laughed heartily at this hit, and John went below with colors flying." George Dewey Meets His Present Wife. Returning to the United States, Dewey was sent to duty at the Kittery Navy Yard, just across the river from Portsmouth, New Hamp- shire. He was a handsome and popular fellow, and a welcome visitor in the homes of the citizens of Portsmouth. Here it was that he met the young woman who became his wife, whose death a few years later Avas the greatest grief that has come into his life. Ichabod Goodwin of Portsmouth was the war governor of the state and to this day is spoken of as "Fighting Governor Goodwin." It was the daughter of the governor who became Mrs. Dewey. Governor Goodwin was himself a popular hero of the times. He had been one of the most loyal and ener- getic of the supporters of the Union during the days of strife and his favor was ready for any worthy man who had served his country. Dewey Has a Rival. Town gossip named two gallant naval officers as rivals for the hand of pretty Miss Susie Goodwin. One was young Dewey and the other Commander S. C. Ehind. The latter was nearly twenty years the older of the two and of equally worthy service. He it was who took the powder- boat "Louisiana" almost to the walls of Fort Fisher, a deed of daring equal to that of Gushing with the "Albemarle." He had commanded the "Agawam," on which Dewey himself served for a short time during the war. But the young woman chose the young man, and Rhind sailed away, to become a rear-admiral in 1883, fifteen years before Dewey's great victory. Nowadays the people of Portsmouth recall that the odds were against the older and more dignified officer because, in addition to the great favor which the young lieutenant had won in the eyes of the DEWEY PEOM WAR TO WAR. 155 young woman, there was the aid which was thrown into the balance by her father, the "Fighting Governor." "George is sOrt of reckless sometimes," the old gentleman once re- marked, "but hang me if I can help liking him. He's honest and full of grit, and he'll be heard from one of these days." Domestic AflFairs and Promotion. Lieutenant-Cbmmander Dewey and Miss Susie Goodwin were mar- ried October 24th, 1867, and following the wedding a reception was held in the fine old Goodwin homestead, which is still standing on one of the quiet, elm-shaded streets of Portsmouth, occupied by members of the Goodwin family. In 1868 and 1869 Dewey was detailed for service at the Annapolis Naval Academy as an instructor, and at the end of that duty he obtained command of the "Narragansett," which was nearly all the time on special service of various sorts for five years. His commission as "com- mander" came on April 13, 1872. It seemed a promising, happy year of his life. A son was born on December 23, but the young mother lived but one week after that date. The child was christened George Goodwin Dewey. The father was never re-married. George Goodwin Dewey was graduated from Princeton College in June, 1898, and since that time he has been in the office of Joy, Langdon & Co., commission merchants, of New York City. Commander Dewey's service in the "Narragansett" included an in- spection of torpedo stations and then some years in making surveys of the I'aciflc coast. In 1876 he was made a lighthouse inspector, perform- ing the duties attached to such a post for two years, after which he be- came secretary of the lighthouse board, a position which he filled for more than four years. First Service in Asiatic Waters. Dewey's first service in Asiatic waters was in 1882, when he was assigned to the command of the "Juniata," on the Asiatic station. The events of 1898 proved that he used the two years allotted to him in the Orient at that time to good advantage by learning all that he could of the people and the ports of the West Pacific. 156 DEWEY FROM WAR TO WAR. When the four vessels which formed the original "White Squadron" were completed, the smallest of them, the "Dolphin," was placed under the command of Dewey and he was given his commission as captain September 27, 1884. A writer in a recent magazine relates an incident as having happened while Dewey commanded the "Dolphin," which cer- tainly never occurred, but which nevertheless reads well. "It was in New York harbor," he says, "while in the 'Dolphin,' that Captain Dewey showed how thoroughly he knew the vagaries of human nature as well as the principles of good discipline. Perhaps he bore in mind some lesson inculcated in early youth by a wise father. At any rate, the admiral has always been noted for his ability to deal with 'Jack.' The 'Jack' in question was a paymaster's yeoman, or something of the kind, and he refused to obey an order of the first lieutenant, be- cause, he said, it was outside the line of his duty. The lieutenant, after vainly remonstrating with him, reported the matter to Captain Dewey, who sauntered out on deck and looked his man through and through, which made the yeoman exceedingly uncomfortable. Nevertheless, he remained stubborn. "'What,' said the captain, 'you refuse! Do you know that that is mutiny? When you entered the service you swore to obey your superior officers.' "The man was silent and made no move, whereupon the captain very quietly told the corporal to call the guard, stood the obdurate yeoman on the far side of the deck, and bade the marines load. Then he took out his watch. " 'Now, my man,' said he, 'you have just five minutes in which to obey that order,' and began to call the minutes. At the fourth count the yeoman moved off with considerable alacrity, and has since been one of the strongest opponents of the policy of tampering with 'the old man,' as the admiral has been for some time affectionately called in the fore- castle." Commanding the Flagship in Europe. In 1885, Captain Dewey was placed in command of the "Pensacola," the flagship of the European squadron, remaining on that station for three years. In this time he visited all the principal European ports, and gained familiarity with many of the European naval conditions, officers and fleets. DEWEY FEOM WAR TO WAR. 157 A blue-jacket who made a cruise with him tells this characteristic story iu the Xew York Sun: "We hadn't been to sea with him long before we got next to how he despised a liar. One of the petty officers went ashore at Gibraltar, got mixed up with the soldiers in the canteens on the hill, and came off to the ship paralyzed. He went before the captain at the mast the next morn- ing. He gave Dewey the 'two-beers and sun-struck' yarn. Dewey Has No Patience With. Lying. " 'You're lying, my man,' said Dewey. 'You were very drunk. I my- self heard you aft in my cabin. I will not have my men lie to me. I don't expect to find total abstinence in a man-o'-war crew. But I do expect them to tell me the truth and I am going to have them tell me the truth. Had you told me candidly that you took a drop too much on your liberty, you'd have been .forward by thi^ time, for you, at least, re- turned to the ship. For lying you get ten days in irons. Let me have the truth hereafter. I am told you are a good seaman. A good seaman has no business lying.' "After that there were few men aboard who didn't throw themselves on the mercy of the court when they waltzed up to the stick before Dewey, and none of us ever lost anything by it. He had to punish, us in accordance with the regulations, but he had a great way of order- ing the release of men he had to sentence to the brig before their time was half worked out." In 1889, Captain Dewey was made chief of the Bureau of Equip- ment and Recruiting, with rank of commodore. Four years later he was made a member of the Lighthouse Board, of which he had been secretary in 1877. In 1896 he got his commission as commodore and was made president of the Board of Inspection and Survey. This is the place that he held when ordered to sea duty in the late fall of 1897, with in- structions to assume command of the Asiatic station, where he hoisted his flag on the Olympia on January 3, 1898. Sent to Command the Asiatic Squadron. It is said that Admiral Dewey was reluctant to go to the station chosen for him. If it was to be peace, shore duty in Washington was 158 DEWEY FROM WAR TO WAR. quite as tempting as dull service in the Orient, If it was to be war with Spain, he regretted being sent so far from the probable field of action in the Atlantic. HoweTer, he made no protest. His friends felt, as he did, that his health would be improved by a return to sea duty. He noted the fact in conversation with friends when leaving New York that he was to be the first commodore in Asiatic waters since Perry, who opened Japan to the world. The remark was significant. He proved to be the right man for the place. Farewell Banquet to the Commoaore. Commodore Dewey's long residence in Washington made him a prominent figure in official and social circles there, and no officer in the navy is perhaps more widely or agreeably known than he. On his de- parture for Y'okohama last November, a dinner was given for him at the Metropolitan club, at which the following verses — ^then scarcely ap- preciated at, perhaps, their true prophetic worthy— were read by Colonel Archibald Hopkins: Fill all your glasses full to-night; The wind is off the shore. And, be it feast or be it fight. We pledge the commodore. Through days of storm, through days of calm, On board Pacific seas, At anchor off the Isles of Palm, Or with the Japanese, Ashore, afloat, on deck, below, Or where our bulldogs roar, To back a friend or beat a foe, We pledge the commodore. We know our honor'll be unstained, Where'er his pennant flies; Our right respected and maintained, Whatever power defies. "GEORGE DEWEY WAS THE LAST MAN TO LEAVE THE BURNING MISSISSIPPI" m-mnAsM ^m^^mSMmml^ AN INTERESTING MONUMENT This monument is standing in the old cemetery at Westfield, Mass., and was erected in 1690 to the memory of the first Dewey born on American soil. DEWEY FROM WAR TO WAR. 161 And when lie takes the homeward tack Beneath an admiral's flag, We'll hail the day and bring him back, And have another jag. Colonel Hopkins afterwards added this postscript to his toast: Along the far Philippine coast. Where flew the flag of Spain, Our commodore to-day can boast 'Twill never fly again. And up from all our hills and vales, From city, town and shore, A mighty shout the welkin hails: ''Well done, brave commodore! "Now, let your admiral's j)ennant fly; You've won it like a man Where heroes love to fight and die — Right in the battle's van." What McKinley Said About Dewey. When the victory of Manila bay fully dawned upon the minds of the American people, there was a unanimous call from press and pulpit for some prompt and official recognition for George Dewey and his gal- lant associates. President McKinley responded to this popular feeling with the following message to Congress : To the Congress of the United States: On the 24th of April I directed the Secretary of the Navy to tele- graph orders to Commodore George Dewey, of the United States Navy, commanding the Asiatic squadron, then lying in the port of Hong Kong, to proceed forthwith to the Philippine Islands, there to begin operations and engage the assembled Spanish fleet. Promptly obeying that order, the United States squadron, consist- ing of the flagship Olympia, the Baltimore, the Ealeigh, the Boston, 162 DEWEY FROM WAE TO WAE. the Concord and the Petrel, with the revenue cutter McCulloch as an auxiliary dispatch boat, entered the harbor of Manila at daybreak on the 1st of May and immediately engaged the entire Spanish fleet of eleven ships, which were under the protection of the fire of the land forts. After a stubborn fight, in which the enemy suffered great loss, these vessels were destroyed or completely disabled, and the water bat- tery of Cavite silenced. Of our brave officers and men not one was lost, and only eight injured, and those slightly. All of our ships escaped any serious damage. By the 4th of May Commodore Dewey had taken possession of the naval station at Cavite, destroying the fortifications there and at the entrance of the bay and parolling their garrisons. The waters of the bay are under his complete control. He has established hospitals within the American lines, where 250 of the Spanish sick and wounded are assisted and protected. The magnitude of this victory can hardly be measured by the or- dinary standards of naval warfare. Outweighing any material advan- tage is the moral effect of this initial success. At this unsurpassed achievement the great heart of our Nation throbs, not with boasting nor with greed of conquest, but with deep gratitude that this triumph has com6 in a just cause, and that by the grace of God an effective step has thus been taken toward the attainment of the wished-for peace. To those whose skill, courage and devotion have won the fight, to the gal- lant commander and the brave officers and men who aided him, our country owes an incalculable debt. Feeling as our people feel and speaking in their name, I at once sent a message to Commodore Dewey, thanking him and his officers and men for their splendid achievement and overwhelming victory, and informing him that I had appointed him an acting rear-admiral. I now recommend that, following our National precedents and ex- pressing the fervent gratitude of every patriotic heart, the thanks of Congress be given Acting Rear- Admiral George Dewey, of the United States Navy, for highly distinguished conduct in conflict with the enemy, and to the officers and men under his command for their gallantry in the destruction of the enemy's fleet and the capture of the enemy's fortifica- tions in the bay of Manila. WILLIAM M'KINLEY. Executive Mansion, May 9, 1898. < DEWEY FROM WAR TO WAR. 163 Congress Thanks Dewey. The message was received by both Senate and House with marked enthusiasm, and, acting on the suggestion of the President, the follow- ing joint resolution was introduced and unanimously passed by a rising vote, every member standing : "Joint resolution tendering the thanks of Congress to Commodore George Dewey, U. S. N., and to the officers and men of the squadron under his command. "Kesolved, by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, that in pursuance of the recommendation of the President, made in accordance with the provis- ions of section 110 of the Eevised Statutes, the thanks of Congress and of the American people are hereby tendered to Commodore George Dewey, U. S. N., commander-in-chief of the Asiatic station, for highly distin- guished conduct in conflict with the enemy as displayed by him in the destruction of the Spanish fleet and batteries in the harbor of Manila, Philippine Islands, May 1, 1898. "Section 2. That the thanks of Congress and the American people are hereby extended through Commodore Dewey to the ofiicers and men under his command for the gallantry and skill exhibited by them on that occasion. "Section 3. Be it further resolved that the President of the United States be requested to cause this resolution to be communicated to Commodore Dewey and through him to the officers and men under his command." Dewey's Honors Multiply. But the official recognition of George Dewey did not stop with the adoption of these resolutions. Senator Hale of Maine at once intro- duced, and the Senate unanimously passed, a bill increasing the number of rear-admirals in the navy from six to seven, and the President im- mediately promoted Acting Eear-Admiral Dewey to the rank of rear- admiral. Senator Quay of Pennsylvania proposed that a jeweled sword be pre- sented by the government to Commodore Dewey, and Senator Lodge of Massachusetts responded by offering for adoption the following reso- lution: 164 DEWEY FROM WAR TO WAR. "That the Secretary of the Navy be and he is hereby authorized to present a sword of honor to Commodore George Dewey, and to cause to be struck bronze medals commemorating the battle of Manila bay, and to distribute such medals to the officers and men of the ships of the Asiatic squadron of the United States, under command of Commodore George Dewey on May 1, 1898, and that to enable the Secretary to' carry out this resolution the sum of |10,000 is hereby appropriated." This resolution was also agreed to without debate. Choice of a Sword for Dewey. In response to the publication of the resolution a great many de- signs were submitted. The committee consisted of Assistant Secretary of the Navy Charles H. Allen,' United States Senator Henry Cabot Lodge, of Massachusetts, who introduced the joint resolution, and Pro- fessor Marshal Oliver, of the United States Naval Academy at Annap- olis. The design chosen was that of Mr. Paulding Farnham, of the house of Tiffany & Co., a member of the National Sculpture Society. The sword, with the exception of the steel blade and the body metal of the scabbard, is made entirely of pure gold, 22-karat fine; the grip is covered with fine shark-skin, bound with gold wire and inlaid with gold stars. Above the shark-skin the handle terminates in a richly carved and enamelled gold collar and pommel; a narrow band of oak leaves unites the shark-skin to the collar; then come the arms of the Admiral's native state, Vermont, with the motto, "Freedom and unity;" and above this, and spreading toward the top, is the Great Seal of the United States, with the blue field of the shield in enamel. The shield in the arms of Vermont is also enamelled. The collar is surmounted with a closely woven wreath of oak leaves, the standard decoration for rank, and the intervening spaces between the decorations are studded with stars. On the pommel is carved the name of the battle-ship Olympia and the zodiacal sign for the month of December, when Dewey was born. Elaborate Decorations. The guard is composed of a conventional eagle, terminating in a claw clasping the top, the outspread wings forming the guard proper. The eagle bears a laurel wreath in its beak. The scabbard is of thin steel, damaskeened in gold with sprays of Ros DEWEY FROM WAR TO WAR. 165 Marinus, signifying fidelity, constancy, and remembrance. The sprays are interlaced in the form of a series of cartouches, with a star in the center of each, while dolphins fill the outer spaces. Sprays of oak leaves and acorns secure the rings and trappings of the scabbard; above these, on the front of the scabbard, is a raised monogram in brilliants (dia- monds) entwining the letters "G. D.," and immediately under them are the letters "U. S. N.," surrounded by sprays of Ros Marinus. The ferrule, or lower end of the scabbard, terminates in entwined gold dolphins. An Inscription of Honor. The sword blade is damaskeened with the inscription: "The Gift of the Nation to Rear-Admiral George Dewey, U. 8. N., in ./iiemory of the victory at Manila bay. May 1st, 1898." A Phoenician gallerj^, representing the first craft of^the world's navies, supplies the rest of the ornament on this side of the blade. On the other side of the blade is shown a flight of the eagles of victory, bearing festoons of laurel. The mountings of the belt and trappings are the regulation buckles, pierced slide-rings and swivels — all of 22-karat gold ornamented with oflk leaves and acorns. The bullion tassel and embroidered belting were especially made, and are much superior to those usually employed. The Congressional resolution was placed in the hands of one of the most expert of the many engrossing clerks employed by the Department of State, and, after several weeks of painstaking labor, was finally for- warded to Rear- Admiral Dewey on July 24, 1898. Acknowledgments from the Departments. The resolution was beautifully embossed and prefaced by a formal attestation of its authenticity by Secretary of State Day, the whole being enclosed in richly gilt and ornamented Russia covers. It is to be remarked that Secretary Long, in his letter of transmission, makes reference to a letter from the Secretary of State complimenting Admiral Dewej' upon his direction of affairs, since the great naval victory, a for- mal evidence that the State Department is thoroughly well satisfied with the diplomatic qualities he has exhibited. The letter of Secretary Long is as follows: im , DEWEY FROM WAR TO WAR.' "The Navy Department, Washington, July 24, 1898. — The depart- ment has received from the Secretary of State an engrossed and certified copy of a joint resolution of Congress, tendering the thanks of Congress to you and the officers and men of the squadron under your command, for transmission to jou, and herewith encloses the same. "Accompanying the copy of the joint resolution the department received a letter from the Secretary of State requesting there be con- veyed to you his high appreciation of your character as a naval officer, and of the good judgment and prudence you have shown in directing affairs since the date of your great achievement in destroying the Span- ish fleet. I take great pleasure in doing this, and join most heartily on behalf of the Navy Department, as well as personally, in the com- niendation of the Secretary of State. "JOHN D. LONG. "Rear-Admiral George Dewey, U. S. N., Commander-in-Chief United States Naval Forces, Asiatic Station." Admiral George Dewey. When Congress reconvened for the short session in December, 1898, Representative Livingston of Georgia introduced the following bill to revive the grade and rank of Admiral of the Navy for George Dewey, aa a still further mark of consideration and reward for his services to his country: "Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, that, to provide prompt and adequate reward to Rear-Admiral George Dewey, the grade and rank of Admiral in the United States Navy be, and it is hereby re- vived, with the same duties, pay and privileges appurtenant thereto that were by law given to the former appointees to said rank, the said grade and rank to exist only during the lifetime of this officer." This bill passed both houses of Congress without opposition and was signed by the President with alacrity. Pursuant to the desire of the Nation, thus expressed. President McKinley commissioned Rear-Ad- miral Dewey as Admiral, and that rank is again held in the United States navy for the first time since it was vacated by the death of Ad- miral Porter, who succeeded Admiral Farragut in this rank when Far- ragut died. CHAPTER IX. THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS IN HISTORY. The Orient Always an Object of Interest and Desire — Writers of Authority on the Philippines — Magellan's Famous Voyage under the Flag of Spain — The Ladrones Discovered — Arrival at Mindanao — Relations with the Natives — Legaspi Sails from Mexico for the Philippines — The Subjugation of the Islands — ^Revolt and Insurrection — The British Invasion. Far in that eastern ocean which was the object of so much daring venture for the navigators of the fifteenth, sixteenth and seventeenth centuries, lie those islands in which we are beginning to discover an interest — ^the Philippine archipelago. Then the Orient was a mysterious, region, marked on the map by fabulous monsters, tempting men's cu- pidity by tales of fabulous wealth. Japan, China, the East Indies and the Indian and Burman peninsulas, with their coasts and adjacent is- lands, were considered then the treasure-house waiting to be despoiled by whatever European monarchs could reach them first, with adven- turous captains leading plundering expeditions. Cathay, Tartary, the Indies, the Spice Islands, were the names that appealed to men then, but they meant the same regions that are now the objects of rivalry among those interested in the "Eastern Question." In the last few hundred years, men have learned that no country offers wealth without work, but they are none the less anxious for commercial and political dominance over those lands of the Orient that were so obscurely known in the earlier day. The people of the United States find themselves thrust into a position where every interest de- mands that they possess the fullest information possible concerning the conditions they will have to meet in dealing with the strange races with which they will come in contact. This is equally true whatever solution of the involved problems is to be finally accepted as correct. Thus justified by the evident needs, I have not hesitated to draw 167 168 THE PHILIPPINE ISLAXDS IN HISTORY. upon the information gathered by other writers than myself concerning the Philippine islands, and for this service I desire to offer full acknowl- edgment. It is not possible now to write concerning the history, the resources, the races and the conditions of the Philippines without mak- ing use of the labor of John Foreman and Dean C. Worcester. For many years the work of the former was the only one of consequence concerning the Philippines. Historically it still remains an essential contribution to the literature of the islands. Prof. Worcester made studies throughout the archipelago which will be of immense value in aiding to a solution of problems that may arise. His writings are those of the student and they form the most acceptable and recent authority on details of the characteristics and conditions of the people and the islands. From a recent work by Trumbull White, too, many of the descriptive and historical facts have been drawn. The acknowl- edgment is made thus definite here, because this book will be more indebted to these works than can possibly be indicated by quotation marks. Notable Era of Exploration. It was only twenty-seven years after the first voyage of Columbus that another voyage under Spanish auspices began, the results of which are now intertwined with our own history. The period of ex- ploration which made the fifteenth century notable and which was crowned by the voyages of Columbus, stimulated the navigators of Spain, Portugal, Holland, England and France to the utmost rivalry in their search for new lands and new seas. Balboa's discovery of the Pacific ocean induced many efforts to find the passage which pre- sumably would give access to it from the Atlantic, but venture after venture ended in failure. Spain was to profit once more by the ^vork of an alien, who, like Columbus, had turned from his own country to a strange monarch for encouragement and means. Ferdinand Magel- lan or Hernando Maghellanes, as the name stands in its original form, was a nobleman of Portugal, who had campaigned for his king in wars at home, fighting bravely and winning fame. Jealous companions attacked him, discrediting his service and the wounds that rendered him a cripple. Eesenting his sovereign's ingratitude, Magellan left Portugal, became a citizen of Spain and finally won the favor of King Charles I. In those days monarchs were not exempt from the commercial < =3 X H w O Q m H o a. < N THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS IN HISTORY. 173 spirit, and an agreement was made by which Magellan undertook the discovery of new spice islands. The king provided five vessels fully equipped and was a partner in the venture to the extent of sharing the larger part of the prospective profits. It was on the tenth day of August, 1519, that the explorer set sail with his modest fleet, and four months later the first stage of the voyage terminated with safe arrival at Eio de Janeiro. Hardships of Magellan's Voyage. Magellan had to undergo an experience like that of his illustrious predecessor and face a mutiny. Sailing from the Brazilian capital southward, in the endeavor to find a passage to the Pacific, he encoun- tered severe cold weather and resultant restlessness. The commander planned to enter one of the rivers which came down to the ocean from the interior of South America and there pass the winter, but his officers and crews disagreed on this proposition, some wishing to sail for home, some willing to follow their leader's plan, and others anxious to form plans of their own. It was the captaiiis themselves who were most difficult to discipline. One of them was executed, in punishment for an attack made upon the commander, and another was set ashore in irons. Then the fleet entered the river as Magellan willed and passed the winter there in safety and comfort. The expedition moved slowly southward after spring opened, losing one ship by desertion and an- other by wreck, but on the 28th of October, 1520, the remaining three reached the straits separating Patagonia from Tierra del Fuego, which ever since has been known by the name of this first European com- mander who passed through them. Sailing westward and northward for many weeks, on the 16th of March, 1521, Magellan discovered what we now know as the Ladrone or Marianne islands. Magellan gave them a more musical name, call- ing them the Islas de las Velas or islands of the sails, because of the resemblance of some of the sharper hills, from a distance, to the sails of his vessels. After a short stay on these islands Magellan sailed southwestward, reaching for his next landfall the north coast of Min- danao, the largest island of the southern Philippines. 174 THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS IN HISTORY. Natives Welcome the Strangers. Like Columbus in the West Indies, the explorer found the natives friendly and glad to furnish the Spaniards with plentiful provisions. The local chief, who was, perhaps, the king of the island, related enticing tales of the riches of the other islands in the archipelago, par- ticularly of Oebu, and offered to pilot the expedition there because the king was a relative of his. Naturally this generous proposition was ac- cepted with alacrity, and Magellan, after taking formal possession of Mindanao in the name of his Spanish patron, sailed away for the neighboring islands. He reached Cebu on the 7th of August, his arrival spreading alarm among the natives who saw from the beach the strange craft. The chieftain from Mindanao, however, gave them assurance that the strangers were but seeking food and were without any hostile design. The king of Cebu thereupon proposed to make a treaty with Magellan with both Spanish and native ceremony. This proposition was wel- comed by the Spanish commander, who brought hi^ men on shore, where impressive ceremonies were performed. The Spaniards erected a hut and celebrated mass in it, much to the interest of the impres- sionable natives. The members of the royal family and their retainers and other influential men were baptized and swore allegiance to their new master, the King of Spain. Then the native custom followed and the ceremony of exchange of blood in token of brotherhood was cele- brated. No time was lost in beginning the activities which were to follow this offensive and defensiA'e alliance. The king was in the midst of war with some of his neighbors and Magellan entered into the con- flict with his own men and arms with apparent pleasure. The result was fateful to him. Within a few months he was wounded during an unimportant skirmish on the little island of Mactan, and died there in a short time. First Circumnavigation of the Globe. When the dominant force of Magellan's personality was lost, the expedition's difficulties began to multiply. Trouble rose between Spanish and natives and twenty-seven of the former were slain jy THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS IN HISTORY. 175 treachery at a banquet where they had been guests of honor. The total number of men for the three ships was now reduced to one hun- dred, an altogether insufflcient number for the long homeward voyage. As a measure of prudence, one of the vessels was burned and the other two sailed westward again, this time discovering the large island of Palawan and touching a part of north Borneo. At Tidor a cargo of spices was taken aboard, but one of the vessels sprang a leak and had to be abandoned. The other continued the voyage and finally reached Spain again, after undergoing many more hardships and adventures for her crew, thus completing the first circumnavigation of the globe. Although the results of this notable voyage were sufficient to stim- ulate King Charles to the organization of two more expeditions, neither of them accomplished anything commensurate with the expense, labor and time involved. It was more than forty years later before any serious attempt was made to reduce the lands to possession. Although the Philippines were nominally a part of the Spanish realm, their value was a matter of doubt, no commerce with them was organized, they produced no revenue, and there was not even a Spanish officeholder in the whole of the archipelago. It was Philip II., in whose honor the islands were to be named, inspired by religious zeal, who set out to conquer and convert to Catholicism the millions of islanders. From Mexico to the Philippines. The expedition was equipped in the American colonies of Spain, four ships and a frigate being made ready on the west coast of Mexico. Four hundred soldiers and sailors were gathered as an army of inva- sion under the famous leader, Miguel Lopez de Legaspi, with six Augus- tine monks to introduce Christianity and look after the spiritual wel- fare of the native races who were to be conquered. The date of this expedition was 1563, but its progress was slow and some years inter- vened before the islands came under extended influence of the Span- iards. Legaspi took possession of Magellan's Islas de las Velas on the way, changing the name to the Ladrone or "robber" islands, as a tribute to the expert thievery of the natives, who adroitly stole a boat from one of his ships, Legaspi reached the Philippines first at Camaguin, and after ITG THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS IN HISTORY. touching at Bohol and sending one of his boats to Mindanao, decided to begin his invasion of Cebu. The ruling monarch, who had succeeded the king of Magellan's time, was much exercised upon the arrival of the squadron, and, selecting one of his bravest subjects, sent him as a spy to report on the Spaniards. The man came back deeply im- pressed by what he had seen, to assure his sovereign that the ships were manned by giants with long pointed noses, who were dressed in magnificent robes, ate stones, drank fire and blew smoke out of their mouths. With such a report as that filed for his official consideration, the king could do little but make peace with the powerful strangers. When Legaspi landed on the 27th of April, 1565, to take possession of the town, he met a welcome, but the natives soon became suspicious of his motives and made energetic attacks upon him. At one time his force was in great danger of extermination, but he held on bravely while the people grew accustomed to the new conditions. Then the Portuguese appeared on the scene and set up a claim for the islands, but they were soon driven off and the pacification of Cebu and the neighboring islands proceeded steadily. In 1569 Panay was invaded and the next year Legaspi's grand- son, Salcedo, was sent with an expedition to subdue Luzon. June 24, 1571, the first city council of Manila was established and forms of government were enacted. One year later Legaspi died. The remarkable energies and abilities of this first conqueror of the Philippines cannot be ignored. His achievements were almost incredible. In Spain to-day he is still named as one of their notable heroes of conquest. Spanish and Chinese at War. The Spaniards were hardly more than comfortably settled in pos- session of their easily acquired new domain, when troubles began to brew. The rulers of China and Japan both claimed rights in the archipelago, and the former made a strenuous effort to enforce his rights and expel the rival conquerors. The most desperate of these attacks was that under the Chinese general and pirate, Li Mah Ong. The records are somewhat confusing as to his identity and status. At any rate he chanced to fall in with a Chinese trading junk which was returning from a trip to Luzon. This THE rniLIPPINE ISLANDS EST HISTORY. 177 he captured and forced her crew to pilot him to Manila, He brought with him a formidable fleet of sixty-two armed junks. Hurried prepa- rations were made for the defense of Manila against the threatened raid. The Chinese attacked the city immediately upon their arrival, forcing their way within the walls of the citadel itself. Hand to hand combats lasted for several days. The Spaniards fought with bravery, finally repelling the Mongolian invaders. Many vessels of the Chinese fleet were destroyed and large numbers of the soldiers and sailors killed. Li Mah Ong next landed on the west coast of Luzon, establishing a settlement at the mouth of the Agno river, where he remained un- disturbed for several months. Then a strong force was sent against him and again he was driven out. With the larger part of his force he left the archipelago for good. Many of the soldiers, however, were driven into the mountains as fugitives. With characteristic Chinese philosophy they settled in the fertile valleys of the interior and started communities which are still flourishing at the present time. They took wives from among the savages and to-day their descendants are hardly distinguishable from other Malays, although they take deep pride in their descent and look down upon their neighbors as being of an inferior race. Mongolians Massacred in the Philippines. The Spanish conquerors did not forget their antagonism to the Chinese, and at various times there were general massacres of the Mongolians which cost them thousands of lives. One of the more nota- ble massacres of the Chinese took place in 1662, There was a Mongol chief in China who refused to yield at the time of the Tartar invasion in the middle of the seventeenth century. Instead he sailed to Formosa with his troops. At that time Dutch settlements had been founded in the island and 2,800 of the Europeans were attacked by about 100,000 Chinese and were forced to surrender. Word reached Manila that the Chinese were contemplating a descent upon the Spanish colony and the governor of the Philippines accused the Chinese among his own sub- jects of conspiracy in the contemplated attack. All the available forces were concentrated and when everything was ready the Chinese were incited to rebel and a general massacre followed. Men, women and 178 THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS IN HISTORY. children were killed indiscriminately, the Spaniards at first intending to kill every one of the Chinamen. Before they had carried out this intention it fortunately occurred to them that the resulting lack of tradesmen and mechanics would cause inconvenience, so those who re- mained alive were graciously pardoned on condition of laying down their arms. Some of the Chinese escaped to Formosa. In 1709 another massacre of Chinese occurred, this time only a few hundreds of the luckless Mongolians being killed. The rest of them, however, were deported, and after the fashion that had been estab- lished, all their property was confiscated and divided between the church and the state. Between 1628 and the middle of the next century nine attempts were made by the Spaniards to conquer the Sulu islands, but in every in- stance they were repulsed with heavy losses. Three Centuries of Insurrection. The history of insurrection and revolt in the Philippines does not begin with 1896. Although our interest has not been sufficient to be directed to the Philippines until recently, the population of those islands have had to contend with oppression which they have resented by up- risings frequently and energetically. The first noteworthy uprising was made by the natives of Bohol in 1622. The causes which led to it were the same that have provoked many of the more recent revolts — namely, the tyranny of the church and the burdensome taxes levied by church and state alike. The rebels were dispersed by troops under the governor of Cebu. So far as the causes of the outbreak of insurrections are concerned, they do not need to be reiterated in the successive revolts. Sometimes some special feature of oppression stim- ulated the outbreak, but the seeds of discontent always lay dormant under Spanish dominion ready to germinate at the slightest signal. The people of northeast Mindanao broke out with another revolt in 1629 and were promptly suppressed. Twenty years later, the people of Samar rebelled on account of an attempt to force them into mili- tary service. Under the leadership of a chief named Sumoroy they killed a priest and sacked the churches along the coast. The governor of the island dispatched native emissaries to bring in Sumoroy's head but they sent him instead the head of a pig. The revolt spread and THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS IN HISTORY. 179 troops were dispatched into the interior to quell it. They failed to take Sumoroy, but found his mother in a hut, and, true to Spanish traditions, literally tore the defenseless old woman to pieces. Sumoroy was at length betrayed by his own people. This uprising spread to other provinces and trouble arose in Masbate, Cebu and Mindanao. In the latter island things assumed so threatening an aspect that a large force of infantry was sent against the rebels. The officer in command, being a diplomatist, first published a general pardon in the name of the king. He then made prisoners of the crowds of insurgents who flocked to his camp and sent them to Manila, where a few of them were par- doned and others executed, the majority, however, being made galley slaves. Revolt at the Cavite Arsenal. The natives of Pampanga province grew weary of being obliged to cut timber for the Cavite arsenal without pay, and in 1660 they revolted. Neighboring provinces joined in the rebellion and a native named Malong was declared king. He organized an army which was re- cruited to the number of nearly 40,000. Many Spaniards were killed, but the natives were finally defeated and scattered. The Jesuit priesthood in the Philippines was_the stimulus for one of the more successful insurrections. In 1744 the despotism of a Jesuit priest caused an uprising in Bohol. The priest had not only ordered his parishioners arrested when they failed to attend mass, but had directed that the body of one of them should be left unburied to decay in the sun. The brother of this man organized a force, captured the priest and paid him in his own coin, killing and exposing his body for four days. The rebel forces were rapidly augmented by men who complained that while they were risking their lives in military service for the government, their homes were wrecked and their wives and families maltreated to secure the payment of tribute. The insurgents main- tained their independence for thirty-five years, at the end of which time the Jesuits were expelled from the colony. Insurrections of the Present Century. The famous revolt led by Novales and Ruiz occurred in 1823. Under these officers a body of native troops tried to seize Manila and place 180 THE PHILIPl'IXE ISLANDS IN HISTORY. their leaders at the head of the government. It is needless to say that the attempt was an utter failure, but it was very fierce and blood- thirsty, although short, and is said to have cost the lives of 5,000 people within a week. Among the other uprisings which may be mentioned are one in Cebu in 1827 and one in Negros in 1844. The latter is said to have resulted from the governor's compelling state prisoners to work for his private advantage. Until the rebellion of 1896 broke out, the most formidable insur- rection occurred at Cavite in 1872. There were conspirators both at the arsenal and in the capital and it had been agreed that when the opportune moment arrived, the Manila contingent should signal the fact by discharging a rocket. The Cavite insurgents mistook fireworks sent up at a local celebration for the expected signal and began opera- tions prematurely. They were forced to retire to the arsenal and all were eventually killed or captured. Hostility to the Spanish friars was at the bottom of this uprising also. A certain Dr. Burgos had headed a party which demanded ful- fillment of the decisions of the Council of Trent prohibiting friars from holding parishes. These provisions had never been carried out in the Philippines, and the various orders were steadily growing more rich, p'owerful and arrogant. It is commonly believed that churchmen were the real instigators of this revolt, desiring to involve Burgos and his followers in treasonable transactions and thus bring about their death. However this may have been, the friars insisted that they should be executed and were able to enforce their desire. The English Capture of Manila. In the latter half of the eighteenth century, when all Europe was at war, the Philippines did not escape the consequences of those far-away hostilities. Great Britain declared war against France and Spain in 1761. Havana was captured by the British, and a fleet was dispatched under Admiral Cornish with orders to take Manila. On the 22d of September, 1762, this fleet arrived before the doomed city, and land forces were disembarked under command of General Draper. After a stout resistance upon the part of the Spanish garrison, which was brave but far inferior to the English force in numbers, the city finally fell. •c THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS IN HISTORY. ' 183 The terms of capitulation were drawn up by Draper and the arch- bishop of Manila, who in the absence of a governor-general was serving in a double capacity. The agreement called for freedom in the exercise of religion; security of private property; free trade for all the inhabi- tants of the islands, and the continuance of the courts for the main- tenance of order. The Spanish were to pay an indemnity of |4,000,000. In harmony with a custom then sadly common among victorious armies, the city was given over for pillage. The English troopers are said to have shown moderation, but the Sepoys, of whom Draper had brought 2,200 from India, outraged, robbed and murdered the inhabitants in the very streets. On the following day there was a similar scene, where- upon the archbishop protested and Draper restored order. British. Occupation Incomplete. The surrendered territory included the whole archipelago, but the English never occupied more than that part of it which lay immediately around Manila. Even .there they were not left undisturbed. One of the justices of the supreme court named Simon de Anda escaped in a native boat to the province of Bulacan. He declared himself governor- general and raised an army, but the desultory fighting which ensued between his forces and the British had no decisive results. A con- spiracy to assassinate Anda and his Spanish followers was discovered among the Chinese in Pampanga province and a massacre of the Mon- gols followed. Anda was so enraged with them that he issued a procla- mation declaring them all traitors and ordered them hanged wherever found. Thousands who had been in no way concerned in the conspiracy are said to have been executed. The war indemnity which had been agreed upon was not forth- coming. The British forces were harassed by attacks from without the city and by fear of treachery within, and at last the officers fell to (quarreling among themselves. Meanwhile the war had come to an end in Europe, and the evacuation of Manila had been provided for by the terms of the treaty' of Paris concluded on the 10th day of February, 1763. Anda, however, refused to consider the war ended until his authority was recognized, and hostilities in the Philippines continued for some months. Finally a new governor-general came from Spain. The British commanders were quite ready to turn the difficult problem 184 THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS IN HISTORY. over to him, and they promptly evacuated the city and sailed away, although a considerable portion of the indemnity still remained unpaid. It is more than likely that England would have kept the Philippines at that time if the European war had continued much longer, but Spain and France both sued for peace and the same treaty which ended the French and Indian war, as it was known in the American colonies of Great Britain and of France, provided for the restitution of Manila to the government at Madrid. The Cholera Panic in the Philippines. A crisis of another form came to the Philippine islands in 1820, which almost destroyed civilization in the colony. For the first time in its modern history the archipelago was invaded by Asiatic cholera. It began at Sampaloc, near Manila, spread to the capital city and thence went into every part of Luzon. The mortality was frightful, some records declaring that over one-half of the population died from the disease. In the height of the epidemic the "ignorant Spaniards and natives were seized with the idea that the disease was the result of a wholesale plot to poison them in the interests of the foreigners of the community. Mobs rose all over the island and massacred Chinese, French, English, Americans, and finally the Spaniards themselves. Houses were burned, citizens robbed and buildings looted. Ultimately the disorders were quelled. Since the revolt of Novales and Ruiz in 1823, the career of the Philippines has been comparatively calm and quiet except the Burgos rebellion at Cavite in 1872. There have been many minor uprisings, riots and revolts, but the policy of the government has grown sterner with the years and merciless measures have been put in effect. The smallest riot has been the signal for martial law. Small gunboats have made it possible to rush troops to the scene of every insurrection and not too much care has been taken to be sure of the guilt of those ar- rested. Every one involved or suspected usually has been tried by court martial and shot without delay. It was this condition that led up to the revolt of 1896. Beginning with that revolution the history of the Philippines has an American point of view to be considered. CHAPTER X. ISLAND GEOGRAPHY, CONDITIONS AND RESOURCES. The Native Tribes of the Philippines— Islands Comprising the Group— €21- matic Conditions — Safeguards Against Disease — Earthquakes and Volcanoes — ^Animal and Vegetable Life— Land and Water Reptiles — Beasts and Birds in Countless Numbers — Extensive Pearl Fisheries — Mineral Wealth of the Islands — Chinese Interests in the Mines — Valuable Discoveries and Future Development. It has been the general impression among travelers in the Orient that the Philippines contained little of interest to them outside of the island of Luzon, and to many of them the c^tj of Manila has been the only objective point. Possibly the tourist w^ould make a few trips into the interior of Luzon, and on rare occasions a hurried visit to one or two of the adjacent islands might be included in the itinerary. The traveler who has made these excursions is usually of the opinion that he has seen all of importance that is to be seen. This popular con- ception of the islands is greatly at variance with the facts in the case. There are more than eighty distinct tribes of the natives who form the bulk of the eight million inhabitants of the island. They are scattered over hundreds of islands, large and small, and wide travel is necessary if one wishes really to know something of the country and its people. It is true in the Philippines, as in every other country, that the traveler who confines his observations to the cities and towns will fail to gain intimate information and knowledge of the essential characteristics of the whole people. In the Philippines, more than in most other places, it is necessary to turn one's back upon the cities and towns and turning from the beaten path, push into the almost unex- plored regions where the wild tribes are to be found. In the study of these primitive peoples and in the wonders of the tropical forests one will find ample repayment for the risks and hardshins he certainly wiM be forced to undergo. Among the islands, means of communication are limited and in 185 ISO ISLAND GEOGRAPHY, CONDITIONS AND RESOURCES. many instances primitive. Between tlie more important cities of the group there are lines of mail and merchant steamers, which afford tolerably frequent and even comfortable communication, but the dif- ficulties multiply when one attempts to visit the interior of the larger and less explored islands or to reach ports where vessels do not call. Native sailboats must be called into service and extreme discomfort sometimes undergone. The carriage roads, even in the vicinity of the larger towns, are usually in bad condition, impassable in the rainy sea- son, and little improved in the dry. On many a path, called by courtesy a road, one finds it impossible to travel even on horseback. Bridges are few and fords are frequentlj^ infested by man-eating crocodiles. Every traveler in the Philippines has ultimately to employ the water buffalo or coolies to carry himself and his baggage, or to walk, by choice, for greater comfort. The Islands Composing the Group. The number of islands in the archipelago has been given all the way from six hundred to two thousand, a surprising variance of infor- mation suggests Professor Worcester, which should be approximately accurate. The larger estimate is extravagant unless the Carolines and Ladrone islands are included in the count with the Philippines proper. If they are excluded, the number of islands remaining certainly cannot count more than twelve hundred, even if every uninhabited rock and sand-pit that projects above sea level be reckoned. The following is a list of the more important islands, with their approximate area in square miles: Luzon 41,000 Leyte 3,090 Mindanao 37,500 ISTegros 2,300 Samar 5,300 Cebu 1,650 Panay 4,600 Masbate 1,315 Palawan 4,150 Bohol 925 Mindoro 4,050 Catanduanes 450 The following islands have areas ranging from about 100 to 250 square miles: Basilan, Basuanga, Culion, Marinduque, Tablas, Dina- gat, Sulu, Guimaras, Tawi Tawi, Siquijor, Balabac, Sibuyan, Panaon, ISLAND GEOGRAPHY, COXDITIONS AND RESOURCES. 187 Camiguin, Romblon, Ticao, Burias, Biliran, Siargao, and Polillo. The total land area is approximately 114,000 square miles, Luzon and Mindanao including more than half of it. Too much dependence cannot be placed upon the foregoing figures, even though they are taken from Spanish official estimates. The Pacific ocean side of the archipelago is so little known that an accurate statement of area is hard to be made. The extreme extent of the archipelago from north to south, count- ing all the outlying islands and including the Sulu archipelago, is about 1,300 miles, and the extreme breadth about half that distance, the lim- its of latitude being from five to twenty degrees north of the equator and of longitude from 117 to 127 degrees east of Greenwich. Storms of Wind and Rain. It is difiicult to advise as to the best season for a journey through the provinces,, for this varies with the locality to be visited. The whole archipelago except the southerly islands is affected by the trade winds. The southwest monsoon, beginning in April or May, blows for about five months. Then, after a short season of variable winds and calms, follows the northeast monsoon for a similar length of time. The south- west winds usually bring the rains, but the conditions of locality, altitude and surrounding mountain ranges may make weeks of difference in the beginning of the wet season. Rivers often overflow their banks during the months of the rains and extensive, floods occur, but even these are much less feared than the destructive whirling storms of wind and rain known as typhoons. The more southerly islands are virtually exempt from these storms, but those islands and channels where they do occur suffer great loss of property and life from the violent hurricanes. The force of the wind is almost, incredible; huge trees are uprooted, houses are unroofed or carried away, and the stanchest ship may suffer destruction if it be in the vbrtex of the storm. In an ocean group extending through such a distance, it is neces- sarily true that the conditions of climate vary considerably, and it is impossible to generalize with accuracy. There is but one place in the islands where reliable temperature records have been kept,, and it is from the observations of the Jesuit observatory in Manila that the fol- lowing statistics are taken: The mean annual temperature in the cap- 188 ISLAND GEOaRAPHY, CONDITIONS AND RESOURCES. itai is 80 degrees, the tliermometer almost never rising above 100 in tlie shade nor falling below 60. There is no month in the year during which it does not rise as high as 91, while the mean monthly tempera- tares are as follows: January 77, February 78, March 81, April 83, May 81, June 82, July 81, August 81, September 81, October 80, Novem- ber 79 and December 77. In addition to the fact that the mean temper- ature of the year is 80 degrees, falling to only 77 in the coolest months, it must be remembered that during most of the time the humidity of the atmosphere is great, which makes the heat doubly trying. Through th-:" winter months the nights are usually fairly cool, but during the hot season there is little relief from one week's end to another. The climate of the Philippine islands may be wholesome or trying to Americans, according to the place selected for residence and the local conditions, as well as the care that the individual may be' able to take of himself. Malaria is very prevalent in some of the islands, notably in Mindoro, Balabac and portions of Talawan, Mindanao and Luzon, but there are many localities entirely free from it. Physical Eflfects of the Climate. One who has made a special study into the climatic conditions as they interest Americans, Professor Dean C. Worcester, speaks concern- ing those things as follows : "I have never yet experienced at sea level a day when a white man could endure severe physical exertion without suffering from the heat. If one is permanently situated in a good locality where he can secure suitable food and good drinking water; if he is scrupulously careful as to his diet, avoids excesses of all kinds, keeps out of the sun in the middle of the day, and refrains from severe and long-continued physical exertion, he is likely to remain well, al- ways supposing that he is fortunate enough to escape malarial infection. I knew an old Spaniard who at the end of a residence of thirty-nine years in the Philippines was able to boast that he had not been ill a day. He had always been so situated that he could take care of himself and he had done it. But how is it with the explorer, the engineer, the man who would fell timber, cultivate new ground, or in some other way develop the latent resources of the country? Any one really exposed to the cli- mate under such circumstances will find it severe. He cannot humor his digestive apparatus, for his bill of fare will be limited to what he can ISLAND GEOGRAPHY, CONDITIONS AND RESOURCES. 189 carry and what the country affords, and he will be fortunate indeed if sooner or later he does not suffer seyerely from bowel trouble. He will be more than fortunate if he escapes malaria, which is especially preva- lent where forest land is being cleared or new ground broken. Fevers of Common Occurrence. "Our work sometimes made it necessary for us to visit localities where fever was known to be prevalent and we came to look upon it as one of the necessary evils of existence. A temperature of 106.5 was not comfortable, but it did not occasion us any alarm. After our third trip to Mindoro the temperature of one member of our party touched that mark on ten consecutive days; and I may add that, al- though I have visited Mindoro three times with other white men and, have each time had considerable numbers of natives in my employ, I have never yet escaped malaria nor was any other member of our party, white or native, more fortunate. The traveler soon learns to recognize several types of fever: one recurs every third day, another every second day and a third daily. If promptly and energetically taken in hand, any of these may be shaken off, but the much dreaded calen- tura perniciosa is a very malignant disease, running its course in a few hours and frequently terminating with black vomit and death. Fortunately la perniciosa is very local in its occurrence, and the places where it is known to exist are shunned by natives and whites alike. "It has been shown in a number of instances that malaria was due to causes that could be remedied. Before the time of General Arolas, Sulu was a fever center. By improving the drainage of the town and by filling in low places with coral sand, he succeeded in almost com- pletely stamping out the disease. Still more striking results were ob- tained at Tataan, in Tawi Tawi, by an officer who had worked under^ General Arolas in Sulu. The garrison at this point had suffered ter- ribly and two governors had died there, but after the forest was cleared away for half a mile around the block house and the ground thor- oughly cleaned up, fever almost completely disappeared. Native Superstitions Regarding Disease. "It is unfortunately true that the climate of the Philippines is espe- cially severe in its effect on white women and children. It is very doubt- ful in my judgment if many successive generations of European or 190 ISLAND GEOGRAPHY, CONDITIONS AND RESOURCES. American children could be reared there. We must then, I think, necessarily admit that we have here a serious, though not necessarily insurmountable, obstacle to the development of the great resources of this remarkable country. Malaria and digestive troubles aside, the health of the colony is fairly good, and the danger from epidemic dis- ease is comparatively' slight. Smallpox is always present, but it .seldom spreads rapidly, as a large percentage of the natives have it during childhood, so that there is hardly material for an epidemic. Cholera is infrequent, but Avhen it once starts cannot be controlled. The natives believe that a black dog runs down the streets and the disease breaks out behind him. They declare that it is the will of God and refuse to take the simplest precaution. Leprosy occurs, but is not common. There is a great deal of biri-biri in Balabac, and I have seen it in Mindoro. The bubonic plague has, fortunately, never gained a hold in the Philippines." Earthquakes and Volcanoes. The forces of nature which raised the Philippine islands from the sea are not yet at rest. Evidences of the action of earthquakes and volcanoes are visible on every hand throughout the archipelago, while elevation and subsidence are going on with great rapidity at the present time. It is not unusual to have a native assure one that he now fishes where his grandfather used to live, or vice versa. Some of the islands, notably Cebu, are covered with limestone caps and give indisputable evidence of having been heaved up from beneath the sea, while in other parts of the archipelago extinct volcanoes, sulphur deposits, old lava beds and boiling springs afford mute witness to the state of things which must have existed in the past. There yet remain many active volcanoes in the island. The most famous of these is the Mayon, an absolutely perfect cone about 8,900 feet in height, which is in a state of constant activity. It is situated in the island of Luzon, which suffered materially from its last de- structive eruption in 1888. Apo, in Mindanao, which is more than 10,000 feet in height, is the tallest of the mountains. The most de- structive of the volcanoes is Taal, also in the island of Luzon. It has been in destructive eruption repeatedly within the past two centuries and is still smoldering. With a height of but 900 feet, it is one of the lowest volcanoes in the world. It lies in the midst of a fresh-water ISLAND GEOGRAPHY, CONDITIONS AND RESOURCES. 191 lake and has the form of a very much truncated cone, its entire top having been blown off by a terrific explosion at the time of the last great eruption. Other active volcanoes are found in Mindanao, Cami- guin, Luzon, and the islands further northward of Luzon. Earthquakes are unknown in the Palawan group, but elsewhere in the archipelago they occur frequently and at times have been the cause of considerable damage to life and property. In all of the larger islands of the Philippines, moderately high mountains are found, there being many peaks ranging between 6,000 and 10,000 feet. Those which are not volcanic are for the most part clothed with vegetation. The peaks of northern Palawan are very rugged and much resemble the American Kockies. In Luzon and Min- danao there are fresh-water lakes and rivers of considerable size. The navigation of the rivers is greatly impeded by shifting sand bars at their mouths, so that vessels drawing more than ten or eleven feet can- not safely enter them. Vast Areas of Forests.- Vast areas in many of the islands are still covered with magnifi- cent virgin forests, but the denudation of the country is going on steadily. When a native wishes to start a farm he clears away the trees on a tract of the desired size, burns them, and cultivates the ground thus laid bare. Sooner or later his plantation is invaded by a tall, rank grass known as cogon. With the simple implements at his disposal he cannot kill out this strong growing pest, so he aban- dons his ground and clears more. When the cogon once gets a hold nothing can compete with it, and the result is the great areas known as cogonales are overgrown with this almost useless grass, which has little utilitarian value. To some extent it is of service for thatch and for firewood, while at the close of the dry season, when the natives burn over the cogonales, the fresh green shoots which spring up after the first showers provide forage for cattle and horses. The astonishingly fertile soil of many of the islands produces crops year after year without thought of artificial enrichment. Animal and Vegetable Life. The animal and vegetable life of the Philippines offers a stibject of endless interest to the traveler. Nature takes strange forms so 192 ISLAND GEOaRAPHY, CONDITIONS AND RESOURCES. universally that one sees hardly a single familiar thing in a Philippine landscape. The trees are different, the flowers are different, the birds and animals are different, while even the insects upon the earth and the fish within the sea are altogether novel. Parties of American zoologists who have traveled there have found the islands almost a virgin field for their labors, so little have the Spanish done to investigate scientificall}'. Xot all of the surprises are pleasant, nor does one have to be a zoologist to come early into contact with the animal life of the Philip- pines. It is necessary if one is to enjoy any comfort during his resi-- dence in the islands, to rise superior to such trivial things as armies of cockroaches and plentiful mosquitoes and rats. The cockroaches grow to a size which justifies them in being classified as beasts o£ prey, those three or four inches in length being quite common. They are annoying pests for their destructiveness, playing havoc with every- thing of leather and paper. Snakes Used as Eatcatchers. In order to counteract the attacks of the rats, nearly all of the older houses in Manila possess what are called house-snakes. These are harmless but huge reptiles, generally twelve or fourteen feet long, which permanently reside in the roof and live on the rats. They live between the cloth ceilings and walls of the houses and the rafters, never leaving their abodes. The natives carry them about Manila for sale, curled up around bamboo poles, to which their heads are tied. The Philippines contain several varieties of buffalo which are not found elsewhere. They are known in the language of the natives as carabaos. These water buffaloes are found wild in most of the larger islands. They are often caught young and tamed, after which they are employed for beasts of burden. They do most of the heavy haul- ing and carting of the country and are very docile although extrava- gantly slow. They require a daily mud bath and will not work without it. The price of the full-grown carabao broken to work is not more than thirty dollars at the outside and sometimes as low as ten dol- lars. There is a smaller buffalo, found only in the island of Mindoro, where it lives in the densest jungle. This little animal, called the ISLAND GEOGRAPHY, CONDITIONS AND RESOURCES. 193 timarau, is a creature of most vicious temper, apparently untam- able. It is graceful in shape and movement and runs very swiftly. Hair and skin are black and horns large and extremely sharp. The timarau if trapped will usually kill itself in trying to escape, and in any event will refuse to eat. It voluntarily attacks and kills the much larger carabao. ■■o"- Animal Foods in Abundance. Several species of deer are found in the archipelago, in some localities sufficiently numerous to become a valuable addition to the meat supply. One species is hardly larger than a goat and another is still smaller. It is known as the chevrotain or mouse deer and is ex- ceedingly rare. Wild pigs are found in the islands in great abundance. They live on food which produces very dainty flesh and the meat is much favored in Luzon, There are no wolves nor foxes in the islands and no wild dogs. Cattle are extensively raised for beef on some of the islands. They are of a small humped variety, and in the Visayan islands bullocks are often used as draft animals. Milk is always very scarce, while fresh butter and cheese are not to be had at any price. Uoats are common and are prized both for their milk and their flesh. The Philippines are poor in carnivorous animals. A small wildcat and two species of civet-cats are the most conspiciious representatives of the order. The marsupials which are so numerous in the Austral- asian colonies are not found here, ^n Luzon and some of the other islands are numerous varieties of bats in great numbers. At nightfall in some places they are so numerous as to resemble a great flight of birds. The little vampire, which prefers blood for its diet, is there. Then the large fruit-bats occur in enormous colonies. Their fur has some commercial value and the natives occasionally eat them. Smaller insec- tivorous bats are numerous. Birds in Countless Numbers. Nature has been as generous to the Philippines in birds as she has been niggardly in animals. About 590 species have been identified by ornithologists. Some of them are of great value as food and others are notable for their beauty. There are pheasants, pigeons, eagles, par- rots, ducks and song birds of great variety. Here in the Philippines 194 ISLAND GEOGRAPHY, CONDITIONS AND EESOURCES. is found that species of swift, or sea-swallow, which builds the nest so favored by the Chinese as a food. These nests are found at the proper season in caves or upon almost inaccessible cliffs, and the gathering of them is attended with considerable risk. They are made from a salivary secretion which rapidly hardens on exposure to the air into a substance resembling white glue in appearance. The best of the nests bring almost their weight in gold from the Chinese epicures. The reptiles of the Philippines are abundant in variety and num- ber. Crocodiles are found in the fresh-water lakes and streams, where they grow to great size. Every year they kill many men, horses, buf- faloes and smaller animals. Then there are iguanas or large land and marsh lizards, the largest of which grow sometimes eight feet in length. These, however, are altogether harmless, and they are considered very good eating by those who are willing to try them. Iguana eggs are almost exactly like turtle eggs. There are other smaller varieties of lizards, some of them living on the ground and others in trees, while in the houses of Manila the smallest are very common and are not considered to be an annoyance. Some of the species of snakes are very venomous, although the loss of life from snake bite is not great. P3rthons and other snakes of the constrictor family are plentiful, but as they are not poison- ous they are in no way dreaded. The skins of these make a capital leather and are used a great deal for decorative work sold in shops. There are cobras in Samar, Mindanao, and the Calamianes islands. Then there are venomous varieties known as the rice-leaf snake and the alinmorani, the bite of which is as fatal as that of a rattlesnake. Besides these there are many water-snakes which are very poisonous, some of them even in Manila bay. Extensive Pearl Fisheries. The fish-markets of Manila offer many varieties of fish in great quantity, nearly all strange to the American eye. Most of them, how- ever, are salt-water fish. They form the staple animal food of the natives. Fresh-water fish are less important. Then there are several kinds of shell fish and crustaceans, all palatable and nutritious. Near Sulu there are extensive beds of pearl-oysters which yield beautiful shells and very fine pearls as well. At present the fisheries are entirely in the hands of Moro divers, and all pearls above a certain size ISLAND GEOGRAPHY, CONDITIONS AND RESOURCES. 195 go by right to the sultan of Sulu. Chinese buyers purchase the rest of the pearls and the shells. From another oyster, handsome black pearls are obtained. The fruits, floAvers and trees of the Philippines are as varied and novel as the birds. There does not seem to be a spot in the Philip- pines, excepting around active volcanoes, where there is not exuberant vegetation. The climate is such as to encourage nature to do her best. Flowers seem to be more gorgeous than in any country within the tem- perate zone. Not only are the flowers indigenous to the Philippines found everywhere, but many transplanted to these islands have far outstripped their original growth. The geranium becomes a perfect weed in the gardens and fields of Manila, while the heliotrope grows as a great bush six feet high and a dozen feet in diameter, weighed down with a load of blossoms. Koses and tulips grow on trees. Oranges and lemons are grown here and produce their exquisite blos- soms in enormous quantities. Every yard is a blaze of blossoms, and flowers are so cheap that it is hardly necessary to pay for them. Fruits in Greatest Varieties. The fruits are even more novel than the flowers, hardly any of the northern varieties being found in the Philippines. The mango is found in its perfection and the banana will win favor from those who have never cared for it before. Paw-paws, shaddocks, oranges, lemons, limes, citrons, guavas, pineapples, cocoanuts, figs, grapes and tama- rinds are names most of them familiar to us at home, although the fruit in the Philippines is superior. Less familar dainties are the durien, the finest fruit of all, which has an exquisite flavor, but an odor like that oflimburger cheese, the chica, the lomboy, the loquot, the mangosteen, the lanzon, custard apples, the santol, bread fruit, jack- fruit, the mabolo, the laichee, the macapa and the avocado or alligator pear. The forests of the Philippines contain an inexhaustible supply of woods of many valuable sorts, which offer commercial opportunities as soon as the islands are opened for development.. Perhaps no commer- cial opportunity is better than the one that will be found in the forests The woods range from the quick-growing palm to the hard woods that require a century for their full development. Many are 11>6 ISLAXD GEOaEAPHY, CONDITIONS AND RESOURCES. of remarkable beauty in color and grain, taking a high polish and undergoing the heaviest strains or severest wear without susceptible damage. The narra or Philippine mahogany is a beautiful wood, which grows to very great size. The banaba is hard, tough, and of a beau- tiful rose-pink color. There are many ebony trees of fine quality. The lanotan is often called ivory wood on account of the remarkable resem- blance it bears to ivory. A dozen others might be named, each with special qualities which give it great value and each found in quantity sufficient to justify deal- ing in it as a business enterprise. Under the Sj)anish regime the im- mense natural wealth in timber has not brought one-tenth of the in- come to the colony that it would under better conditions of trade. Yet, notwithstanding red tape and costly governmental interference, the profit is so large that a steady trade is done by Manila and Iloilo with other parts of the world. Mineral Wealth of the Islands. Three objects of search stimulated the energy and the cupidity of those monarchs of the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries who fostered the exploration of remote lands and seas. They wished to discover new races which might be converted to Christianity for their own glory and the aggrandizement of the Church; they sought the islands that would produce rich spices and silks in order to pour the treasures of the Orient into their own coffers and their own kingdoms; further- more, they wanted to find gold and other precious metals which tradi- tion always locates in the least known and least iiceessible countries. Less attention, however, has been given by Spanish explorers to the mineral wealth of the Philippine islands than to any other phase of their natural riches. The Spanish government throughout almost the entire period of its possession, has not only refused to examine and develop its own resources, but has actually discouraged every one else who has attempted to do what it declines to do itself. Grold has long been known to exist in the Philippines, and was mined by the natives long before the Spanish discovered them. They say that the yellow metal has been extracted from the rocks and the soil from time immemorial, and they still continue to dig it in a hap- hazard way, using the rudest and most wasteful methods. They know ISLAND GEOGRAPHY, CONDITIONS AND KESOURCES. 197 nothing of amalgamation, nor do they understand the value of pyritie ores. They have neither powder nor dynamite, and work only rich quartz and alluvial deposits. For the latter they use washboards and ilat wooden moulds, losing all the float-gold. The gold-bearing quartz is crushed by hand or ground between heavy stones turned by buffaloes and is then washed. The shafts are bailed by lines of workmen who pass small water-buCkets from man to man. Even by these primitive methods, they obtain the precious metal in considerable quantities. Chinese Interests in the Mines. The gold of the Philippines was better known in the past than it is to-day. The Chinese books refer to the archipelago as a land of gold and many precious ores, and as a matter of fact one can learn more about the mineral resources of the country in Hong Kong than in Manila. As early as 1572 there were mines in North Camarines, which lies to the southeast of Luzon, and in the same century the natives practiced quartz mining in northern Luzon. In 1620 an army officer found out that some half-caste Chinese were extracting large quantities of gold from mines in the provinces of Ilocos and Pangasinan, in north- ern Luzon. The Chinese were attacked and killed, but the victorious soldiers never found the mines. Within recent years gold deposits were found on the east coast of Mindanao, and the captain of a steamer trading in that neighborhood reported that the output of the washings was at least ten pounds a day and that nearly all of it went to Chinese traders. Even in Manila province the natives washed the sand in the river near Montalban and obtained enough gold dust to pay them for their trouble. The Sulu warriors bring gold dust and nuggets to Borneo and claim that there is an inexhaustible supply on their island and Basilan. Valuable deposits of gold have been found in several other islands of the group. There are old alluvial workings in Cebu, and Mindanao has rich gold-bearing quartz in addition to its placer mines. On Panaon there is known to be at least one vein of gold-bearing quartz. The name of Mindoro is said to be derived from mina de oro (gold mine), and natives often offer travelers in that island a chance to see places where.rich deposits are found. 198 ISLAND GEOGRAPHY, CONDITIOXS AND RESOURCES. Foreign Capital Interested. No serious and systematic effort ever has been made to develop the great mineral wealth of the Philippines. There have been spas- modic attempts at different times, but they have almost invariably re- sulted in failure, owing to insufficient means of transportation, the dif- ficulty in securing labor, and especially to lack of capital. Within the last few years a British company called the Philippines Mineral Syndi- cate, Limited, has been conducting systematic explorations, and it is from their reports that the accompanying information has been taken. The operations of the syndicate have proved the alluvial deposits in Luzon to be extensive as well as rich, while the auriferous formation from which they have been derived is believed to extend throughout the "backbone" of the island. The mountain peoples nearly all traffic in gold. Many of the deposits on the Pacific slopes of Luzon are very near the sea, and it is fair to believe that if modern ma- chinery were introduced and transportation lines opened, the Philip- pines might become a great gold-producing center. Silver is found in the Philippines, though not to so wide an extent as gold. There are very large deposits of silver lead at Acsubing, Panoypoy, and Riburan on the island of Cebu. There is galena, bearing both gold and silver, in Dapitan and Iligan, in the island of Mindanao. Other Minerals Found in Abundance. True coal has not been discovered in the Philippines, but very ex- tensive beds of excellent lignite have been found in Luzon, Cebu, Mas- bate, Mindanao, Negros, and Mindoro. Experimental tests have shown it to be a fairly satisfactory fuel for steamers, and nothing except the complete lack of suitable means of transportation prevents the develop- ment of these deposits. Although a large supply of coal has been maintained at Manila, which has been imported from Great Britain Australia and Japan, the Spanish administration has preferred to pay ten or twelve dollars a ton for 25,000 tons every year rather than build a small railway on the island of Cebu from Compostella to the coast, which would deliA-er the lignite in unlimited amounts at a cost of not PERFORATED BY SHELLS This house, which stands immediately in rear of American trenches, shows the effect of gun fire. EMILIO AGUINALDO This portrait was taken at the outbreak of the insurrection against Spain, when Aguinaldo was younger both in age and experience than he is to-day. ISLAND GEOGRAPHY, CONDITIONS AND RESOURCES. 201 more than |1.50 a, ton. It is hardly to be doubted that systematic ex- ploration would lead to the discovery of true coal. Copper ore occurs in Luzon and Mindanao in large outcrops and is utilized by the natives, but it has not been successfully mined by Europeans. In Mindanao there are also quicksilver, platinum and tin. Iron ore of excellent quality, yielding up to 85 per cent of pure metal, exists in Luzon, and other excellent iron districts are found elsewhere in the island. In the last century, iron mines were worked with great success in Morong, but were finally closed by the government on the ground that the workmen, who were Chinese, were not Christians. The luckless owner was obliged to send all these workmen to China at his own expense, and the government refused to pay him for the iron.he had already delivered, on the ground that he had insulted the Church in employing pagans. The iron mines of Angap in Bulacan are richer and purer than the best Spanish ore, which is so popular in the iron foundries of England. Valuable Discoveries and Future Development. In different parts of the archipelago, large deposits of sulphur and arsenic are found, in the volcanic regions sometimes of the utmost purity and sometimes mixed with copper and iron. Explorers report valuable discoveries of slate, borax, plumbago, granite, coral rocks, sandstone and limestone. There are deposits of gypsum on a small island opposite the village of Culasi in western Panay and also Min- doro. Large beds of good marble are found both in Luzon and Eom- hlon. Mines of natural paint, probably red lead, are found in Mindoro. Petroleum occurs in several of the islands, one of the best districts being in western Cebu near Toledo, where free flowing wells have been opened. Once American industry and enterprise obtain a foothold in the Philippines and enough discoveries are made to stimulate more active search, it seems reasonably certain that valuable mineral wealth will be found in commercial quantities. It has been the history of the world that the discovery of gold was the most influential factor possible in inducing rapid immigration, settlement and the development of civili- zation and all its kindred industries. California, Australia, South Africa and Alaska are the latest and most notable examples of this historical truth. CHAPTEE XL MANILA AND LUZON UNDEE SPANISH EULE. The Walls of the Ancient City — Picturesque Parks and Public Grounds — The Chinese and Their Work — Tragic Memories of the Luneta — Beauties of the Night — Amusements of the Natives — Italian Opera and American Circus — Spanish Bull Fights and English Horse Eaces — The Hotels of the City — Native Shops and Their Keepers — The Town of Cavite — Steamship Service of the Island. Like nearly all Oriental cities the ancient Manila was enclosed by a wall which gave it protection from attacks of foes. The city outgrew this boundary many years ago, and the neglected fortifications have long since ceased to be regarded as of any use. However effective they may have been in centuries gone by in protecting the people against invaders, they would be of no avail against modern military methods and implements of war. Fortunate it was for the Spaniards and equally fortunate for the tourist who is to come, that Admiral Dewey did not find it necessary to bombard the place on that August day when General Merritt's forces entered the city. On the northern side of the walled city the river serves as a moat and on the west the waters of Manila bay approach the walls. On the other two sides moats have been constructed which can be filled with water in the event of an attack. The last time they w^ere em- ployed was in the war with Great Britain in 1762, when General Draper ' captured the city. The walls altogether encircling the city measure more than two miles in length and are from ten to twenty feet thick. Ancient cannon of picturesque pattern are mounted on top, some of them dating from the end of the thirteenth century. There are, how- ever, a few modem guns. The masonry of these fortifications has proved its worth. It has withstood the onset of many an assault in olden time, while the hun- dreds of earthquake shocks that have shaken it have done little damage. The moats have been the receptacle of stagnant water and refuse for S02 MANILA AND LUZON UNDER SPANISH RULE. 203 many a year and must have been a source of much of the fever which has oppressed the city. Within this wall were the Spanish forces who were surrendered by their commander to Dewey and Merritt when de- fense was no longer possible. The walled city has eight gates equipped with portcullis and draw- bridge after the medieval fashion, but for fifty years they have not been raised. Within the walls are found many .of the government offices, a post-office and telegraph office, the old custom house, convents, col- leges, a cathedral, eleven churches, an observatory and an arsenal. Many shops and small stores are situated here. Picturesque Parks and Public Gardens. The old city of Manila offers picturesque sights for the tourist, but is not the one where he would choose to stay after he had exhausted the sights. In the "new" city outside the walls there are more cleanli- ness, more fresh air, more modern buildings, and a number of veiy pretty parks and public gardens. This is on the other side of the Pagig river from the walled city and is known as Binondo, a great trading center, where all the foreign merchants have their places of business. Here many of the streets are fairly well paved and in some instances as wide as those we are accustomed to at home. The retail shops are nearly all in the hands of Chinese merchants, many of them of great wealth and prominence. Their countrymen of humbler station are seen on every street, performing much of the manual labor of the city. Chinese coolies carry burdens, drive carts and do much of the heaviest work. Chinese tradesmen are the leaders in most of the mechanical industries and trades, this in spite of the fact that Chinese labor is supposed to be discountenanced by the people and the laws as they have existed under the Spanish rule. The great show places of Manila are the Santa Lucia and the Luneta. These drives run from the Pasig river, along the sea front of the walled city, and then out across the immense open parade ground- which separates the walls of Manila from the suburbs of Ermita. They are practically one continuous road, but the mile that fronts the city walls is called the Lucia and the broader oval park-like extension is the Luneta. Rows of waving, stubby palm trees mark the edges of the drives and electric-light poles line the borders throughout their entire 204 MANILA AKD LUZON UNDER SPANISH RULE. length. In the old days these avenues were famous for their beauty and display. It is doubtful whether any other city in the Orient could rival them for brilliance and fashionable luxury. Tragic Memories of the Luneta. It is also doubtful whether another drive exists which is so grim in tragic memories as the beautiful Luneta. Hundreds of Filipinos have been executed there. In the mornings the crowds would throng the drives to see the Filipinos shot and in the evening they would gather again to hear the music at the bandstand. But the war stopped all of that. The Luneta became neglected as the insurgents kept advanc- ing closer and closer to the borders of the city. The Spanish officials who had robbed and murdered to their hearts' content were afraid to venture out at night beyond the walls of the city for fear of being assassinated by natives who hungered for revenge. Strong barricades were built at the corner of the walled city just where the Lucia merges into the broader Luneta, and the Spaniards never ventured beyond that barricade of railroad iron and sacks of earth. When the Americans took the city it was days and days before the proud Spaniards would show themselves. In the evening when the sun is sinking behind the Mariveles moun- tains the wealth and fashion of Manila emerge from the gloomy streets of the walled city and show themselves on dress parade on the water front. Carriages roll up and down and back and forth through the short length of the Lucia. Rows of other vehicles are drawn up along the edges, the occupants smoking and lazily watching the passing show. Pretty women, bareheaded, and dressed in cool, refreshing white, look enchanting to one who has seen nothing but yellow and brown Malay girls all summer and whose experience in society has been confined to young, barefooted Philippine ladies who smoked cigars and wore gauze waists with rags reefed around them. Beauties of a Summer Night. The surf rolls in long curling ridges, the palm trees wave in the fresh evening air, the ships of the fleet lying out in the bay twinkle with lights, and the Mariveles mountains and Corregidor away to the west fade into MANILA AND LUZON UNDER SPANISH RULE. 205 purple shadows. Wliea the full moon comes out it lights up the domes and towers of the city and spreads a radiance of white across the bosom of the bay. The air is full of the music of crickets and grasshoppers, and the fragrance of flowers steals out of the verdure along the drive. The Americans take little part in the showy display which comes each evening along the Santa Lucia. Occasionally a soldier in service-worn buff clatters along on a little Philippine horse, but there has been no general inclination to mix with the brilliant show on the avenue. Dr. Farrell, one of the surgeons of the 1st California, as- tounded the Spaniards by appearing on the Lucia driving a carriage four-in-hand. When it is considered that the Spanish laws here forbid any one besides the archbishop and the governor-general appearing behind a four-in-hand, the extent of the sensation that Dr. Farrell caused may be imagined. At 8 o'clock it is all over, for that is the dinner hour in Manila. The carriages gradually disappear within the somber sallyports of the old moss-covered walls. At 8:30 hardly one remains, and then the Lucia and Luneta are quiet. Only an occasional caromata rattles over the beautiful drive. Between the Luneta and the district of the city where the work- ing classes live, the contrast is startling. The filth of the latter is ap- palling and the houses are hovels crowded with human beings, animals and vermin. Here start the epidemics which are so fatal to the city population. Modern Improvements are Found. The public improvements of the city have not been as meager as might have been expected. There is an excellent system of waterworks and a fairly good fire department. Fortunately the comforts that are most essential are the least expensive, and consequently in reach of many people. Rents are very low; servant hire is so cheap that one can have a retinue at the cost of a single house maid at home. Carriages and horses are likewise inexpensive, whether one keeps his own vehicles or hires them at his will. The equipages, however, are very queer in appear- ance measured by American standards, and the horses by no means equal to those Ave drive at home. The sports of Manila are materially different from those to which we are accustomed, for their favorites have been bull-fighting and 206 MANILA AND LUZON UNDER SPANISH RULE. cock-fighting. The bull ring of Manila, in the suburb of Paco, draws great crowds when the entertainment is offered, in spite of the fact that the performances are by no means spirited. Neither Spanish bull fighters nor Spanish bulls are brought to the island, so that native talent has to be obtained to play both roles. The bulls are timid and lazy, the bull-fighters are little better, so that the traveler does not see bull- fighting of the same sort that he would in Spain, Cuba or Mexico. The Sports of the Natives. Cock-fighting, on the other hand, is maintained at as high a station as its rival is low. The clergy of the island have been among the best patrons of the sport. They are successful breeders, skillful handlers and regular .bettors. The galleries are always well patronized and on Sundays and feast daj^s crowded to suffocation. Music and the drama are popular in some forms and in others are neglected. The three theaters of Manila give rather dull performances of comedies, farces and melodramas. When the city is visited by real dramatic companies from Hong Kong or by an Italian opera company, patronage is generous. Military music is specially favored by the peo- ple and some of it is of more than average quality. The Filipinos have organized at least one notably fine band of ninety pieces. The most popular of all amusements brought by strangers to the city is the American circus. As is well known, every circus in the far East is called American in order to obtain the advertising which ac- companies the name. When these organizations come to Manila from Hong Kong or Amoy, they are almost overwhelmed by the warmth of their reception. No company plays a shorter season than three weeks, while some remain two and three times that lone. Race Week in Manila. Horse-racing in Manila is directed by the jockey club, which holds a week of races every year. The membership includes nearly all of the European and American colony, as it was constituted before the war. The club has a fine track and generous purses are awarded. The riding is done by gentlemen jockeys, there being no professionals in the country. The animals are very small, much after the fashion of Ameri- MANILA AND LUZON UNDER SPANISH RULE. 207 can polo ponies, but the races are popular and afford excellent sport for the social world. The club entertains liberally during the race week. The water front of Manila affords interesting and picturesque sights for the stranger. The anchorage is usually crowded with steamers and sailing vessels. In the river, huge cargo barges or light- ers move slowly up stream conveying freight from the vessels in the harbor to the warehouses on shore. Along the banks of the river are the smaller steamers, schooners and other craft from the island provinces, which are of sufficiently light draft to cross the bar and reach the docks. Then there are huge canoes, small dug-outs, ferry- boats for Cavite and places up the river, so that the scene is always a busy one. When the passenger lands there is the same clamor for the privi- lege of driving him to the hotels that results from cabmen's rivalry the world over. There are three styles of carriages for rent in Manila. These are the two-horse carruage or barouche, the quells and the caro- mata. The carruage is the eminently proper thing to take. The quells is a little square two-wheeled trap, with the driver perched up in front and seats for four inside. The caromata or native cart, with its one dilapidated pony and rope harness, is a top-heavy, two-wheeled institur tion which continually threatens to overturn. The driver rides inside with the passengers, sometimes sitting in their laps. The Hotels of the City. There are various hotels in Manila with varying degrees of ex- cellence, although none satisfy an exacting American traveler who is unwilling to put up with Filipino customs. The best hotels in the city are the H6tel de I'Orient and Hotel de I'Europe, either of which will answer till something better is constructed. The others, however pre- tentious their names may be, such as H6tel de Madrid, Hotel de I'Uni- verse and La Catalanta, are of the next grade lower and hardly to be considered by the American traveler. As a result of danger of earthquakes, one seldom sees build- ings more than two stories high and the heavy tile roofs formerly in use have been replaced by lighter ones of galvanized iron. The con- sequence of this is that the heat within the houses, radiated from the roofs, sometimes becomes intense. Window glass is little used in the 208 MANILA AND LUZON UNDER SPANISH RULE. houses. Little squares of translucent oyster shells are used instead^ which soften the glare of the tropical sun. The sides of upper stories in the houses are often constructed almost entirely of frames filled with these little shells so arranged that they can be slid back, thus throwing the entire room open to the breeze. The living rooms are almost in- variably in the second storj^ the ground floor being used for servants' quarters, shops, offices or store-rooms. Many of the streets of Manila are wretchedly paved or not paved at all. They are inadequately lighted, some by kerosene lamps and others even by wicks suspended in dishes of cocoanut oil. There is, however, an electric system, which is being extended rapidly. Diminutive street cars, each drawn by a single pony, run on two different lines into the suburbs. The principal business street is the Escolta, where the Span- ish, French and German stores are located. They have carried fair assortments of European goods, but the prices have been high on ac- count of the excessive import duties. The Chinese shops, on the other hand, are mostly found on the Rosario, another important business street. The city is entirely without any adequate system of drainage. Canals radiate from the Pasig river in various directions and into these the filth of the city is dumped whenever it is not allowed to accumulate about the houses. The Natives Inveterate Gamblers. The Manila lottery was one of the notable institutions of the islands, the Spanish government formerly deriving from it an annual profit of half a million dollars, the tickets being distributed not only through- out the archipelago, but in Hong Kong and along the China coast. The inborn gambling instinct of the Filipino is thus fostered and nu;ny a poor fellow spends his last cent for lottery tickets and then goes to jail for not paying his taxes. Estimates of the population of Manila have been varied and doubtful. The most authentic information, however, places the total population at about 300,000, of which natives number 200,000. The Chinese are credited with 40,000 of the remainder, the Chinese half-breeds 45,000, the Spanish and Spanish Creoles 5,000, the Spanish half-castes about as many, and the Europeans and Americans other than Spanish about 400. Kearly all Europeans wear white duck suits over very thin under- MANILA AND LUZON UNDER SPANIHH RULE. 209 wear. The Chinaman sticks to his national costume, while the people of mixed blood almost invariably adopt the native dress, which for men consists of hat, shirt, pantaloons and slippers. The dress of the native women is very pretty when good materials are used, and so well adapted to the climate that many European and American women adopt it for their home attire. It consists of a thin waist, called the camisa, with huge flowing sleeves; a more or less highly embroidered white chemise showing through the camisa ; a large kerchief folded about the neck with ends crossed and pinned on the breast; a gayly colored skirt with long train and a square of black cloth drawn tightly around the body from waist to knees. Stockings are not worn as a rule and the slippers which take the place of shoes have no heels and no uppers except for a narrow strip of leather over the toes. It is an art to walk in these without losing them, but the native belles contrive to dance in them and feel greatly chagrined if they lose their foot-gear in the operation. Attractive Native Women. Many of the Mestiza or half-caste women and girls are very attrac- tive, and, like the native women, they have beautiful hair, which not in- frequently reaches to their heels and of which they are inordinately proud. They also take pride in small feet, if they happen to possess them, and it is not at all unusual to see slippers which are quite too small for their owners and leave some of the toes dangling helplessly outside. On account of the climate, which is conducive to indolence, nearly everybody who can afford the, time takes a nap or siesta in the middle of the day. Meals and business alike are arranged to suit this custom and the hours of labor are not burdensome in any calling. Coffee and fruit are served in the early morning. An exceedingly light breakfast is provided about 8 o'clock. Tiffin, which is a substantial luncheon with several hot dishes, is taken at noon, and dinner is served at 8 o'clock in the evening. In deference to the earthquake and the typhoon, architecture in Manila takes peculiar forms. The only high buildings are the churches, and these are built with very thick walls. The public buildings are heavy and gloomy. In the business quarter the houses are of two 210 MANILA AND LUZON UNDER SPANISH EULE. stories with enormously thick walls and partitions. The Malay bunga- lows in the suburbs are one-story, supported with tiles or stone founda- tions and covered with thatch. In the Chinese quarter the buildings are chiefly one-story and where two-storied have the lower one of great solidity and the upper one so light as to be almost fragile. Another enemy of houses never to be ignored is the white ant. This energetic creature, as well as two or three of his allies, is so vo- racious that the wooden beams and floors of houses frequently must be renewed after their attacks. Every effort has been made by the people to avert the ravages of the ants; they have tried varnishing the woods and painting them with poisonous compounds, on all of which the ants seem to thrive. There are some woods which are less subject to the pest than others, but none is entirely exempt. Arrangement of the Dwellings. Houses follow the example of those in Spain and the Spanish- American countries for their interior arrangement. Almost always the dwelling is built around an open quadrangle or else there is a drive- way through the house with a courtyard in the interior or at the rear of the building. Sometimes the house sits back from the street, se- cluded by a high wall. Booms, halls, carriageway and courtyard are smoothly paved with blocks of stone brought from quarries in China. The walls are covered with whitewash and stone staii-ways lead to the second floor, where the choicer living apartments always are found. Windows and doors are left open as much as possible and refreshing breezes moderate the heat of nearly all seasons. It requires no exer- tion on the part of a householder to make his home beautiful. Nature will do it all. Mosses, vines and flowers cover every wall, and trees sprout everywhere, all with blossoms and blazes of color in every place, expected and unexpected. Stocks of goods kept by the merchants of Manila are small, because of the excessive and indiscriminate taxation which was applied under the Spanish regime. The dealer made as little display as possible, in order to avoid the appearance of wealth and consequent taxation. How- ever, the stocks of goods are now fairly well selected and anything ordered can be obtained promptly from the bonded warehouses. Cloth- ing for men and women alike is made to order in less time than any- MANILA AND LUZON UNDER SPANISH RULE. 211 where else on earth, and the goods themselves are brought to the home of the customer for selection instead of requiring a shopping expedition. Native Merchants and Their Wares. Silver and gold jewelry, made by native workmen and sold in the stores of Manila, is peculiarly interesting and attractive. Basket- work of all sorts and fancy matting are other offerings of the shops of peculiar interest to strangers. Confections of guava and other fruits prepared with native sugar, appeal to those fond of sweet- meats. Chinese stores offer fans of all sorts from the highest to the lowest price. Parasols and umbrellas, which are required by every- one, whether in dry or rainy seasons, form a large part of the wares of the shopkeepers. Altogether, the stranger in Manila may find plenty of novelties to buy for souvenirs of his journej'-, characteristic of the country and exceedingly interesting to the people at home. One of the most interesting spots of Manila is the old Paco ceme- tery, with its massive walls suggestive rather of a defense for the liv- ing than of a last refuge for the dead. The cemetery is in a circular space inclosed by a huge wall of masonry eight or nine feet thick and ten feet high. The only entrance is through a gate of iron and wood of great strength, whicli still further adds to the appearance of fortifi- cation. Within this circular wall is a second wall built in the same manner, presenting a solid front to the exterior. The interior is a honeycomb of crypts in which the cofiins of the dead are placed, the entrance being sealed by small ornamental tablets of stone bearing the names of the dead. In many of the crypts there is a double door, the outer one being of glass, through Avhich quaint images of the Virgin and the infant Christ or some other decoration such as rudely fashioned artificial flowers are seen. Each crypt rents for about |35 yearly — a small fortune for these people — and when the inmate is for- gotten or the relatives become impoverished or for any reason this rental is unpaid the remains are immediately swept from the tomb and cast into a common receptacle for all like unfortunates. The Town of Cavite. Just southwest of the province of Manila lies the province of Cavite, which is one of the most important on the island of Luzon. At the 212 MANILA AND LUZON UNDEE SPANISH RULE, uorthern end of the province the land runs out into Manila bay in a long peninsula, which in turn divides into two smaller ones pointing towaM the mainland. This is the site of the city of Cavite, which, be- sides being the capital of the province, also has been the northern naval station of the Philippine government. Here was the scene of the de- struction of the Spanish fleet by the American squadron under Ad- miral Dewey. The city of Cavite is about eight miles and a half from Manila, measuring in a straight line across the bay, and is connected with the capital by frequent ferryboats. Luzon, with an area of 42,000 square miles, includes more than a third of the total extent of the land surface of the Philippine islands. In its northern portion are extensive chains of lofty mountains with many volcanic peaks, active and interesting. One of them, the Mayon volcano, in Albay province, is a perfect cone rising to a height of more than ten thousand feet. The volcano of Taal, on the other hand, in the same range, is one of the lowest active volcanoes known. In Luzon are river and lake systems second only to those of Mindanao. The Bio Grande de Cagayan, which rises near the center of the island, flows into the ocean at the northern extremity and drains an immense area of great fertility. Here is grown the best tobacco raised -in the archipelago. The river is navigable for some distance, although the bar at the mouth obstructs the entrance for steamers of more than ten feet draft. The Pantanga river also rises in South Caraballo mountain but flows in the opposite direction, emptying into Manila bay by a delta with more than twenty mouths. The low ground along its banks is extensively cultivated and produces good crops of rice and sugar cane. ^b'- Water Courses of Luzon. The Laguna de Bay, which is but a few miles inland from Manila, is the largest body of fresh water in the archipelago, although some of the Mindanao lakes approach it closely in size. Its greatest length is twenty-five miles and its greatest breadth twenty-one. It empties into Manila bay by the Pasig river, which separates the newer portion of the capital from the old, and is navigable to the lake for small, flat- bottomed steamers. Lake Bombon, from the center of which rises Taal volcano, measures fourteen by eleven miles. MANILA AND LUZON UNDER SPANISH RULE. 213 The natural resources of Luzon are enormous. Rich deposits of gold and other valuable minerals have long been known to exist. The soil is very productive and yields the greater part of the sugar raised in the archipelago, together with hemp, coffee, cacao, rice, to- bacco, and, in fact, all the more important staple products of the colony. Luzon is the most populous island of all the Philippine archipelago, some estimates as to the numbers of its inhabitants running as high as 5,000,000. The most important of the numerous tribes into which the people are divided are the Tagalogs and the Ilocanos. Both are civil- ized and as a rule orderly, although brigandage is not uncommon in the Tagalog territory. It is from this tribe that the greater part of Aguinaldo's support in the insurrection of the Filipinos has been drawn. In a later chapter on the people of the Philippines, more detailed in- formation will be included on the races inhabiting this island. The absence of proper railway facilities is not as great a handicap in the Philippines as it might be in some other countries, for the remark- ably irregular coast-line and the extended interior water systems en- able the traveler to reach the greater part of the archipelago by boat. There are little, light-draft steamboats which go almost everywhere and which charge very low fares, while upon every navigable stream, lake and bay are small boats which can be hired for an insignificant sum. Steamship Service of the Island. A steamer runs from Manila northward along the west coast of Luzon nearly to Cape Bojeador. At any one of several ports the traveler who is willing to undergo discomfort may begin an excursion into the interior of the island, where scenery of great beauty will be found and native manners and customs may be studied in their most primitive condition. There is very little danger to the traveler in the extreme north along the coast, for the natives are hospitable to the limit of their means and quite docile. The country is little culti- vated by civilized methods except in the more accessible portions. CHAPTER Xn. THE CENTEAL ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAGO. The Visayan Archipelago — On an Island Steamer- — A Typical Spanish Town — A Fort Without a Gun — Yellow Journalism in the Philippines — Beautiful Women Who Smoke — Cebu and Its Commercial Import- ance — The Island of Panay — ^The Sulu Sea and Its Boundaries — Prim- itive Modes of Life in Palawan — Among the Savage Tribes. Second to Manila in commercial importance and population is the city of Iloilo, which is situated on the island of Panay. Panay is one of that group of islands lying north of the great island of Mindanao and south of the eastern portion of Luzon, known as the Visayan archipelago. Other important islands of the group are Guimaras, Negros, Cebu, Bohol, Samar and Leyte. Iloilo came into familiarity because of its importance in the Spanish- insurgent complications. After the capture of Manila by the American forces, Iloilo was the seat of Spanish government in the Philippines. It was then surrounded by the insurgents, who besieged the city until the Spanish commander surrendered to them. This situation was a con- siderable puzzle to the American authorities in the island. It placed the insurgent forces in possession of the second city in the archipelago, with an ample supply of arms and ammunition. They proceeded to organize a government of their own, quite distinct from that of which Aguinaldo was the head, announcing it as the Visayan republic. When American troops were hurried to Iloilo from Manila, 300 miles away, they were forbidden the privilege of landing and the situation became more than critical. This was at the time the ratification of the treaty of peace with Spain was under discussion in the United States Senate and the stn.te of affairs at Iloilo was brought into particular prominence. There was a general sentiment of reluctance throughout the country to see American arms turned against an insurgent body who had expelled their enemies from the second stronghold of the island, and were standing upon their rights as victors over the Spanish to demand consideration and inde- 214 THE CENTRAL ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAGO. 215 pendence. Let Mr. McOutcheon, the artist correspondent, describe his interesting journey from Manila to Iloilo, made last September, when conditions were strained but before the insurgents had taken the city. On An Island Steamer. "The trip between the two cities is one of the most charming ex- periences that a traveler could ever hope for. Some day, when the army of tourists invades the Philippines and the red guidebook and the personally conducted tour become established features, there will be pages and pages in the steamship prospectuses devoted to it. The island sea of Japan, the Thousand Islands of the St. Lawrence, the castle- capped peaks of the Rhine and the beautiful Golden Horn of Turkey will- have a new rival. During the forty hours that it takes one of the small steamers of the Compania Maritima to make the run, the sight of land is never lost, and the scene is constantly shifting, and is always new and wonderful. The vessel passes by dozens of islands, every one of which is glorious in the richness of its foliage, the splendor of its mountain sides or the dazzling whiteness of its long stretch of sandy beach. Sometimes you are in a narrow channel, with great uplifts of brilliant green rising on either hand; then you are carried into an open sea, with only the blue hills of distant islands breaking the serene horizon or clusters of waving palm trees or some lonely coral atoll swimming on the skyline like a mirage on the desert. On one side may be the lofty purple heights of an island mountain range, standing out against the angry, ominous blackness of the storm clouds which seem to be everlastingly rioting in imposing tumult around the crests; on the other side may be gleaming strips of beach, with tangles of trop- ical verdure lining them; then long, easy slopes of rich, brilliant moun- tain sides fading away to a jagged skyline of distant blue. There are several volcanoes that are active, and may be marked by the hazy smoke that lifts lazily against the clouds. "Just now there are very few vessels venturing on the run, for the Compania Maritima, which is a Spanish concern, has only two of its vessels put under the American flag, and those that carry the Span- ish flag are afraid to venture out of Manila or Iloilo for fear of the insurgent steamers that lie in hiding among the coves of the archi- pelago waiting to dash out and seize any floating thing that shows the red and vellow at its peak. 216 THE CENTRAL ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAGO. "In company with three other correspondents, I started for Iloilo several days ago. Up to this time no American had made the trip since peace was declared, and we had a good deal of curiosity to know how we would be received. The officers of the Buluan, one of the Spanish steamers recently placed under our flag as an insurance against insurgent attack, looked on us with considerable suspicion, for they were all Spanish and in wholesome fear of the governor-general now at Iloilo. "Mr. Balfour, a young Scotchman and manager of the Iloilo branch of the Hong Kong and Shanghai bank, was the only other pas- senger on board who spoke English. As the vessel reached the island of Panay and steamed along down the coast he pointed out the posi- tions held by the insurgents. When she reached Concepcidn, the place of the farthest advance of the revolutionary forces, th^ Spaniards looked with anxious eagerness at the distant shore line and the word 'insurrecto' occurred with much frequency. It was noticed, too, that with Mr. Balfour there was a disposition to conduct all references to the present operations on the island in a decided undertone. A Typical Spanish Town. "Iloilo was reached in the middle of the afternoon. It is a typical tropical Spanish town, situated on a flat, sandy point of land which juts out into the strait. Guimaras island lies two miles to the east- ward, and beyond it were the volcanic mountains of Negros island. A number of Spanish vessels were lying in the harbor and a greater number could be seen in the river. A small boat came out of the river and approached the Buluan. As she stopped alongside, the pilot came aboard and made preparations to take the vessel into the river, but when he found that there were Americans on board he proceeded im- mediately back to the town. There was a long wait, and then we realized that an obstacle had evidently reared its horrid front and that an objection had been advanced regarding our landing. The Spaniards on board, who were delayed in landing, regarded us with pronounced disfavor. The captain then came to us and through Mr. Balfour informed us that we would have to produce passports and official credentials from General Otis. As we had none, and, in fact, had never even thought that there might be a necessity for such things, '4?; THE CENTRAL ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAGO. 219 we began to entertain the prospect of being compelled to go back to Manila without landing, "A steam launch finally came out of the river and bore down on the Buluan. Presently a Spanish officer came aboard, and a long and earnest conversation was held between him and the captain. After some minutes we were informed by Mr. Balfour that it would be neces- sary for us to get permission from the governor-general allowing us to land. He kindly volunteered to see the British consul and endeavor to obtain that permission. The launch then steamed back to the city with him on board, and it was noticed with some interest that armed carabinieros were left on the ship, two posted at each gangway. There was a terrific wait. At nearly 6 o'clock the vessel got permission to proceed, and about 6:30 she drew up at the wharf in Iloilo river. We were then informed that we would be permitted to land and that the governor-general wished to see us at once. We were allowed to land our small luggage, and through the courtesy of the port officials it was not examined. An Interview with the Governor-General. "Our cards were at once sent to the governor and we were asked to come to him early in the morning. There were no hotels in town, but the English residents took us in with a kindness and hospitality that over- whelmed us. Early the following morning a small delegation of Amer- icans was ushered into the presence of Governor-General Rios at the official palace. The general is a large man of imposing military pres- ence, and was courteous in the extreme. It was explained through an interpreter that the visitors were American newspaper representatives, who were charmed with the beauty of the islands, and who wished before returning to America to make a trip among the southern islands. The general volunteered every courtesy,^ and offered lettei:s of intro- duction to various governors in Mindanao and the Sulu group, but he explained that steamers were running very irregularly, and that he did not want us to venture into the interior, out of regard for our per- sonal safety. A Defenseless City. "Conditions in Iloilo were critical. The inhabitants were almost terror-stricken, for the insurgents were expected to attack within two 220 THE CEiSTTEAL ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAGO. days. The town was almost defenseless. An old fort, which Avas ancient a hundred years ago, commanded the harbor, but it spent all its time commanding, for there were no guns mounted in it. A line of stone breastworks extended along the beaches around the town, but they were ridiculous as protection against any force excepting infantry forces, which might attack by swimming across. The river was choked with Spanish steamers that were afraid to venture out under the Span- ish flag. A few troops were scattered through the town, but they were so few and badly organized that they only served to emphasize the fact that the city was practically defenseless. Big bodies of in- surgents were known to be advancing fi'om the north and west, and a titanic effort was being made to collect troops sufficient to stop their ad- vances. There were three Spanish gunboats in the river, the Samar, Mindow and El Cano. The two first named were small and of the same size as the Callao, but the last was much larger. Her engines were in bad order and it was common gossip that if her heaviest guns were fired the shock would shake the ship to pieces. "The day after our visit to the governor a transport arrived from Paragua having 150 troops. It was learned that General Rios was con- centrating all the Spanish forces of the other islands on Panay, in the hope of preventing the fall of the city before the conclusion of the Paris conference. During the following three days other transports arrived with troops, which were at once sent off to a secret destination. The inhabitants were given to understand that the troops were being- sent to relieve other garrisons, but it was found that they in reality were being dispatched to Antigue on the west coast, where the insur- gents were advancing. Waiting for the Blue Jackets. "The English residents of Iloilo were eagerly hoping for the arrival of American warships, feeling that the presence of an American force would prevent the outbreak and massacre that otherwise would surely result. The business interests are all hopeful that the Americans will retain the islands, for they feel that no peace can be expected as long as the Spaniards remain in Iloilo. "The three large towns of the island of Panay are Iloilo, Molo and Jaro, all of which are bunched together down at the southeastern eor- THE OEXTRAL ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAGO. 221 ner. The first named is the big commercial center, where all the Euro- peans live, and it ranks even as great as Manila in the extent of some of its shipping. Along the river and the quay there are immense go- downs filled with hemp, sugar and copra, and in time of peace there are lines of steamers and sailing schooners constantly running between the town and the great sugar and hemp districts of Negros, Mindanao, Leyte and the coasts of the island of Panay itself. Just now there are only occasional steamers plying back and forth, and these fly some flag other than the Spanish flag. "The town of Iloilo is not especially interesting, the most attractive thing about it being that it is a little cooler than Manila. The official residence of the present governor-general of the Philippines overlooks the plaza and is not particularly imposing. On the other side of the plaza are the cathedral and the big building occupied by the priests. The chief business houses are all on the Calle Real, or chief street of the town, and with only two exceptions are owned by Englishmen or Chinese. The Spanish population is usually connected with the gov- ernment or army in some way, or else work for the English. There ai*e three newspapers — the P6rvenir de Bisayas, the Eco de Panay and the Heraldo. The P6rvenir is the only one that is reputable and fairly trustworthy. The Eco is bitter in the most malignant form. On the day we arrived in Iloilo it printed an article stating that the American soldiers in Manila were bloodthirsty and were killing natives and tor- turing them with all kinds of barbarity. This has been the kind of news it has printed since the war began. Native Impressions Concerning Americans. "Among many of the natives of Iloilo there is an established belief that the Americans are Indians with long hair and an abnormal thirst for blood. This impression has existed because most of the natives have never seen an American. As a natural consequence of this the members of our party were objects of a good deal of concern and curiosity. In other words, from the time we heard what Americans were supposed to be in the eyes of the natives we felt that we were a sort of 'exhibit A,' and our object in life was to live down the reputation of our countrymen and show what nice people Americans really are. Mr. Davis and Mr. Bass are not particularly ferocious looking, and I have some hope that his- 222 THE CENTRAL ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAGO. tory will not record me as one wlio lOves slaughter and gloats over the massacre of innocents. These personal confessions may be excused as having a definite bearing on the story. Therefore, in the history of the world there were probably never before three individuals who so com- pletely embodied all the essentials of peacefulness, good behavior and high and lofty conduct as we did while on exhibition during our mission of enlightenment. "There are two banks in Iloilo, the Hong Kong and Shanghai bank and the Banco Filipino Espanol. The former is of course a branch of the great oriental bank of the same name and is almost as strong as the Bank of England. It is a silver bank, however, all its operations being conducted on that basis. Mr. C. H. Balfour, the manager, a first cousin of Robert Louis Stevenson, was once stationed in New York city for six months in the interests of the bank. A Clash with the Authorities. "Mr. Balfour had just brought down from Manila 150,000 Mexican dollars on the Buluan. The Spanish authorities examined this ship- ment very closely. For several years there has been a law prohibiting the circulation of Mexican dollars of a later date than 1877, and as among the present shipment were some of a later date for awhile there was great danger that the shipment would be confiscated by the au- thorities. After some discussion, supported by the high standing of Mr. Balfour with the Spaniards, the shipment was released and sent back to Manila. "There is an English club with a membership of about twenty-five, four or five of whom are Germans, six or eight English and the rest Scotch. Nearly all the Britons in Hoilo happen to be Scotch. Only one caf6 of any pretensions could be found, and that is purely a Spanish caf^, where dashing Castilian officers sit ten or twelve hours a day tell- ing how Sagasta ought to have run things. "About five miles out from Iloilo is Jaro, but it isn't pronounced that way. It sounds as if it were spelled Harrow, and for the first day or two I thought people were talking about the English preparatory school. The road out is beautiful with tropical splendor, but the bridge is broken down and one has a good walk in the blazing sunshine before one reaches Jaro. And after a short residence in Iloilo a perso^t ac'j(u\res THE CENTEAL ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAGO. 223 a wholesome fear of the midday sun. The local foreign residents were earnest in their warnings against exposure to the sun, and about the first thing that is done when down there is to buy a large sun hat which closely resembles a Hindu pagoda. The Market Place in Jaro. "There was the regular Thursday market on in Jaro when we reached the town. A district five or six acres in extent was laid out in irregular lanes of small shelter houses and several hundred natives were thronging up and down these lanes, bargaining and smoking tre- mendous 'cigarros.' The heat was intense, but in spite of the discom- fort of it the experience was one of the most enjoyable and wonderful we had ever been through. Certain sections were devoted entirely to cloth goods, others to hemp ready to be woven into the cloth, others to fish markets, milk, food supplies, baskets, tobacco and dozens of other native commodities. The people were extremely picturesque, and many of the young girls were very beautiful. It was strange to see how general it was for the women to smoke and to see to what gigantic cigars their fancy ran. The cigars were manufactured as occasion demanded, a roll of tobacco being wound about with a string, and the result was that the extemporized cigar looked like a long, ragged torch. "The market lasted all during the forenoon and then the throng be- gan to dwindle away. The long rows of bull carts and caromatas scat- tered all through the country, and at 1 o'clock the scene of our financial conquests was quiet and sleepy and the thatched palm roofs of the nipa shelters slumbered in the deadly heat of the midday sun. "Molo — which, strange as it may seem, is pronounced as it is spelled ^ies off from Iloilo in another direction. This is where the mestizos, or half-castes, live. Chinese who have married Indian girls make Molo their home. It is, like Jaro, a large settlement, and a great number of wealthy Chinese have built it up to quite a respectable and substantial appearance. There are a number of factories there where different native fabrics are woven, but the Philippine idea of a factory is not ours. Three or four looms are in a residence, and the women members of the household go out and weave a piece of cloth whenever the mood possesses them. A purchaser desiring a cloth of a particular color can have it made according to his own design. It takes some time, because 224 THE CENTRAL ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAGO. ia this manana land the natives never believe in doing anything to- morrow that can be put off until dav after to-morrow." An Important Commercial City. Cebu is now the third commercial city of the Philippines and the capital of the island bearing the same name. A line of steamers runs from Iloilo to Cebu in about twenty hours, while a more pretentious line runs from Manila to Cebu direct. For many years this city ranked next to Manila in commercial importance, but Iloilo finally passed it in the race and now stands second. However, until the recent insurrec- tion disturbed all commerce and agriculture, it was still the shipping center for much of the hemp raised in the Visayan islands. The popu- iition is about 10,000 and the foreign community consists only of agencies of two English, one German and three Spanish business houses. One man holds all the foreign consulates and the business houses represent all the insurance companies and banks as well. As the site of the first Spanish settlement in the Philippines Cebu Is a place of some historic interest. From 1565 to 1571 it was the cap- ital of a. colony. Up to 1759 it continued to have a municipal govern- ment, which was then abolished because there was but one Spaniard in the place capable of being a city councilor, while the mayor had recently been turned out of oifice for attempting to extort money from a Chinaman by putting his head in the stocks. The municipal govern- ment was not restored until 1890. The islands of the Visayan group are more than varied in their characteristics of soil, climate and products. They are so near one another that navigation for small boats is easy and frequent, even though some of the channels between the islands are rough. Gruimaras, for instance, which lies opposite Iloilo across a channel only six miles in width, is extremely healthful. It is rough and hilly, but without high mountains. The whole island is covered with a cap of limestone and the soil is apparently poor. Near the sea, cocoanut palms are abundant, and the nuts, with a mild intoxicant made from the sap of the blossom-stalks, are the principal products of the little island. The Island of Panay. The island Af Panay itself, one of the larger of the archipelago, has been almost deaaded of the trees which once covered it, and in the THE CENTEAL ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAGO. 225 Tlcinity of its principal city one finds only swamps, cultivated ground, and immense cogonales. The savage tribes have disappeared w^ith the forest, either yielding to civilization or becoming extinct, but in the high mountains to the northwest, which are little explored, some wood- land and some wild men may yet be found. There have been no valuable mineral deposits discovered in Panay. The soil is fairly fertile over large areas and in some regions is very rich. There are extensive sugar plantations in the Concepci6n dis- trict. Near Capiz large quantities of alcohol are made from the juice of the nipa palm. The blossom-stalk is cut off and the flowing sap caught, placed in large receptacles to ferment and finally distilled. The process is inexpensive and the product of excellent quality. Although Cebu is the third city of commercial importance in the islands, there are other native cities of larger population which are important market towns for agricultural products. Capiz, for in- stance, on the northeast coast of Panay, has a population of more than 25,000, with a Spanish colony of nearly 100. The next neighbor island to the southeastward of Panay is Negros, the principal towns of which are Dumaguete, Bais and Bacalod. Negros is probably the richest island of its size in the archipelago and the fertile lowlands along the coast are extensively cultivated, although much good land still lies idle. Fine tobacco is grown in the Escalahte region, but sugar is the most important crop. Although the most primitive methods of cultivating the cane and extracting the juice are commonly employed, there are a number of fine estates on which comparatively modern machinery is used. The most southerly island of the Visayan group, except the south- ern extremity of Negros itself, is Siquijor, which lies about fifteen miles to the southeast of Dumaguete. One town is named the same as the island and another is called San Antonio, the former on the seashore and the latter on the highest ground in the hills. Like most of the limestone islands of the Philippines, Siquijor is quite free from malaria. Inasmuch as it produces a large quantity of excellent food products and the people are notable in the Philippines for their industry, it is a somewhat desirable place for a short visit. The island of Cebu lies directly east of Negros. The city, which is the capital of the island, has been a bishop's see, as well as the resi- dence of the governor and a general of brigade commanding the gov- 226 THE CENTEAL ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAGO. ernors of all the Visayan islands. Cebu has no high mountains, but the surface of its interior is broken by steep -and rugged hills. The island has been almost denuded of trees, and large areas are grown up in cogonales. The soil, which is often shallow, lies over limestone rocks. There is very little malaria, and the island is, on the whole, exception- ally healthful. There are no wild tribes in Cebu. Brigands infest some districts, but as a rule the people are orderly and noted for their ami- ability and hospitality, A Healthful Climate. Samar, another of the larger Visayans, and, in fact, the third island in size of all the Philippines, has for its capital a town called Catbalo- gan. It is a small, clean town, lying on the north shore of a fine bay on the west coast. Its main business is the buying, curing and baling of hemp. There are several fairly good shops in the place, but it is difficult to obtain food there, as fruit, poultry and eggs are scarce and dear. Fish is very abundant, however, and milk can be obtained daily — a rare luxury in the Philippines. There is a fine beach in front of the town where the surf bathing is delightful. Hemp is the chief product of the island and is raised in considerable quantities. There is also an immense amount of valuable timber still standing. The island is without high mountains, but there are several rivers of some importance. The climate is healthful. These are the islands included in the Visayan republic, organized with Iloilo as capital, when the Spanish commander there surrendered his troops to an insurgent force. The Island of Palawan. Far to the southward of Luzon lies the Sulu sea, forming a great diamond-shaped body of water, of which the angles virtually coincide with the points of the compass. The southwestern side of the figure is bounded by British North Borneo; the southeastern by the Sulu archi- pelago, where the Moros have their stronghold, and by the island of Mindanao, second -in size of the Philippines; the northeast by Negros, Panay and Mindoro; and the northwestern by the island of Palawan and its neighbors. THE CENTRAL ISLANDS OP THE ARCHIPELAGO. 227 This latter island, the fifth in size of all the Philippines, with the smaller ones adjoining it to the north and south, forms one of the greater divisions of the whole archipelago, known by the Spaniards under the name of Islas Adjacentes. Palawan is the native name for the island and the one which is considered geographically correct, al- though the Spaniards long have dubbed it Paragua. The other isl- ands properly included in the same general division are Busuanga, Calamianes, Culion, Nengalao, Linapacan, Cuyo and Dumaran in the northeast, and Balabac in the southwest. The traveler for the Islas Adjacentes sails from Manila on one of the inter-island steamboats, which carry the mail, passengers and freight throughout the archipelago. The first stop in the journey usu- ally is at the Calamianes islands. The same name is applied to one of the provinces, which includes the numerous islands lying between Palawan, Mindoro and Panay. Cuyo is the capital of the same province and the second port of the journey. Here, strangely enough, the popu- lation is composed almost altogether Of women, who consequently monopolize all the trade. They come off to the passenger steamers with fruit, provisions and curios and a man is seldom seen by the traveler. It is so difficult to gain a livelihood in this island that the boys and young men make their escape to more favorable islands as soon they are big enough to shift for themselves, and the result is that ninety per cent of the population are women. A Prosperous Town. Palawan is one of the least known and least settled islands of the Philippine archipelago, of which, except for some little neighbors to the southward, it is the westernmost. The island is nearly 300 miles in length, its breadth ranging from six to thirty-five miles, with an average of twenty miles. The capital is Puerto Princesa, which is situ- ated on the eastern side about midway between the northern and south- ern extremities. The town is a fairly prosperous place, situated on a good-sized bay, which affords safe anchorage. There is a lighthouse which marks the entrance to the excellent harbor and a little slip for repairing vessels. the island of Palawan formerly belonged to the sultan of Borneo. Early in the eighteenth century the Spaniards began to settle its north- 228 THE CENTRAL ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAGO ern end, and in order to protect them from the warlike Moros wlio lived in its southern third, a garrison was established. After being- maintained for a few years, it was left without the necessary supplies and was finally abandoned after many of the troops had perished miser- ably of hunger and want. A few years later the sultan gave the island to the Spanish. Troops were sent under a captain to take formal pos- session. All of them died ultimately, some from eating rotten food and others in war with the Moros. Still later a third garrison was estab- lished at Tay Tay. At first a little settlement grew up around it, which ultimately shared the fate of its predecessor. After centuries of effort to settle the island and protect the set- tlers, a renewed attempt was made on the part of the Spanish authori- ties. In 1885 it was provided by royal order that military posts should be established in Palawan for the protection of prospective settlers. All Spanish subjects Avho should migrate from Spain, as well as all civilized natives who should settle in these islands were promised ex- emption from the payment of tribute for six years. They were also offered free transportation to their destination and were provided with seed and implements. Efforts to Colonize an Island. As this offer failed to have the desired effect, it was later provided that the governors of neighboring provinces should promote the volun tary migration of native families by still more generous offers. Twenty- five families were to be sent from each of the neighboring provinces annually. All debts owed the government by these families were to be canceled. They were to receive free transportation for themselves and their cattle, to be given seven acres of land each, and practically sup- ported during the first six months after their arrival. The same royal order provided for the building of highways and the opening of free ports, but nothing came of it all. A few little military outposts were established in Palawan, but no highways were built, no free ports opened, nor did any voluntary immigrants arrive. Either it was omitted to provide funds for carrying out the tempting plans of settlement, or if provided the money was turned into channels altogether different from what had been intended. When the effort to stimulate voluntary immigration into Palawan THE CENTRAL ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAGO. 229 failed, the Spanish continued to foster their policy of providiiif? ptltlers by force. Puerto Princesa for a long time has been a penal settlement. From other parts of the colony convicts are sent to serve 'their term in the island. As in most other penal settlements, when their sen- tences expire they have no money to pay for a passage back to their homes, so they make the best of it by remaining as colonists. While they are serving their terms in Puerto Princesa, they are obliged to work on government enterprises of various sorts. Formerly a sugar plantation was maintained to furnish them employment, and when that was abandoned they were set to clearing timber land near the city. As is to be expected, the convicts have suffered the same abuses that have been the curse of other penal settlements, aggravated per- haps by the fact that in this case the administration was Spanish. The convicts at Puerto Princesa suffer a very high death rate, amount- ing sometimes to about twenty-five per cent yearly, as the result of their hard labor, poor accommodation, insufficient food and ill treatment. Primitive Modes of Life. Manners of life in Palawan, even in the capital of the island, are essentially primitive. The servants are all convicts, who can be hired from the government, or by a special concession, "trusties," men who have a certain degree of liberty, may be obtained. Their houses are poor, furniture scanty, and the markets provide an exceedingly lim- ited bill of fare, consisting chiefly of rice and fish. The water supply is contaminated by surface drainage, so that rain-water preserved in large tanks must be employed. A large part of the death rate of the con- victs must be charged against the water provided for them. The savage native people of Palawan include various tribes, some of them quite distinct from those found in the other islands of the archipelago. In the southern part Moros are found, in the northern mountain region Battaks, and in the central portion and along the northern coast Tagbanuas. The latter are commonly believed to be a half-breed race, a mixture of the Negritos and some Malay tribe. They are quite dark and their hair is inclined to be curly. Under the advice and direction of a Spanish engineer who was constructing a highway across the island, they have established a village called Tagbarus, in 2S0 THE CENTRAL ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAG-O. which they show a surprising capacity for civilization. They have actu- ally organized a form of local government under his advice and started small plantations of rice, bananas and cocoanuts. Among the Savage Tribes. The Tagbanuas of the remoter parts of the island are even more in- teresting than their partially civilized brethren. They are friendly to strangers and by no means as suspicious as most savage tribes. Their village houses are built of palm and bamboo of quite small size and are built high in the air, on stilts of bamboo, instead of being within six or eight feet of the ground. They have their own simple alphabet, which is in common use, using fresh joints of bamboo in place of paper for their writings. The letters are scratched on the smooth surface in vertical columns. In former times the Tagbanuas were governed by a ruler who held office for life. If he proved a good chief his eldest son was allowed to succeed him; if not, a new one was chosen by will of the people. At present, however, there is no ruler for the whole tribe. The affairs of each community are administered by a council of old men who render justice according to native conditions and their own ideas. If a person is charged with a serious crime, accused and accuser are conducted by the old men to the bank of some deep pool, and there in the presence of relatives and friends the two dive beneath the water at the same instant. The one who remains under the longer is held to have spoken the truth. It is in this island of Palawan that the most valuable deposits of dammar are found. Dammar is a vegetable gum which exudes from a large tree and has considerable value in commerce for various uses. It is abundant in Mindanao as well as Palawan. In some places there are extensive deposits which have run into the earth in bygone years or have been gradually covered with accumulating leaf mold. These are known as dammar "mines" and will be the source of considerable in- come and profit to some one who may attempt a systematic working of the deposits, something that has never yet been done. The dammar deposits of Palawan are near the coast and the yearly exports from the archipelago vary from 200 to 500 tons, in spite of the crudity of the methods employed in gathering it. THE CENTRAL ISLANDS OF THE ARCHIPELAaO. 231 Eflfects of Spanish Misrule. Palawan was the scene of one of the numerous melancholy failures that have resulted from attempts to develop the valuable latent resources of the Philippines. A former governor who tried unsuccess- fully to interest his countrymen in the remarkable possibilities of that island, finally resigned his oflftcial position and secured a concession of 30,000 acres of land. His franchise permitted him to work mines, cut timber and cultivate the soil. At once he found it necessary to em- ploy Chinese labor to clear away the forest, whereupon his govern- ment refused him permission to employ aliens. Next his countrymen ac- cused him of trying to interest the foreigners in his concession, suggest- ing that he meant eventually to declare Palawan independent territory. The result was that such additional restrictions were imposed upon him that his concession became absolutely worthless. An experiment station which he established furnished ample proof of the wonderful fertility of the soil and the possibilities of his concession if he had been treated with a liberal spirit. Any estimate of the natural resources of the Philippine islands and the possibility of profit to energetic immigrants must be incomplete because of just such facts as the foregoing. The Spanish policy has been a handicap altogether insurmountable. The honest man could not face the corruption that surrounded him and compete with it. The dishonest man, however willing he might be to bribe and use improper influences, would find the demands upon him growing more and more as his ability to pay more increased, so that in the end there would be "little left for him. CilAPTER Xni, SULU AND MINDANAO, THE HOME OF THE MOEOS. Origin of the Sulu Mohammedans — A War for Supremacy — Fighting the Pirates — Insurrections in the Islands — An EfHcient Governor — Where the Slave Trade Flourishes — How to Govern the Sulus — An Island Comparatively Unknovpn — Construction of the Native Houses — Pe- culiar Systems of Local Government — Hospitality of the Filipinos. Between the islands of Borneo and Mindanao, extending from north- east to southwest, lies a chain of 150 islands, and innumerable islets and rocks rising from the water, known as the Sulu archipelago. Their coasts are washed on one side by the Sulu sea and on the other by the Celebes sea. According to Spanish authority ninety-five of these islands are inhabited. The people are known as the Moros, and it is more than likely that they will one day play an important part in the annals of American history in the Philippines. The history of the Sulus is the history of the Moros, for there is their stronghold. After the Spanish discovery of the Philippines, as the invaders endeavored to extend their sovereignty southwestward from Mindanao, they found as an obstacle in their way the settlements of Sulus. Strangely enough, however, there was in the early days of Philippine history a short alliance between the opposing forces on which Spain in after years based her claim of sovereignty over the Sulus. The Mohammedans reached this chain of islands as a result of civil warfare in Borneo. Two sultans who were brothers Avere in con- flict in that great island, and the unsuccessful one, with his followers fled across the channel into the Sulu islands. It was another exodus of the same sort from Borneo that brought the Mohammedan element into Palawan and the adjacent islands. This defeated sovereign, establishing his capital at the town of Sulu, or Jolo, as the Spanish name it, began a Mohammedan civilization which rapidly became a strong power in that part of the world. A cousin of this sultan settled on Basilan, which is the nearest to Mindanao of the Sulu chain, and 233 SULU AND MINDANAO, THE HOME OF THE MOEOS. 233 soon became its sole ruler. He was loyal to the sultan at first, but in time plotted against him and attacked the capital city unsuccess- fully. After many fights on land and sea he retired again to his own possessions in Basilan. Then the sultan himself went to Manila and pledged his vassalage to the Si)anish on condition that they would help him subjugate his rebellious cousin. The promise was promptly made, but the squadron which was equipped under the agreement was delayed several months beyond the promised time before it sailed southward. In the mean- time the sultan, tired of waiting, attacked the rebels and routed them completely, although he was himself killed in the battle. The Span- iards in due season arrived at Sulu, and, not finding the sultan, turned and went back to Manila. They preserved the treaty with great care and upon this has been based the Spanish claim of sovereignty over the Sulu sultanate. A War for Supremacy. The next ruler, however, Adasaolan, extended his influence far and Avide. He developed the archipelago, made alliances with the Moham- medan king of Mindanao and the chief of nortliern Borneo, and com- pelled all his subjects and tributaries to adopt the Koran at the point of the sword. He built the first mosque in the city of Sulu and received honors and titles all the way from Turkey, from the head of the Mohammedan church, the Sublime Porte, in recognition of his services to the faith. It would seem that his claim of sovereignty and his posses- sion of the territory gave him a better title to the islands than the treaty of Manila gave to the Spanish. Nevertheless, in 1595 the Spaniards sent an expedition to take possession of their property and incidentally to spread the gospel among the heathen. Nearly all their officers were killed, half the men incapacitated by sickness and woun(is, while the war-ship which carried the expedition was so shattered that it was able to get only as far as Cebu on the return journey. From this time on, the Sulu pirates carried their daring incur- sions throughout the waters of the archipelago, hardly interrupted until English men-of-war suppressed the evil in the present century. Their pirate craft frequently sailed into the neighborhoc i oi the. city of Manila and actually captured trading vessels within «iight of the 234 SULU AND MI^DAXAO, THE HOME OF THE MOROS. peninsula of Cavite. At one time the Sulu pirates held Bohol, Cebu, Negros, Leyte and even a part of Panay under tribute. When com- munities refused to pay tribute they were attacked by these daring invaders, their men slain, their houses burned, their property looted, and their wives and daughters taken as slaves away to the south. Attempts to Suppress Pirates. Undoubtedly the Madrid government did the best it could under the circumstances. It appropriated large sums of money for men-of- war, forts, weapons and ammunition, and directed the Philippine of- ficials to exterminate the piratical communities. But the money was diverted into the pockets of colonial office-holders. Thousands of in- offensive natives were slaughtered in the wars, while the governors wrote home accounts of imaginary victories and glowing descriptions of the blessings of peace. At the end of their terms they came back rich for life. The most pretentious effort made by the Spanish to terminate the constant warfare between Spain and Sulu was the establishment of a settlement at Zamboanga, at the extreme southeast point of Min- danao. Here they built a walled city, constructed strong forts and made it a naval station and arsenal second only to Cavite. Directly opposite Basilan, and in such close proximity to the Sulu archipelago, it provided a fine base of operations, offensive and defensive. But so little care was taken of the sanitation of the place that it soon became known as the sepulchre of Spain. The absence of sewerage and sanita- tion, combined with the heat and moisture, developed malarial dis- eases whose deadliness astonished even the Spaniards. Of one garrison of a thousand men, 850 died in a single year. In 1750 the governor-general of the Philippines sent a large expe- dition from Manila to attack Sulu, but the fleet returned to Zam- boanga having accomplished nothing. The islands were continually ravaged by the Mohammedan sultan. At last, in 1770, there was a tacit agreement for peace between Sulu and Spain, because both par- ties were exhausted with warfare. From, that time until 1851 pirates occasionally ravaged Spanish cities and Spanish gunboats destroyed Sulu craft, but nothing amounting to war occurred. < o CO b Q D SULU AND MINDANAO, THE HOME OF THE MOROS. 237 A Temporary Peace Declared. In the latter year troubles began again and for twenty-five years affairs got more and more intolerable. The bold ravages of the sultan throughout the archipelago compelled another Spanish expedition in 1876, which destroyed several forts and killed many natives, but lost more men than it destroyed. Nevertheless, it brought about a tem- porary peace. The sultan admitted the sovereignty of Spain over the Sulu domain and Spain induced Great Britain and Germany to sign a protocol recognizing the treaty. In 1880' a British company colonized a large tract of land in Borneo, recognizing the suzerainty of the sultan of Sulu. Spain made a vigorous protest, but the British government decided in favor of the sultan. After some negotiations, Spain gave up all claim to land in Borneo belonging to the Sulu sul- tanate. In 1887 insurrection again broke out in the islands and in Min- danao itself. The Spanish government sent its fleet at post haste to the seat of disorder and also forwarded re-enforcements for the vari- ous garrisons which had been established in the enemy's country. A few months after this insurrection was put down another broke out. In 1888, however, comparative peace was established throughout the Sulu archipelago and since that time the Spaniards have been in legal possession of the country. They have ten garrisons scattered at different points throughout the islands. Outside of the coasts they have no authority nor power whatever. The sultan of Sulu rules the same as ever, and the native, not Spanish, laws are observed. The population of the group is estimated at 150,000, but that is probably less rather than greater than the actual population. As a matter of English law, the sultan of Sulu exercises sovereignty of a qualified sort over several Borneo sultans. According to Spanish law, he exercises some feudal authority over the chiefs of Palawan, a large Mohamme- dan sultanate in Mindanao, and over several small tribes on that island and the island of Basilan. Nevertheless, they have done what they could to reduce the authority to a minimum, regretting every point that they haA^e been compelled to yield to his influence. 238 SULU AND MINDANAO, THE HOME OF THE MOROS. A Royalist with Republican Tendencies. The most efficient Spanish governor ever in charge of the difficult situation in Sulu was General Arolas, whose history is a notable one. Professor Worcester relates interesting stories of his administration. He has always been an outspoken republican, ready to fight for his convictions. He has told American callers in Sulu of his warm ad- miration for the United States as a type of what a republic should be, adding that if he were not a Spaniard he would be an American. In the days when the republican party triumphed in Spain, Arolas is said to have cast the royal throne out of a window with his own hands in order to show his respect for its former occupants. After the fall of the Spanish republic, he continued to display what was considered un- seemly activity, and there seems little doubt that when he was hon- ored with an appointment as governor of Sulu, it was with the inten- tion of exiling him to a place from which he was not likely to return. , , The new governor found the town unhealthful, the defenses inade- quate, and the garrison in constant danger of annihilation. He made prisoners of the Moros and compelled them to work in strengthening the defenses until these were made impregnable. He improved the sanitation of the town, changing it from a fever center to an unusually healthful place. He constructed water works, built a splendid market, established a free-school system and thoroughly equipped a hospital. The Sulus soon became the wonder of the Philippines. At last with one gunboat and two regiments he attacked Maibun, the sultan's capi- tal, and inflicted a crushing defeat upon the Moros. The sultan con- trived to escape, but many important chiefs were killed, the heavy guns taken, and the fortifications destroyed. Arolas followed up his advantage and attack succeeded attack until the fanatical Moslems were cowed as never before. Several times Arolas escaped unscathed from deadly peril and the Moros believed that he bore a charmed life. They called him "papa." And when "papa" gave orders they were treated with great respect. In his dealings with them he was just, but absolutely merciless. Every threat that he made was carried out to the letter. For once the Suluanos had met their master and they knew it. SULU AND MINDANAO, THE HOME OF THE MOROS. 239 An Unpopular Decree. In 1892 Governor Arolas returned to Spain and his successor proved to be by no means as capable, although he did not have long to prove his ability. Finding things apparently quiet, he decided to require the Moros to pay taxes and issued a decree to that effect. The sultan himself, with a baud of his men, presented themselves armed, offering to yield to the order. The sultan came forward, presented the' governor with a bag of pearls, and then, suddenly drawing a barong,, split the Spaniard's skull to his teeth. The Moros fell on the sur- prised soldiers and won a complete victory. But two or three of the Spanish soldiers escaped by hiding in a subterranean passage. The town was destroyed by the Moros. The second island of the Sulu group in importance and population is Tawi Tawi, which is inhabited by piratical, slave-hunting Moros. It is not strange that little is known to civilization about the character- istics of the islands of this archipelago when danger lurks at every hand. However, it is known that Tawi Tawi is covered from end to end with forest. In the old days when slaves were more numerous in the Sulu islands, the virgin forest was cleared from a large area near the towns and fruit trees were planted in its place. The result is that the forests near the settlements are composed almost entirely of trees which produce edible fruits. Wild hogs are abundant likewise, for there is almost no one to hunt them, and, with plenty of food and little molestation, they have multiplied astonishingly. Where the Slave Trade Flourishes. The surface of Tawi Tawi is uneven, but the hills, though steep, are low and of quite uniform height. Near the center a precipitous mountain rises to an elevation of some 2,000 feet. The slave business still flourishes in Tawi Tawi and to some extent in the other Sulu islands, although not so much as here. Girls of fifteen years are valued at about five bushels of rice. The slave dealers of Tawi Tawi are said to have no difficulty in selling all the able-bodied men they can cap- ture to the Dutch planters in Borneo. The subjugation and possession of the Sulu archipelago will pro- !;40 «ULU AJSTD MINDANAO, THE HOME OF THE MOEOS. vide much interesting and energetic labor for the United States. It is to be doubted if even the most persistent office-seekers vs^ill make strenuous effort to obtain appointment to authority there, under the conditions that they will have to meet. The Mohammedan Moro of the Sulu sul- tanate seems to value life not at all, and to be quite willing at any time to die if in the process he can take the life of two or three Chris- tians into eternity with him. Politically and geographically this group must go with the Philippine archipelago itself, but it will be the most puzzling part of the possession to govern. The Sulu Mohammedans of Borneo have given no trouble to the British who hold the sover- eignty, and, on the other hand, they have been treated with great tact and caution by their British rulers. The authorities let them uione in their religious views and advise the missionaries to use all possible tact in their endeavors to introduce Christianity. It is difficult to discover any middle ground in the methods of governing these peo- ples between the English system in effect in India, of leaving the natives in full liberty to practice all customs and religious observances which do not conflict with life and human safety, and the energetic policy of General Arolas of exterminating ever^ one in reach, at the first sign of irritation or disagreement. The Least Known Island of the Group. Mindanao, the largest island of the Philippine archipelago except Luzon, and the most southerly except the Sulu group, has been the least explored by the Spanish and the slowest to subjugate, in spite of the great loss of life and effort that have been expended in the attempt. The island has an area of 37,500 square miles. Its savage peoples, high mountains and dense forests have made exploration difficult and until within a short time little has been known of its interior. Of late years the priests of the Jesuit missions have pushed their explorations with great courage and energy until they have gathered data for a fairly complete and accurate map. These mission explorers recognize twenty-four distinct tribes of people, of whom seventeen are pagan, six Mohammedan Moros, and the other Christian Visayans, who have come in from the northern islands and settled at various points, especially along the north coast. Most of the wild tribes are of Malayan origin, but there still remain is SULU AND MINDANAO, THE HOME OF THE MOROS. 241 Mindanao a considerable number of the little black Negiitos, witli whom some of the Malay tribes have intermarried. The warlike Moros are especially dreaded. They are found along the southern and south- western coasts and near the large rivers and inland lakes. Although the island is nominally divided into provinces, Spanish authority has been effective, as a matter of fact, only in narrow and more or less isolated strips along the sea and near a few of the rivers which afford the only means of communication with the interior. One of Weyler's Undertakings. Professor Worcester relates an interesting circumstance connected with Spanish control in the islands, which introduces as its chief actor one whose name has been very familiar to Americans. He says: "In Mindanao there are no roads and the futility of attempting to move troops inland was beautifully demonstrated by General Wey- ler during our second visit. For some reason best known to himself, he saw fit to send in an expedition against the Moros. It was very broadly hinted by his countrymen that he had an itching for the rank of marshal and hoped to win it. Whatever the cause, all the available forces in the archipelago were concentrated and marched into the Mindanao forest. An officer who accompanied the expedition told me that the enemy simply ran away and they were never able to over- take them, while eighty per cent of their own men were disabled hy starvation and fever. Although the starvation might have been avoided, it is tolerably certain that the fever was inevitable. The mortality was certainly terrible. We saw the wreck of the expedition come back, and in spite of the fact that the priests from all the towns near Zam- boanga were called in, they could not shrive the soldiers as fast as they died. Sick men were sent away by the ship load. Meanwhile Wey- ler was directing operations from a very safe distance, spending much of his time on a dispatch boat. We learned later that several glorious victories were announced at Manila and were celebrated with proces- sions, fireworks and great rejoicings." A Fertile Island. The natural characteristics of Mindanao are such as to make it interesting alike to the traveler and the possible settler. Its resources 242 SULU AND MINDANAO, THE HOME OF THE MOEOS. are, perhaps, less developed than those of any other of the larger islands of the archipelago. The soil, especially in the river and lake regions, is exceedingly fertile and repays abundantly the labor ex- pended upon it. Valuable mineral wealth is knovrn to exist, although few details are recorded. Gold is found in paying quantities at a num- ber of points, among others Misamis and Surigao, where the natives liave worked the diggings profitably by their crude methods for many years. Misamis is a port on the north shore of the island in Iligan bay, while Surigao is at the northeastern extremity of the island. The name of Mindanao signifies "man of the lake," the natives explaining that the name was given because the island is so well watered. Its river and lake systems are even more important than those of Luzon. The largest river, the Buluan, which rises near the southeastern extremity of the island, runs north through a great valley of remarkable fertility, traversing the whole island and flowing into the seat that bounds the north shore. The Kio Grande, on the other hand, rises near the north coast and flows south and west, while there are other rivers of lesser importance. Both of the rivers named have their sources and tributaries in large lakes and there are many others which find an exit to the sea by smaller streams. The forests of the islands are of great extent, the splendid trees including many of great commercial value. Beside the valuable prod- ucts of the forest which Mindanao has in common with most of the other islands, gutta percha is abundant in certain localities. Beautiful Vales and Lofty Mountains. The scenery of Mindanao is notably fine. There are several moun- tain chains separating the river valleys and the peaks include a number of active volcanoes. The most famous of these is Mount Apo near the port of Devao on the south coast. The summit of this volcano rises to a height of nearly 9,000 feet. Extinct volcanoes are numerous. The oldest of the Spanish settlements in the island is the impor- tant town of Zamboanga, which is the capital of a province bearing the same name. This port is situated at the extreme southwestern point of the island and consequently nearest the Sulu archipelago and the domain of the Moros. It was taken and fortified in the early days SULU AND MINDANAO, THE HOME OF THE MOROS. 243 as a place of operation against the Mohammedans and still has an ojd stone fort to which the inhabitants might retreat if attacked. ! The town is large and clean, with a pier extending into moderately deep water, although vessels of large size have to lie in the onter harbor. The steamers sailing from the Australian ports of Queensland for Hong Kong and Yokohama, pass between Mindanao and Borneo on their direct course, not many miles from Zamboanga. In former times these steamers made port at this city as a regular stopping point on their journey, but the excessive harbor fees and aggravating cus- toms restrictions long ago caused them to shun it. This is one of the more notable lanes of passenger and freight traffic between Australia and Asia. Under an American regime Zamboanga no doubt would become a port of call, and a welcome one, for these same vessels, and it would be an important city in the traffic of the archipelago. Picturesque Village Life. This part of the island of Mindanao has been quite thoroughly under Spanish control and in the neighborhood of Zamboanga are vil- lages of decent civilized natives, resting content under the alien author- ity. Such villages are picturesque and interesting to the traveler, although they offer no accommodations for one who is exacting. Every such village has a church, which is the most pretentious edifice in the place, a house for the priest, and an institution of the islands known as the tribunal. This is a sort of town-hall where the head men of the village meet to transact business. It contains a pair of stocks or some other contrivance for the detention of prisoners. When troops are quartered there, the place is used as a barracks, and most import- ant of all to the stranger, any traveler who chooses to do so has a right to put up there. Hanging on the wall is ordinarily to be found a list of the proper local prices for rice, fowl, eggs, meat and other articles of food, as well as for horse hire, bufPalo hire, carriers, etc. The object of this list is to protect strangers from extortion. Here in the neighborhood of Zamboanga is an excellent place to observe the manners of life of the civilized natives and the relationship they have held to the Spanish authorities of the Philippines. The native houses there are like those of the poorer civilized natives throughout the archipelago. 244 SULU AXD MINDANAO, THE HOME OF THE MOKOS. The typical Philippine house rests on four or more heavy timbers, -which are firmly set in the ground, and its floor is raised from fiAe to ten feet in the air. There is not a nail or a peg in the whole structure. The framf' is of bamboo, tied together with rattan. The sides and roof are usually of nipa palm, although the former may be made by split- ting green bamboos, pounding the halves flat, and then weaving them together, while if nipa is very scarce, the roof may be thatched with the long grass called cogon. The floor usually is made of bamboo strips with their convex sides up. They are tied firmly in place in such a way that wide cracks are left between. The windows are provided with swinging shades which can be propped open during the day. One has to climb a ladder to enter the house. Often there is but one room for cooking, eating and sleeping. The cooking is done over an open fire built on a heap of earth in one corner. In the better dwellings there is a place partitioned off for cooking, usually just at the head of the ladder, while the body of the house is divided into two or more rooms. Native houses of this sort have much to recommend them. If shaken down by an earthquake, or blown over by a typhoon, no one gets hurt, for the materials used are too light to do harm when they fall. The ventilation is perfect and the air keeps much cooler than in a tightly closed building. Wealthy natives sometimes build houses of boards with galvanized iron roofs and limestone foundations, but they are very much more expensive and decidedly less comfortable than the humbler dwellings. Native Systems of Government. The system of government of the native villages throughout Min- danao, and as well in the other islands of the archipelago where Span- ish rule has extended, is of considerable interest. Professor Worcester's account of local government throughout the island is as follows: "A gobernadorcillo, literally "little governor," is to be found in every Philippine town or village and he is a very important person- age. He is always a native or a half-caste and is the local representa- tive of the governor of his province, from which he receives instruction and to TV-horn he sends reports. His headquarters are at the tribunal. SULU AND MINDANAO, THE HOME OF THE MOROS. 245 He is addressed as captain during his term of office, and after his successor has been chosen is known as a captain pasado. "He settles all local questions except those which assume a serious legal aspect and therefore properly belong to the justice of the peace; but his most important duty is to See that the taxes of his town are col- lected, and to turn them over to the administrator of the province. He is personally responsible for these taxes, and must obtain them from his 'cabezas' or make good the deficit. He is obliged to aid the guardia civil in the capture of criminals, and to assist the parish friar in promoting the interests of the church, frequently, also, in advancing his private ends. Finally, he is at the beck and call of all the officials who visit his town. He often has to entertain them at his own expense, and not infrequently finds it advisable to make them presents. He is liable at any time to be called to the capital of the province, but is given no compensation for the cost of traveling or the loss of time. If he does not speak Spanish, he must employ a clerk (directorcillo). Salaries of Local Officials. "There is a gTeat deal of writing to be done at the tribunal, and, as the allowance for clerk-hire is usually utterly insufficient, the gober- nadorcillo must make up the difference. In return for all this he is allowed a salary of two dollars per month, and is permitted to carry a cane! If he does not 'squeeze' his fellow-townsmen or steal public funds he is apt to come out badly behind. "While the office is nominally filled by election every two years, the elective system is of such a nature that service can readly be made compulsory. Wealthy men are chosen for the place, if any such can be found, and are often kept in office for years, sorely against their will. Yet there is nothing quite so dear to the heart of the average Philippine native as a little authority over his fellows, and in spite of the numerous drawbacks, the position is sometimes earnestly sought. "The families of every town are divided into groups of from forty to sixty, each under a 'cabeza de Barangay,' who is responsible for their taxes. If he cannot get them from the people he must pay them out of his own pocket. Excuses are useless. For obvious reasons, men of means ai^ chosen for this position, and, though nominally elected 246 SULU AND MINDANAO, THE HOME OF THE MOROS. evei-y two years, they are actually kept in office as long as they have anything to lose, and sometimes longer. "The gobernadorcillo has a 'ministry,' consisting of the first and second tenientes (lieutenants), who take his place in his absence; other tenientes having charge of outlying districts; and chiefs of police, plantations and cattle. "At the tribunal is maintained a small force of cuadrilleros, who perform police duty, and are supposed to defend the town against bandits and the like. "A man who has been elected teniente or gobernadorcillo, or who has served ten years as a cabeza de Barangay, is numbered among the 'headmen' of the place. The Responsibilities of Office. "The headmen meet at the tribunal from time to time, and discuss public affairs with great gravity. They assemble every Sunday morn- ing, and, headed by the gobernadorcillo, and frequently also by a band playing very lively airs, they march to the convento and escort the friar to the church, where they all attend mass. "The state dress of the headmen is quite picturesque. Their white shirts dangle outside of their pantaloons after the Philippine fashion and over them they wear tight-fitting jackets without tails, which reach barely to their waists. When the jacket is buttoned, it causes the shirt to stand out in a frill, producing a most grotesque effect." A traveler, in speaking about the villagers of Ayala, in Mindanao, says: "We were rather touched by their never-failing hospitality. The Philippine native seems always ready to kill his last fowl for a stranger or share with him his last pot of rice. When we stopped at a hut and asked for a drink, its inmates were loth to offer us water in the cocoanut-shell cups which served their own purpose and hunted up and washed old tumblers or even sent to some neighbors to borrow them. With a glass of water they always gave us a lump of coarse brown sugar to stimulate thirst, an entirely unnecessary precaution." CHAPTER XIV. THE FILIPINOS AND THEIR CHARACTEEISTIOS. Savage Tribes in the Islands— The Original Inhabitants— The Commencement of the Insurrections — Native Weapons and Hovr They are Used- Picturesque Dress of Men and Women — Religious Ceremonies — Beliefs of the Moros — Some Civilized Characteristics— A Tribe of Head Hunters — How Some of the Natives Live. Inhabiting the Philippine islands are at least eighty distinct and separate tribes of people, which in a broad classification may be grouped as Negritos, Mohammedan Malays, Pagan Malays and civilized Malays. Many of these tribes are virtually unknown to explorers, and are still in a state of barbarism, unimpressed by any mark of civilization. The population of these islands is unknown, and there are no means by which a close estimate may be made, as even in those districts w^here the Spanish authorities had complete control of the affairs of state the census returns were notoriously unreliable. But it is probable that the entire archipelago contains between eight and ten millions of people. The original population of the Philippines was the tribe known as Negritos. These aboriginals are at the bottom of the scale in mental- ity and in physique, little black fellows, who are rapidly disappearing and seem destined to speedy extinction. The best judges of island char- acter declare them to be incapable of civilization, a fact which lessens the regret that they are vanishing. The largest number of them re- maining are in the islands of Mindanao and Negros, where they people the splendid forests clothing the mountain slopes. There are also a few of the Negritos left in Mariveles mountain, near the mouth of Ma- nila bay on the island of Luzon, while in the vicinity of Cape Engano, at the northeastern extremity of the same island, they are still quite numerous. Even at the time of the Spanish conquest the Negritos were becoming decimated by their conflict with the Malay invaders. Now they have become a wretched, sickly race of almost dwarfish 247 24S THE FILIPINOS AND THEIR CHARACTERISTICS. istatuie. Although not of the African type, their hair is curly, their skins black and their features coarse and repulsive. Agriculture is little practiced by them, but they depend for food upon the products of the forest and upon the game which falls before their poisoned arrows. The Moros, or Mohammedan Malays, are chietly confined to the islands of Mindanao, Palawan, Basilan, Sulu, Tawi Tawi and Mindoro, The Moros have played a very important part in the history of the Philippines. They were a people of Borneo, who arrived in the archi- pelago just at the time of the Spanish discoverer. Landing first in Basilan, they spread rapidly over the small islands of the Sulu and Tawi Tawi groups, eventually occupying the whole coast of Mindanao, the southern third of Palawan and the small islands adjacent. Before they had completely overrun Palawan, they were interrupted by the Spanish troops in their own conquest and since then they have not been able to advance their settlements. The Commencement of the War. The first encounter between the Spaniards and the Moros resulted from an unprovoked attack made by the European traders upon one of the More chiefs of Mindanao. The result was disastrous to the ag- gressors, who were almost annihilated. The fierce Moslem warriors returned the attack with all the stimulus of their fanatical passions. They raided the Spanish and native coast towns of the central and northern islands with annual piratical expeditions, meeting with great success and taking thousands of captives and rich treasure. For more than 250 years these forays continued, while in every village watch- tower in the northern islands there was constant vigilance by the sen- tries who watched for the approach of the Moro fleets. The success of the raiders was continued. Not only were natives enslaved by thou- sands, but Spanish planters, government offlcials and priests were killed or held for ransom. The history of the Philippine islands is largely the history of the wars between Spanish and Moro forces. Of course, the Spaniards could not submit tamely to such an intolerable state of affairs. Expe- dition after expedition was sent against the Mohammedan forces, and with great expense of money and life a few temporary successes were gained. Garrisons were established even in Sulu, only to be massacred THE FILIPINOS AND THEIR CHARACTERISTICS. 249 or driven from the islands. Finally, with the improvement in fire-arms accessible to the Spanish forces, and the construction of light-draft steam gunboats and rapid-fire guns, the Spaniards gained an advantage which could not be overcome and piracy was reduced to a minimum. Gunboats patroled the islands in every channel. No Moro craft was permitted at sea except with a written permit from the nearest Spanish governor. Any prau violating this order was either rammed and sunk by any gunboat meeting it or swept by the fire of the machine-guns, no quarter ever being given. Then village after village was destroyed by shells from the gunboats, even the town of Sulu, which had been the residence of the Moro sultans, suffering destruction in 1876. A Spanish military post was established in its place. Other Moro strongholds in the different islands were taken and fortified, the coast villages burned, and the inhabitants driven to the hills, until finally by tacit agreement a sort of armed truce began, which, with frequent interruption, con- tinued for a number of years. A Difficult Proposition in Government. The sultan of Sulu is the ruler of all the Moros in the Philippines, although his authority is not very well established in Mindanao, where there are two subordinate sultans. Under the sultan of Sulu, the au- thority is delegated to a regent, who acts during his absence ; a minister of war and a minister of justice, with a local chief in each district and a mandarin in each village. The higher authorities in the church are the cherifs, hereditary officers who have certain authority in tem- poral as well as spiritual affairs. Under them are panditas or priests, who look after the immediate spiritual welfare of the people. The Mo- hammedanism of the Moros is hardly as well defined or carefully prac- ticed as that of the Mohammedan countries of Asia. Their mosques are built of bamboo. Their language, which is written in Arabic char- acters, is based on Sanskrit roots. Instruments of Attack and Defense. The Moros do not fail to justify the reputation given them that they are among the most ferocious and daring people of the earth and among the most difficult to control. All the males above sixteen years 250 THE FILIPINOS AND THEIR CHARACTERISTICS. of age go armed, except those in settlements under Spanish dominion, where this practice is prevented. Their weapons are of excellent steel, beautifully finished and admirably adapted for the vio- lent use for which they are intended. The barong, the campilan and the kris are those most favored. The first is somewhat after the fashion of a butcher's cleaver, with thick back and thin edge. The strong and skillful warrior prides himself on being able to cut an opponent in half if he can get a chance for a fair blow. The campilan is a straight-edged, two-handed sword, with a blade wide at the tip and steadily narrowing towards the hilt; it is used only for cutting, for which it is thorough- ly effectual. The straight kris is a narrow-bladed, bevel-edged sword used for cutting and thrusting. The serpent kris, with its wavy, dou- ble-edged blade is used for thrusting and inflicts a horrible wound. The men are of medium height and superb muscular development. They dress in pantaloons, waistcoat, jacket, sash and turban, all gaud- ily colored and showily embroidered. Their pantaloons are usually skin-tight below the knee and loose above. The rank of a Moro is in- dicated by the way he ties his turban. Under all circumstances a Moro carries barong, kris or campilan thrust into his sash. If he expects serious trouble, he has in addition a shield of light wood and a lance with a broad, keen head. His conveniences for working steel are of the simplest, but the blades which he produces are highly tempered and often beautifully finished. He sometimes works silver in with the steel or even inlays it with gold. The hilts of his side-arms are of hard, polished wood or ivory and are sometimes handsomely carved. He is crazy to get hold of fire-arms, but seldom succeeds, and at any rate is usually a very bad marksman. How the Women Dress. Moro women are exceedingly fond of bright colors, scarlet and green being their favorites. Their garments are a skin-tight waist, a baggy divided-skirt, and a novel garment called the jabul, made by sewing together the two ends of a long piece of cloth. This is draped about the body in various ways and may be thrown over the head to keep ojff the sun. Moro children usually possess clothes like those of their elders, but they make very little use of them. The men are very skillful boatmen and sailors. The boat that THE FILIPINOS AND THEIR CHARACTERISTICS. 251 they use, tlie prau, is of the type familiar among all the islands of the south Pacific, a frail-looking affair, skillfully Carved out of a log, with outriggers which guarantee its stability. They are swimmers of marvel- ous skill and their performances in diving for pearls are almost incredi- ble. Other than that, however, the men consider it beneath their dignity to engage in manual labor. Th« Moro is a born warrior and chafes under restraint. He dis- dains to work and expects his wants to be supplied by his wives and slaves. He gives much time to the care of his arms and to perfecting himself in their use. He tries to terrify an opponent by making hideous faces, uses his shield very skillfully, and in battle is the bravest of the brave. Inhuman cruelty, however, is one of his characteristics, and he will cut down a slave merely to try the edge of a new barong. An Unpleasant Religious Rite. One unpleasant phase of life among the Moros has been the system by which the orthodox native proves the merit of his religion. The Moros believe that one who takes the life of a Christian thereby in- creases his chance of happiness in the future life. The more Chris- tians killed, the brighter the prospect for the Moro, and if he is only fortunate enough to be himself killed while slaughtering the enemies of the faithful, he is at once transported to the seventh heaven. From time to time it happens that one of them wearies of this life, and, de- siring to take the shortest road to glory, he bathes in a sacred spring, shaves off his eyebrows, dresses in white and presents himself before a pandita to take solemn oath to die killing Christians. He then hides a kris or barong about his person and seeks the nearest town. If he can gain admission, he snatches his weapon from its concealment and runs amuck, slaying every living being in his path, until he is finally him- self dispatched. The number of lives taken by one of these mad fanatics is sometimes almost incredible, but he is eventually killed himself and his relatives have a celebration when the news of his death reaches them. The religion of the Moros is a modified Mohammedanism. They believe that the sun, moon and stars are the light of God. There are no other worlds than this in the universe, but there are beings which inhabit the air above us and the earth beneath our feet. They worship 252 THE FILIPINOS AND THEIlt CHARACTERISTICS. God like ourselves. There is one God called Toohan. Man differs from the brutes in his higher intelligence and in his ability to speak. Animals have spirits, but they are not like the soul of man and vanish into thin air when death comes. The soul of man lives for- ever. It enters his body at the top of his head when he is born, an opening being left between the bones of the skull for that purpose. It leaves the body at death once more through the skull. When one dies his soul, according to some panditas, goes directly to the place of God; according to others it goes under the earth to sleep until the last day. A bad man's soul eventually goes to hell, which is a place of torment where one is punished according to his sins. If he has talked too much his mouth pains him; if he has been jealous, cruel or treacherous, it is his heart; if he has been murderous or thievish, his hand. In the course of time every man's punishment is finished and he goes to heaven. Some Tenets of the Moro's Faith. Some panditas say that one's punishment consists in misfortune, disappointment and suffering here below, and that atonement comes before death. Others declare that the good souls wait in the air and the evil ones in the earth, and there is neither hell nor judgment until the end of the world. Then all souls, good and bad, will be swept up as by a great wind and carried to the Mount of Calvary, where they will meet Gabriel, Michael and the Weigher, who will weigh each one. Souls heavy with sin will be sent down to hell. The Moros believe in all the Old Testament characters like "Ibrahim," "No," "Adam," "Mosa," "Sulaiman," "Yakub," and others. They know the outlines of the stories of Adam and Eve, the flood, etc. According to them, Jesus Christ, called by the Moros Isa, was a man like ourselves, but great and good and very powerful. He was not a son of God. The Moros hate and kill the Chris- tians because they teach that men could punish and kill a son of God. The Tagalogs are the people of the Philippines who are likely to come most closely in contact with Americans in the beginning because it is they who have been most active in the insurrection against th(^ Spanish in Luzon around Manila. In the Philippines are, perhaps, five million civilized natives, belonging for the most part to three tribes, the Tagalogs, Ilocanos and Visayans. While the tribes differ and there are even differences within the same tribe under varvinjj conditions. CAPTAIN CHARLES V. GRIDLEY. Commander of the Flagship Olympia. When the fleet was ready to sail from Hongkong, Captain Gridley was already a dying man: but he kept his sufferings to himself and performed his duty until sent home by medical survey several weeks after the battle. He died at Kobi, Japan, June 4, on his way to the United States. THE FILIPINOS AND THEIR CHARACTERISTICS. 255 still the civilized natives are sufficiently similar to be considered as a single class in looking toward the future of the islands. The best students of the islanders believe that the natives are naturally fairly intelligent and often most anxious foit an opportunity to get some education. The fact that the great mass of the people are ignorant affords no proof that they are stupid, for they have been deliberately kept in ignorance from the time of the Spanish discovery until now. Some Characteristics of Civilization. The moral obligation to tell the truth does not weigh heavily upon the Filipino. The civilized natives often lie to conceal the most trivial shortcoming, or even without any excuse whatever, and the detection of a falsehood brings no regret except chagrin that the practice has not been more dexterously carried out. The Filipino cannot under- stand punishment for falsehood, because it is not to his mind an offense. For a fault which he recognizes, however, as such, he will submit to punishment without a murmur, and indeed he thinks more of a master who applies the rattan for punishment when it is deserved, than of one who does not. On the other hand, he is quick to resent what he considers to be injustice and will bide his time in silence until his vengeance is certain. The natives of the Philippines have not made eminent contribu- tions toward the advance of science, literature and art, but that proves little as to their capacity under a regime of development. Even as it is, the Tagalog race has developed one painter of merit, one author of excellent ability, and some wood-carvers who have done admirable work. But the average native, situated as he is, could not be expected to make any advancement along such lines. Within his own sphere he is certainly ingenious and ever ready with a remedy for any mishap that may occur. The Filipino frequently shows himself irresponsible in financial affairs, spending money that he should save and borrowing what he is not likely to be able to repay. On the other hand, he seldom repudiates his debts, and if called upon to meet them does his best. The charge that the Filipino is indolent does not weigh heavily upon those who know the conditions. The man who would exert him- self unnecessarily in such a climate, whether white or native, would 256 THE FILIPIXOS AND THEIR CHARAOTEEISTICS. be subject to much curiosity. No one can work there as he would in a temperate climate and live. Nature has done so much for her child- ren in these islands that they have no need to labor hard in order to supply their few and simple wants. Spanish administration has not been such as to encourage the natives to pile up money for the tax-gatherer and the village friar. Once they are made to realize new wants of their own, they will work to satisfy them. In Siquijor, Bohol and other islands where hard natural conditions make it difficult to earn ' a livelihood, the people are noted for their industry and are, conse- quently, in demand as laborers. Good dualities of the Natives. It is well to emphasize that the civilized Filipino has many good qualities to offset his defects. He is hospitable to the limit of his means, and will go to any amount of trouble to accommodate some perfect stranger who has not the slightest claim on him. Every village has its bath and the people are notable for their personal cleanli- ness. The homes are well regulated and the family life is peculiarly happy. The children are orderly, respectful and obedient to their parents and respectful to strangers. Wives are allowed an amount of liberty hardly equaled in any other eastern country, and they seldom abuse it. They have their share of the work to do, but it is a just share and they perform it without question and without grumbling. The civilized native is self-respecting and self-restrained to a re- markable degree, patient under misfortune and forbearing under provocation. When he does give way to anger, however, he is as likely as not to become for the moment a maniac and to do some one a fatal injury. He is a kind father and a dutiful son. His aged relatives are never left in want, but are brought to his home to share the best that it affords to the end of their days. Among his fellows the Filipino is genial and sociable. He loves to sing and dance. He is a born musi- cian and his performances upon the instruments at his disposal are often very remarkable. He is naturally fearless and admires nothing so much as bravery in others. Under good officers he makes an excel- lent soldier, and he is ready to fight to the death for his honor or his home. THE FILIPINOS AND THEIR CHARAOTERISTICS. 257 A Tribe of Head Hunters. Out of the many wild tribes of the Philippines other than those that have been mentioned in connection with the descriptions of the various islands, it is necessary to mention here but a few more, the names of which will become familiar to American students of conditions in the Philippines. The word Igorrote, which was originally the name of a single tribe, was extended to include all the head-hunt- ing tribes of Luzon, and later became almost synonymous with wild, so that when one speaks of the Igorrotes at the present day he re- fers to a number of fierce hill tribes which differ widely. Head- hunting is practiced by the Gaddanes, but it is for the most part con- fined to the season when the fire-tree is in bloom. It is said to be impossible for a young man of this tribe to find a bride until he has at least one head to his credit. There are a number of other head- hunting peoples, among whom may be mentioned the Altasanes and Apayaos. Not all of the wild peoples are warlike, however, the Tingui- anes, for instance, being a peaceable, well-disposed race. The large island of MindOro, which lies directly south of Manila bay, is the island least known in the northern Philippines and is almost universally avoided by white men. The natives frequently refer to it significantly as the white man's grave. At the present time it is celebrated chiefly for the unsavory reputation of its people, the heavi- ness of its rainfall and the deadliness of the miasma in its fever-smit- ten lowlands. Once Mindoro was famous for its splendid crops of rice and its people were peaceable Tagalogs. Their prosperity attracted the atten- tion of the Moros, who raided their towns. Then an epidemic exter- minated the buffalos, leaving the natives without means of tilling their land, and cholera did the rest. Now the few poverty-stricken villages on the east coasL, which are supposed to be under Spanish protection and control, amount to little. It is unsafe for white men to visit in the villages on the west coast. The once rich fields have grown up to forest land and the island is a rendezvous for desperate criminals who escape from the neighboring provinces and seek refuge in Mindoro, where they are safe f'-om pursuit. 258 THE FILIPINOS AND THEIR CHARACTERISTICS. An Unexplored Island. In the interior of Mindoro are a number of lofty mountains, the highest peak attaining an altitude of nearly 9,000 feet. These moun- tains and the adjacent lowlands are clothed in magnificent forests which the hand of man has never disturbed. Between the mountains and the west coast are extensive plains covered with high grass. East of the mountains are heavily timbered lowlands crossed by numerous rivers. There are no maps nor charts of this island sufficiently accurate to be of any value to travelers. The rainfall is enormous for nine months of the year, and even during the dry season, from March to May, exploration in the interior is frequently interrupted by the heavy rains. The principal town of the island, considered to be the capital, is Calapan, and other settlements around the coast are Manganin, Man- salag and Naujan. Calapan is on the northeast coast, opposite Luzon, There is no anchorage and the surf runs so heavily during the autumn months that steamers are often forced to carry the mails by without landing. The only Europeans at the capital are the necessary officials and a few shop-keepers, while outside of Calapan half a dozen friars form the entire Spanish population of the island. There is a tribe of primitive savages dwelling in Mindoro, entirely distinct from any found elsewhere in the archipelago. They are called Mangyans and bear a very bad reputation for savagery to strangers. The most exhaustive exploration of Mindoro was made by Professor Worcester, who declares that the bad reputation of the Mangyans is by no means justified. Instead of being the dreaded head-hunters and cannibals of whom such alarming reports are circulated, they proved to be as harmless as children. The houses of the Mangyans are of the crudest sort, huts which are mere platforms of poles with shelters of leaves above them. Na- tives wear but little clothing and live in the rudest fashion in the depth of the forest. The Mangyans are found both in the lowlands and in the mountains, the mountaineers being in every way superior to the low- landers. They are physically well developed and comparatively free from disease. Their noses are very flat. Their heads are covered with great shocks of black hair, often showing a tendency to curl. Pro- THE FILIPINOS AND THEIR CHARACTEEISTIGS. 259 feasor Worcester reports that the tallest of the men was five feet and one-half inch in height. How Some of the Natives Live. Besides vegetables and grain they eat roots and tubers, as well as any birds they can get, civet-cats, rats, monkeys, snakes, lizards and fish. Oocodiles they consider a great luxury, although they are seldom able to catch one. In hunting they use bows and poisoned arrows, and occasionally manage to bring doM^n a wild hog. All of the Mangyans who have been questioned, emphatically deny any belief in a future life. They do not show the slightest evidence of idolatry or any wor- ship or religion of any sort whatsoever. They are, however, moral in their personal relations and honest in the extreme. Professor Worces- ter says: "On the whole, after making somewhat extensive observa- tions among the Philippine natives, I am inclined to formulate the law that their morals improve as the square of the distance from churches and other so-called civilizing influences increases." Mindoro is infested with many bandits known as Tulisanes, who hunt in parties, robbing and murdering in the boldest manner, after the fashion of bush-rangers in the earlier history of Australia. They make travel in Mindoro exceedingly dangerous. The natural resources of this island are undoubtedly great, but the combination o'f its dan- gerous Tulisanes and its exceeding unwholesomeness makes it far from attractive for the American traveler. CHAPTER XV. COMMERCIAL AND NATIVE INDUSTRIES. New Fields for American Enterprise — Where Rope is Made — Needs of the Hemp Growers — An Opportunity for Inventors — Magnitude of the Sugar Industry — The Tobacco Factories of Manila — Influence of the Chinese in Industrial Matters — Window Panes Made From Shells — The Uses of the Bamboo — Rice the Principal Article of Food — How to Reach the Islands. ■ The most notable and profitable industry of the Philippine islands, the one that is actually essential to the world's convenience, is the production of Manila hemp, from which rope is made. This archipelago has long furnished the world with its entire supply of the fiber. The only attempt to produce hemp outside of the Philippines that has met with any success whatsoever, is one recently made in North Borneo, but this has not been continued long enough to affect the industry in the Philippines. The product is something enormous. The average num- ber of bales exported for the years 1888 to 1897 was 651,897, but the output has been steadily increasing and in 1897 it reached a total of 825,028 bales. Manila hemp, known in the Philippines as abaca, is the fiber of a wild plantain. Its plants so closely resemble those of the edible banana that only an expert can distinguish them. Abaca will not live on swampy land, yet, as it requires considerable moisture, it must be shaded by trees that can resist the sun. The best plants are growji at a moderate elevation, on hillsides from which only the smaller forest- trees have been cut. The best thus far grown has been raised in Leyte, Marinduque and the districts of Sorsogon and Gubat in Luzon. Except Manila itself, the principal hemp ports are in the central and southern islands of the archipelago. Iloilo is one of some impor- tance. The greatest, however, is Cebu, and others of large commerce in hemp are Catbalogan, on the island of Samar, and Tacloban, on the island of Leyte. Every port among those neighboring islands finds its 260 COMMERCIAL AND NATIVE INDUSTRIES. , 261 commerce in the hemp industry. Surigao, at the northeastern extrem- ity of Mindanao, is not a large port, but it ships some of the best hemp that comes into the Manila market and it is of consequent importance in 'the islands. How Hemp is Produced. The slender stem of the wild plantain is enveloped by overlapping, half-round petioles, which produce the fiber. In order to extract it the plant is cut and the leaf-stems are separated and allowed to wilt for a short time. Each is then drawn between a block of wood and a knife hinged to the block, and provided with a lever and treadle so that it can be firmly held down on the stem. By this means the pulp is scraped from the fiber, which is wound around a stick as fast as it is drawn from under the knife. The whole little machine is so absurdly simple, with its rough carving knife and rude levers, that it hardly seems to correspond with the elaborate transformation that takes place from the tall trees -to the slender white fiber. One man can clean only twenty-five pounds of hemp a day. When it is remembered that the harvest for 1897 was more than 825,000 bales, weighing 240 pounds each, it seems the more remarkable that so rude an instrument should have such an important part to play. After being drawn from the leaves the hemp is next spread in the sun for at least five hours to dry, when it can be immediately baled. Most of the hemp presses are run by man power. Abaca is usually propagated by transplanting the suckers that spring from its roots. It reaches maturity in three years from these cuttings and in four years from seed. It should be cut when it flowers, as fruiting weakens the fiber. There are no insect pests that injure the growing plant to any extent. It is necessary to employ native laborers and they must be closely watched, as they are inclined to allow the petioles to rot and to use serrated knives in drawing the fiber, thus decreasing the labor of extracting it, but sacrificing its strength. An Opportunity for Inventors. About thirty per cent of the fiber is wasted by the present method of extraction and a fortune undoubtedly awaits the man ingenious enough to devise a suitable labor-saving machine to take the plac€ 262 COMMERCIAL AND NATIVE INDUSTRIES. of the simple device at present used for drawing it. Numerous attempts to meet tliis want have been made in the past, but the various con- trivances have all failed through either breaking the fiber or discolor- ing it. To be of practical value a machine must be light enough to be readily carried about by a few men. Under existing conditions abaca plantations are estimated to yield under careful management an an- nual return of thirty per cent, on the investment. The second commercial industry of the Philippines in its impor- tance as an export is sugar growing. The best sugar land is found in the island of Negros and not more than half of it is under cultiva- tion. Good uncleared land sells for |50 per acre and cleared land for |75. The value of land suited to raising sugar varies with the facili- ties for drainage and the distance from market. Partially exhausted land near Manila brings as much as |115 an acre, while Luzon land producing a third more sugar, but at a distance from the capital or any other good port, sells at f30. All of these values are estimated in the silver currency of the islands. The construction of railways would do much to open up new country and readjust values. The sugar estates in the Philippine islands usually are small, not more than a dozen of them producing above 1,000 tons each per annum. In spite of this fact, the crop has been a large one. In 1888 exports reached their maximum with more than 200,000 tons. Since that time they have fallen off, owing to the increased production of beet sugar and the consequent depreciation of that obtained from cane. Magnitude of the Sugar Industry. There are local variations in the production of sugar in the Philip- pines, although the essential processes are about the same as in other countries. Tahiti cane is planted in Luzon, and Java cane in the south- ern islands. Nearly all the Negros grinding mills are of European make. Antiquated wooden or stone crushers, run by buffalo power, are ex- tensively used in the other sugar-producing districts. Transportation to the coast is by buffalo cart or by water. Negros has no port which will admit large vessels, and sugar must be shipped to Iloilo in small steamers or schooners. In the northern Philippines the syrup from the boiling pans is poured into porous earthern pots, holding about 150 pounds each, and COMMERCIAL AND NATIVE INDUSTRIES. 263 is then allowed to drain. The molasses, which is caught in Jars, is sold to distilleries for making alcohol. In Negros the method is dif- ferent. The syrup is boiled longer and is finally poured into large wooden troughs and stirred with shovels until it cools, forming a dry sugar which is ready to pack at once. The sugar produced by the method first described is called "clayed" sugar. It must be broken up and sun-dried before it can be shipped. The cigar factories of Manila are the chief local industry of the city. The manufacture of tobacco products has been the chief source of revenue under the Spanish regime, to church and state as well as to the merchants. Including the raising of the tobacco by field laborers on the plantations and the makers of the trade supplies, the industry gives employment to several hundred thousand people. The famous Manila tobacco is a descendant of plants brought from Mexico to the Philippines by missionaries in the latter part of the seventeenth cen- tury. The plants flourished in their new home and the natives soon became exceedingly fond of tobacco. How the Spaniards Controlled Tobacco. During the first two centuries of Spanish rule, little attention was paid to the cultivation of tobacco, but in 1781 a royal decree of Spain declared the entire tobacco business of Luzon to be a government mo- nopoly. The natives were compelled to raise it against their will, out- rageous abuses arose and rioting often resulted. By one expedient after another and laws of remarkable cruelty, the Spanish succeeded in raising the revenue from about two millions in 1840 to five millions in 1859 and eight millions in 1870. Natives were compelled to raise tobacco where before they planted corn and rice. Finally another law was passed whereby any land not cultivated in tobacco was appro- priated by the government and given to any appointee who would devote it to that purpose. Under tyranny and starvation the natives rebelled and great violence was shown by the soldiers who put down the insurrection. Finally, on the last day of 1882, the monopoly was abolished by law and the disgraceful busifiess was brought to an end. Although the best Philippine tobacco is not considered equal to the choicest Cuban crop, it is neveij-theless excellent. Thus far compara- tively little systematic efl'ort has been made to improve its quality. 264 COMMERCIAL AXD NATIVE INDUSTRIES. There is no question that the quantity of the crop might be greatly increased and its quality bettered by more careful growing and* curing. Until now the best results have been obtained in north Luzon, although tobacco is grown also in Panay, Negros, Cebu and Mindanao. In 1897 the leaf tobacco exported was more than 800,000 pounds, while the cigars numbered nearly 157,000,000. In addition the home consump- tion is large, for nearly everybody smokes in the islands, native and foreign, man, woman and child. The tobacco is milder and not as well flavored as the Cuban. It comes close to the Mexican leaf, from which it is descended, but, according to experts, is better than the latter. TJie tobacco factories in Manila range from small shops to estab- lishments employing hundreds and even thousands of operatives. They are large, roomy buildings, well ventilated, with excellent sanita- tion. The operatives are mainly girls and women, mostly half-castes and natives. The largest concern employs more than 10,000 operatives. CoflFee Growing in Luzon. Coffee of excellent quality i is readily grown in the Philippines, where the bushes come to bearing in their fourth year. They grow best at a considerable elevation, where the temperature does not average above seventy degrees Fahrenheit. The bushes require shade and moisture and yield but one crop of berries annually. These are picked from the trees by hand, heaped up in piles for a few days, and then washed to get rid of pulp. The price of coffee at Manila varies greatly from year to year. The most extensive plantations are near Batangas in the island of Luzon. The coffee raised in the Philippines is of the same varieties and qualities as that from the Dutch East Indian posses- sions and can be just as favorably marketed. The export trade in coffee has not been exceedingly large, but the local consumption is considerable. Gutta percha of good quality is abundant in certain localities in the Philippines, particularly in Mindanao. It is hardly known as a Philip- pine export, as the two or three men who have dealt in it have kept their knowledge to themselves as far as possible. The export trade in hemp, sugar, tobacco and the other commercial products of the Philippines has been in the hands of European houses. Several important English, German, French and Spanish firms have houses in Manila, but the only American concern in the islands with- COMMERCIAL AND NATIVE INDUSTRIES. 265 drew from business there the year before the outbreak of war. The trade of the islands is highly profitable and has been well organized by the representatives of these great concerns. Native Industries of the Islanders. The native Filipinos are by no means as indolent as they are gen- erally credited with being, and are quite as industrious as they could be expected to be in such a climate and under such a governmental regime as existed during the Spanish administration. The Filipinos have their own native industries, which are quite distinct from the commercial in- dustries that depend on the rest of the world for their prosperity and their market. It is true that many of the native industries have taken on a commercial form in late years. In many cases their product of one sort and another has been such as to win favor for itself by proving its merit. Many of the native industries are very ancient, especially those involving spinning and weaving and the utilization and manufacture of sea-shells into useful and ornamental articles. The Chinese have done much to introduce various occupations among the Filipinos, fol- lowing the same custom that has been theirs wherever they have found inferior races in their migrations. It is to the Chinese, therefore, that many of the leading industries are credited. The most important of these industries, from a commercial point of view, is the manufacture of a beautiful fabric from the fiber of the pineapple leaf. This cloth, known variously as pifia and nipe, wins favor wherever it is shown, although it is little known in the United States. The cloth has the brilliancy and strength of silk, com- bining beauty with excellence in wearing qualities. The making of the cloth is not a complicated process. The leaves are rotted under water and in the sun, in order to separate the long threads and free them from gum, sap and foreign matter. These threads or hairs are very fine, varying in color from white to grayish and yellowish white. After being carefully washed by the native women, they are woven upon a simple hand-loom which bears a strong resemblance to the native looms used in China. The fabric resulting is considered the most ex- quisite that can be had for woman's dress in the Philippines. The same fabric is produced in Cuba, where it is equally popular. It is 266 COMMERCIAL AND NATIVE INDUSTRIES. the custom there, however, instead of weaving the cloth locally, to ship the fiber in bales to Spain, where it is woven on more perfect looms. In Spain and in France the fabric is considered one of the most beautiful that can be obtained, and those American women who have seen it quite agree with that judgment. Bracelets and Necklaces from Shells, The shell industries of the Filipinos are peculiarly interesting and altogether novel. Nature has furnished material in endless quantity and variety. The simplest form of shell work is to make bracelets and necklaces out of little shells of great variety, some no larger than chil- dren's glass beads. Live shells are preferred to dead shells in all the work and bring much higher prices, live shells of course meaning those in which the animal is living when taken from the water. The oyster shells of many species are utilized for this work. Some are perfectly flat, while others are deep and large. Conchs are found in numerous variety, widely varied in color and shape. From small shells spoons of all sorts are made. The bowl may be of a bright golden color with a high luster, the outside being pearl-gray or pink. These spoons are very cheap and can be bought in any size for a few cents a dozen. From the conch shells are made handsome bowls, tureens, vegetable dishes, cups, saucers, plates, pin-boxes, jewel-cases, card-receivers, ash cups and tobacco jars. One of the most interesting industries is the utilization of the Philippine fresh-water mussel to produce pearls and pearl-covered ornaments at will. This mussel exceeds even the oyster in the quan- tity though not the quality of the liquor which, by evaporation or separation, produces mother-of-pearl. The introduction of a bit of sand into the mussel will result in the production of a pearl in a few weeks, poor in quality of course, but still a pearl. Little images are placed in the mussel in the same way and taken out to be sold after they are coated with pearl. The images thus obtained are sold to Buddhists, who treasure them as excellent representations of their great teacher. Shell Window Panes. The preparation of window panes from the flat Manila oyster shells is a large trade among the natives. The shells are split and cut into COMMERCIAL AND NATIVE INDUSTRIES. 267 small squares and other regular shapes, forming an excellent substi- tute for glass. They shut out, perhaps, half the light, which is not an objection in such a climate, and in addition have the quality of mica of shutting out all of the heat. When fine qualities of shell are employed, the resulting tints are truly beautiful, offering a suggestion of genu- ine opalescence. On other varieties of shells exquisite engraving is done in low relief, representing landscapes and figures, with a most beautiful display of delicate tints over the whole. Cowrie shells, cats- eyes, little images of native figures and shell cameos are various phases of the native shell industry. In the forests and fields the Filipinos find many of their local industries. The bamboo is as valuable to them as it always is to the natives wherever it grows, becoming almost absolutely indispensable. It furnishes him with frame, siding, and sometimes even roofing for his house, and from it he fashions rafts, out-riggers for his boats, sledges, agricultural implements of many sorts, lance shafts, bows, bow strings, arrows, spoons, forks, fish traps, water pipes, cups, fences, bridges, musical instruments and almost anything else that he needs. The areka palm, which grows near the native houses, produces the nuts so much used for chewing. From 200 to 800 nuts per year will grow on a single tree, the local demand for them providing occupation for many na- tives, and they are used somewhat in Europe for manufacturing a dentifrice. The cacao tree, which produces the chocolate bean, has flourished in the Philippines since it was imported from Mexico early in the seven- teenth century. The rich seeds are borne in large fleshy pods. Bushes are raised from the bean and bear the fourth year, reaching maturity two years later, by which time they have attained a height of about ten feet. The beans find ready sale for home consumption, but the industry has not yet reached a commercial status. Raising Cocoanuts for Market. The cocoanut* palm flourishes throughout the Philippine islands, often growing in soil too poor to produce anything else. Trees come to bearing in six or seven years, and yield on an average twenty nuts per month. The ripe fruit is made into large rafts and floated to mar- ket, wherever possible, but when waterways are lacking it must be 268 COMMERCIAL AND NATIVE INDUSTEIES. hauled on buffalo sledges. There is a steady local demand for the oil, which is the illuminant almost invariably used by the natives and is sometimes used in place of lard for cooking purposes. Copra, as the dried meats of the nut are called, is exported in considerable quantity to Europe. Copra is used for making fine soaps and cosmetics. The castor oil bean grows wild on many of the islands, and its oil is extracted in a small way for the local trade. It is not an article of export. A species of tree cotton grows wild on many of the islands. The fiber is too short to be of value for weaving, but it is used for stuffing pillows and like purposes. Long-staple cotton was at one time successfully raised in Ilocos, but its cultivation was discouraged by the authorities, who preferred to have the natives grow tobacco. Corn is raised as a staple food article in some of the central and southern districts, especially in Cebu. On good land it yields about two hundred fold and three crops can be grown in a year. The demand for it is quite limited, as many of the natives will not eat it. Potatoes are grown in Cebu, Negros and Luzon. Those thus far produced are very small. There is a good demand for them and the price is high. Rattan is very abundant and like bamboo is put to a thousand uses. Its stems are of uniform diameter, grow to enormous length and are very strong. They are used in place of ropes and cables or are split and employed for tying together the parts of house-frames, canoes, fences, carts, sledges, and agricultural implements, as well as for binding hemp bales and sugar sacks. Split rattan is also used m bed making and chair seating. Demand for it is steady and many natives earn a living by cutting, splitting and marketing it. The Rice Industry. The staple food of the common people is rice, and they are quite successful in raising it. In former years considerable quantities of rice were exported to China, but at present the crop is insufficient for the home consumption. There are more than twenty different kinds of paddy. They may be roughly divided into two classes, the lowland rice and the highland rice. The former grows on alluvial soil under water. The fields where it is raised are divided into small plots sur- rounded by mud banks for the better control of the water supply. The grain is sown on the seeding plot to sprout, and when it has reached COMMERCIAL AND NATIVE INDUSTRIES. 269 proper height is transplanted to the flood fields. As a rule but one crop per year is obtained, the yield varying from fifty to a hundred fold. The highland rice is of inferior quality, but grows without irrigation. The yield is about, half as much as the other, but two or three crops can be raised in a year. The methods used in rice culture and harvest are of the crudest. The ground is prepared for the lowland rice by flooding it and working it with muck rakes drawn by carabaos. The young rice shoots are stuck in by hand and the ripe heads of grain are often cut one at a time with a small knife blade, though sickles are sometimes used. Threshing is usually accomplished under the feet of women or cattle, more rarely by means of wooden flails. The grain is freed from the husk by pound- ing in a wooden mortar and flat baskets are used for winnowing. Very rarely one finds simple home-made machinery for pounding or winnow- ing grain, but there is nothing of the sort in general use. The manufacture of hemp and of hemp-rope is partly native and partly Spanish. The natives had learned the virtues of hemp long before the Spanish discovery of the islands. They made an excellent rope, employing nearly all of the methods that are used to-day in that manufacture. Besides tw^isting the threads, the cords and the strands, they also braided them and with the braids in turn made strands by twisting and a second braiding. The braided ropes were often quite flat and were practically straps. They are still utilized as harness for their ponies and buffaloes and for rigging upon their primi- tive water cart. The same hempen straps are used for the making of sandals and rude rugs and for nearly every purpose to which the leather thong or strap is put by savage races. Although the native ropes are inferior to those made by Europeans or under European direction, they are strong, durable and extremely cheap, costing only a third to a fifth of the more finished product. At one time these native styles of cordage might be considered as part of the commercial industry of the country, but the exorbitant export duties and internal taxation crushed out the native enterprise. How to Reach the Philippines. It is a journey of more than a month to reach the Philippines from the United States, by the methods of travel heretofore existing. The 270 COMMERCIAL AND NATIVE INDUSTRIES. only communication they have had by regular passenger lines with the ports of Asia is by steamers running between Hong Kong, Amoy and Manila. Then there was a Spanish line sailing directly from Spain and touching at Singapore. Hong Kong is the usual port of sailing for Manila, so that it remains for the prospective traveler to reach Hong Kong, either by way of San Francisco or the Suez canal, as suits him best. The journey eastward is ten days longer than that westward. No doubt a direct line from San Francisco to Manila, via Honolulu, will be established in the near future, but until that time comes one must depend on the older steamship companies. J. M. SEYBA Aguinaldo's private secretary, who returned with him from Hong Kong to Cavite. CHAPTER XVI. AGUINALDO, THE LEADER OF THE FILIPINOS. Personality and Career of the Most Notable Man in the Philippines — The Last Insurrection Against the Spanish and How It Terminated — Bribery and the Consequences — Varying Opinions of Aguinaldo— A Word About the American Consuls — Relations with Army and Navy — Oen- eral Merritt and the Filipino Administration. It is doubtful whether even the name of the leader of the Filipino rebels against the Spaniards was known to a dozen persons in the United States until it became familiar in the days of Dewey's occu- pancy of Manila bay. His title in full, as used by himself, is Don Emilio Aguinaldo y Famy, President of the Revolutionary Government of the Philippines and General-in-chief of the Army, but his signature is usually the single word by which he is known to us. Although we knew little of th© progress of the insurrection against Spanish rule in the Philippines prior to the arrival of Admiral Dewey, the Filipinos were making history for their islands long before that time, and their leader did not reach his position of eminence by accident, but by his own energies and abilities. For a long time the native inhabitants of the Philippine islands had been restless under the oppressive yoke of Spanish cruelty. Finally, under the advice of the organized Junta Patriotica an insurrection was begun, the principal strength of which was centered in the island of Luzon, as a threat against the city of Manila, the seat of Spanish gov- ernment, and in the island of Panaj, in which is situated the city of Iloilo, second in commercial importance in the archipelago. Spanish "Pacification" of the Filipinos. Emilio Aguinaldo, now about 29 years old, is a man of an intel- ligence far beyond that of most of his people. He comes of a good family in the province of Cavite, near Manila, where he was educated and where he entered the bar. He joined the insurgents immediately 273 274 . AGUIXALDO, THE LEADER OF THE FILIPINOS. aftei- the outbreak of the rebellion in the latter part of 1896, but it was not until after the execution of Dr. Eizal that he became one of the leaders of the revolt. The blockade maintained by the Spanish squad- ron in Philippine waters against the importation of arms for the in- surgents gradually drove the Filipinos to the wall, and in December, 1897, the celebrated "pacification" of the islands was negotiated, the go-between being Seiior Pedro Paterno, director of the Manila museum, a Filipino who had remained at least passively loyal to the Spaniards. The Filipina junta at this time was composed of Emilio Aguinaldo, who exercised such executive powers as were possible to so feeble an organi- zation; Senor Artacho, home secretary; Seiior Montenogro, foreign sec- retary; Vito Bilarmino, war secretary, and Baldomero Aguinaldo, secre- tary of the treasury. The so-called "pacification" consisted in a purchase of the insurgent leaders for the sum of |800,000 (Mexican), equal to about |400,000 in gold. Aguinaldo and his associates agreed to surrender all the arms in the possession of the natives and to quit the archipelago, remain- ing away at the pleasure of the Spanish government, and to use their utmost infiuence to disband and disarm all the insurgent forces. Aguin- aldo was to go to Hong Kong to receive the first installment of the Spanish monej^ amounting to |400,000 (Mexican), and he was then to cable to Artacho, who surrendered himself to the captain-general as a hostage. On receiving Aguinaldo's cable message that the money had been paid Artacho was to dissolve the insurgent organization, disband the troops and give up their arms. This part of the programme was carried out in December, 1897, or the early part of January, 1898, and the treaty of Biyak was signed with great solemnity. Then came the time to test the sincerity of the parties to the agreement. The facts seem to show that Spa-in followed exactly the course that she followed in Cuba in 1878 to terminate the Ten Years' War. The pro- gramme as carried out in each case provided, first, for the bribing of the insurgent leaders to use their influence for peace; second, the promising of whatever reforms were necessary to induce the insurgent armies to cease fighting; third, the immediate punishment of all the insurgent leaders on whom they could get their hands as soon as peace was actually established and matters in their own hands; fourth, the re- newed and redoubled severity of treatment to the pacified colony and fifth, the utter ignoring and repudiation of every detail of the seductive AGUINALDO, THE LEADEE OF THE FILIPINOS. 275 promises they had made. A natural consequence of this chain of cir- cumstances was the renewal of insurrection in each case by the de- ceived insurgents, as soon as new equipment and new organization could be arransred. ^&"- Eeforms Promised by the Spanish, By the terms of the treaty an armistice of three years was estab- lished and the natives were to lay down their arms and turn them over to the Spanish authorities. The Spanish authorities on their part bound themselves to grant certain reforms, of which the most important were the restriction of the power of the religious orders, the representation of the Filipinos in the Spanish Cortes, the future impartiality of justice and law between Spaniards and natives in the Philippines, the participation of natives in the office-holding of the islands, and the liberty of the press. It was agreed that the governor-general of the islands. General Primo de Rivera, should remain in that position throughout the three years of the armistice as a guarantee that the reforms would be established, and that a general amnesty should be proclaimed. The Spanish authorities were so far from carrying out their agree- ments that it would seem almost as if they had studiously endeavored to go as far as possible from the terms of the treaty and for the further irritation of the Filipinos. In the first place, General Eivera was re- moved from his post very soon, thus withdrawing from the islands the one who would have been best informed on the demands of the natives. The general amnesty was never declared, although a few pardons were given. Instead of establishing the reforms, the very things that were most irritating to the insurgents were aggravated. The religious orders were given increased power, two vacant bishoprics being filled at once by priests of the very orders that were the first cause of the insurrection. In the short time intervening between the signature of the treaty and the removal of General Eivera from Manila, he denied the existence of the agreement and executed many of the very persons whom he had prom- ised to protect, endeavoring by this means to destroy the nucleus of the revolution. In Spain he was given the decoration of the grand cross of San Fernando, as a reward for the peace he had established. By all of these things the Filipinos believed themselves absolved from any 276 AGUINALDO, THE LEADER OF THE FILIPINOS. obligation to Spain that had been assumed by the mutual agreements included in the treaty. General Greene's Opinion of Aguinaldo. It is interesting to note what General Francis V. Greene of the United States army in the Philippines thought of the bribery phase of the affair and of Aguinaldo. In his official report to the secretary of war, dated August 30, 1898, he says: "Aguinaldo and his associates went to Hong Kong and Singapore. A portion of the money, $400,000, was deposited in banks at Hong Kong, and a lawsuit soon arose between Aguinaldo and one of his subordinate chiefs named Artacho, which is interesting on account of the very hon- orable position taken by Aguinaldo. Artacho sued for a division of the money among the insurgents according to rank. Aguinaldo claimed that the money was a trust fund, and was to remain on deposit until it was seen whether the Spaniards would carry out their promised re- forms, and if they failed to do so, it was to be used to defray the expenses of a new insurrection. The suit was settled out of court by paying Artacho |5,000. No steps have been taken to introduce the reforms. More than 2,000 insurgents who had been deported to Fernando Po and other places are still in confinement, and Aguinaldo is now using the money to carry on the operations of the present insurrection." General Whittier's statement shows that Aguinaldo even refused to take money for his personal expenses when asked to return to Manila, by the American consul at Singapore, Spencer Pratt, who offered him money for that purpose. Aguinaldo and the American Consuls. The reports of these two officers were evidently made before they had carefully investigated the facts. Aguinaldo was on his way to Europe with the lion's share of the bribe money, when news of the prob- ability of war between the United States and Spain reached him in Singapore, where he remained to see whether the Filipinos might not profit by Spain's difficulties. It was then that occurred the negotiations with our worthy representative, Consul Pratt, which, Aguinaldo now claims, in part justify his assertion that the United States made an AGUINALDO, THE LEADER OF THE FILIPINOS. 277 alliance with him by which he was to assist in expelling the Spaniards from the Philippines, and in return the United States was to recog- nize the independence of the Filipino republic. It is, of course, impos- sible to tell how big a fool an American consul is capable of being, but developments at Singapore and Hong Kong lead to the belief that the record was advanced a long distance. No one need suppose, however, that Senor Aguinaldo was deceived as to the authority of a mere consul to bind our government. He is altogether too shrewd and too well read to have any illusions, though of course now it suits his game to set up the claim that his return to Cavite was due to the solicitations and agree- ments of our consular representatives. To show how well he has studied the situation let me recall a con- versation he had with General Anderson, who commanded the first de- tachment of our troops that landed at Cavite June 30 last. It should be remembered that Aguinaldo had probably never regarded the United States as anything more than a geographical expression until within five months preceding this conversation, for no one had ever thought of the possibility of our interference with the future of the Philippine archipelago. Aguinaldo at his second or third meeting with General Anderson asked him point-blank whether the United States had any intention of treating the Philippines as colonies. As General Anderson had no orders and no authority to reveal the policy of his government he replied that he could not answer that question; but, he added, the United States had been a nation for more than 120 years without colonies, and Aguin- aldo could judge for himself whether our government would try to colonize a distant territory at this late day. "That is true," replied Aguinaldo, "and besides I have read the constitution of the United States very carefully, and I cannot find in it any provision for colonies." As I said before, no one need imagine that Senor Aguinaldo was under any hallucination as to the powers of a consul to pledge the faith of his government. It is probable that he knew the duties and limita- tions of our amateur diplomats in Singapore and Hong Kong even better than they did. No Filipino Pilot Aboard the Olympia. When it was evident that war was only a question of days Aguinaldo went from Singapore to Hong Kong, hoping to arrive in time to see 278 AGUIXALDO, THE LEADER OF THE FILIPINOS. Commodore Dewey, but lie was several days too late. As there are peo- l)le who confidently assert that Aguinaldo piloted Commodore Dewey's flagship into Manila bay the night before the battle it may be as well to say that neither Aguinaldo nor any other Filipino was on board the Olympia at that time. Moreover, the onlv one of his followers with 1'.; ■ tleet was a man whom the commodore intended to use as an interpret^.* in case he should fall in with any Filipino fishermen from whom he might want to get information before entering Manila bay. Three of these men — Teodoro Sandico, A. G. Medina and T. Alejandrino — came off to the fleet before the commodore sailed from Mirs haj, and one of them was taken aboard the storeship Zaflro. As this vessel was the last vessel in the line on entering Manila bay he was not in a position to do any piloting even if he had been capable of such work, which he was not. On May 17, however, after Aguinaldo and his followers had haunted the American consulate in Hong Kong morning, noon and night for many days, Consul-General Wildman sent them all aboard the McCul- loch and they went to Manila bay. It was distinctly understood by Aguinaldo that Admiral Dewey assumed no authority over and no re- sponsibility for his actions, and that the object striven for was solely the defeat and expulsion of the Spaniards. As I accompanied him from Hong Kong and was able to be of some service to him, I was received at his headquarters with great cordiality until after the arrival of the first detachment of troops. Admiral Dewey put him ashore in Cavite, gave him a great deal of ammunition and a few cannon, and he started to work. His campaign was wonderful and Admiral Dewey was greatly pleased. Aguinaldo took possession of one of the abandoned houses in Cavite, and at first he acted Avith great good judgment and simplicity. In a day or two the natives flocked into Cavite in droves, and as a small steamer arrived from Hong Kong, laden with arms and ammunition, in a week there were more than 1,000 men ready to take the field against the Spaniards in Cavite province. Major-General Merritt and Aguinaldo. When the American army came Aguinaldo was crowded out of Cavite, and there began to be friction. General Merritt's arrival in- creased that friction and Aguinaldo complained of the way he was beiu"- AaUINALDO, THE LEADER OF THE FILIPINOS. 279 treated, expressing considerable bitterness because of the manners of the American soldiers. That marked the poiht where Aguinaldo came to be popularly re- garded as an ambitious, designing enemy to be mistrusted, and the in- surgent fight for independence became Aguinaldoism. Major-General Merritt's report of the relations between his army and the Filipinos, of date August 31, was as follows: "As General Aguinaldo did not visit me on my arrival nor offer his services as a subordinate military leader, and as my instructions from the president fully contemplated the occupation of the islands by the American land forces and stated that 'the powers of the military occu- pant are absolute and supreme, and immediately operate upon the po- litical condition of the inhabitants,' I did not consider it wise to hold any direct communication with the insurgent leader until I should be in possession of the city of Manila, especially as I would not until then be in a position to issue a proclamation and enforce my authority, in the event that his pretensions should clash with my designw. "For these reasons the preparations for the attack on the city were pressed and military operations conducted without reference to the situation of the insurgent forces. The wisdom of this course was subse- quently fully established by the fact that when the troops of my com- mand carried the Spanish intrenchments, extending from the sea to the Pasay road on the extreme Spanish right, we were under no obligations by prearranged plans of mutual attack to turn to the right and clear the front still held against the insurgents, but were able to move forward at once and occupy the city and suburbs. "To return to the situation of General Greene's brigade as I found it on my arrival. It will be seen that the difficulty in gaining an avenue of approach to the Spanish line lay in the fact of my disinclination to ask General Aguinaldo to withdraw from the beach and the 'Calle Real,' so that Greene could move forward. This was overcome by instructions to General Greene to arrange, if possible, with the insurgent brigade commander in his immediate vicinity to move to the right and allow the . American forces unobstructed control of the roads in their immediate front. No objection was made and accordingly General Greene's bri- gade threw forward a heavy outpost line on the 'Calle Real' and the beach and constructed a trench, in which a portion of the guns of the Utah battery was placed." 280 AGUINALDO, THE LEADER OF THE FILIPINOS. After reporting the details of the taking of Manila, General Merritt continued: "After the issue of mj proclamation and the establishment of my office as military governor, I had direct written communication with General Aguinaldo on several occasions. He recognized my authority as military governor of the town of Manila and suburbs and made profes- sions of his willingness to withdraw his troops to a line which I might indicate, but at the same time asking certain favors for himself. The matters in this connection had not been settled at the date of my depar- ture. Doubtless much dissatisfaction is felt by the rank and file of the insurgents that they have not been permitted to enjoy the occupancy of Manila, and there is some ground for trouble with them owii^g to that fact, but, notwithstanding many rumors to the contrary, I am of the opinion that the leaders will be able to prevent serious disturbances, as they are sufficiently intelligent and educated to know that to antagonize the United States would be to destroy their only chance of future politi- cal improvement." President McKinley Instructs General Merritt. The relation between the army and the Filipinos that was desired by the administration at Washington is outlined in the order sent to General Merritt regarding the occupation of the city of Manila, as soon as word of the capture was received in the United States. The order was as follows: "Adjutant-General's Office, Washington, D. C, Aug. 17, 1898.— Major-General Merritt, Manila, Philippines: The president directs that there must be no joint occupation with the insurgents. The United States, in the possession of Manila city, Manila bay and harbor, must preserve the peace and protect person and property within the territory occupied by their military and naval forces. The insurgents and all others must recognize the military occupation and authority of the United States and the cessation of hostilities proclaimed by the presi- dent. Use whatever means in your judgment are necessary to this end. All law-abiding people must be treated alike. By order secretary of war. H. C. CORBIN, "Adjutant-General." AGUINALDO, THE LEADER OF THE PILipmOS. 281 Let us return again to the progress of such government as the Fili- pinos were able to form and to their operations against the Spanish before Manila, prior to the American taking of the city. Dictatorial Government of the Filipinos. On the 18th of June Aguinaldo issued a proclamation from Cavite establishing a dictatorial government with himself as dictator. In each village or pueblo a chief was to be elected, and in each ward a nendrum; also in each pueblo three delegates, one of police, one of justice, and one of taxes. These were to constitute the junta, or assembly, and after consulting the junta the chiefs of pueblos were to elect a chief of province and three counsellors, one of police, one of justice, and one of taxes. They were also to elect one or more representatives from each province to form the revolutionary congress. This was followed on June 20 by a decree giving more detailed instructions in regard to the elections. On June 23 another decree followed, changing the title of the govern- ment from dictatorial to revolutionary, and of the chief officer from dic- tator to president; announcing a cabinet with a minister of foreign affairs, marine and commerce, another of war and public works, another of police and internal order, justice, instruction and hygiene, and an- other of taxes, agriculture and manufactures; the powers of the presi- dent and congress were defined, and a code of military justice was for- mulated. On the same date a manifesto was issued to the world explain- ing the reasons and purposes of the revolution. On June 27 another decree was issued containing instructions in regard to elections. Ou August 6 an address was issued to foreign governments, stating that the revolutionary government was in operation and control in fifteen provinces, and that in response to the petition of the duly elected chiefs of these provinces, recognition of belligerency and independence was requested. In this address it was announced that the revolutionary govern- ment had the city of Manila besieged. Order and tranquillity reigned. Nine thousand ^prisoners of war were held by the insurgents, and an army of 30,000 was declared to be under arms. 2S2 AGUINALDO, THE LEADER OF THE FILIPINOS. Status of the Filipino Administration. In the province of Cavite and that portion of the province of Manila outside of the city and its suburbs, that was occupied by the insurgent troops as well as those of the United States, their military forces, military headquarters, etc., were very much in evidence, occu- pying the principal houses and churches in every village and hamlet, but there were no signs of civil government or administration. It was reported, however, that Aguinaldo's agents were levying taxes or forced contributions not only in the outside villages, but (after the Americans entered Manila) by means of secret agents, in the market place of the city itself. At Aguinaldo's headquarters, in Bakor, there were signs of activity and business, and his cabinet officers were in constant ses- sion there. . Aguinaldo never himself failed to claim all the prerogatives due to liis alleged position as the de facto ruler of the country. The only general officer who saw him or had any direct communication with him was General Anderson. He did much to thwart this officer in organiz- ing a native wagon train and otherwise providing for his troops, and he went so far, in a letter of July 23, as to warn General Anderson not to land American troops on Philippine soil without his consent — a notice which, it is hardly necessary to say, was ignored. The day before the attack on Manila he sent staff officers to the same general, asking for the American plans of attack, so that their troops could enter Manila with them. Merritt and Aguinaldo Meet. Aguinaldo did not call upon General Merritt upon his arrival, and this enabled the latter to avoid any communication with him, either direct or indirect, until after Manila had been taken. General Merritt then received one of Aguinaldo's staff officers in his office as military governor. The interview lasted more than an hour. General Merritt referred to his proclamation as showing the conditions under which ' the American troops had come to Manila and the nature of the military government, which would be maintained until further orders from Washington. He agreed upon the lines outside of the city of Manila, AGUINALDO, THE LEADER OF THE FILIPINOS. 283 up to which the insurgent troops could come, but no further, with arms in tlieir hands. He aslced for possession of the water worlis, which was given, and, while expressing friendship and sympathy for the Philip- pine people, he stated very positively that the United States govern- ment had placed at his disposal an ample force for carrying out his in- structions, and even if the services of Aguinaldo's forces had been needed as allies he should not have felt at liberty to accept them. From the first it was seen that the problem of how to deal with Aguinaldo's government and troops would necessarily be accompanied by embarrassment and difficulty, and would require much tact and skill in its solution. The United States government, through its naval commander, had to some extent made use of them for a distinct mili- tary purpose, to harass and annoy the Spanish troops, to wear them out in the trenches, to blockade Manila on the land side, and to do as much damage as possible to the Spanish government prior to the arrival of our troops, and for this purpose the admiral allowed them to take the arms and munitions which he had captured at Cavite, and their ships to pass in and out of Manila bay in their expeditions against other provinces. But the admiral was very careful to give Aguinaldo no assurances of recognition and no pledges nor promises of any descrip- tion. The services which Aguinaldo and his adherents rendered in preparing the way for attack on Manila were certainly entitled to con- sideration, but, after all, they were small in comparison with what was done by our fleet and army. An American Government in Manila. Our army entered Manila on the afternoon of August 13. On the 14th the capitulation was signed, and the same day General Merritt issued his proclamation establishing a military government. On the 15th General Mac Arthur was appointed military commander of the walled city ajid provost-marshal-general of the city of Manila and its suburbs, and on the 17th General Greene was appointed to take charge of all fiscal affairs and the duties performed by the minister of finance. Eepresentatives of the postoffice department had arrived on the steam- ship China in July and they immediately took charge of the Manila postoffice, which was opened for business on the 16th. The custom house was opened on the 18th, with Lieutenant-Colonel Whittier as collector, and the internal revenue office, with Major Bement as collector 284 AGUINALDO, THE LEADEE OF THE FILIPINOS. on the 22cT. Captain Glass of the navy was appointed captain of the port, or naval officer, and took charge of the office on August 19th. The collections of customs during the first ten days exceeded |100,000. The collections of internal revenue were small owing to the difficulty and delay in ascertaining what persons had or had not paid their taxes for the current year. The administration of water works was put in charge of Lieutenant Connor, of the engineers, on August 25; the provost court with Lieutenant-Colonel Jewett, judge advocate United States volun- teers, sitting as judge, was appointed and held its first session on August 23. The provost-marshal-general had charge of the police, fire, health and street cleaning departments, and the issuing of licenses. The guardia civil, or gendarmerie of the city, proving indifferent and inef- ficient, were disarmed and disbanded; the 13th Minnesota regiment was detailed for police duty. One or more companies were stationed in each police station, from which patrolmen were sent out on the streets to take the place of the sentries who had constantly patrolled them from the hour of entering the city. Resuming Business in the City. / The shops were all closed on Saturday afternoon, %h.e 13th; on Monday some of them opened, and by Wednesday the banks had resumed business, the newspapers were published, and the merchants were ready to declare goods at the custom house; the tram cars were running and the retail shops were all open and doing a large business. There was no disorder nor pillage of any kind in the city. The conduct of the troops was simply admirable, and left no ground for criticism. It was noted and commented upon by the foreign naval officers in the most favorable terms, and it so surprised the Spanish soldiers that a considerable num- ber, of them applied for permission to enlist in the American service. A total of about |900,000 of public funds belonging to the various government departments was taken in charge by General Greene to be applied properly in public service. General Merritt's Proclamation to the Filipinos. On the day after the taking of Manila, Major-General Merritt issued the following proclamation to the Filipinos: AGUINALDO, THE LEADER OF THE FILIPINOS. 285 "Headquarters Department of the Pacific, August 14, 1898. "To the People of the Philippines: "I. War has existed between the United States and Spain since April 21 of this year. Since that date you have witnessed the destruc- tion by an American fleet of the Spanish naval power in these islands, the fall of the principal city, Manila, and its defenses, and the surren- der of the Spanish army of occupation to the forces of the United States. "II. The commander of the United States forces now in possession has instructions from his government to assure the people that he has not come to wage war upon them, or upon any part or faction among them, but to protect them in their homes, in their employments, and in their personal and religious rights. All persons who, by active aid or honest submission, co-operate with the United States in its efforts to give eifect to this beneficent purpose, will receive the reward of its support and protection. "III. The government established among you by the United States is a government of military occupationj and for the present it is or- dered that the municipal laws such as affect private rights of persons and property, regulate local institutions, and provide for the punish- ment of crime, shall be considered as continuing in force, so far as compatible with the purposes of military government, and that they be administered through the ordinary tribunals substantially as before occupation, but by officials appointed by the government of occupation. Duties of the Provost Guard. "IV. A provost-marshal-general will be appointed for the city of Manila and its outlying districts. This territory will be divided into sub-districts, and there will be assigned to each a deputy-provost- marshal. The duties of the provost-marshal-general and his deputies will be set forth in detail in future orders. In a general way they are charged with the duty of making arrests of military, as well as civil olfenders, sending such of the former class as are triable by courts-mar- tial to their proper commands, with statements of their offenses and names of witnesses, and detaining in custody all other offenders for trial by military commission, provost courts, or native criminal courts, in ac- cordance with law and the instructions hereafter to be issued. 286 AGUINALDO, THE LEADER OF THE FILIPINOS. "V. The port of Manila, and all other ports and places in the Philippines which may be in the actual possession of our land and naval forces, will be open, while our military occupation may continue, to the commerce of all neutral nations as well as our own in articles not contraband of war, and upon payment of the prescribed rates of duty which may be in force at the time of the importation. "YI. All churches and places devoted to religious worship and to the ar-ts and sciences, all educational institutions, libraries, scientific collections, and museums are, so far as possible, to be protected; and all destruction or intentional defacement of such places or property, of historical monuments, archives, or works of science and art, is pro- hibited, save when required by urgent military necessity. Severe pun- ishment will be meted out for all violations of this regulation. "The custodians of all property of the character mentioned in this section will make prompt returns thereof to these headquarters, stating character and location, and embodying such recommendations as they may think proper for the full protection of the properties under their care and custody, that proper orders may issue enjoining the co-opera- tion of both military and civil authorities in securing such protection. "YI. The commanding general, in announcing the establishment of military government, and in entering upon his duty as military gover- nor in pursuance of his appointment as such by the government of the United States, desires to assure the people that so long as they preserve the peace and perform their duties toward the representatives of the United States they will not be disturbed in their persons and prop- erty, except in so far as may be found necessary for the good of the service of the United States and the benefit of the people of the Philip- pines. "WESLEY MERRITT, "Major-General, United States Army, Commanding." The forces of the United States were in possession of the harbor and citj- of Manila and the adjacent shores. CHAPTER XVII. FEICTION BETWEEN AMERICANS AND FILIPINOS. Complications Are Threatened from the Beginning— The Germans and the Insurgents — Affair of the Steamer Filipinas— Recognizing the Insur- gent Flag — How Dewey Dealt with Aguinaldo— Aguinaldo and His Forces Required to Leave Manila—Picturesque March Through the City — Filipino Congress in Session at Malolos. Although the open rupture in peaceable relations between Filipinos and Americans before Manila did not occur till months later, there were frequent incidents in the earlier weeks of the American occupation which warned all parties that something might happen at almost any time. Even before the army came, while Dewey was entirely in charge of the situation, some things required deft handling, and from the moment the troops arrived, complications began to multiply. Some- times it was the position taken by the Germans which threatened diffi- culty and sometimes the Filipinos themselves did not do just what was needed to insure harmony. The Germans and the Filipinos. Early in July the German cruiser Irene stopped the insurgent steamer Filipinas and threatened to bring her and her crew to Manila as prisoners if she did not haul down the insurgent flag at once and hoist a white flag. The Filipinas, a steamer of about 700 tons, loaded with a half cargo of tobacco, was in hiding in the coves around Subig bay. She was owned and officered by Spaniards, but her crew was a native one. The crew mutinied and killed the twelve officers. They then took charge of the ship and hoisted the insurgent flag. On the shore of Subig bay, and chiefly in the town of Subig, were 400 Spanish soldiers. As the insurgent forces on the land began to close in on them they fled in a body to the Isla de Grande, near the mouth of Subig bay. They took with them 100 sick and about 100 women. They 288 FRICTION BETWEEN AMERICANS AND FILIPINOS, retained their small arms and had only one Maxim gun. The insurgents hoped to starve them into submission. About this tim^ the Filipinas incident occurred, whereby she passed from the Spanish to the insur- gents. Two hundred insurgent soldiers took the ship and approached the island and fired on the Spaniards. Their firing was ineffective, bu*t after awhile the Spaniards, probably realizing the ultimate hopelessness of their position, hoisted the white flag. At almost the same time the German cruiser approached from within the bay and the Spaniards hauled down the white flag, for they evidently had reason to hope for interference by the Germans. The German ship at once advanced to the Filipinas and said that the flag she flew was not recognized, and if it were not at once hauled down and a white one substituted she would be taken with her crew to Manila as prisoners. The Filipinas at once hauled down the insurgent flag, hoisted the white one and started immediately south to Manila bay. All this happened July G. She ar- rived off the American flagship late in the evening and the insurgents at once reported the matter to the admiral. Admiral Dewey sent the insurgent ship into a safe anchorage. At 12 O'clock midnight the Raleigh and Concord quietly hove up their anchors and left the bay. They steamed at once to Subig bay and fired several times on the Spaniards, who promptly surrendered. The Irene had dis- appeared just before our cruisers arrived, although she had been in Subig bay for several days for the expressed purpose of protecting Ger- man interests said to be located there. The Concord then returned to report to Admiral Dewey and find out what should be done with the 600 Spaniards captured. The Ealeigh remained at Subig on guard. Dur- ing the 7th the insurgent leader, Mr. Leyba, came out to the flagship for permission to take the Filipinas and go to Subig for the purpose of cap- turing the island. The admiral told him that it had already been done. Leyba went aboard the Filipinas with a strong force of men and left the harbor. The Concord, when she returned to report the matter to the admiral, bore a letter from Captain Coghlan of the Raleigh begging that the Spaniards captured be made American prisoners, and that they be not turned over to the insurgents, as Admiral Dewey's original orders de- manded. The Concord was sent back with instructions to turn the pris- oners over to Aguinaldo, but he exacted an ironclad promise that they should be well cared for. FRICTION BETWEEN AMERICANS AND FILIPINOS. 291 Germans Appear TTnfrieiidly. This Irene incident was of the most absorbing interest to Americans. It was the first open move on the part of Germany to interfere in affairs about Manila, and opinions differ very much as to her right to go so far as she did. Strictly according to international law, the Irene was right in treating the insurgent steamer as a pirate. Germany had not recognized the belligerency of the insurgent cause, had no official recog- nition of the flag, and might, under many circumstances, be right in stopping a ship with an unknown flag. But the circumstances in the case were peculiar. The Germans were allowed to remain in Manila bay through the courtesy of Admiral Dewey. They knew that the waters around Luzon were practically American waters. They knew very well that the insurgent flag was flying with the acquiescence of the admiral, and that the insurgents had been carrying on extensive opera- tions around the island with small steamers flying their own flag. Assuming that the Germans were permitted, under strict construc- tion of international law, to stop the insurgent steamer and make her fly a white flag, their action under existing circumstances was one of delib- erate unfriendliness to the Americans. Whether it was proper for the insurgent flag to fly in the Philippines exclusively concerned the Amer- icans, and such questions of propriety were for Admiral Dewey to decide. This same point recalls an incident in which recognition of the insur- gent flag was involved. The French and German ships refused to allow insurgent launches to come beside their ships. One day the Spaniards, looking out from Manila, saw one of them stop at the English ship Im- mortality and the occupants go aboard. They at once sent out a hurried protest. Why was the launch allowed to land on the English ship? They construed the action to imply a recognition of the insurgents' bel- ligerency. They demanded an explanation. Captain Chicester at once sent word back that he knew his business, and referred them to Admiral Dewey. The action of the Irene had another significance. For several days there had been persistent rumdrs that Aguinaldo and the Germans were intriguing. Aguinaldo, it is claimed, was anxious that Germany should recognize his belligerency. That two German officers called on 292 FRICTION BETWEEN AMERICANS AND FILIPINOS. Aguinaldo gave some show of truth to the rumors. It was evident from the Irene incident that their negotiations were not effective, and it looked very much as if the Filipinos had been stopped by the Germans because Aguinaldo refused to accept the Germans' terms. If Germany had recognized Aguinaldo's belligerency and the rebels had captured the city, there would have resulted no end of delicate complications. How Dewey Dealt with Aguinaldo. When Admiral Dewey wanted anything from Aguinaldo he always got it, and if the insurgents did anything that didn't please the admiral the latter promptly and emphatically called them down. Admiral Dewey never wrote a single communication to Aguinaldo, sending all his messages orally, and he advised that the military com- manders should follow the same course. General Anderson, however, wrote several communications, and there sprang up a number of written clashes between him and Aguinaldo. General Anderson finally declared that further arrangements should be deferred until the arrival of Gen- eral Merritt, who would have full instructions regarding the relations between America and the insurgents. Major Jones, brigade quartermaster, went to see Aguinaldo July 17 in Bakor, and found it impossible to get an audience. In response to the first request to see him word was returned that the general was busy. After some time the major once more requested an inter- view, and this time was told that the general was asleep. Major Jones then sat down and wrote a note that burned the paper. He said that in America, when a commanding oflicer was asleep or could not be seen, there was a subordinate who would transact business for him. He had come over to get 500 ponies, and he had expected the Filipinos would assist him to obtain them. The Americans had come to drive the Spaniards out of the islands. They were the friends of the Fili- pinos, and expacted to give them a good government. Aguinaldo sent over soon afterward, asking if this was an official communication, and was told by General Anderson that it was. Aguinaldo then sent back a polite note, saying that he was ready and eager to give the Americans any assistance possible, but that he did not have the ponies that Major Jones wanted. He closed his letter by expressing friendship for the Americans, for, as he put it, were they not going to drive the Spaniards FRICTION BETWEEN AMERICANS AND FILIPINOS. 293 out of the island and turn the government over to the Filipinos. Gen- eral Anderson, in answer to this, said that he did not understand it that way. Aguinaldo Wants His Status Defined. From the time of the arrival of land forces, Aguinaldo had been anxious to know what share in the battle of Manila would be allowed the insurgents. He was reluctant to be put aside, and resented the request that he evacuate his trenches and permit American soldiers to take position there. After that time, when he and his government were refused any part in the direction of affairs in Manila and his army was turned back when endeavoring to enter the city with the victorious Americans, he became more restless under the restraint and complica- tions began to arise. Correspondent John T. McOutcheon relates graphically the condi- tions as they existed up to and including the withdrawal of the Filipino forces from the vicinity of the city of Manila. He says in part: "When the Americans entered the city the insurgents swarmed in after them, looting and pillaging. They established armed barracks on the Calle Real in Malate and extensive headquarters in the Calle Obscrvatio. The chief work of the Americans began with the pres- ence of the insurgents. The Americans and Spanish were practically allied to prevent the insurgents getting into the city. Then came an order prohibiting Insurgents entering the city armed, and a force of about 300 were disarmed by the Americans. This aroused considerable feeling, and it was noticed that Aguinaldo, who still had possession of the water works, refused to let the water in the city. There then fol- lowed a long parley of negotiation, in which Aguinaldo demonstrated that his rights as governor-general were just about the same as those of General Merritt. The latter had the city, but the former had the country. It must have been rather humiliating for the American gov- ernor to find himself in a position where he could not direct affairs a half-mile beyond the city limits. Filipino Leader Demands Consideration. "In securing the water works, a number of Aguinaldo's demands had to be satisfied. He sent in several conditions which had to be ful- 294 FRICTION BETWEEN AMERICANS AND FILIPINOS. filled. Among them was that his troops should have control and sur- veillance of the water works, and as long as the Americans remained the water should be supplied through his indulgence, but as soon as the Americans left, if the islands were to be i*elinquished or given back to Spain, he wanted to be in a condition to renew the conflict against the Spanish with the same advantages as he had before the Americans came into the city. For the same reason he demanded that the troops be allowed to retain their arms until it was definitely decided that the Spanish had forever and beyond doubt been banished from control of the Philippines. He also wanted a specified number of convents within the city to quarter his troops in, he wanted the Spanish police whom Merritt had retained relieved from duty, and he wanted definite lines established within which the Americans were to control and beyond which he was to control. He demanded that the officers be allowed to Avear their sidearms when entering the city, that he himself be given the governor-general's summer palace at Malacanan, now occupied by General Merritt, and that all the products of Filipino labor be allowed to leave the islands free of duty. 1 Where the Insurgents Were in Control. "Some of these demands were preposterous, but some were reasju able and logical. He had a right to ask the retention of his arms as long as the ultimate position of the islands was in doubt, so that if the Spaniards ever regain control he will be prepared to renew his fight. The result of his other conditions is in doubt. It is merely known that outside Manila Aguinaldo's troops are supreme, and that in some quar- ters Americans are prohibited from going. Fie also has two strong barracks within the city limits, with big bodies of armed troops. Within a mile of General MacArthur's headquarters it is estimated that there are at least 4,000 armed Filipinos. He also retains control of the water works, but allows them to be operated. He has not been given a palace in the city, and it is not thought that his products will be exempt from duty. The Guardia Qvil, which is the local constabu- lary, composed of men who have served at least eight years in the Spanish army and are past masters of every form of corruption and extortion which their long post-graduate course has taught and fitted them for, are relieved and Americans assigned to take their places. Sk) FRICTION BETWEEN AMERICANS AND FILIPINOS, 295 the matter rests, and will probably remain this way until the disposi- tion of the islands is determined." When General Otis sent word to the insurgents that they must withdraw their forces from Manila and its suburbs there was a settled conviction that trouble would result. The time limit was set at Sep- tember 15, and as this time drew near and no movement was manifest in the native barracks the American lines were strengthened and preparations made for the encounter' which then seemed unavoidable. On the 14th, however, it was stated on official authority that the in- surgent generals had agreed to move out of the city and to vacate the convents and private houses that they had appropriated for their military uses. They had gone to General Otis, and after a long con- sultation this peaceful solution of the difficulty had been reached. With practical unanimity the leaders protested that they were entirely friendly to the American forces and that they did not desire to do anything which would appear unfriendly. They would willingly withdraw their troops from the city provided some assurance were given them that if the Americans left the Philippines they, the in- surgents, would be left in as strong positions as they had occupied before the city was suiTendered. Another point was brought forward very strongly which they said they were exceedingly concerned in know- ing. This was whether or not the Spaniards would be placed in their former defenses and given the arms that had been surrendered, and whether the relative positions of the Spanish and insurgent forces would be established as they were before the city was surrendered. Ruling Made by Major-General E. S. Otis. General Otis told them that if the Americans left the Philippines the Spaniards would be restored to their defensive positions and their arms given them. This did not please the insurgents, but they agreed that such an action would be just and was to be expected. Some of them, notably General Pio del Pilar, a fire-eater who had command of the forces at Paco, showed a keen resentment against being sent out of the city, and it was thought for a time that General Pilar would rebel against the acquiescence of the majority. At noon on the 14th there was great activity among the insurgents. Officers were riding around and numbers of troops were centralizing in the different 296 FRICTION BETWEEN AMERICANS AND FILIPINOS. outlying districts. Even then it was a doubtful matter whether or not they were to retire peacefully or whether a few of the rebellious hot-headed commanders would refuse to abide by the verdict of the majority. A request was made by them of the American general command- ing the Malate and Ermite division that they be permitted to march up the Luneta with their arms and pass along the ground where the Spaniards used to shoot the Filipinos. It was a pretty sentiment and General Ovenshine gave his consent. When the Filipinos Left Manila. The story of the evacuation is related by Mr. McOutcheon as follows: "At 5:30, out of the Calle Real in Ermita appeared an officer on a fiery native pony. He was Colonel Callais, one of the ablest officers in the entire insurgent army, a man whose whole soul was in the cause, who is well educated and a fine strategist, and who has a nobility of bearing that marks him a soldier and a man of high qualities. Close at the heels of his pony came the magnificent Pasig band, composed entirely of native musicians and numbering ninety pieces. Every man was in uniform and the piece they played was a stirring wild native march that set the horses to prancing and every one who listened tingling with enthusiasm. Then came the troops, hundreds and hun- dreds of them, all in blue drilling and every man with his rifle. There were over six hundred of them and the picture their bright uniforms made as the columns of four wheeled out of the Calle Real, down the Calle San Luis, with the bands playing and the horses tearing back and forth, was one never to be forgotten. Throngs of people watched the long lines march by. There was something pathetic about the whole incident, for they were being driven out of the city which they had fought so long to get into, and even though their presence within the American lines was a constant menace and their withdrawal absolutely necessary one could not help feeling sorry for them. "Down the Calle San Luis they marched, then down the Paco road toward the walled city, to the Calle Bagumbayan, and then began their triumphal march past the walls of old Manila, where the ramparts were thronged with Spanish prisoners watching the departure of their enemies. This was the nearest that a rebel flag had ever approached FRICTION BETWEEN AMERICANS AND FILIPINOS. 297 the walled city, and it must have been a source of satisfaction to the insurgents to show their strength to their hated oppressors by parading right under the ancient walls. Scores of carriages were drawn up along the line of march, and many of them contained Spanish officers. American Soldiers Cheer Filipinos. "The Wyoming soldiers lined up and cheered the insurgents as they marched by the Wyoming barracks, and it sounded strange to hear one force cheering another which the day before was looked on as half an enemy. It was a good thing, however, and it made the insurgents feel good. "S'winging from the Calle Bagumbayan, which circles the eastern and southern sides of the walled city, the departing native troops turned down the Lunetta and straight on out the Calle Real, never stopping until they left the suburbs far behind. Over in Tondo and in Paco and in Sampaloc and in the other suburbs where the insurgents had massed this scene was being repeated, although not with such a show nor with so many bands. In the twenty-four hours of September 14 over four thousand armed insurgents marched out of the city, and, although many of them returned later, they were unarmed and in con- sequence welcome to stay as long as they chose. "General Otis conducted the arrangements for the departure of the insurgents very skillfully, for it was a delicate situation and an ill- advised move might have thrown the two forces into active conflict. "The next day (September 15) marked the opening of the congress of the Philippine revolutionary government at Malolos. This town is thirty-eight kilometers north of Manila, and it is the place where Aguinaldo has set up his government. Several Americans attended the opening. The train from Manila was jammed with natives, and a great many prominent Philippine merchants and lawyers were on board. About eighty representatives from different parts of the Philippine islands were in Malolos to represent their various districts. The town was decorated with insurgent flags of all colors. Any design that re- motely approached the red and blue of the true flag was made to serve, and every nipa hut had its rudely fashioned flag floating out from the banana and palm trees. Congress was held in a church. The first session was short and not imposing. 298 FRICTION BETWEEN AMEEIGANS AND FILIPINOS, The Filipino Congress in Session. "Aguinaldo, in swallow tail and a dazzling shirt front, called the meeting to order, read his address and then retired. The session was adjourned until the following day, and time given the members to dis- cuss the articles of the new constitution. Through the courtesy of Aguinaldo the American newspaper men, Consul Williams and several other Americans were given an abundant luncheon. Speeches were made by prominent members of the congress and every expression of friendship was made. It was hard to realize that the day before the American forces had thrust the insurgents out of the city of Manila, "There were loud ^Vivos Americanos,' and the guests were made to feel that they were among friends. No people are more hospitable than the Filipinos. At one time during the luncheon a Spaniard from Manila, who was connected with a business house there, was arrested on the street near where the Americans were located for attempting to arouse public feeling against the Americans. He had been circu- lating wild stories, tending to inflame the more ignorant natives against the visitors, but the insurgent leaders ordered his immediate arrest. The Pasig band was in Malolos, and the city looked gala in the extreme. "Aguinaldo was quartered in an old convent, which had been con- verted into a place of considerable grandeur. Here he received dele- gates and friends with that serene, implacable look which is so peculiar to him." CHAPTER XVIII. FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. An Appeal from the Junta Patriotica at Hong Kong to the American People — Charges of Bad Faith — General Merritt's Opinion of the Filipinos — General Otis Tries to Secure the Release of Spanish Prisoners Held by the Insurgents — Our Expedition to Iloilo — President McKinley's In- structions to the American Authorities in Manila — A Manifesto from Aguinaldo — The Filipino Cabinet — Agoncillo in Washington — Presi- dent McKinley Appoints a Commission. Looking forward to the securing of the best conditions possible for his country, Aguinaldo lost no time in sending a commissioner to Washington to represent the Filipinos. SeSior Felipe Agoncillo was assigned to this important mission, and he journeyed to San Francisco by the same steamer which carried General Greene. General Merritt at the same time started for Paris to be present at the meeting of the treaty commissioners there. Owing to the American censorship of the cable at Manila, the Aguin- aldo government maintained an office and organization in Hong Kong, where, free from restraint, the members of the Junta Patriotica could take such action as they saw fit to support the revolutionists in the islands. The Junta issued from Hong Kong an appeal to Americans which recited the complaints and grievances of the Filipinos, and begged for redress. Many of the allegations, however, were overdrawn Filipinos Appeal to Americans. This appeal, issued November 15, 1898, was as follows: "We, the Hong Kong representatives of our countrymen, appeal to the great and good judgment of President McKinley and the spirit of fairness and justice of the American people as always shown in their regard for the petitions of the weak and oppressed. 299 300 FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. "While the fate of the islands is still undecided, and we are doing all in our power to prevent a conflict between the Americans and Fili- pinos — waiting patiently for the conclusion of the Paris conference — we implore the intervention of the President, supported by the will of the people, to end the slights shown our leaders, officials, soldiers and people by some of the American military and naval authorities and soldiers. "We do not wish to do Admiral Dewey or General Otis wrong, but we presume that reports, under press censorship, will be, as they have been, sent broadcast, alleging that all the mistakes are ours and that the Americans are treating us most kindly. But we must tell the truth for the best interests of both parties, depending upon the American President and people to see that justice is done to our leaders, Aguinaldo especially, having full confidence in ultimately receiving jus- tice from America. Pertinent Questions to be Answered. "What have we done that we should experience unfriendly treat- ment? Are the Americans our friends? The tension becomes greater daily, and any moment a shot may be fired by an irresponsible Amer- ican or Filipino soldier. And the flame thus started can only be quenched with blood dear to us both. "We beseech the American President and people to help us to control our own people by directing the officials at Manila to temper their actions with friendship, justice and fairness. "We suggest that Admiral Dewey and General Otis and General Merritt, in Paris, be asked: "If, from the commencement of hostilities to the present time, have not Aguinaldo and the Filipinos under him acceded to every request of the American officials? "When Manila was captured, although the Filipinos had driven the Spaniards into Manila, completely investing the city and occupying some of the roads commanding in part the approaches to Manila, in advance of the Americans, were Filipinos not entirely ignored and even not notified of the intention to attack, or of the time or part they were expected to play, even if such was to stand aside? "When the Filipinos, seeing the intention to attack, went to the FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. 301 assistance of the Americans, were they not stopped by an armed body and faced about, instead of being informed by friendly, peaceful request that they were not wanted? This unexpected action would have placed the Americans between two fires, Spanish and Filipino, if shots had been exchanged in the excitement of the moment, had not then the Filipinos restrained themselves and obeyed the Americans, although deprived of the fruits of victory and participation in the final triumph after fighting all the way to the very walls and bearing the brunt of three months' campaign. Spirit Shown by Filipinos. "After remaining a month on the outskirts of the city, where we had been stopped, quietly, as a garrison, we were ordered away. Did not we cheerfully obey, although having no assurances that the Amer- icans would not give back the Manila posts, vacated, to the Spanish? When located for several months still farther out, we were ordered even beyond the suburbs of the city, where no quarters, nor shelter existed for troops and where supplies were difficult to obtain, did not we obey? "Can the cruel allegations that we would murder, loot, steal and commit incendiarism if given a free hand be supported, when we con- ducted a campaign throughout Luzon, capturing all the important j)oints outside of Manila and taking and treating humanely a thousand Spanish prisoners without being guilty of such acts, beyond what ac- companies any military campaign, as the work of irresponsible camp- followers? "We beg that the American officials be asked also if all the Ameri- cans visiting the Filipinos' headquarters at Malolos, traveling in the interior, visiting the camps and lines or seeking favors of our officials, were not uniformly politely treated? Puzzles to be Solved. "In a friendly manner we invite the consideration of other points. Groundless and harmful rumors are being constantly circulated by Spanish sympathizers and malcontents, which are often believed with- out investigation. Our protests are not heard. 302 FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. "All our launches were seized because of foolish rumors that we would attack the Americans. We asked for an explanation in seek- ing their recovery, and were not even given an answer. "Our enemies were delighted, thus encouraging further rumors. "Should not some logical reason, other than mere report, be given for suddenly seizing our property in Manila? "The Spaniards, the late enemies of the Americans, are shown every consideration, and the Filipinos, friends and allies, are often treated as enemies. Does this satisfy American ideas of justice? The Filipino people cannot understand it, although their leaders tell them not to protest and that all will end well. "We are asked by the Americans to restrain our people and avoid any outbreak pending the decision of the peace commission. This we gladly do. But we beg that similar instructions be given to the Americans by the Washington government. "From the beginning of our relations, when Aguinaldo was urged in Singapore and Hong Kong to return to Cavite and assist the Amer- icans, until Manila fell, we acted under the advice and with the knowl- edge of the American officials. During that time we conquered all of Luzon outside of Manila and were informally recognized and encour- aged by the Americans. When Manila was captured their chief end was attained, we were no longer recognized and were even treated as untrustworthy. Is this just? Washington Administration Blamed. "We can only attribute this sudden change froni friendly encour- agement and co-operation to an order from Washington to the officials at Manila to avoid compromising the American government by any recognition of the Filipinos or their government. They have endeav- ored to carry out these instructions literally, believing it the proper course to ignore the Filipinos entirely, losing sight of their former friendly intercourse and assistance and of the assurances the American officials made to our leader Aguinaldo, who in turn communicated the same to his followers. "In concluding our humble but earnest appeal to the President and Ibe people of the great American Republic we wish to emphasize our absolute confidence in him and them; to make it plain that our protests FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. 303 r.re not prompted by any feeling of animosity, but are directed against tlie conditions existing at Manila, and not against the American gov- ernment or people; to acknowledge our gratitude to the American arms for destroying Spanish power in the Philippines and permitting the return of Aguinaldo, and to express the hope that America will stand by her determination not to return the islands to Spain. "We await the arbitrament of the peace commission, for whose good judgment we have profound respect, with even greater interest than the Americans, because it concerns our native land, our happi- ness, our freedom and our homes. "In the meantime we pray for peace and a perfect understanding with the Americans." Major General Merritt on the Filipinos. By this time General Merritt was in London on his way to the United States and he read with a great deal of interest the long letter of complaint against American officials in the Philippine islands addressed by the Filipino junta of Hong Kong to President McKinley and the people. In discussing the Filipinos, the American general referred to them as "children," and said it would be impossible to establish American government in the islands. He added that they must have some form of colonial government similar to the British colonial governments. Eegarding the complaints of the Filipinos the general said : "It was impossible to recognize the insurgents, and I made it a point not to do so, as I knew it would lead to complications. Admiral Dewey after my arrival pursued the same course. What was done before is not for me to comment on. I purposely did not recognize Aguinaldo or his troops, nor did I use them in any way. Aguinaldo did not ask to see me until ten days after my arrival. After that I was too much occupied to see him. "In talking with leading Filipinos I told them the United States had no. promises to nlake, but that they might be assured that the government and people of the United States would treat them fairly. This was because the United States is in the habit of dealing fairly with all struggling peoples, and not because I had been authorized to say anything of the kind. 304 FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. Criticisms on Aguinaldo. "We purposely did not give the insurgents notice of our attack on Manila because we did not need their co-operation and did not pur- pose to have it. We were moved by fear that they might loot and plunder and possibly murder. Aguinaldo's subordinate leaders, in con- versing with American officers, frequently said they intended to cut the throats of all the Spaniards in Manila. "Aguinaldo himself wrote a complaining letter saying the insur- gents had been denied 'their share of the booty,' whatever he may have meant by that. I took no notice of this letter, nor do I think the sub- ject now raised is a matter for discussion between Aguinaldo and any representative of the American government." General Otis, then the commander of the American forces in the Philippines, proposed to Aguinaldo that he release the friars and civil- ians held in captivity throughout the provinces. The insurgent leader denied their maltreatment and refused to release the prisoners, claim- ing that the civilians had enlisted as volunteers and therefore were legitimate prisoners of war. Aguinaldo also denied that women and children were detained, but said some women and children had volun- tarily accompanied their husbands or fathers into captivity. As to the friars, Aguinaldo argued that they are prohibited by the pope from accepting parochial appointments; that they are only permitted to follow monastic life, and that the parishes are intrusted to ministers of the independent monastic orders. But, he added, the Philippine clericals have deliberately and systematically deceived the pope, pretending that the country was barbarous, unfit for the regular ministry and that it was necessary that the monastic orders should administer the parishes. Therefore, Aguinaldo continued, he consid- ered it necessary to detain the friars until the pope is undeceived. Affairs About the City of Iloilo. The most threatening complications of all were centered about Iloilo, the second city of the islands, on the island of Panay, 355 miles south of Manila. This is one of the group known as the Visayas islands. Iloilo was besieged by the insurgents and so closely encircled FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. 305 that the Spanish garrison which was stationed there finallj^ was unable to hold out any longer. Several thousand soldiers were surrendered to the native forces, with large quantities of arms and ammunition, on the 24th of December. Three days later an American expedition which had been hurried southward from Manila under the command of General Marcus P. Mil- ler, arrived at Iloilo, and found that the Spaniards had evacuated the place. The steamer Churuca transferred the Spanish forces to Minda- nao. In accordance with an agreement the rebels entered the city and trenches on Monday at noon. They immediately established a municipal government. Guards were placed over foreign property. Everything was quiet and orderly. There was some looting during the night, but five natives were shot, and this had an exemplary effect. The only foreign ship in the harbor was the German cruiser Irene. The Filipinos assured the Americans that they might land unarmed, but that if the latter landed armed the natives would be uncontrollable. EVery prep- aration was made for resistance upon the part of the rebels, and re- enforcements were arriving from Negros and the neighboring islands. Instructions from President McKinley. To define the position of the American authorities in the Philip- pines, President McKinley issued a letter to the secretary of war, with instructions that it be transmitted to General Otis and by him em- bodied in a public proclamation to the Filipinos. The letter was as follows : "Executive Mansion, Washington, D. C, December 21, 1898. — To the Secretary of War. Sir: The destruction of the Spanish fleet in the harbor of Manila by the United States naval squadron com- manded by Rear- Admiral Dewey, followed by the reduction of the city and the surrender of the Spanish forces, practically effected the con- quest of the Philippine islands and the suspension of Spanish sover- eignty therein. "With the signature of the treaty of peace between the United States and Spain by their respective plenipotentiaries at Paris on the 10th inst., and as the result of the victories of American arms, the future control, disposition and government of the Philippine islands 306 FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. are ceded to the United States. In fulfillment of the rights of sover- eignty thus acquired and the responsible obligations of government thus assumed, the actual occupation and administration of the entire group of the Philippine islands becomes immediately necessary, and the military government heretofore maintained by the United States in the city, harbor and bay of Manila is to be extended with all possible dispatch to the vs^hole of the ceded, territory. "In performing this duty the military commander of the United States is enjoined to make known to the inhabitants of the Philippine islands that, in succeeding to the sovereignty of Spain, in severing the former political relations of the inhabitants and in establishing a new political power, the authority of the United States is to be exerted for the sovereignty of the persons and property of the people of the islands and for the confirmation of all their private rights and relations. A Message of PriendsMp. "It will be the duty of the commander of the forces of occupation to announce and proclaim in the most public manner that we come not as invaders or conquerors, but as friends, to protect the natives in their homes, in their employments and in their personal and religious rights. All persons who, either by active aid or honest submission, co-operate with the government of the United States, to give effect to these benefits and purposes, will receive the reward of its support and protection. All others will be brought within the lawful rule we have assumed with firmness, if need be, but without severity so far as may be possible. "Within the absolute domain of military authority, which neces- sarily is and must remain supreme in the ceded territory until the legislation of the United States shall otherwise provide, the. municipal laws of the territory in respect to private rights and property and the repression of crime are to be considered as continuing in force and to be administered by the ordinary tribunals so far as possible. The operations of civil and municipal government are to be performed by such oflEicers as may accept the supremacy of the United States by taking the oath of allegiance, or by officers chosen as far as may be practicable from the inhabitants of the islands. "While the control of all the public property and the revenues of. ..- FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. 30Q the state passes with the cession and while the use and management of all public means of, transportation are necessarily reserved to the authority of the United States, private property, whether belonging to individuals or corporations, is to be respected except for cause fully established. The taxes and duties heretofore payable by the inhabi- tants to the late government become payable to the authorities of the United States unless it be seen fit to substitute for them other reason- able rates or modes of contribution to the expenses of government, whether general or local. If private property be taken for military use it shall be paid for when possible in cash at a fair valuation and ffhen payment in cash is not practicable receipts are to be given. Commercial Status of the Islands. "All ports and places in the Philippine islands in the actual pos- session of the land and naval forces of the United States will be opened to the commerce of all friendly nations. All goods and wares, not prohibited for military reasons by due announcement of the military authority, will be admitted upon payment of such duties and other charges as shall be in force at the time of their importation. "Finally, it should be the earnest and paramount aim of the mili- tary administration to win the confidence, respect and affection of the inhabitants of the Philippines by assuring to them in every possible way that full measure of individual rights and liberty which is the heritage of free people and by proving to them that the mission of the United States is one of benevolent assimilation, substituting the mild sway of justice and right for arbitrary rule. In the fulfillment of this high mission, supporting the temperate administration of affairs for the greatest good of the governed, there must be sedulously main- tained the strong arm of authority, to repress disturbance and to over- come all obstacles to the bestowal of the blessings of good and stable government upon the people of the Philippine islands under the free flag of the United States. WILLIAM M'KINLEY." Commenting upon President McKinley's proclamation to the Fili- pinos issued by General Otis, the Independencia, a native paper, de- clared the problem presented most grave. It admitted that there were only two solutions possible — namely, the American abandonment of 310 FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. their annexation policy, claiming that the people here are not desirous of absorption in their nationality, or a prolonged and bloody war. It cited the example of the "noble patriots of Iloilo defying General Miller," expressed hope for a pacific termination of the crisis, but hinted of trouble. Aguinaldo Issues a Manifesto in Reply. Within a few hours of the proclamation issued by Major-General Otis in behalf of President McKinley the agents of Aguinaldo billed Manila with a manifesto which read as follows: "The government of the Filipinos has concluded that it is obliged to expound the reasons for the breaking off of friendly relations with the army of the United States in these islands so that all can be convinced that I have done everything on my part to avoid it, and at the cost of many rights necessarily sacrificed. "After the naval combat of May 1 the commander of the American squadron allowed me to return from Hong Kong, and distributed among the Filipinos arms taken from the arsenal at Cavite, with the intention of starting anew the revolution (that had settled down in consequence of the treaty made between the Spaniards and the Filipinos at Biak-na- bato) in order that he might get the Filipinos on his side. "The different towns now understood that war was declared between the United States and Spain and that it was necessary for them to fight for their liberty, sure that Spain would be annihilated and would be unable to do anything to put the islands in the way of progress and pros- perity. "My people rejoiced at my return, and I had the honor of being chosen as chief^ for the services I had rendered before. Then all the Filipinos, without distinction of class, took arms, and every province hurried to turn all the Spanish troops outside the lines of its boundary. "So it is easy to understand how my government would have had the power over the whole island of Luzon, Bisayas and a portion of Min- danao had the Americans taken no part in the military operations here which have cost us so much blood and so much money. "My government is quite aware that the destruction of the Spanish fleet and giving of arms to them from the arsenal has helped them much in the way of arms. I was quite convinced that the American army was FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. 311 obliged to sympathize with a revolution which had been crushed so many times, had shed so much blood and was again working for inde- pendence. I had all confidence in American tradition and history, for they were willing to fight for independence and the abolition of slavery until it was attained. The Capture of Manila. "The Americans, having won the good disposition of the Filipinos, disembarked at Paraiiaque and took the position occupied by our troops in the trenches as far as Maytubig, taking possession as a matter of fact of many trenches that had been constructed by my people. "They obliged the capitulation of Manila, and the city, being sur- rounded by my troops, was obliged to surrender at the first attack. Through my not being notified, my troops advanced to Malate, Brmita, Paco, Sampaloc and Tondo. Without these services in keeping the Spaniards in the city they would not have given up so easily. "The American generals took my advice regarding the capitulation, but afterward asked me to retire with my forces from Port Cavite and the suburbs of Manila. "I reminded the generals of the injustice they were doing me and asked them in a friendly manner to recognize in some expressed way my co-operation, but they refused to accord me anything. Then, not wish- ing to do anything against the wishes of those who would soon be the liberators of the Filipino people, I even ordered my troops to evacuate the port of Oavite and all the suburbs of Cavite, retaining only one, the suburb of Paco. "After all these concessions in a few days Admiral Dewey, without any motive, took possession of our steam launches that were circulating, by his express consent, in the bay of Manila. "Nearly the same time I received an order from Gen. Otis, com- mander in chief of the army of occupation, obliging me to retire my ^army outside certain lines which were drawn and given me, and in which I saw included the town of Pandacan and the village of Singalon, which never have been termed suburbs of Manila. "In the actual sight of the two American generals I ordered a consul- tation of my military generals, and I consulted my assistant counselors 312 FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. and generals, and the two bodies conformed in a desire to appoint a commissioner to see Gen. Hughes. "The general received my commissioner in a poor way and would not allow him to speak, but I allowed it to pass, by a friendly request from Gen. Otis, and withdrew my troops outside the given lines so as to avoid trouble and waited for the conclusion of the peace commission at Paris. "I thought I would get my independence, as I was promised by the consul-general of Singapore, Mr. Pratt, and it would come in a formal, assured, friendly proclamation by the American generals who had en- tered these waters. "But it was not so. The said generals took my concessions in favor of friendship and peace as indicative of weakness, and, with growing ambition, sent forces to Iloilo with the object of taking that town, so they might call themselves the conquerors of that part of the Philip- pines, which is already occupied by my government. "This way of proceeding, so far from custom and the practice ob- served by the civilized nations, gives me the right to proceed, leaving them out of consideration. Notwithstanding this, and wishing to be in the right to the last, I sent to Gen. Otis a commissioner with a request to desist from this fearful undertaking, but he refused to do so. War Is Threatened. "My government cannot remain indifferent' in view of a violent and aggressive usurpation*^ of its territory by a people who claim to be the champions of liberty, and so it is determined to begin hostilities if the American forces intend to get, by force, the occupation of Visayas. "I denounce these transactions before the world in order that the universal conscience may give its inflexible decision. Who are the man- slaughterers of humanity? Upon their heads be all the blood that will be wasted. EMILIO AGUINALDO. "January 6, 1899." The Manila American of January 10 thus describes the effect of Ag- uinaldo's proclamation announcing the breaking of friendly relations with the United States : "The second manifesto was posted throughout the city Sunday even- ing, and early yesterday morning. As quickly as it could be read the FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. 313 woi'd was passed among the natives and Spaniards, and the excitement rose to fever heat. Household goods were quickly packed up and two unorganized processions were started; one composed of natives traveled down the street leading to the insurgent lines, while the other, composed of Spaniards, led to the walled city. "At an early hour yesterday the news reached general headquartei*s and interpreters were sent out to make copies of the second proclamation and translations. When the purport of the manifesto was learned or- ders were sent to the headquarters of every regiment on the island to keep the men within quarters under arms, ready to respond at a mo- ment's notice to any emergency call. Guards all over the city were strengthened and every possible precaution was taken to guard against an outbreak or disturbance. "Many insurgents who have been working in the city left their posi- tions yesterday and went flocking to their lines outside the city. As a result many business houses are short of help, and some have even closed their places temporarily. The streets, which since the occupation have been almost blocked with vehicles, were unusually free and less than one-half the usual number of quilez and carromatos were to be found on account of their having been taken out of the city by the in- surgent owners." While affairs around Manila were in this condition, it was announced that a new cabinet had been formed by Aguinaldo. Aguinaldo and His New Cabinet. Aguinaldo has so dominated the affairs of the so-called Filipino. re- public that little attention has been paid to his lieutenants and the men who have been assigned to places of nominal importance in the govern- ment. Indeed, most people would find diflflculty in recalling to mind the names of any of Aguinaldo's cabinet ministers. One reason for this indifference to the individuality of the Filipino leaders below Aguinaldo may be found in the fact that nearly all of his subordinates are mere figureheads — men of no strength of character and little or no following among their own people. In all the forms of government instituted by Aguinaldo since last May there has not been one man who would allow himself to have an opinion— much less to express it— contrary to Aguin^ aldo's, except, possibly. General Pio del Pilar. 314 FILIPIXOS AXD THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. Although it is probable that the so-called central government of the Philippines — Gobierno de la Republica Filipina, as the natives call it — will become non-existent in a short time, I take pleasure in giving the names of the chief executive officers, with some idea of their qualifica- tions for their posts, as furnished by Seflor Ponce, a Filipino diplomat. Serior Ponce says that the legislative power of the Filipino republic rests with the congress, "composed of the finest elements of the land, presided over by Seuor Pedro A. Paterno, lawyer of the University of Madrid, where he is well known." Sefior Ponce gives the names of the Filipino cabinet officers as fol- lows : President — Emilio Aguinaldo. Secretary of War — Baldomero Aguinaldo. Secretary of Foreign Affairs — Cayetano S. Arellano. Secretary of Home Affairs — Leandro Ibarra. Secretary of General Revenue — Mariano Trias. Secretary- of Justice — Gregorio Araueta. Secretary of Education — Felipe Buencamino. The war ministry has only one department with five subheads. Its general director is Antonio Luna. The ministry of foreign affairs is divided into three subdepartments — that of diplomacy, in charge of Dr. T. H. Pardo de Tavera; that of the navy, whose chief is Pascual Ledesma, and that of commerce, under Esteban de la Eama. There are two bureaus in the home department, one of the police and secret service, under Severino de las Alas, and the other of hygiene and sanitation, in charge of Dr. Jos6 Albert. Benito Legarda and His Characteristics. In the department of general revenue there is one bureau under Ben- ito Legarda, whom I found to be one of the most suave and clever little diplomats in the east. He is undoubtedly well placed, for if the Repub- lica Filipina should ever have occasion to raise money from a population unwilling to be bled, Seiior Legarda is just the man to convince a reluc- tant lot of business men that it will be more pleasing to themselves and more satisfactory to the government for them to part with their money than their blood. FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. 315 One bureau of justice under Jos6 Basa and one of registry under Juan Tangeo constitute tlie department of justice. In the department of education tliere are three rather incongruous bureaus — namely, public instruction, under A. Oruz Herrera; agricul- ture and fabric industry, under Jos6 Alexandrino, and public works, un- der Fernando Caiion. Most of the men above named have been educated in Europe. Senor Arellano was professor of law in the Manila university, a magistrate and consulting lawyer for the friars and several banks and other corpora- tions. Dr. Pardo de Tavera is a doctor of the University of Paris and the author of several historical and scientific works. Senor Luna is a bacteriologist, late of the Pasteur institute in Paris. Senores Alexand- rino and Canon were educated in Europe as engineers, the former at the University of Ghent. Dr. Albert is a doctor of medicine of the Universi- ties of Madrid and Berlin. Seiiores Ibarra, Bassa, Alas, Araneta and Tangeo are lawyers who practiced in the Spanish courts in Manila be- fore the outbreak of the insurrection. Senores Eama, Ledesma and Trias were formerly merchants and are reputed to be wealthy. Senor Ponce says that the Filipino congress has now under discus- sion a constitution for the Filipino republic, and he adds an interesting item of news to the effect that already the congress has approved a law authorizing the issue of bonds to the extent of |20,000,000 (Mexican) to meet the necessary expenses of the government. Senor Ponce also says the foregoing facts show that the Filipino government is working with a regularity that is a proof of the knowl- edge with which it was formed, and that it is backed by a native press that is full of vigor. An Opinion from Senor Ponce Concerning the relations of the Filipino republic with the United States Senor Ponce^ — writing before the attack of the natives upon our troops, of course — says : "It is very difficult to forecast events, but from the data that come to the surface I can affirm that our amicable rela- tions with the Americans will never be interrupted. Even Mr. McKin- ley always repeats that America has waged war for humanity's sake, without any ambitious intention of extending her territory. We want only the proper internal prosperity and justice to the populace. All this 316 FILIPINOS AND THE AMEEICAN GOVERlSfMENT. allows us to hope that America will be our eternal Mend and that, as her people have contributed very much to enable us to gain our inde- pendence, they will also help us to preserve it by defending us against foreign aggTession." Lest any reader may imagine that Senor Ponce is more naive than most of the Filipinos in expecting the United States to undertake the protection of the Filipino republic against the encroachment of other powers, I may say that nearly every one of Aguinaldo's lieutenants had exactly the same idea. They seemed to think that we would be glad to do all that they wished and that it would be a sufficient reward to us to know that we had assisted them to free themselves from the Spaniards and establish a republic. The first reports of the formation of the new cabinet included Teo- doro Sandico in the list as minister of the interior, but this proved to be an error, as I presumed at the time. However, his relations to Aguinaldo and to Legarda, now in the cabinet, were such that some information concerning both these personalities may be of interest. Sandico and Legarda. Teodoro Sandico is a rather clever half-caste,educated as an engineer, who was the medium through whom Aguinaldo worked when he was making our consul in Hong Kong believe that he (the consul) was a diplomat of supreme sagacity and finesse. Poor Sandico really took our consul seriously for a time and believed that he had assisted in the negotiation of a treaty between the republic of the United States and the Filipino republic. It is true Aguinaldo was never deceived by the performances of our consuls at Singapore and Hong Kong, but he now finds it convenient to pretend that he was led to "help" the Americans by the representatives of our government. As a matter of fact, Aguin- aldo knew perfectly well the powers and the limitations of our consuls — a great deal better, in fact, than these men themselves knew them. One day the former United States consul to Manila, Mr. O. F. Wil- liams, took on board the collier Nanshan a very nervous Filipino, who announced that he had come to that ship at Consul Williams' request preparatory to sailing for Hong Kong. This man was Sandico, and when I questioned him about the purpose of his trip to Hong Kong he let the cat out of the bag at once for the sake of getting my influence FrLIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. 317 with Admiral Dewey to let him go in the coming trip of the Zafiro. He said that he was on very friendly terms with Seilor Artacho, who had just arrived in Cavite from Hong Kong; that Artacho had been arrested the day after his arrival, and that he was to be shot that day; that he (Sandico) had barely escaped imprisonment because he had passed the night in the same house with Artacho,* and that Consul Wil- liams had saved his life by giving him asylum on board the Nanshan. About this time one of Aguinaldo's staff, a slight young fellow named Legarda, came off to the Nanshan and told Sandico that Aguin- aldo had sent for him to come ashore. Then followed a most interest- ing struggle on the part of Sandico to escape the fate that he felt sure had been meted out to Ar-tacho and his four friends. Sandico fell back upon his position of supposed safety on board a United States vessel. Aguinaldo sent Legarda to Admiral Dewey with a request that his insubordinate officer be returned to his service. The admiral's eyes snapped when he learned that Sandico had taken refuge aboard the Nanshan at the request of Consul Williams, and he ordered Flag Lieu- tenant Brumby to see that Sandico was put ashore. The latter, finding that his asylum was to be taken from him, begged Brumby and myself most piteously to intercede with the admiral to save his life. While Legarda was ashore getting instructions from Aguinaldo, Sandico was sure his last hour had come. He was removed from the Nanshan an hour later, but the delay had been long enough to enable the admiral to let Aguinaldo know, unofficially, that it would be unwise for him to permit any summary executions in or near Cavite. CoEse- quently Sandico was merely "squeezed" for information that could be used against Artacho; but, remembering how sure Sandico was t/»at Aguinaldo intended to have him shot at sight, it seemed a little 'odd to hear the incorrect report that he was to serve in Aguinaldo's caV 'met. Legarda and His Mission to the Spanish. Benito Legarda, in spite of his youth, is one of the shrewdest and most capable of the men in Aguinaldo's entourage. He is small and slight, with regular and pleasing features and very agreeable manners. He was educated in England, he told me, having been sent to a board- ing school at Clapham, I think, when he was very young. He speuks English fluently and French fairly well. 318 FILIPINOS AXD THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. It was Legarda whom Aguinaldo sent into Manila when our troops were beginning to move toward the city and when Aguinaldo had just learned that his men were not to be allowed to take part in the city's capture. There is no doubt that he carried a proposition from Aguin- aldo to the captain-general at least to let the natives enter the city in advance of the Americans; and there are many suspicions that a much more treacherous proposition was made. Whatever may have been Legarda's mission there is no doubt that it failed. So he came back to Aguinaldo with the messages intrusted to him by the captain- general and the archbishop of the Philippines. Then, although Aguin- aldo and every one else in that neighborhood knew that the city would be forced to capitulate or would be carried by assault, and that it was only a question of a few days at most, he sent Legarda back into Manila on a secret duty. Legarda was instructed to propose to the Spaniards that the Filipinos should unite with them to crush the "Yankees," and that in return the rebels should receive their independence from Spain. Of course, the Spaniards did not form the alliance with the natives, but it is certain that Legarda was the envoy whom Aguinaldo trusted above all others on his staff. The Spaniards offered him the earth if he would desert to them, and he concluded it would, perhaps, be a wise thing to do. So he remained in Manila after his second trip thither and lived on the fat of the land in the captain-general's palace. No one in our lines could comprehend the purpose of his supposed treason, but later it was ciiscovered that he had gone back by Aguinaldo's order to remain in the city until its capture by the Americans, so that he might "bob up serenely" at the moment when the surrender took place and thus enable him to claim that he had a representative present when the Spaniards capitulated. When there is anything to be gained "by trick or device," as the law reads, the Filipinos can give the heathen Ohinee cards and spades and win. Demands of the New Filipino Cabinet. The new cabinet asked for recognition of the independence of the Philippine islands. The release of the Spanish prisoners held by the Filipinos was denied. An offer was made, however, of willingness to come to an understanding with the Americans "as allies" for the surren- FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNJMENT. 319 del" of the Spanish military and civil officers and others on the following conditions: "The negotiations to be opened formallj^ between Spain and the national Filipino government, Spain nominating a delegate to treat therewith. "Exchange of prisoners and Spain to repatriate, firstly, all the Fili- pinos held prisoners ; secondly, all prisoners of war condemned as trait- ors, revolters or deserters, and Spain to grant amnesty to all Filipinos and Spaniards accused of conspiracy in the insurrection. "Spain to defray all the expenses of repatriating the Filipinos and also the cost of maintaining and repatriating the Spanish prisoners held by the Filipinos, "Friars taken prisoners will not be included in the exchange, see- ing that they acted as papal agents during the war; but their surrender will be made on the condition, firstly, that the apostolic delegate will ask their liberty in the name of the pope; secondly, that a,ll bulls and pontifical decrees granting special privileges to the religious orders be revoked; thirdly, that all rites of the secular clergy be respected; fourthly, that no friar hold any parish, cathedral, episcopate or dioc- esan preferments; fifthly, that all such preferments be held by native or naturalized Filipino clergy, and, sixthly, that rules for the election of bishops be fixed." Conditions around Iloilo became more critical. The streets were barricaded and many buildings prepared for defense in the event of attack. The insurgents threatened to destroy the whole business quarter of the city at the first shot of bombardment by the Amer- icans. The banks sent their funds aboard ships in the harbor. Presi- dent McKinley's proclamation had to be typewritten aboard ship, as the printers on shore declined to do the work, and when the text of the proclamation w^as read to them they ridiculed the notion that con- ciliation was possible. Agoncillo's Work in Washington. Seiior Agoncillo, the Filipino representative in Washington, had made repeated efforts to obtain diplomatic recognition from the Presi- 320 FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. dent and the secretary of state, always without success. They had re- ceived him personally and had listened to his presentation of affairs, but had given him no official recognition whatever. In his communi- cation of January 24 to the secretary of state, Seiior Don Felipe Agon- cillo called attention to the fact that on January 11 he addressed a letter to him upon the question of recognition, forwarding with it a memoran- dum demonstrating that, according to all American precedents, the Philippine republic was entitled to recognition, and in the same letter invited the attention of the secretary to the present strained condi- tions at Manila, where overzeal on either side might create a condition resulting in grievous loss of life and urging the necessity of an early and frank communication between the representatives of the two countries. He further called attention to the fact that since his letter was written the very circumstances he feared have brought the two countries to the edge of war. Referring to the continual movement of ships and troops to the Philippines, Agoncillo said he was unable to conceive of any reason why the army and navy of the United States, lately employed against a common enemy, should be turned against America's recent associate. The United States, he said, had no active enemy in the orient, hav- ing proclaimed an armistice with Spain. It was true, he continued, that Spain had undertaken to convey to the United States its alleged claim against the Philippines, a claim which Spain was not capable of enforcing and which never found its origin in the consent of the people of those islands. He inquired: "Are my government and people to be left to suppose that it is because of some desire on the part of the American government to enforce against its late associate this exploded claim that the United States is massing its forces at the late capital of the Philippine islands?" He was sure the secretary of state would appreciate, in view of the circumstances detailed, the quieting, reassuring effect upon the minds of his countrymen to result from a disclaimer upon the part of the American government of any intention to attack their liberties and independence. An American Commission to the Philippines. But by this time there were two delegations of Filipinos in "Wash- ington. One was that headed by Agoncillo, representing Aguinaldo and FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. 321 the insurgents ; the other, wealthy merchants, also Filipinos, who were opposed to Aguinaldo and regarded him as an adventurer. President McKinley decided upon the appointment of a commission to visit the Philippine islands and confer with the leading people, both Spaniards and insurgents, concerning the organization of a government. He believed it would be taking great risks for Congress or himself or anybody to attempt to frame a government for the Filipinos without knowing thoroughly the sentiments and the requirements of the people and the conditions in which they were situated. Although he probably knew as much on this subject as any man who had not personally visited the archipelago, he did not feel competent to make any recommenda- tions. He believed that he should go very slowly. He wanted also formally to assure the Filipinos of the friendly intentions of the United States. He wanted them to understand that the purpose of his government was to give them as large a share of self-government as the circumstances would justify, and that he would like to have the views of the people of importance, the intelligent classes, the property-owners and taxpayers as to the form of government most suitable. This commission was composed of Admiral Dewey, General Otis, Colonel Charles Denby of Evansville, Ind., who was for thirteen years minister to China; President Schurmann of Cornell University, and Professor Dean C. Worcester of Michigan University, Ann Arbor. The latter is the author of an exhaustive and valuable scientific work on the Philippine islands, drawn from information which he gained in scientific exploration and study in the archipelago through a period of nearly three years. Native papers and insurgent leaders gave little credit to the appoint- ment of the commission, claiming that it was but a ruse of the Amer- icans to gain time and strengthen their position. This was the state of affairs at the end of January, 1899, when American men-of-war and American soldiers were being sent as rapidly as practicable to add to the forces already in the far-away islands of the east. Then, in the first days of February, occurred the lamentable encounter which marked the beginning of a new war, this time the United States of America against the native inhabitants of the remote Philippine archipelago. 322 FILIPINOS AND THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. Sentiment in the United States. The action of the Filipinos in bringing on a conflict, stimulated to prompt action those United States senators who had been in doubt on the treaty question, thereby accomplishing a purpose diametrically op- posed to what the insurgents desired. The treaty of peace negotiated in Paris by the American and Spanish commissioners, was ratified by the senate on Monday afternoon, February 6, the vote being fifty-seven to twenty-seven — more than the two-thirds majority required. The tension had been great in the senate and there was considerable doubt whether or not ratification would be carried. The country, how- ever, was gratified that the senate took this action, believing that the time to settle questions as to our disposition of the Philippines was after we had safely taken care of our own treaty of peace. On the same day. Senator McEnery of Louisiana, offered a resolution declaring that there was no intention on the part of the United States to annex the Philippine islands or admit their population to citizenship; that after we had prepare'd them for self-government we would dispose of them as will be best for their welfare and ours. This resolution went over for action at a later date. Agoncillo and his fellow-members of the Filipino embassy left Wash- ington for Montreal the night before the first news of hostilities was re- ceived in the United States. It was believed that he had been warned by cable of Aguinaldo's intentions. From that time he made his head- quarters in the Canadian city, keeping in touch with the Filipina Junta in Paris, London and Hong Kong. The policy which had been adopted toward the Filipinos met with strenuous opposition from a large and influential class in the United States. The McEnery resolution passed the United States senate, de- claring our ultimate purpose was not to annex the Filipinos. It became evident that the sentiment of the country was by no means unanimous for annexation. The military operations which resulted in the deatli of thousands of Filipinos who sincerely believed they were fighting for the freedom of their countiy, aroused a great deal of feeling. CHAPTER XIX. OUR WAR WITH THE FILIPINOS. Commencement of Hostilities Between Americans and Filipinos— The Ad- vance of the Americans — Old Men and Children in the Trenches — Shells From Dewey's Fleet — A Filipino Proclamation — Manila on Fire —Cessation of Hostilities — Arrival of the Philippine Commission — The Attack on Pasig — Aguinaldo in the Trenches — Arrival of the Oregon. It was on the night of Saturday, February 4, that the first outbreak between the Filipino insurgents and the American troops in the Philip- pine islands took place. That evening three of the natives attempted to pass the American picket lines at Santa Mesa in the city of Manila. They were challenged and retired without replying. A second attempt met with the same opposition, and when they approached the line for the third time Corporal Greely,of the First Nebraska Volunteers, challenged them and then opened fire, killing one and wounding another. These shots aroused the insurgent line, stretching from Caloocan, near the bay, north of Manila, to Santa Mesa, in the rear of the city, and a fusillade was started at many points. The pickets of the First Nebraska, the First North Dakota and the First Montana regiments replied vigorously, and hot work began. The American outposts, how- ever, held their ground until reinforcements arrived. At 9 o'clock the Filipinos attempted to rush the lines, and almost broke through the wavering pickets and breathless detachments that had hurried to their support. The Americans, however, grew stronger every minute. The artillery joined in the m^Ue and soon from the bay Admiral Dewey's warships began to shell the insurgent positions. The Filipinos then concentrated their forces at three points, Caloocan, Gagalangin and Santa Mesa. The Attack of the Filipinos. At 1 o'clock in the morning the insurgents opened a hot fire from the three points simultaneously. This was supplemented by the fire 333 324 OUR WAR WITH THE FILIPINOS. of two siege guns at Balik-Balik and by advancing their skirmishers at Paco and Pardacan. The Americans replied by a heavy fire, but in the darkness they could have little knowledge of its effect. The Utah light artillery at last succeeded in silencing the guns of the Filipinos. The Third artillery was pounding away at the flashes of fire showing the insurgent positions on the extreme left. The engagement lasted over an hour. During much of the time the United States cruiser Charleston and the gunboat Concord^ stationed off Mala- bon, hammered with the rapid-fire guns of their secondary batteries upon the insurgent position at Caloocan. At 2:45 in the morning there was another fusillade along the entire line. By this time the United States monitor Monadnock was in position south of Manila and opened fire on the insurgent line near Malate. When daylight came the Americans advanced. The First California and the First Washington infantry made a splendid charge and drove the insurgents from the villages of Pato and Santa Mesa. The Nebraska regiment also distinguished itself, capturing several prisoners and one howitzer and a very strong position at the reservoir which is connected with the Manila water works. The Twentieth Kansas and the Dakota regiments compelled the enemy's right flank to retire to Caloocan. Fir- ing continued throughout Sunday at various points. The American losses at the end of the battle were approximately 50 killed and 200 wounded. It was impossible to do more than estimate the losses of the Filipinos. Burying the Dead Insurgents. All day Monday, burial parties were busy interring the dead who fell during the fighting on Saturday night and Sunday. Hundreds of dead Filipinos were found in the rice fields and were buried on the spots where they were found. The most conservative calculation placed the loss of the Filipinos at 1,000 dead and 2,000 wounded. Late Monday afternoon, General Hale's brigade advanced and took the water works at Singalon. Four companies of the Nebraska regi- ment and a part of the Utah battery with two field guns and two Hotchkiss guns met the enemy on the hill a half a mile out, and a sharp engagement took place, in which the Nebraskans lost four men. The Filipinos were driven back, retiring in bad order. General Ovenshine's GENERAL ELWELL S. OTIS GENERAL WESLEY MERRITT OUR WAR WITH THE FILIPINOS. 327 brigade advanced and took Paranaque, capturing two field guns. Gen- eral MacArthur's division advanced beyond Gagalangin without loss, the enemy retreating upon Caloocan. By the night of Tuesday, after three days and nights of inter- mittent fighting, the insurgent forces had been driven back ten miles to the east and south of Manila and five miles to the north, where they still had lodgment in the vicinity of Malabon. The advances of the American troops had never once been checked, the enemy being scat- tered like rabbits. First the canebrakes in front of advanced positions were shelled and as the lurking rebels broke from cover to seek safer quarters, they were raked with a withering cross-fire from the rifles of the Americans, Who then advanced in irresistible charges. The Work of the Sharpshooters. The Filipinos did their shooting almost exclusively from behind trenches, or from ambushes in the thickets, except that sharpshooters in the treetops were kept busy. The Filipinos wasted a vast quantity of ammunition, but they almost invariably shot too high, so that while the killed and wounded on the American side made a distressingly long list, the escape of the troops from an appalling slaughter, considering the intrenchments everywhere, the junglelike growths of vegetation suit- able for ambushes, and the short range firing from native huts, was almost miraculous. On the side of the rebels the dead had literally fallen in heaps. There were swarms of armed men everywhere in front of the American lines when the fighting began. Tottering old men and little boys, armed only with knives, huddled in the trenches with the native riflemen, and many of these — how many will probably never be known — were shot down along with the more formidable warriors. Caloocan became the scene of fighting as the Filipinos were driven farther from the city. On the evening of February 7, Lieutenant A. C. Alford of the Twentieth Kansas infantry and a private of that company were killed and six others of the regiment were wounded while recon- noitering. The party was in a jungle when it was attacked by the enemy. Two companies of the Kansas regiment were sent to the relief of their comrades and drove the Filipinos into Caloocan, penetrating to the very heart of the town. Meanwhile gunboats shelled the suburbs. S28 OUR WAR WITH THE FILIPINOS. General Otis finally recalled the troops, but the natives, misunder- standing the retreat, failed to take advantage of it. The outskirts of the town were burned. Two days later another conflict occurred at Caloocan. General MacArthur's forces lying north of the Pasig river were swung into the town and routed the Filipinos after a lively battle. Before the men were in the field, however, shells were thrown from the guns of Admiral Dewey's ships for a full half-hour. The natives were badly demoralized and had lost heavily before the real fighting began. The American land forces were hurried forward at 3:40 in the after- noon and within two hours the enemy were utterly routed and the village was reduced to ashes. Shells from Dewey's Fleet. The next stronghold where the insurgents made a stand was Malabon, out of which place they were driven by the American troops on February 11, setting fire to the town as they retreated. The monitor Monadnock and the cruiser Charleston shelled the insurgent outpost!? and drove them toward the mountains, while the American columns were advancing. In the attack the American army suffered a loss of two killed and nine wounded; the insurgent loss was heavy. After the retreat of the insurgent forces, plans showing a meditated attack upon Manila were discovered. Fighting before Manila was now interrupted for a few days, except for unimportant skirmishes between outposts of the opposing armies. The American authorities in Manila, however, had quite enough to do to guard the city froni threatened uprisings. It was believed at one time that there was a plan to bum the city and many alleged con- spirators were arrested. It was well understood that the people of the city and the suburban villages were in sympathy with the insurgents and would take any chance to assist them. On February 14, some of the rebels took possession of the houses near the outposts, a skirmish followed and we lost nine men in a Cali- fornia regiment before the enemy were driven out. Then a gunboat shelled the villages and the jungle, driving the Filipinos toward the famous lake, Laguna de Bay. By this time the American outposts were extended to a position twelve miles beyond the city. Another skirmish occurred on the Tariquina road on February 18, in which about twenty OUR TYAR WITH THE FILIPINOS. 329 Americans were killed and wounded. A day later word came that the California volunteers had abandoned Guadalupe church, setting it on fire, and retired to San Pedro Macati. The rebels still held the country in the vicinity of Guadalupe, Pasig and Patero, despite the efforts of the gunboats to dislodge them from the jungle on both sides of the river. The heat was intense and increasing daily, so that the American soldiers were suffering greatly from the weather to which they were not accustomed. There was a daily list of casualties cabled to the war department by Major-General Otis and the list of killed, wounded, and those dying from disease grew steadily. The Capture of Hollo. At Iloilo conditions were equally strained, but hostilities had not progressed to such an extent. After weeks of waiting in the harbor, on the morning of Friday, February 10, General Miller sent an ulti- matum to the commander of the Filipinos on shore, notifying him it was his intention to take Iloilo, by force if necessary. Non-combatants and foreigners were warned to leave tlie town within twenty-four hours. The insurgents were also warned that they must make no further belligerent preparations. The gunboat Petrel was then moved to a position close inshore near the Filipino fort, while the cruiser Boston took up her station at the other end of the town. Friday passed quietly. During the day many refugees left the town of Iloilo. The majority of them were taken on board foreign ships lying in the harbor. Searchlights from the United States warships were kept all night long illuminating the town and its defenses. Filipinos are Driven Back. 'At 3 o'clock Saturday morning the gunboat Petrel signaled to the cruiser Boston that the insurgents were working in their trenches. In return the Petrel was ordered to fire warning shots upon the town from her 3-pounders. The enemy responded with a harmless fusil- lade. The Boston and the Petrel then bombarded the trenches, com- pletely clearing them of their occupants in a very short time. Soon after the bombardment began flames broke out simultaneously 330 OUR WAR WITH THE FILIPINOS. in various parts of the town. Thereupon forty-eight marines, acting as infantry and artillery, were landed from the cruiser Boston, and a com- pany was sent ashore from the gunboat Petrel. These detachments marched straight into the town of Iloilo, and, hoisting the stars and stripes over the fort, took possession of the place in the name of the United States. The capture of the town and its defenses having been accomplished, the marines and soldiers who had been sent ashore assisted in saving the American, English and German consulates from destruction by the fire, which was raging among the frail and inflammable buildings of the town. The Swiss consul's residence, which was in the same row as the consulates named, was burned. The entire Chinese and native sec- tions of the town were destroyed, but foreign mercantile property escaped with slight damage. There was some desultory firing by the enemy in the outskirts of Iloilo, but not a single American was injured. On February 12, General Miller ordered a reconnoissance in force to ascertain the enemy's position. Between Iloilo and Molo and beyond no hostile forces were encountered, but midway between Iloilo and Jaro a large body of the enemy was encountered, occupying both sides of the road. They met the advance of the American troops with a severe and well directed fire. The Americans deployed and returned the fire with a number of volleys. Supported by the Hotchkiss and Gatling guns the enemy was driven through Jaro to the open country beyond. The Americans lost four men slightly wounded, the insurgent loss was severe. Plan a Terrible Revenge. The following proclamation issued from Malolos, the seat of the insurgent government, on February 15, shows the feelings that animated Aguinaldo and his advisers as regards the American army: "First. You will so dispose that at 8 o'clock at night the individuals of the territorial militia at your order will be found united in all of the streets of San Pedro, armed with their bolos and revolvers or guns, and ammunition if convenient. "Second. Philippine families only will be respected. They should not be molested, but all other individuals, of whatever race they may OUR WAR WITH THE FILIPINOS. 331 be, will be exterminated without any compassion after the extermina- tion of the army of occupation. "Third. The defenders of the Philippines in your command will attack the guard at Bilibid and liberate the prisoners and 'presidiarios,' and having accomplished this they will be armed, saying to them: " 'Brothers, we must avenge ourselves on the Americans and exter- minate them, that we may take our revenge for the infamy and treach- ery which they have committed upon us; have no compassion upon them ; attack with vigor. All Filipinos en masse will second you. Long live Filipino independence.' "Fourth. The order that will be followed in the attack will be as follows: The sharpshooters of Tonda and Santa Ana will begin the attack from without, and these shots will be the signal for the militia of Troso Binondo, Quiato and Sampaloe to go out into the street and do their duty; those of Pake, Ermita, and Malate, Santa Cruz and San Miguel will not start out until 12 o'clock unless they see that their companions need assistance. "Fifth. The militia of Tonto will start out at 3 o'clock in the morn- ing; if all do their duty our revenge will be complete. Brothers, Europe contemplates us; we know how to die as men, shedding our blood in defense of the liberty of our country. Death to the tyrants. "War without quarter to the false Americans who have deceived us. "Either independence or death." Manila on Fire. On the night of February 22 the insurgents fired the city of Manila. Flames burst forth simultaneously from Santa Cruz, San Nicholas and Tondo, and from these points the fire spread in all directions. While the American soldiers were fighting the fiames, retarded as they were by the natives, who cut the fire hose, who shot at the men from dark corners as they stood exposed in the glare, and who started new confla- grations, boatloads of armed insurgents stole down from the north and crept up the swampy creeks of the Vitas district. There they prepared for an attack on the rear of the American troops. They lurked at the edges of the creeks and amid the salt marshes, gathering their forces together from the city and the bay, until they were ready for serious work inside the American lines. 332 OUR WAR WITH THE FILIPINOS, At dawn the signal for the attack was given by the insurgent cannon on the north opening fire on Caloocan. The American cannon responded promptly and soon silenced the insurgents' guns. In the meantime the Filipinos had issued from the marshes in an effort to break the Ameri- can line. Gen. Hughes, however, attacked them strongly from the city, drawing off such men as he could spare from police work and fire fight- ing. Shells from the Monadnock. Outside the city the Filipino forces made a concentrated attack on General MacArthur's front, near Caloocan. This was shortly before noon. The American artillery was brought into play at the first sign of hostilities, and this, with a deadly fire from the rifles, kept the enemy in check. This fighting was plainly visible from the bay, and it became the duty of the signal corps to indicate the positions of bodies of insur- gents to the Monadnock. The consequenqe of this maneuver was that the gunners in the twin turrets of the monitor were soon sending 10-inch shells humming clear over the American lines to fall and burst among the Filipinos, who could in no way escape this long-range bombardment. Many of the monitor's shells set fire to the native habitations and to the brushwood, adding greatly to the desolation of the scene for miles around Manila. There were also other fires in the environs, for the insurgents continued to carry out their policy of devastation by fire, even when it could not possibly injure the Americans. After two hours of shelling from, the Monadnock the enemy had practically ceased to trouble our force at Caloocan, and hundreds of them lay dead in their tracks. Meanwhile other bands of natives were being fought off at Santa Cruz and San Nicolas. Indeed, they even attempted to invade the out- skirts of the city itself in the vicinity of the turbulent Tondo district, with its teeming native population. There was every indication of a desperate movement having been planned to include every conceivable form of annoyance to the Ameri- can forces, inside the city and out. It is evident that incendiarism was designed to throw the invaders into confusion, and that if our soldiers had not been so prompt to meet the emergency an attempt would have been made to capture the city and put the foreign residents to the OUR WAR WITH THE FILIPINOS. 333 sword. The spirited attacks all along the line were a part of this scheme. That it failed in its object was due to American generalship and Ameri- can pluck. A considerable force of insurgents had advanced from Balik-Balik, intending to force their way through our lines and enter Manila during the conflagration. Finding this impossible they remained in hiding around the edges of a clearing in the woods beyond San Juan del Monte. On the 24th several companies of the First Wyoming regiment, which guarded that part of the American line, were sent against them, and after a sharp engagement succeeded in forcing them to beat a retreat. The Filipinos left thirty dead among the thickets where they had fought. Enemy Has Dummy Rifles. A surprising discovery was made when insurgents captured on the skirmish line were brought in. It was found that many of them were armed with dummy rifles, there being about three of them to every Mauser. The bluff made by the dummies having been discovered, the secret of the apparently excellent equipment of the insurgents was revealed. It was a source of wonder to General Otis where arms could have come from. The Consul-General at Hong Kong insisted that he had suppressed the shipping of rifles and ammunition from that port; but armed bodies of insurgents carrying equipment seemingly of the first class were numerous, and it was asserted by the Spaniards that the insurgents were continually receiving guns. Guerrilla warfare was adopted by the Filipinos. With knives concealed they would lie in wait, and slipping out noiselessly, stab Americans in the back. Americans compelled to be on the streets all carried revolvers and on a number of occasions were compelled to use them against the assassins. The United States transport Scandia, which arrived at Manila with the Twentieth Infantry on the 23rd, was joyously greeted, and no time was lost in getting the troops ashore. Temporary quarters were speed- ily arranged for them, and the men were wild with joy on learning that they had arrived in time to take part in the fighting. 334 OUR WAR WITH THE FILIPINOS, A Period of Comparative Quiet. A cessation of hostilities followed these aggressive movements on the part of the insurgents, and Manila had a period of comparative quiet. Frequent skirmishes with small bodies of the enemy engaged the attention of the troops, and many of them were taken prisoners, but there was little loss of life in either army during these encounters, and neither side gained any appreciable advantage. President J. G. Schurman, of Cornell university, and Professor Dean 0, Worcester, of the University of Michigan, members of the United States Philippine commission, arrived at Manila from Hong Kong, on March 4, on board the cruiser Baltimore. On March 7, the insurgent forces, to the number of several thousand, were driven from their position at San Juan del Monte with great loss. A conference of the regimental and brigade commanders in the early morning decided on making the attack. General Hale's brigade, which had been holding the water works against the repeated attacks of the Filipinos, swept forward in the form of a V, with the open ends towards the Pasig river. This form of advance inclosed the rebel position completely and permitted a terrible concen- tration of fire. The positions of the American forces were as follows: On the west, the Wyoming regiment ; on the northeast, the Nebraska and T'wentieth Infantry; on the river side a gunboat was detailed for the action to shell the enemy in retreat. Brilliant Charge by Americans. As soon as the lines were well under way in the massed advance the Wyoming regiment closed in, firing rapidly and effectively. Suddenly one of the companies of the regiment sprang from the line with a cheer, and, with an officer at its head, dashed toward the insurgent trenches. It was Company C, and the action electrified the American lines. The other companies of the Wyoming regiment rushed to the front, and th*,' entire line swept down upon the Filipinos. Maintaining their fire for only a short time after the roaring charge, the Filipinos leaped from their earthworks and fled, closely pressed, Eetreat was cut off in all OUR WAR WITH THE PILIPINOS. 335 directions save toward the Pasig river, and as the insurgents turned that way they were met by a pitiless shelling by the gunboat. The infantry lines closed in at once from the east. The Nebraska regiment was led by Colonel Stotzenberg, who carried his men forward with great speed. In the woods the Filipinos were scattered into small bands and driven along the river front. The loss of the insurgents was very heavy, the accurate fire of the gunboat creating panic in the fleeing lines. The only casualty to the American forces was the wounding of Private Speach of the Nebraska regiment. The American forces were halted at the river for a rest. The insur- gents had been utterly routed. This engagement was the following up of the advance made the day before by General Hale's brigade in San Tolan and Mariquina. It was then that the Americans met and defeated the largest body of natives yet encountered. General Wheaton's bri- gade was also in action, the fighting having spread toward his flank. The Colorado, Nebraska and Wyoming regiments, with eight field pieces, the Utah regiment and two companies of the Oregon infantry- were in the fighting line. In the rear the Twentieth Infantry was held in reserve. Resistance was made by the natives the moment the Ameri- can troops approached San Tolan. Their fire was not effective, however, while the marksmanship of the western regiments was superb. A river gunboat joined in the attack and shelled the towns as in the fighting of this morning. The troops in General Wheaton's brigade were the California, Idaho and Washington regiments, and the Sixth Regular Artillery. In face of the telling fire the natives clung to their position before the towns until the shells began dropping among them. Then the American infantrymen advanced and the Filipinos fled from their earthworks. They carried some of their dead and wounded with them, but a great number were left upon the fleld of battle. Eight Americans were wounded. Heavy Insurgent Losses. At daylight, March 13, General Wheaton's divisional brigade was drawn up on a ridge behind San Pedro Macati, a mile south of the town. The advance was sounded at 6:30 a. m., the cavalry leading the column at a smart trot across the open to the right, eventually reaching a clump 336 OUR WAR WITH THE FILIPINOS. commanding the rear of Guadalupe. Supported by the Oregon volun- teers, the advance force opened a heavy fire on the Filipinos. The response was feeble and desultory, apparently coming from small groups of men in every covert. While the right column was swinging toward the town of Pasig they advanced, pouring volleys into the bush. A small body of natives made a determined stand at Guadalupe church, but was unable to withstand the assault. At 7:30 a. m., a river gunboat started toward Pasig. The insurgents were first encountered by this vessel in the jungle near Guadalupe. Steaming slowly, the gunboat poured a terrific fire from her gatling guns into the brush. For all of an hour the whirring of the machine guns alternated with the booming of the heavier pieces on board. In the meantime Scott's battery ashore was shelling the trenches and driving the enemy back. The artillery advanced to the ridge of bamboo, drove a few of the enemy's sharpshooters away with volleys from their carbines and then went on with little opposition. In the meantime the infantry had been sent forward in extended order, the Washington regiment resting on the bank of the river, each regiment deploying on reaching its station and furnishing its own sup- ports. The entire column wheeled toward the river, driving the enemy before it, and then advanced on Guadalupe. The artillery moved to a ridge commanding Pasig and Pateros. The Attack on Pasig. By this time the enemy was in full flight along a line over a mile long, and the firing was discontinued temporarily, in order to give the troops a rest before making the attack on Pasig. After a short rest General Wheaton resumed the attack on Pasig. Scott's battery, sup- ported by two companies of the Twentieth Eegiment, advanced on Guadalupe by the road along the river bank, the remainder of the Twentieth Regiment and the Twenty-second Regiment following with the reserve of the Oregon volunteers. At 11:30 a. m. the column came in contact with the enemy, and a gunboat steamed to the firing line and cleared the jungle on both sides, while the battery took up a position on a bluff at the right. The first shot from the American field pieces, at 1,200 yards range, dismounted a gun of the enemy at Pasig. After the town had been shelled the Twen- OUE WAR WITH THE FILIPINOS. 337 tieth Eegiment lined up on the bluff and the Twenty-Second took up a position on the left of the place, with the cavalry in the center, where- upon the enemy retreated to the town. The gunboat then moved into a bend opposite, and a hot fire on the Filipino position was maintained along the whole American line until 2:20 p. m., when preparations were made for the attack. At 3 p. m. our gunboat started in pursuit of the enemy's armed tug, chasing her to the lake. At 3 :30 p. m. a large body of the enemy was discovered working around our right flank, and the Twentieth Eegiment was moved to a commanding ridge. The natives were met opposite Pateros, but they bolted. Thirty of the insurgents were killed, sixteen were taken prisoners, and the Americans lost six men wounded. An attempt was made to secure a passage across the river to the island on which the town of Pasig is built, but it was a failure and in consequence the insurgents, taking advantage of the darkness of the night, returned in force to the town. There they were found the fol- lowing morning strongly intrenched, and a desperate fight, lasting for seven hours, was made against them by the troops of General Wheaton's brigade. The left wing of the American forces, consisting of the Twentieth and Twenty-second infantry, crossed the river and made a detour to the rear of Pasig. Meanwhile the Washington volunteers on the right cap- tured Taguig and took 350 prisoners. The troops of the brigade which were not engaged in crossing the river fired volleys from the shore, sweeping the Filipino trenches with their bullets. By these movements the natives were almost surrounded, but the numerous creeks flowing through the flat and muddy country greatly delayed the progress of the American troops, thus affording loopholes for the insurgents, with the result that many of them escaped. Three thousand Filipinos took part in this action. Four hundred of them were killed. There was fierce street fighting in Pasig before the last of the enemy was driven out or captured. Pateros had been reoccupied by the insurgents, and this town was also captured after severe fighting. In this action one American was killed and five were wounded. With the capture of Pasig, Pateros and Taguig, the American forces held complete possession of the Pasig river from the Bay of Manila to the Laguna de Bay. This distance is only eight miles, but control of it 338 OUR WAR WITH THE FILIPINOS. practically dmded the island of Luzon into two parts. Laguna de Bay is a great inland body of water over 100 miles in circumference. The Pasig river, eight miles long, is the Laguna's outlet to the sea at Manila. Pateros is a place of 2,842 people, according to the latest Spanish census. Only a mile eastward toward Laguna is Taguig, with 9,664 people. Pasig is three miles beyond Taguig, and commands the exit of the Pasig river from Laguna de Bay. It is more of a city, being a trans- shipping point for the commerce which passes between the country bor- dering on the lake and Manila. The channel between Pasig city and the south side of the river is much larger than those which separate Pateros and Taguig. The crossing of this water and the taking of Pasig were the crowning feats of the forward movement of Wheaton, ^to Another Lively Battle. The First battalion of the Twentieth infantry regiment advanced from Pasig, on March 16, clearing the country to Cainti, a well-defended village of TOO inhabitants five miles northwest of the foothills. The troops first encountered the Filipino outposts in the dense jungle on the banks of the river. The enemy was dislodged after half an hour's fight- ing. The Americans adA'anced in splendid manner under a heavy fire until they were ready to volley the natives from the trenches. The latter had a great advantage and dropped a number of our men. The Americans charged across the rice fields, making four advances on the enemy, who numbered 1,000 men, 500 of whom were intrenched, and in the face of a cross-fire. Our troops carried the town after four hours' fighting and burned the outskirts, the insurgents firing from the win- dows and keeping up a running fire in the streets. The Americans then withdrew in order to obtain more ammunition. The Filipinos lost about 100 men, and the American loss was two killed and thirteen wounded. Aguinaldo in the Trenches. During all these days of battle Aguinaldo was a daily visitor in the tJTuches and outposts of the insurgent army. He was received enthus- iastically everywhere by the troops. OUB WAR WITH THE FILIPINOS. 339 The Filipino government established pensions for disabled private soldiers of |7 (Mexican) a month. Officers were to receive more according to their grade, majors receiving |30 a month and generals |50. The widows of privates were allotted |7, of officers below the grade of gen- eral $10, and of generals |15 a month. Another decree of the govern- ment empowered provincial governors to levy contributions arbitrarily on the inhabitants under their supervision whenever the revenue from legitimate sources should have become exhausted. Arrival of the Oregon. Just at sunset, on the evening of March 18, while the band on shore was playing "The Star Spangled Banner," with the troops at parade and the warships in the harbor lowering their colors, the battleship Oregon steamed into Manila Bay, saluted Admiral Dewey, and dropped anchor amid the cheers of seamen afloat and soldiers ashore. The Oregon made the voyage from Honolulu without incident, and arrived in as perfect condition as when it made its famous trip around the Horn to help smash the Spanish fleet off Santiago. The arrival of General Lawton made a reorganization of the Ameri- can forces necessary, and two divisions of three brigades each were formed. General Lawton assumed command of the First, which consisted of the Washington, North Dakota, and California volunteers, under Gen- eral King; six troops of the Fourth cavalry, the Fourteenth regulars, the Idaho volunteers, and a battalion of the Iowa troops, under General Ovenshine; the Third and Twenty-second regular infantry and the Ore- gon regiment, under General Wheaton, and Dyer's and Hawthorne's light batteries. General MacArthur's division consisted of two batteries of the Third artillery, the Kansas and Montana volunteers, under General H. G. Otis; the Colorado, Nebraska and South Dakota regiments, and six companies of the Pennsylvanians, under General Hale; the Fourth and Seventh regulars, the Minnesota and Wyoming volunteers, and the Utah artillery. A separate brigade was assigned to provost guard duty, consisting of the Twentieth and eight companies of the Twenty-third regulai- infantry. 340 OUR WAR WITH THE FILIPINOS. A Letter From the Front. Correspondent McCutcheon, writing from Manila under date of March 19, sent the following interesting account of affairs in the island at that time: "When the Esmeralda arrived this morning from Hong Kong after a fearful experience with the China sea I went ashore, and had barely reached the Hotel Oriente when I heard that General Wheaton's com- mand had been fighting the evening before near Taguig. Reports indi- cated that the fighting still continued. Taguig is at the junction of the Pasig river and the lake, about ten miles from the center of Manila. It has been the scene of several skirmishes lately. "Another correspondent and I at once started for the trouble zone. The streets of Manila were almost deserted and there was a quiet about the town that contrasted strongly with the condition of things three months ago. Then everything was booming and optimists firmly believed that hostilities between the Americans and insurgents were highly improbable. Now the die was cast and each day for the last month and a half had told a tale of slaughter and military activity. "As we finally left the limits of the suburbs and reached the lonely roads through the paddy fields southeast of Paco we encountered an occasional soldier, who told awful stories of the fight at the front. The first report was that eighty Americans had been captured, a number killed and many wounded. Another report was more moderate, and another was that many of the prisoners had been subjected to inhuman torture. Each report was distinguished by some picturesque feature that had grown from the retelling or from the narrator's imagination. "At San Pedro Macati we left our vehicle and secured tough little ponies for the remainder of the trip, goon afterward we passed the American trenches and rode on to intercept General Wheaton's com- mand, which was supposed to be on the shores of the lake about three miles further on. At the Pasig ferry there was a,hospital corps waiting the remainder of the wounded and dead coming down the river in launches. One launch had already gone on to Manila with about twenty wounded men from the skirmish of the night before. We were informed that General Wheaton was about a mile beyond the ferry, A ride of OUR WAR WITH THE FILIPINOS. 341 ialf a mile brought us to strings of bullock carts and evidences of a soldiers' encampment. "Here we found General Wheaton. He occupied a picturesque head- quarters on a little slope at the side of the road, his house being a rough nipa-thatched shelter. The general had just returned and was in his undershirt, with a soiled service-beaten pair of khaki trousers. His face showed the effects of the spirited work of the past week and he looked tired. Still he was studying carefully a blue-print map of the lake district and figuring out future movements. He was flushed with the success of the day's work, for his command had routed the insurgents, killing a great number of them, and then, not satisfied with this, had chased them fifteen miles down the lake shore, the insurgents burning the towns as they fled through them. When the Americans got through the Pasig country was rid of every insurrecto for the time being. The Americans then began their march back to the camp, but had not arrived at the time. General Wheaton estimated the insurgent losses for the week at about 2,000, while the Americans had lost fewer than flfteen killed and fifty wounded. "The general strikes me as being a regular fighting man without frills. His policy is to sail in and mow a clean swath in any direction as long as there is an insurgent, and the work seems to agree with him. See No Natives in Manila. "The streets of Manila at night are absolutely deserted except for soldiers and an occasional white man. There are no natives to be seen anywhere. There is a great deal less apprehension than there was a few days ago, and people are growing ' accustomed to the conditions of affairs. Eumors are thick, and there is always a feeling of expectation that is now the natural thing. No one can predict where the next out- break will be, for the reason that the insurgents are now operating in a flying column, and attack one American section of the line one night and probably another several miles away the next. "The Americans now have divided the insurgents north of Manila and those south of the city, so that communication between the two divided forces is difficult. The gunboats control the lake and the navy the sea and bay, so that it is almost impossible for the two forces to 342 OUR WAE WITH THE FILIPINOS. join without making the long and difficult trip around the lake on its eastern shore. "It is believed that the only operation that will have a decisive effect will be a big movement north toward Malolos and San Fernando, but there are not enough Americans here to do that now. On the arrival of the troops now on the way something may be done, but there is a feeling that at least 60,000 troops will be necessary to protect the city and to form powerful flying columns north and south. If the insurgents can be driven from the big cultivated valley which runs north through the island and chased into the mountains, it is thought their zeal will diminish tremendously." Native Villages Burned. On the night of March 18 some of the Filipinos who had been driven from Cavite and the small towns in the vicinity of Pasig combined forces and attacked a company of the Washington volunteers, a detached post at Taguig, about a mile and a half southeast of Pasig. General Wheaton immediately re-enforced the Americans with two com- panies each of the Washington and the Oregon regiments. The post had held the enemy in check, and the fire of the re-enforcing companies repulsed them, driving them across to an island formed by the estuary. They were thus in front of the Twenty-second regulars. On discovering that they were entrapped the natives fought des- perately, aided materially by the jungle and the darkness, but they were completely routed, with heavy loss, after two hours' fighting. The Americans lost two killed and twenty wounded, among the latter Lieut, Frank Jones. General Wheaton determined to punish the natives, and at daybreak the following morning his brigade started in the following order: The Sixth artillery holding the extreme right, the Oregon volunteers head- ing the center, the Washington regiment keeping to the edge of the lake, and the Twenty-second regulars occupying the right of the line, which swept the whole country along the lake, in a southeasterly direction, toward General Ovenshine's position. The line, thus extended over two miles of country, rough and covered with thick jungle, advanced eleven miles. The enemy fled, and were pursued by the American troops fifteen miles down the shores of the lake to San Pedro Tunoaon. During this GENERAL ARTHUR MACARTHUR GENERAL WILLIAM LAWTON OUR WAR WITH THE FILIPINOS. 345 exciting foot race the Filipinos and Americans burned ten villages, the former applying the torch when forced to retreat, and the latter dis- lodging by flames persistent guerrillas who fired upon the troops from the windows of houses. The flying brigade, after making this long excursion into the enemy's territory, returned to its former position at Taguig, exhausted by the hard work xinder a hot sun. The Oregon regiment had one man kill.ed and four wounded, and the Twenty-second regulars one wounded. The oflBcial reports gave no fewer than 200 Filipinos killed. The armed tugs Laguna de Bay and Oeste returned to San Pedro Macati on March 18, and reported the results of their tour of the lake. They shelled the town of Morengo, the Filipinos fleeing without making any response to the fire. The Americans landed a party, which de- stroyed a quantity of stores and all the stone buildings, except the church. The expedition then proceeded to Majayjay, where a sugar mill and saw mill were destroyed. On arriving at Santa Cruz, a town of 1,200 inhabitants, it was found that the enemy was strongly intrenched and prepared to defend the posi- tion, assisted by two gunboats and several launches. Moreover, the mouth of the river was blocked with rocks and bamboo. A few shells caused an exodus of the citizens, but not of the enemy's troops. The Americans did not attempt a landing. CHAPTER XX. CAMPAIGNING IN LUZON. The Fighting Continues — Burning Native Huts — Many Killed on Both Sides — The Advance on Malolos — Lawton Captures Santa Cruz — Our Men Wade Ashore Under Fire — In the Hands of the Enemy — General Lawton Evacuates the Captured Towns — General Otis' Opin- ion — Revival of Confidence Among the Filipinos. Severe fighting was begun on the morning of March 25 northeast of Caloocan. Preparations for the movement were elaborate and arranged with the utmost care and foresight. The general formation was: Gen- eral Hale's brigade in front; behind it were massed the brigades of Gen- erals Harrison Gray Otis and Hall; General Wheaton's brigade was placed in the rear. This force numbered, roughly estimated, 12,000 men — about the game as the estimated strength of the enemy, who, however, were strongly intrenched in dense jungles, into which our men would have to force their way after crossing a large open space, exposed to the full force of the Filipino fire. The regiments in our line averaged about 800 men each. These regi- ments were the Third Artillery, Montana Volunteers, Pennsylvania Volunteers, Nebraska Volunteers, Wyoming Volunteers, Colorado Vol- unteers, South Dakota Volunteers, Oregon Volunteers, Third Eegulars, Fourth Eegulars, Seventeenth Eegulars, Twenty-second Regulars, Twenty-third Eegulars, Utah Artillery, and the Minnesota Volunteers. This force, excepting General Wheaton's brigade, which had been detached from General LaAvton's division south of the Pasig river, rep- resented the northern portion of the original semicircular line back of Manila. The advances of the last two weeks had brought it to Caloocan as a center, while the retreat of the enemy had established its center on Novaliches, a short march to the northeast. The left of our line extended as far north on Manila bay as Malabon, nearly due west of Polo, the objective point of the movement, the design 3ie CAMPAIGNING IN LUZON. 347 being to imprison the enemy there between the bay and our line to the east and north. The effect of this plan of operation was to drive a wedge through the heart of the insurgent army and effect its complete disorganization by imprisoning nearly half of it between our line, extending at an angle on the south and the northeast, and Manila bay. Our movement began before dawn. Under cover of the darkness the brigades of General H. G. Otis and General Hale left their trenches and made a rapid advance. They came close upon the enemy's first line without being detected. Their vacated positions were immediately oc- cupied by the brigades of General Wheaton and General Hall. At 4 o'clock the advancing force stopped for breakfast. Our camp fires warned the Filipinos and their buglers called to arms. This was the signal for our advance to the attack. Between our front and the enemy's first line there was a mile of rough, open country. While we were crossing this, without any sort of shelter, the insurgents were well protected in the edge of the woods, in trenches four feet deep, behind tangles of underbrush. Advance on Double Quick. Our troops advanced on the double quick, yelling fiercely. Occasion- ally they dropped in the grass for an instant, firing by volley, adopting American tactics for the first time. The Filipinos reserved their fire until we were within 1,000 yards of them. Then they suddenly replied to our volleys with a galling fire across the open stretch we were crossing. The enemy's fire was the more galling for the reason that their aim was better than in previous engagements. They fired lower, their bul- lets driving a cloud of dust into the faces of our advancing troops. But the Americans never hesitated. They rushed forward, cheering and continuing their volleys with appalling effect, carrying everything before them. When we were 200 yards distant from the enemy's line they began to break and run for the woods. At short range our volleys mowed down those who still resisted, so that when our men stood in the enemy's outermost position they saw that their further pursuit would be over the bodies of dead and disabled insurgents. At this stage of the engagement the Montana and Kansas troops 348 CAMPAIGNING IN LUZON. made a splendid display of military ardor and skill. The hottest resis- tance of the rebel line was offered to them from an intrenchment from which night attacks had greatly worried the Americans of late. The men of Kansas and Montana repaid the debt with interest. At 6 a. m. — ninety minutes after the start — 6ur line had cleared the enemy's front for a distance of three miles to the north. While General MacArthur's division swung to the left, driving the Filipinos into the jungle on all sides, General Hale's brigade swept in a northwesterly direction. It put the enemy to rout, and burned the town of San Fran- cisco del Monte. Our line was then opposite the enemy's center at Novaliche. The artillery was advancing rapidly, there being a good road from Laloma, its starting point, to the insurgents' central position. Immediately be- hind the artillery came the wagons, carrying pontoons, telegraph sup- plies, and ammunition. The advance of the infantry was in splendid order. In accordance with instructions General Wheaton's brigade had re- mained in the trenches. This division joined the general movement at noon, but during the forenoon it engaged the enemy between Malabon and the River Tuliahan. The opposition was strong, but the enemy was forced to retire. While the brigades of Generals Harrison Gray Otis and Hale were advancing on the strongly intrenched towns of Novaliches and Polo in the forenoon and capturing Francisco del Monte and Mariquina, they swept the country clear to the water works and the foothills. The American advance was marked by burning huts of the natives. Chinese, leading ambulances and horse litters, brought in our wounded. Among them were a few Filipinos. Among the nine prisoners taken during the forenoon by the Penn- sylvania troops was a giant captain of the Macabebe tribe. He was stark naked and looked a terrible fellow, though quite cowed. All the prisoners were in a state of abject terror. They anticipated instant execution. Capturing the Eailroad. Early in the afternoon the forces of General Hale and General Otis captured the railroad. This hastened the climax of the day's triumph, CAMPAIGNING IN LUZON. 349 as it practically cornered the flower of Aguinaldo's army at Malabon and in the foothills at Singalon, twenty miles apart. The brilliant exploit of the Third Artillery and the Kansas regiment in crossing the Tuliahan river and capturing a blockhouse under a fierce rain of bullets occurred late in the afternoon. They were moving in a northwesterly direction toward Polo, while General MacArthur, with the remainder of General Otis' and General Hale's brigades, was ad- vancing south of the river in a position to attack Polo. This division was then within five miles of Polo and two miles of Novaliches. To pro- tect General Hale's right Geheral Hall moved to Banlac, meeting with strong opposition. Meanwhile the Oregon regiment and a portion of the Utah battery under Lieutenant Gibbs occupied the extreme left. The sensational attack upon the blockhouse by the Kansas regiment, which swam the river to make it, seemed to paralyze the natives. They had disguised the house as a leper hospital, and imagined that our men would give it a wide berth. Casualties on the American side were about 200 during the day, mostly wounded. The Filipinos were slaughtered everywhere, the field being strewn with their wounded and dead soldiers. The fight was con- tinued on the following day, and in this engagement General Wheaton's brigade figured almost exclusively. Evidently anticipating a bombardment by the fleet, a thousand Fili- pinos vacated Malabon, leaving a few to burn the town. General Wheaton's brigade, composed of the Second Oregon Kegiment, and the Twenty-second and Twenty-third Infantry, stretched out along the rail- road from Caloocan to the Tuliahan river, was powerless to prevent the withdrawal, owing to the natural obstacles and to the strong opposition. In the meantime General Wheaton's brigade held the railroad to the river, but was unable either to repair the bridge, which had been de- stroyed by the enemy, or to advance, owing to the opposition and the hills on the other side. The calculations of both General Hale and General Harrison Gray Otis, whose brigades constituted General MacArthur's division, were much interfered with by the character of the country in front of both, and the enemy was able to take advantage of this, so that the operations against Novaliches and Polo were delayed, though the right wing of the division swung out, sweeping the enemy in a northwesterly direction. General Wheaton's headquarters was a half-mile south of the river, 350 CAMPAIGNING IN LUZON. on the road. The opposite bank was protected by a blockhouse and in- trenchmeuts. Occasionally the artillery and infantry fired across the stream. Finally the engineers moved a construction train up to the bridge, the iron framework of which remained, and began to replace the floor. While this was going on the Second Oregon Regiment crossed the river on the left and the Twenty-second on the right, with four compan- ies of the Twenty-third infantry supporting the latter regiment. A ris- ing clear ground stretched away a distance of hall a mile to Malinta, situated on its crest Advance Under a Hot Fire, In front of the village were strong Filipino intrenchments, but no Filipinos were to be seen. The Twenty-second regiment approached diagonally, with General Wheaton and his staff close behind and scouts closely observing the ground. When the Americans were within about 300 yards of the intrenchments the Filipinos suddenly volleyed heav- ily. The Twenty-second, which was holding the center, suffered con- siderably, but with the Oregons on the left and the Kansans on the right in the woods the fighting was kept up for half an hour, the Twenty- second infantry advancing up the slope through the thick grass under the hottest fire. General Wheaton and his staff were all the time under a rain of bul- lets. Colonel Egbert, who was in the thickest of the fighting, was shot in the abdomen. He was placed on a stretcher and an attempt was made to carry him to the cars, but he died on the way. It was a most affecting scene. General Wheaton, baring his head, said: "You have done nobly." Colonel Egbert gasped in reply : "I must die; I am too old." No Filipinos were found in the trenches. Though apparently their force was much smaller than that of the Americans, they had an im- mense advantage in position and in opportunity to retreat. General MacArthur's advance guard, the Third artillery and the Twentieth Kansas regiment, joined General Wheaton's brigade shortly after Malinta was taken, approaching along the Novaliches road westerly. The soldiers were much exhausted and there were several prostra- CAMPAIGNING IN LUZON. 351 tions from the heat, which was intense. The dead and wounded were collected in the shade of the trees and carried on stretchers by Chinese across the river to the train. Marilao was afterwards burned by the insurgents who had escaped, and they hurriedly retreated to the north toward Malolos. Three men of the Third artillery were wounded at the railway bridge. Three lieutenants of the Dakota regiment were killed. The total loss for the day was about twenty wounded and ten killed. The total American losses during the three days' fight were about 30 dead and 280 wounded. The Advance on Malolos. The American troops under General MacArthur continued their for- ward movement upon Malolos, the Filipino capital, and formed in battle line on the afternoon of March 30, a mile north of Guiguinto, taking posi- tions in the following order from left to right: Third artillery. First Montana, Twentieth Kansas, Tenth Pennsylvania, First South Dakota, First Nebraska, Fourth cavalry. At 2:30 o'clock all was in readiness and the line began a cautious advance. Almost immediately the insurgents began to pour in a heavy fire from the right, which fell with great severity upon the Nebraska men. However, the Americans continued to advance steadily and rapidly regardless of the withering volleys, and soon drove the rebels from their trenches, which had been masked by thickets. The engagement lasted half an hour, and resulted in the following losses to the Americans: Nebraska, four killed, thirty wounded; Penn- sylvania, one killed, one wounded; South Dakota, two wounded. The Americans then continued their march without interruption for two miles, which brought them within two miles and a half of Malolos. Here they came upon an insurgent outpost, and beyond it they could see strong intrenchments. A native came forward from the insurgent lines under a white flag and asked for mercy for all the unarmed persons. Being assured that such persons would not be harmed the messenger re- tired to the trenches, and immediately the insurgents opened a sharp fire, but this was soon silenced and the trenches were captured with a rush. The troops under General MacArthur and the reserve under Geneipal 352 CAMPAIGNING IN LUZON. Wheaton slept on their arms that night and arose at dawn, keyed up for a desperate battle. After a hasty breakfast in the early morn- ing the troops formed in line ready for the attack. It was rumored at that hour that Aguinaldo, commanding a force of 30,000 men, was pre- paring to defend the insurgent capital to the last extremity. General MacArthur, however, discredited this report, though the fact that Malolos, which was in plain sight a mile and a half away, showed no signs of conflagrations seemed to .indicate that a strong defense would be made. Disposition of American Forces. The Americans were in splendid shape for a rousing attack. The Filipinos had retired so rapidly before the advance that their attempts to tear up the railway track and burn the bridges had failed, so that the railway was being operated to the American firing line and tele- graphic communication with Manila was perfect. The navy was pre- pared to co-operate also. Admiral Dewey had sent the Helena with her ten-foot draft and her fine battery of quick-firing guns up into the shal- low water along the coast, and an attempt was made to bombard the city from the nearest point. As for the men drawn up in line of battle, they were fit and eager to begin. How the Troops Were Disposed. The disposition of the American troops was as follows: General MacArthur's division was thrown across the railway track, the 3d artillery being on the extreme left; then the 1st Montana, 20th Kansas, 10th Pennsylvania, 1st South Dakota and 1st Nebraska came in the order named, the last being on the extreme right. General Wheaton's brigade, composed of the 2d Oregon, 22d infantry, 13th Minnesota and 1st Colorado, acted as support. Two guns under Lieutenant Fleming, two guns under Major Young of the Utah battery and one Colt rapid- fire gun under Lieutenant Davis of the navy, served by jackies from the fleet, were posted on the railroad track looking toward the station at Malolos. A strong line of insurgent trenches was visible a mile to the north of our position, stretching across the railway track. At 6:10 o'clock General MacArthur ordered the artillery to begin. For half an hour the guns shelled the insurgent trenches and threw CAMPAIGNING IN LUZON. 353 shrapnel into Malolos at 3,400 yards. The fire was promptly returned by the Filipinos, but it speedily died down and then ceased altogether. One battalion of Nebraska men began to advance on the right across the open plain and the example was followed at once by the Pennsyl- vania and South Dakota troops. In a few minutes a general advance was in progress. It quickly met with sharp resistance on the right On the left of the railway track the Kansas troops, with Colonel Fun- ston at their head, and with the Montana men and the 3d artillery well up with them, moved forward through dense thickets. Here no fire came from the insurgents. Kansans Swarm into the City. The advance continued cautiously. At 9 o'clock Aguinaldo's head- quarters were observed to be burning. Colonel Funston and his men then drew forward within a quarter of a mile of the city. Major Young advanced his pieces and fired two shells into the heart of Malolos with- out obtaining any response. Then Colonel Funston started on a dead run for the insurgent head- quarters with a small detachment cf long-legged Kansans yelling at his heels. Several scattering shots met them, but these did no damage and did not even check the headlong dash of Funston and his men. The American troops rushed into the main square of the city. There they came upon a scene of great confusion. Many buildings were on fire and sending up great columns of smoke. Only the Chinese inhabi- tants remained aild they were in a state of extreme terror. The troops soon garrisoned the city in proper style. They found no insurgents within its borders, as all were fleeing to the north. Lawton Captures Santa Cruz. An army of 1,500 men, under General Henry W. Lawton, left Manila on the night of April 9 with the object of capturing Santa Cruz, the Filipinos' stronghold on the eastern shore of the lake. The expedition consisted of 200 picked sharpshooters, chosen from various regiments; Hawthorne's mountain battery, Gale's squadron, three troops of the 4th cavalry, unmounted, with Bronko's'and Tappan's battalions of the 354 CAMPAIGXIXG IN LUZON. 14tli iufautiy, Linck's battalion of the 1st Idaho infantry and Fraino's battalion of the 1st North Dakota infai.ntry. The flotilla of twenty canoes, towed by tugs and convoyed by the gunboats Laguna de Bay, Oeste and Kapidan, and preceded by the launch containing General Lawton, started from San Pedro Macati, on the River Pasig, moving toward the lake just as evening was setting in. It was a truly picturesque scene. The men were all in high spirits and carried rations for ten days, with the lightest marching equipment. The journey was a short one over the bay lagoon, a freshwater sea which comes almost up to Manila itself. Forty-eight miles across the lake is Santa Cruz, the capital of the province of Laguna, with a popula- tion of about 13,000. The plans of the American commander worked perfectly, with the ex- ception that the progress of the expedition was delayed by the difficult navigation of the river, making it nearly dawn by the time the lake was reached. The expedition then steamed cautiously forward, the Rapidan and > the Oeste a mile ahead, the Laguna de Bay guarding the rear. Signal fires, however, were lighted on the mountain tops, giving alarm of the approach of the troops. It was noon before the white church towers of the city appeared in the shadow of the great volcanic mountain on a marshy plain dotted with occasional palm groves. A casco," with a force of 200 sharpshooters, under Major Woisen- berger, was run into a shallow inlet about five miles south of the city, and a few shells were sent toward the intrenchments of the rebels at the edge of the woods, sending the enemy scampering inland. Wade Ashore TJnder Fire. Then a number of Americans jumped into the water, and, wading for about a hundred yards, crept forward and formed in line, covering the landing of the remainder, which finished abont 5 o'clock. The three troops of the Fourth cavalry, unmounted, were sent ashore on a danger- ous marshy point, directly south of the city, under fire from the enemy's trenches. Meanwhile in the town itself there was ntter silence and not a sign of life. General Lawton, desiring to make an inspection and to give the CAMPAIGNING IN LUZON. 355 inhabitants an opportunity to surrender, went on board the Laguna de Bay, and steamed slowly to the dock, the whole fleet watching anxiously. When it was discovered by the glasses that the trenches and stone build- ings were swarming with white-clad soldiers the boat withdrew, receiv- ing volleys from the trenches thrown up on the marsliy plain north of the city. The flotilla anchored in compact formation for the night, ready to re- sist any surprises from the gunboats supposed to be in the lake. At sunrise the following day the assault commenced. The American line south of the city stretched two miles inland, and with its left sweep- ing the shore it moved north, while the Fourth cavalrymen on the point advanced toward the city, pouring volleys upon the trenches. Simul- taneously the gunboats hovered along the shore, shelling the woods ahead of the troops and driving the Filipinos inland. The Gatlings cleared several trenches. The whole brigade was divided into squads of twelve and the fighting was carried on in the old-time frontier fashion, from behind trees, crawl- ing through bushes or rushing across the open. The trenches that were not cleared by the gunboats gave considerable resistance when the line was nearing the city, and the Laguna de Bay and Oeste bombarded for an hour in the hope of making them too warm for occupancy, but did not succeed in clearing them entirely. General Lawton, with the Fourteenth Infantry Battalions, ap- proached a narrow iron bridge across a creek on the south border of the town. Here a company of Filipinos was intrenched across the stream and behind a stone barricade at the entrance to the bridge. The Ameri- cans rushed forward in single file, in the face of a galling fire, demol- ished the barricade with their hands and drove the enemy from the trenches, killing a dozen. The Filipino soldiers in the town, secreted in various buildings and firing from the windows, gave the invaders an interesting hour. There was a regular nest of them in the stone jail, which is hedged in by a wall. This was a veritable pepper pot. The Americans, singly or in pairs, en- tered the houses, and many warriors were taken prisoners. A considerable body of Filipinos fled northward, crossing the open marshes, but the Gatlings poured upon them a deadly hail until they disappeared in the woods, slaying dozens. Major Weisenberger de- ployed the sharpshooters along the shore, and they crept steadily for- 356 CAMPAIGNING IN LUZON. ward, aiding the Gatlings. Finally a large body was sent against the enemy, driying them toward the mountains. Lawton Makes Use of the Palace. General Lawton established headquarters at the elegant palace of the Governor, and a guard was immediately placed in the church, as the sacred edifices are always the first objective of looters. Within an hour the town was patrolled and all looting rigidly prevented. Almost all the inhabitants had fled during the two preceding nights and only a few Chinese shopkeepers emerged from hiding and resumed business. On the marshes north of town were found forty dead Filipinos, some terribly torn by shells, and many others wounded, to whom the Ameri- cans offered their canteens, as though they were comrades. The enemy lost in the day's fight 150 killed, including Paole Aguirre, one of their bravest and best leaders, and twelve other officers of minor rank. General Lawton's fiying column followed up the taking of Santa Cruz by the capture of Paganjan. The Filipinos at that place offered practically no resistance. The American forces were then rushed for- ward down the Lumbarg Kiver and found the insurgents assembled in considerable numbers at the village of Lumbarg, which commands the mouth of the river. Here the enemy had placed obstructions which pre- vented the passage of the American gunboats. Shells were thrown suc- cessfully from the Laguna and the main forces of the insurgents were driven out. Only a small number remained to oppose the entry of the Americans. These few took a determined stand within an old church and valiantly maintained a steady firing upon the Americans. Finally some of our men were rushed forward by land, and there was a lively skirmish, in which several Filipinos were killed and about fifty taken prisoners. Lieutenant Southern, of the Washington volunteers, was wounded in the arm, but that was the only casualty suffered by the Americans. Six launches and two cascoes were captured from the enemy. General Lawton, after leaving a strong guard, returned with the remainder of his column to Santa Cruz. The Americans, who had been congratulating themselves that the Filipinos north of Manila were thoroughly whipped, had their hopes completely dashed by an offensive outbreak early on the morning of CAMPAIGNING IN LUZON. 357 April 11. The enemy made a carefully planned attack on Mac Arthur's men, who had been guarding the railroad line between Malolos and Manila. Shortly after midnight signal rockets were displayed along the foothills west of the railroad. The attack began immediately. While there was fighting all along the railroad line, the Filipinos had massed their men at two points — Bocave and Marilao. The fighting was sharp and quick. Five American soldiers were killed and fourteen wounded. Before the Filipinos were repulsed they succeeded in cutting the telegraph wires in several places between Bocave and Marilao. They also tore up part of the railroad track. As day broke the insurgents retreated to the foothills. In the Enemy's Trap. On April 12 Admiral Dewey sent the Yorktown to Baler, on the east coast of Luzon, for the purpose of rescuing and bringing away the Spanish forces, consisting of eighty soldiers, three ofiicers and two priests, who were surrounded by 400 Filipinos. The Yorktown, on arriving oif Baler, sent up the river a boat containing fifteen men, under command of Lieutenant J. C. Gillmore. On April 18 Admiral Dewey cabled the War Department at Wash- ington, that Lieutenant Gillmore and his crew had been ambushed, fired upon and captured, and that their fate at that time was unknown. On April 20 Correspondent McCutcheon cabled as follows: "I interviewed Admiral Dewey today as to whether he intended to send an expedition to Baler to punish the insurgents for the killing or capturing of Lieutenant Gillmore and the sailors from the Yorktown. "The Admiral's answer came quickly and decisively. *0f course,' he said. Then he added that the plans for the expedition to Baler still were incomplete, but that he intended to send an expedition there which would not only release the Spanish garrison, but which would punish the insurgents thoroughly for the treatment they had accorded Lieu- tenant Gillmore and the men of the Yorktown. "Admiral Dewey would not say what he believed had been the fate of Gillmore and the sailors. He said he supposed they had been either killed or captured. It could easily be seen from his manner that he believes the American sailors are dead. It is probable that the punitive expedition will start within a few days. 358 CAMPAIGNING IN LUZON. "During the interview Admii*al Dewey talked of the expedition to Baler, which is on the east coast of Luzon. He said the Yorktown was dispatched to Baler on a mission of mercy to rescue forty Spanish sailors and three ijriests, who were beleaguered in a church. On arriving at Baler Lieutenants Gillmore and Standley took fourteen sailors in a steam launch to make soundings. The launch was armed with a machine gun. "Lieutenant Standley landed and ascended a hill to reconnoiter, and the launch disappeared behind a bend in the river, continuing the soundings. Presently Standley heard a volley of musketr5^ Three more volleys followed, and then loud cheering. He did not hear the machine gun fire at all. He tried to get to the scene of the fighting, but could not locate the launch. Over the brow of the hill he could see a church in the distance. A Spanish flag was floating over it. Not being able to see or hear more of the Americans in the launch, he returned to the Yorktown. A scouting party was immediately sent out from the cruiser, "For two days a search was continued for the missing men. Not a trace could be found of them. Then the Yorktown returned to Manila and reported their disappearance. "Admiral Dewey is unable to explain the fate of the party. He said he supposed they had been captured or killed either by insurgents or Spaniards. He could not say which. "I also secured an interview with General Rios, who was ignorant of the fate of Lieutenant Gillmore and his companions. He was greatly surprised that the Americans should have been attacked. General Rios told me that last January he had tried to notify the garrison at Baler that the Spanish-American war was ended, and so arranged with Aguinaldo to send a lieutenant in the Spanish army with the message. He was to be accompanied by Filipinos. He was never heard of afterw^ard. General Rios said' he supposed that the garrison at Baler had either refused to accept the message as authentic, sus- pecting treachery-, or that the young officer had been killed by the Filipinos, General Rios Surprised. "He was greatly surprised at Lieutenant Standley's story of seeing a Spanish flag flying over the church, and said that the only explanation CAMPAIGNING IN LUZON. 359 he could offer was that the garrison still believed Spain was at war with America. If the Spaniards attacked the launch he said it was because of the ignorance of the treaty of peace on the part of the Spaniards and because they were not aware of the Yorktown's mission. Still, he said that he believed the launch had been attacked by insur- gents, as the besieged Spaniards were powerless to assume the offen- sive. He was unable to suggest any plan by which the Americans, if they be prisoners, and the Spanish garrison could be released. He said he believed that a cruiser belonging to some neutral power might be able to do so. General Kios said he understood that there were 400 insurgents at Baler and that they had absolute control of the river approaches. "In regard to the reported arrangements for the exchange of the Spanish prisoners General Eios said efforts were still being made to effect their release. He showed me a letter that he had prepared, in which he made an appeal to Aguinaldo's sense of justice. He also pointed out to the insurgent leader that the release of the Spaniards would establish a bond of sympathy between the Filipinos and the Spaniards which might prove very advantageous to the insurgents in the future. He said he would endeavor to get this letter to Aguinaldo tomorrow. "General Kios claims to be of the opinion that the Filipinos are not seeking money by holding back the Spanish prisoners. He claims Aguinaldo and his followers do not want money. All they are fighting for, Kios says, is independence. He said he thought they were holding back the prisoners in the hope that their retention in some way might help the insurgent cause." Slain by Filipinos. Five Americans were killed and several seriously wounded during an engagement which took place on April 12 between General Lawton's troops and the Filipinos at Paete, a town about twelve miles north of Santa Cruz. The advance guard of General Lawton's expedition had taken two towns on the shore of the lake north of Santa Cruz. The guard came upon the enemy suddenly at Paete, where the Filipinos had strong intrenchments across the roadway. The North Dakota volunteers, 360 CAMPAIGNING IN LUZON. while avoiding this fire, received a cross-fire from another band of in- surgents who had intrenched themselves on a steep hill. Our troops were divided into squads of five men and sent up the hill to talse these trenches. They encountered a deadly fire. In one squad only one man escaped without wounds. Finally the artillery and the guns of the tinclads were brought to bear on the stronghold of the insurgents, and after one hour's shelling the Filipinos were driven back. General Lawton continued his march northward along the road be- tween the hills and the lake, with the gunboats Rapidan and Laguna de Bay abreast of his army. The troops crossed the Paghanjan and con- centrated at Lambun, at the mouth of the river. After leaving two companies of the Fourteenth Regiment to guard the entrance of the river the troops marched to Longas and found it deserted. Furniture which had been dropped in the flight of the natives was scattered along the trails leading into the hills. The Americans entered San Antonio at sunset without meeting with any resistance. Twenty unarmed prisoners, bearing copies of the proclamation of the United States Philippine commission, which they had somehow "secured, were afterward released and sent outside our lines with bundles of proclamations to distribute. Evacuation of Santa Cruz, On April 16 General Otis ordered General Lawton to return to Manila with his entire command, thus completely evacuating Santa Cruz, and the other villages taken by the expedition. General Lawton obeyed orders, but he entered a protest against the action, as he felt the necessity of an American garrison in the towns he had captured, and especially in Santa Cruz. The latter place he regarded as most important, as it commanded the entire Laguna de Bay district, and with the Americans in control they would be in a position easily and effectually to intercept any communication between the Filipinos of the northern and southern portions of the island. General Otis defended his order for the evacuation of the captured villages by declaring that he considered it impracticable to spare a sufficient number of troops for garrison purposes. His plan of cam- paign contemplated a continuation of the fighting in the northern por- tion of the island, and in his opinion every man of the available force GENERAL LOYD WHEATON GENERAL FRANCIS V- GREENE CAMPAIGNING IN LUZON. 363 was needed in that locality. Besides, General Otis argued, Santa Cruz and the other cities could be retaken if necessary during the rainy season, with much less difficulty than General Lawton had encountered, for the reason that the water in Laguna de Bay would be deeper, making the transportation of troops in boats a much easier problem. There can be no question regarding the moral effect of the evacua- tion on the Filipinos. They construed it as a confession of weakness on the part of the Americans, an acknowledgment that they were not able to hold the positions taken. In consequence there was a great revival of confidence among the insurgents- CHAPTER XXI. THE PEACE COMMISSION MEETS HOSTILITY. The Personnel of the Commission — Proclamation to the Filipinos — Assurances of Good Will — The Supremacy of the United States to Be Enforced— Honest Civil Service Promised — Industrial Pursuits to Be Encouraged ■ — The Public School System — Opinions of Leading Filipinos — No Ces- sation of Warfare. It is necessary now to turn to the work of the commission that was appointed by President McKinley for the purpose of inquiring into the situation as it existed in the Philippines and advising what course our government should pursue in dealing with the people of those islands. The arrival at Manila of Professors Schurman and Worcester from the United States has been mentioned in an earlier chapter, and they, together with Colonel Charles Denby, who was formerly our minister to China, Admiral Dewey and Major-General Otis composed what was known as the United States Philippine commission. Their first formal meeting was held in Manila on March 20, and an organization was perfected. Professor Schurman was chosen president and Mr. T. R. McArthur was appointed secretary. It was decided to issue a proclamation to the Filipinos informing them of the purposes of the commission, and President Schurman was delegated to prepare the document. Commission's Froclamation to the niipinos. The preamble of this proclamation, which was issued on April 4, recited the cession by the peace treaty of the Philippine islands to the United States, referred to the appointment of the commission, assured the people of the cordial good-will and fraternal feeling of the president of the United States and the American people and asserted that the object of the United States government, apart from the fulfillment of its solemn obligations to the family of nations by the acceptance of 364 THE PEACE COMMISSION MEETS HOSTILITY. 365 sovereignty over the islands, was the well-being, prosperity and happi- ness of the Philippine people and their elevation and advancement to a position among the most civilized populations of the world. Continu- ing, the proclamation said: "The president believes this felicity and perfection of the Philippine ■ people will be brought about by the cultivation of letters, science and the liberal and practical arts, by the enlargement of intercourse with foreign nations, the expansion of industrial pursuits, by trade and com- merce, by the multiplication and improvement of means of internal communication and by the development of the great natural resources of the archipelago. "Unfortunately these pure aims and purposes of the American gov- ernment and people have been misinterpreted to some of the inhabitants of certain islands, and in consequence the friendly American forces, without provocation or cause, have been openly attacked. Why these hostilities? What do the best Filipinos desire? Can it be more than the United States is ready to give? They say they are patriots and want liberty." The commission emphatically asserted that it was willing and anxious to establish an enlightened system of government, under which the people might enjoy the largest measure of home rule and the am- plest liberty consonant with the supreme purpose of the United States. The proclamation then said there could be no real conflict between American sovereignty and the rights and liberties of the Filipinos, for America was ready to furnish armies and navies and all the infinite resources of a great and powerful nation to maintain its rightful su- premacy over the islands; so it was even more solicitous to spread peace and happiness among the people and guarantee them rightful freedom, to protect their just privileges and immunities, to accustom them to free self-government in ever-increasing measure and to encourage those democratic aspirations, sentiments and ideals which arethe promise and potency of fruitful national development. In conclusion the proclamation announced that the commission would visit the Philippine provinces to ascertain the enlightened native opinion as to the forms of government adapted to the people conform- able with their traditions and ideals. It invited the leading, representa- tive men to meet the commission and declared the policy of the United 366 THE PEACE COMMISSION MEETS HOSTILITY. States in the establishment and maintenance of the government was to consult the wishes and secure the advice and co-operation of the people. Intentions of the United States. The proclamation contained eleven articles, declaring America's in- tentions as follows: "1. The supremacy of the United States must and will be enforced throughout every part of the archipelago. Those who resist can accom- plish nothing except their own ruin. "2. The amplest liberty of self-government will be granted which is reconcilable with just, stable, effective and economical administration and compatible with the sovereign rights and obligations of the United States. "3. The civil rights of the Filipinos will be guaranteed and pro- tected, their religious freedom will be assured, and all will have equal standing before the law. "4. Honor, justice and friendship forbid the exploitation of the people of the islands. The purpose of the American government is the welfare and advancement of the Philippine people. "5. The United States government guarantees an honest and effect- ive civil service, in which to the fullest extent practicable natives shall be employed. "6. The collection and application of taxes and other revenues will be put upon a sound, honest and economical basis. The public funds, raised justly and collected honestly, will be applied only to defraying the proper expenses of the establishment and the maintenance of the Philippine government and such general improvements as public in- terests demand. Local funds collected for local purposes shall not be diverted to other ends. With such prudent and honest fiscal adminis- tration it is believed the needs of the government will in a short time become compatible with a considerable reduction in taxation. "7. The establishment of a pure, speedy and effective administration of justice, by which the evils of delay, corruption and exploitation will be effectively eradicated. "8. The construction of roads, railroads and other means of com- munication and transportation and other public works of manifest advantage to the people will be promoted. THE PEACE COMMISSION MEETS HOSTILITY. 367 "9. Domestic and foreign trade and commerce and other industrial pursuits and the general development of the country in the interest of its inhabitants will be the constant objects of solicitude and foster- ing care. "10. Effective provision will be made for the establishment of ele- mentary schools, in which the children of the people will be educated. Appropriate facilities will also be provided for higher education. "11. Reforms in all departments of government, all branches of the public service and all corporations closely touching the common life of the people must be undertaken without delay and effected conforma- bly with common right and justice, in a way to satisfy the well-founded demands and the highest sentiments and aspirations of the Philippine people." Another Manifesto from Horg Eong. The Filipino junta in Hong Kong regarded the proclamation of the United States Philippine commission as objectionable and issued a statement saying: "It is a tissue of generalities, bristles with pharisa- ism and cant, vaguely promises much and grants nothing to the Fili- pinos, who are tired of promises and surfeited by Spanish promises simi- lar to the American." Continuing, the statement read: "The proclamation proves that the fair promises of independence under a protectorate and President McKinley's declaration of the ob- jects of the Spanish war were only a mask of humanitarianism to cover the real intention. The invitation of the United States Philippine com- missioners to the Filipinos to meet them for an exchange of views is meaningless, as during the hostilities the representative Filipinos are necessarily absent from Manila, assisting the struggle for independence. The Filipinos continue to resist violent and aggressive usurpation, not because they expect a complete victory, but to emphasize their rights and to protest against a ruthless invasion. We emphatically deny that the aims of the American government have been misinterpreted. The proclamation of General Otis showed those aims clearly. We also deny the legality of the sale of sovereignty over the Philippines by Spain, and we reiterate positively that the Americans began the hostilities on February 4. 368 THE PEACE COMMISSION MEETS HOSTILITY. A Froclamation of Conquest. "The proclamation of President McKinley's commission to the sub- jugated inhabitants of the Philippines was a proclamation of conquest As such it grated upon the sensitive ears of those American citizens who still regard as eternal and of universal application the foundation principles upon which their own institutions are based. The document professed kind intentions, to be sure, and contained promises of liberal treatment to such as recognize and bow to the supreme and sovereign authority of the American republic. But the spirit of kindness which the proclamation breathed is the kindness which the conqueror has ever promised to his not too willing subjects. The proclamation recognized no rights of the Filipinos, nor did it deem the consent of the governed a matter of any importance. The conquered were simply promised kind treatment and beneficent government as a condition of submission to an outside authority. What conqueror ever promised less? And where is it written in American institutions that the rule of a conqueror con- trary to the willing consent of the ruled is not tyranny simply because beneficent? "Consider these two 'regulative principles' for the guidance of the United States in its relations with the Philippines, laid down by the commission as principles of 'cardinal importance': " '1. The supremacy of the United States must and will be enforced throughout every part of the archipelago, and those who resist it can accomplish no end other than their own ruin. " '2. To the Philippine people will be granted the most ample liberty and self-government reconcilable with the maintenance of a wise, just, stable, effective and economical administration of public affairs and compatible with the sovereign and international rights and the oblig'a- tions of the United States.' "If the Filipinos submit to American rule and recognize 'our* sover- eign rights they will be well treated. If not, they but accomplish their 'own ruin.' Truly a sentiment worthy of a Napoleon!" Filipinos Move for Peace. As soon as the proclamation was made public a number of the leading Filipinos held a conference to discuss what action if any they THE PEACE COMMISSION MEETS HOSTILITY. 369 should take regarding it. Mr. McCutcheon interviewed Benito Legarda as to tlie sentiment of this meeting and reported as follows: "Legarda said that twenty -two of the most influential men among the Filipinos met and discussed the various methods by which the pacifi- cation of the island of Luzon might be brought about. The probable effect of the various means considered was debated at length. "A committee was appointed to confer with the Philippine commis- sion sent here by President McKinley, the one that recently issued the proclamation in the island. Propositions of the Committee. "The Filipino committee was intrusted to submit three proposals to the American commissioners. The first proposition is to the effect that the Americans make all concessions that are possible to the Filipinos and inaugurate a policy which will approach absolute autonomy as nearly as possible. "The second proposition to be made is that a delegation of Filipinos be sent to visit Aguinaldo after the Filipino and American commis- sions have met and endeavor to effect a friendly understanding between him and the Americans. This delegation is to explain to the insurgent chief the concessions which the Americans will be willing to make and the policy which will be followed in the future. "The third proposal will be to the effect that the American commis- sion assure the Filipino committee that all government positions which are not held by Americans will be given to Filipinos and that represen- tatives of no other race be given any official positions. "I also interviewed Arevalo, who was formerly Aguinaldo's aid, re- garding the effect the proclamation issued by the American commission was having on the natives. He said he believed the issuance of the proclamation had been without effect. He said he did not think the proclamation was reaching the right class of people. It is Arevalo's opinion that if the Americans sincerely desire the pacification of the island they should go under a flag of truce and confer with the Filipinos. In this way each side would be able to convince the other that good faith would govern their actions. He said it was highly improbable that the Filipinos would take the initiative, because they were con- vinced that they could not hold their own against the Americans, and 370 THE PEACE COMMISSION MEETS HOSTILITY. believe that if they made the first move toward peace the Americans immediately would refuse to make such liberal concessions as they would in case the Filipinos appeared anxious to continue the fight. "Arevalo said that Aguinaldo at present was at San Miguel, about thirty-five miles north of Manila. He also claimed that General Luna had made his way back to Bulacan. Aguinaldo Probably Assented, "A great deal of importance is placed upon the meeting of the Fili- pinos. Legarda is one of Aguinaldo's most trusted lieutenants. He has served as secretary to the insurgent leader. He is said to have a great talent for diplomacy. The fact that he attended and took a lead- ing part in the meeting of the Filipinos has led to the impression here that Aguinaldo assented to, if he did not actually instigate, the meeting." In the important dispatch from Mr. McCutcheon there seemed a clear indication that the Filipino leader, Aguinaldo, was trying to make the best terms he could with our government. The mere announcement that "twenty-two of the most influential men" in the island had met to discuss the terms of a p^'oposed negotiation with the American com- missioners might not by itself mean anything, owing to the absence of names by which we might identify these would-be negotiators. They might or might not be persons capable of having any considerable amount of influence with their fellow-countrymen, and unless they were in such a position as would enable them to draw after them a very large following it would be worse than useless for our commissioners to pay the least heed to them. But the presence of Legarda gave great importance to this news. All persons who have lived in the east and who have had. oppor- tunities to form a correct estimate of the Malay character, know that a Filipino can be effectually reached by only one argument — namely, the inevitable. To dire necessity he submits so readily and ungrudgingly that a careless observer might be led to think that he was more than usually docile and easily governed. As long as life is not made un- bearably hard for him he will not rebel, even though he is convinced that he is being unjustly treated. But, if he discovers not only that he is oppressed, but that his oppressors are not strong enough to hold THE PEACE COMMISSION MEETS HOSTILITY. 371 him down, he will then rebel and fight fiercely, as he did against the Spaniards in 1896. As in that insurrection also, when he finds that he has undertaken an impossible task, he straightway begins to make overtures toward being "pacified," as he calls it. Now this was exactly what Aguinaldo was trying to do in these negotiations. I say that it was Aguinaldo at the bottom of the move- ment, because it bore the earmarks of his actions. If it should appear that Aguinaldo personally had no connection with the meetings re- ferred to, his lack of participation in the aif air would not necessarily detract from its importance. It would merely indicate that Aguinaldo had lost his power over the most influential among the native leaders. I strongly believe, however, that young Legarda — he is only 23 years old — was the actual emissary and accredited instrument of Aguinaldo himself; and if this surmise should prove to be correct, it is my belief at this writing that it will not be long before Aguinaldo will appear openly in the negotiations with our commissioners — always provided, of course, that the latter show a reasonable combination of tact, firm- ness and justice. CHAPTEE XXII. CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. Brave Americans Fall in Battle— The Death of Colonel Stotzenberg— Calumpit Taken — Brilliant Work of the Kansas Regiment — How Colonel Funston Swan, the River — Representatives of Aguinaldo Ask a Truce — General Otis' Ultimatum — A Local Filipino Govern- ment Receives American Sanction — Natives Return to Their Homes. On April 20 a force of about two hundred insurgents attacked the outposts of the Washington regiment, near Taguig, south of Pasig and Pateros. Two companies immediately engaged the enemy and ad- vanced into the open in skirmish order. The natives were checked and routed after two hours' fighting, leaving twelve men killed on the field and several wounded. The American troops also obtaine'd possession of many Mauser rifles and many other vreapons. Three Americans were wounded. At 6 o'clock on the morning of April 21 three companies of the South Dakota regiment marched from Bocave and in conjunction with three companies of the Minnesota regiment, from Guiguinto, north of Bocave, encountered an insurgent force numbering fully five hundred men when two miles out. The enemy retired three miles in fairly good order, in spite of the fact that the Filipinos suffered heavy losses. The Americans, having exhausted their ammunition, were compelled to re- turn to their camps. General Lawton took the field at daybreak April 22 with a column of troops consisting of the North Dakota regiment, two battalions of the Third infantry, the Twenty-second infantry, two guns of Scott's battery, three troops of the Fourth cavalry, and Gale's squadron, equipped in light marching order. This force started at 5 o'clock this morning over the Novaliches road, traversing the country previously cleared of insurgents, but subsequently reoccupied by them. The Dakota regiment first encountered the enemy in front of Novaliches, at 8:15 a. m. The natives opened fire on our troops, but their fire was silenced fifteen minutes later, the enemy retiring in bad 373 eONTINUATION OP THE WAR. 373 order, and the Americans advancing along the rough roads around Novaliches. They were considerably annoyed by the fire of the native sharpshooters from the jungle for two hours. At 2 o'clock in the afternoon the insurgents were in full flight, leaving many dead on the field, and our troops were compelled to take a brief rest in the shade, as the heat was overpowering. Brave Americans Killed. One of the most furious battles of the war was fought on April 23, and for the first time the insurgents forced the American troops to retreat. Colonel J. M. Stotzenberg and Lieutenant Sisson, two brave officers of the First Nebraska volunteers, were pierced through the heart by insurgent bullets in the terrific engagement. Six other Amer- ican soldiers were killed, while forty-three were wounded before the insurgents were driven back. The scene of the battle was Quingua, five miles northeast of Malolos. Major Bell of the Fourth United States cavalry was ordered to make a reconnaissance in order to develop the strength of the enemy near Quingua. He took Lieutenant Eutherford and sixty-one men of the Fourth cavalry. At daybreak this little body of Americans reached the Filipino position. Major Bell and Lieutenant Rutherford, with five men, went ahead of the rest of the reconnoitering party. The insurg- ents saw them, but withheld their fire, evidently expecting that the remainder of the company would soon come within range. Major Bell's orders from General MacArthur explicitly instructed him to ascertain the strength of the enemy. The remainder of the cavalry was advanced. As soon as the little command came within range the insurgents opened with a hot fire. One American soldier was killed and five wounded by the first volley. Major Bell immediately sent for reinforcements. The cavalry held its ground bravely. The insurgents fought like demons. The Filipinos sent canoeloads of soldiers down the river. These landed on both the right and left sides of the American soldiers, surrounding them on three sides. They were forced back, but they fought hard for every inch of ground which they gave to the enemy. The Filipinos followed up their advantage. They had driven Major Bell and his men nearly three-quarters of a mile from Quingua when Major Morford, with a battalion of the First Nebraska volunteers, has- 374 CONTINUATION OF THE WAE. tened up to the assistance of the retreating cavalrymen. Instead of the new troops changing the tide of battle and causing the Filipinos to retreat, the insurgents held their ground and fought the more savagely. Next two companies of the Iowa regiment advanced to the fighting line, but later they were withdrawn, being on guard duty. The rest of the Nebraska regiment next came up. General Hale arrived shortly afterward with the rest of the lowans. The Americans were ordered forward to take the positions which the insurgents were holding. Killed Leading His Regiment. Just as the forward movement began. Colonel Stotzenberg came dashing up and took his place at the head of his regiment. He had just returned to Malolos from Manila, where he had been visiting his wife. He heard of the battle, rushed to Quingua and reached his men in time to lead them in the storming of the insurgent trenches. During this charge in the withering hail of bullets, Colonel Stotzenberg was shot. He dropped dead within a few yards of the trenches. Three guns from the Utah artillery reached the fighting ground just as the Nebraskans were making their charge. Their advance, assisted by the shells from the artillery, broke the resistance of the insurgents, and after half an hour more of fighting they were driven from Quingua. Of the members of the Seventh cavalry which came up with General Hale, three were killed and five wounded. Several members of the Iowa troops were wounded. The total American loss was eight killed and forty-three wounded. Fifteen dead Filipinos were found in the trenches, but their loss was comparatively small, as they were pro- tected during most of the battle. Major Bell's horse was shot from beneath him. The bullet passed through Major Bell's legging. Major Mallory's horse also was killed. The members of the Nebraska regiment are overwhelmed with grief over the loss of their colonel. Colonel Stotzenberg was noted as an absolutely fearless officer, and his regiment considered his loss irre- parable. General Hale's brigade continued to advance the following morning. It consisted of the First Nebraska, First South Dakota and Fifty-first Iowa regiments. They marched, swam and waded their way across the Bagbag river, encountering the insurgents at the river ford. A sharp fight followed, in which nearly fifty Filipinos were killed. One CONTINUATION OP THE WAR. 375 American, a member of the hospital corps, fell during the engagement, ifinally the insurgents retreated toward Oalumpit, while General Hale's men followed, driving them from one position after another. In the meantime General MacArthur was at Malolos with Wheat- on's brigade ready to march at a moment's notice toward Aguinaldo. General Hale's fight, however, delayed the advance down the river to- ward Calumpit, which "is seven miles northwest of Malolos. General MacArthur was therefore not able to keep up with General Hale, who was within a quarter of a mile of Calumpit early in the afternoon. When General MacArthur heard of the manner in which General Hale had progressed, he was greatly pleased. He said the flank movement which General Hale had made had had the effect of surprising and absolutely demoralizing the insurgents. The Taking of Calumpit. After a series of brilliant and daring forward movements, the Amer- icans took and occupied Calumpit on April 26. The Filipinos set fire to the town before they left, and the Americans found the houses burn- ing when they dashed up the village streets after the insurgents. The insurgents continued their policy of retiring from one position after another after inflicting the greatest possible damage upon the advancing army. Their forces were well drilled, and every foot of the ground was tenaciously disputed by thoroughly organized troops, who stood remarkably firm, even before artillery. The enemy had planned to wreck our artillery transport train. This attempt was a failure, but a span of the iron railway bridge over the river was destroyed, hampering the American transportation for some time. The Filipinos cut the girders, intending to have the structure fall with the train, but it collapsed prematurely of its own weight. Well Fortified by Insurgents. The Bagbag river, which is about a hundred yards wide at that point, was splendidly fortified, and the Americans were compelled to approach across an open space from which the natives had cleared every obstruction to sight. The bank of the river, a high bluff, was surmounted with trenches, capped with rocks, ioopholed and partly hidden' by bushes. 376 CONTINUATION OF THE WAR, General Wheaton's brigade approached the river along the railroad, leaving camp beyond Malolos City. General Hale's vpas earlier on the march and sweeping westward toward the railroad. The armored train was being pushed by Chinamen, the Twentieth Kansas regiment advancing in extended order on the left and the First Montana regi- ment, with the Utah light artillery, on the right. The rapid-firing guns on the train "opened the ball" at 11 :30 a. m., about a mile from the river, their popping alternating continuously with the boom of the six-pounders. The Montana regiment and the Utah artillery batteries at the same time entered the jungle, from which the insurgents, who were occupying a large, straggling village of huts, poured heavy volleys. In the course of an hour the Americans had forced a passage through the woods to the open space in front of the river, and the artillery, immediately on wheeling into the open, began shelling the Filipino trenches. Brilliant Work by Kansans. In the meantime Company K, Twentieth Kansas, led by Captain Boltwood, performed one of the most brilliant achievements of the cam- paign. The regiment was being held in reserve, and Company K charged a distance of a quarter of a mile over a cornfield to the bank of the river, near the bridge, where the insurgents from a trench were peppering the train, then about 200 yards down the track. The com- pany found shelter in a ditch. Colonel Frederick Funston called for volunteers to cross the river, and the colonel himself, Lieutenant Ball, a private of Company K, a private of Company E, Trumpeter Barsfield and Corporal Ferguson of Company I crawled along the iron girders. While this was going on the men of Company K, from the ditch, were fusillading the trenches in the endeavor to divert attention, but the Filipinos got the range from a trench down the river, and their bullets soon spattered the water under the structure. Having reached the broken span, the small but valorous party of Americans slid down the caisson, swam a few yards to the shore and crawled up the bank, the little colonel leading the way to the trenches, revolver in hand, while the few remaining Filipinos bolted. Colonel Funston said afterward : "It wasn't much to do. We knew CONTINUATIOK OF THE WAR. 377 they could not shoot straight, and that our boys would attend to them while we were crossing." Hard Fight for Hale's Troops. General Hale's troops, on the right, had the hardest fight. They followed the north bank of the river nearest the town from the east, with the First Nebraska regiment on the left and the First South Dakota and the Fifty-first Iowa beyond. The country to be traversed was mostly jungle, but the Filipinos stood their ground even in the open spaces. General Hale^s right joined General Wheaton's left soon after noon, a curve in the river enabling the Americans to pour an enfilading fire into the enemy's trenches. About this time the cheers of the Kansas troops announced that the Americans had crossed the river. General Hale's men began to ford the Chico, a branch of the Bagbag, stretching to the northeast. The general himself plunged in up to his neck, and the regiments, all carrying flags, floundered across the stream. The guns of the Utah light artillery were dragged over next and formed into an extended line to advance upon the trenches before Calumpit, from which the Filipinos were pouring continuous volleys. The armored car had one man killed and two wounded. The Kan- sas regiment had three wounded during the charge, and the Utah light artillery one killed and two wounded. Most of the other casualties befell the South Dakota regiments. The fighting was resumed at 6 o'clock the following morning. Dur- ing the night the American engineers repaired the Bagbag bridge, thus enabling our troops to cross the river. General Wheaton's brigade advanced in extended order, with the Kansas regiment to the west of the railroad and the Montana regiment to the east of it, and took up a position covering one and a half miles on the south bank of the Eio Grande. On the opposite bank were fortified trenches, from which a few American soldiers would have been able to defy thousands, so strongly were they constructed. Found Trenches Deserted. The Americans found the trenches on the south bank of the river deserted, which furnished them with cover from which they could pick 378 CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. off Filipinos whenever one of them showed his head. When the natives began firing, two puffs of smoke, simultaneously, from the trenches on each side of the railroad track, showed they were using cannon, which was a genuine surprise to the Americans. Several shells burst close to General Wheaton's staff, but it seemed that the Filipinos failed to master the machinery of modern shells, as they were unable to get the right range. The taking of the bridge over the Rio Grande at Calumpit, the most strongly defended position held by the insurgents, on April 27, was a deed of astonishing daring. This bridge was the most valuable strat- egic point in Luzon, and the fact that it was guarded by the most trust- worthy and best disciplined regiments of the Filipinos made the feat the more noteworthy. It was a red letter day for the Twentieth regiment of Kansas volun- teers, commanded by Colonel Funston. One hundred and twenty men belonging to that regiment crossed the river in the face of a deadly fire from 3,000 insurgent Mausers. This torrent of bullets was aug- mented by the fusillade of a Maxim gun, of which the Filipinos had obtained possession. Colonel Funston, with only nine men, charged the trenches manned by thousands of insurgents, discharging their rifles as they ran up the embankment. The American artillery on the south shore of the Eio Grande poured shot and shell into the insurgent stronghold, until the natives were stampeded and retreated north towards Baeolor. The Gateway to Luzon. In order to give an adequate idea of the bravery of our troops and the extraordinary character of their achievement, it is necessary to describe the defenses held by the Filipinos and the topography of the country. The bridge where the desperate fighting took place is about one hundred yards long. It extends over the Eio Grande and is the gateway, practically, to the entire northern portion of the island of lAizon. All the ties and rails had been removed from the structure, making it almost impossible to cross, as the men had to creep along the iron framework. At the further end of the bridge, opposite Calumpit, were carefully constructed and formidable earthworks, which seemed almost impreg- nable. They were in the form of semi-circular trenches with roofs of GEN. CHARLES KING In dress worn at the installation of President McKinley. OONTlNtJATIOK OF THE WAR. 381 steel rails around the approach of the bridge, forming ^ splendid pro- tection against bursting shells, and for a time they made the work of the artillery almost futile. These earthworks extended for a long distance in either direction, and were evidently the work of many weeks. An old Spanish cannon was mounted near the railway, with its muzzle pointed south towards Calumpit. About three hundred yards west of the railroad, on the north shore of the Eio Grande, a deep, narrow stream empties into the river. Be- yond this are other trenches commanding the south shore of the river. Position of the Opposing Forces. The American forces occupied the south shore, within fou.r hundred yards of the insurgent earthworks. One gun from the Sixth artillery and one revolving cannon were stationed in a freight-house near the bridge. Another piece from the Sixth artillery and one of the revolv- ing guns belonging to the Utah battery, under Lieutenant Fleming, were stationed three hundred yards west, on the bank of the Rio Grande. Then three of the heavy guns of the Utah battery and two Gatlings under Major Young were placed at short distances east of the railway at point-blank range of the insurgent trenches. The Kansas regiment was west of the railroad track, while the First Montana vol- unteers were on the east side. In the early morning the Filipinos began a steady fire from both their infantry and artillery. Most of it was directed upon the freight-house where the Sixth artillery gun was stationed. The Americans, however, returned such a heavy fire that the insurgents were obliged to keep beneath the cover of their earth- works. It was during this fire that Colonel Funston and his one hundred and twenty Kansans performed the exploit of the day. They marched down to the river, a distance of three hundred yards from the freight-house, in plain view of the insurgents. Immediately the Filipino fire was directed upon the Kansas men. Colonel Funston and his men. were prepared to cross the river so that they could make a flank attack upon the insurgents in the trenches. Privates White and Trembly of Company D of the Kansas regiment stripped off their uniforms, jumped into the river and swam directly toward the Filipino breastworks. Almost immediately they drew the fire from the trenches of the insurgents, but evidently they had not 3S2 CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. been noticed at. the end of the bridge. The latter were fully occupied by the artillery and infantry fire of the Americans. Natives Scared by the Din. When White and Trembly reached the shore they carried a rope to the beach, tied it to an upright of the bridge, and by making a tremendous noise frightened the insurgents out. They had no arms, but they threw clods of dirt into the trenches and kept up such a terrific yelling that they thought a whole company was upon them. All this time Colonel Funston and his men on the south shore of the river kept up a steady fire, thereby protecting White and Trembly. Two more Kansans followed in a small boat with the clothes and rifles which had been stripped off by Trembly and White, but the boat capsized. Its contents were lost and the two men in it were obliged to swim for their lives. Colonel Funston in the meantime followed on a raft with about twenty men. Close behind him came two more rafts on which were thirty men. The appearance of this number revealed to the main force of the Filipinos the daring trick which had been practiced upon them. Immediately they directed a wild fire toward the rafts. It was in- effective. As soon as Colonel Funston reached the opposite shore with his fifty men he rushed down to the small stream which empties into the Eio Grande about three hundred yards from the railroad bridge. His men were yelling like demons. They were pouring a terrific en- filading fire into the main trenches of the insurgents across this small stream. The Filipinos became panic-stricken. There was a regular stam- pede. When Colonel Funston saw them running he searched for some place to cross, and in so doing got under fire from several hundred in- surgents who had retreated some distance from the smaller stream. A Maxim gun was opened on them from a different direction and this cross-fire compelled them to retire. When the Maxim ceased the Fili- pinos returned. Finally Colonel Funston found a small boat, and with Captain Orwig and eight men crossed the small river and with this handful of volunteers charged straight into the heavy trenches held by the Fili- pinos. They chased the insurgents out of their protected position and CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. 383 by the time Colonel Funston i-eaclied the railroad the Kansas and Montana troops began creeping across the bridge. The Insurgents Demoralized. It was thought the insurgents had fled. They were noticed, how- ever, in a big field to the rear of their intreuchments forming a long skirmish line. Several hundred of them prepared to advance. They appeared greatly demoralized, however. Two generals on horses gal- loped wildly back and forth endeavoring to restore order. They finally got the Filipinos into fairly good order as a skirmish line. The generals could be seen by the Americans urging their men to advance. As the line moved forward the Kansas regiment opened fire from the position on the north bank of the Eio Grande. The in- surgents broke again., The total Filipino loss was more than forty killed and thirty-seven were taken prisoners during the day. The American loss was slight. One man was killed and one wounded in the morning fight. In the afternoon battle one man was killed and several wounded in taking the trenches. Many were overcome by the dreadful heat and long march to Apalit, as the advance was made during the hottest part of the day. General Mac Arthur said at the end of the fight: "While it was not a bloody engagement it was one of the most daring and the most magnificent that ever took place. When it is con- sidered that the Filipinos numbered several thousands of well-armed men, with almost impregnable trenches, the feat of our soldiers in forcing them out is almost without parallel. I want to make this state- ment strong. The credit of this great success is due to the daring of Colonel Funston of the Kansas volunteers and to the quick discern- ment of General Wheaton." Aguinaldo Asks a Truce. The first overture for peace in the Philippines was made April 28 by representatives of Aguinaldo. The carriers of the white flag were Colonel Manuel Aguelles and Lieutenant Jos^ Bernal of General Luna's staff. They were met at the outposts in the suburbs of Calumpit and were escorted in the most for- mal manner to the headquarters of General Otis. The American commander received them pleasantly, but his face 384 CONTINUATION OF THE WAR did not disclose the jubilation he must have felt when he saw that the enemy had come to him with an olive branch, telling him, to all intents, that the war was over. The officers informed General Otis they had been directed by their chief to say that he desired to end the war. It was necessary for Aguinaldo, they said, to bring the matter before the Filipino Congress, and that body had been called to meet on May 1 to consider terms of peace. It was desired that the American commander should direct that there be no further aggressive measures on the part of his forces for two weeks in order that the congress could be brought together and the important matter discussed. General Otis heard the statements of the native soldiers with the greatest courtesy. "Tell your General," said he, "that he must lay down his arms with- out any reservation whatever. I cannot recognize the Filipino govern- ment or its congress. If you wish peace, surrender. You will be allowed perfect amnesty. There will be no punishment for acts already committed. America forgives you. "The proclamation issued by my Government is sincere, and you shall share with our own people the fullest liberty. But now you must make a complete and unreserved surrender. You are compelled to admit that you are defeated. "America did not begin this war. It was of your own making. There is a big army on the way from the United States and there is nothing for you to do but surrender. This is absolute." In further conversation General Otis accentuated the demand that there should be a complete surrender, and pointed out the futility of continued opposition on the part of the rebels. He undoubtedly made it clear to the emissaries of General Luna and Aguinaldo that he had no concessions to make. Hint of New Proposals. Colonel Aguelles and his companion listened with attention to the words of the General. It was plain that they were seriously impressed. The Colonel, in reply, said that he was not in a position to make a definite answer to the demand, which was unexpected. He said that he would return to his leader and that he and the Lieutenant might be expected back with another proposition. With that the interview ended. CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. 385 The two truce-bearers were sent away with a guard, although there was no reason to believe that they would be molested. The populace took the liveliest interest in their visit, but there was no demonstration. The two officers paid a visit to their families and called upon several friends. In spite of the peaceful overtures of their commissioners the Fili- pinos vigorously resisted the advance of General MacArthur's division from Apalit toward San Fernando, fighting desperately at long range, after running from trench to trench when driven out by the American artillery. The movement commenced at 5 :30 on the morning of May 4. Gen- eral Hale's brigade, consisting of five Gatlings under command of Major Young of the Sixth artillery, two battalions of the Fifty-first Iowa regi- ment, the First Nebraska regiment and the First Dakota regiment, ad- vanced along the road, a few miles west of the railway line. General Wheaton, with Hotchkiss and Gatling guns, under the command of Lieutenant Naylor of the Utah light artillery, mounted on handcars, pushed ahead, the Twentieth Kansas and First Montana regi- ments deploying to the right and left when feasible. The country to be traversed proved to be the worst yet encountered, miles of marshes and many unfordable streams delaying the advance materially. Both brigades met with resistance simultaneously on ap- proaching the river near San Tomas, which is about eight kilometers from Apalit. The center span of the railroad bridge had dropped into the river, and the rebels had only left a small force to check General Wheaton, their main body lining the strong trenches in front of General Hale. Although the attacking force poured a heavy artillery and musketry fire across the river, the enemy stubbornly resisted for over an hour, ultimately breaking when Major Young shelled their left flank, and then retreating along the river bank under cover. Retreat and Burn Villages. General Wheaton in the meantime tried ineffectually to draw the fire of the Filipinos in the trenches east of the track. So soon as they discovered that the nature of the country would permit only a few skirmishes on each side of the embankment the natives regained their courage and fought desperately for three-quarters of an hour in the face 386 CONTINUATION OF THE WAR of the American volleys and a rapid-fire fusillade, until flanked by the Montana regiment. Then a general scramble ensued, most of the enemy boarding trains that were in readiness, and the others taking the road to San Fernando, after burning the villages of San Tomas and Minalin. About noon General Wheaton crossed the broken bridge, cleared the stragglers out of the villages and advanced toward San Fernando. General Hale effected a crossing simultaneously, after a slight delay necessary to repair a stone bridge. The main body of the enemy was at San Fernando under the per- sonal command of General Luna. After an hour's hard fighting the insurgents retreated in the direction of Santo Tomas, which is a mile west of the railway. Two companies of the Twentieth Kansas regi- ment pursued. A great many of the insurgents were captured and when the Kansas volunteers reached the main body of the enemy Gen- eral Luna ordered his troops to fall back for a mile to a position a mile east of the railroad, where the foothills form natural intrenchments. In the meanwhile Lawton's troops had advanced to Santo Tomas, driving the insurgents before them. Before the Filipinos left the city they fired the houses. Wheatori's brigade advanced on General Luna's men and a desperate stand was made. The Americans secured a posi- tion in the freight house of Santo Tomas, from which an effective fire was directed upon the Filipinos, who were more protected by their natural earthworks. After half an hour's firing General Wheaton, attended by his own staff, and Colonel Funston, leading four companies of the Kansas regi- ment, made a dash across the open field. The American soldiers for- sook the protection of the buildings along the railroad and started on a dead run for the insurgents. It was a most picturesque and gallant charge which General Wheaton and Colonel Funston led. Behind them came the soldiers, all cheering and yelling for their lives. Colonel Funston was slightly wounded in the hand, but not seriously enough to incapacitate him from duty. Two Americans Killed. The total losses of the day on the American side were two killed and fifteen wounded. In this number of wounded are included the offi- cers who were struck by Filipino bullets. Immediately before the battle of San Tomas, when General Luna CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. 387 saw that an engagement with the American troops was inevitable, he sent back an aid post haste to Bacolor, where General Mascardo was, demanding re-enforcements. Mascardo's reply was that he would take orders from no one but Aguinaldo. This defiance so infuriated Luna that, in spite of the impending conflict with the common enemy, he took 1,500 of his soldiery and made a forced march to Bacolor, intent on chastising his comrade-in-arms. Mascardo was nothing loth to fight it out, and ordered his command into line of battle. Shouts of hatred and defiance were heard on both sides. Outside the opposing forces the insurgents' camp was all con- fusion. Aguinaldo, terrified by the situation, ordered his chief of stafl', Colonel Arguelles, to make peace at all hazards. The soldiers had loaded their pieces and were waiting for orders to begin the onslaught, when Arguelles galloped between the lines, frantically waving a flag of truce. There was an angry conference between him and the rival generals. Aguinaldo was drawn into it. With all the intensity at his command he begged Luna and Mascardo not to plunge the Filipino forces into civil strife at a time when they were already broken and demoralized by successive defeats at the hands of the Americans. His entreaties prevailed for the time being. Luna sullenly returned to the front after the commanding general had provided him with re-enforce- ments and ordered Mascardo to be court-martialed for not having sent them at first. Major-General Lawton's column advanced to a position two and a half miles north of Balinag on May 6. Before making a forward move- ment General Lawton sent back to Manila two wounded men of the Minnesota regiment and one of the 'Oregonians who were hurt in yes- terday's fighting, besides twenty sick men. They were sent by way of Malolos. General Lawton's advance met with but slight opposition. Outside of Maasin 2,000 insurgents who occupied an intrenched position were routed in short order. Natives Given Office. The first Filipino municipal government sanctioned by the Amer- icans was established at Baliang on May 8. General Lawton had au- thorized the inhabitants of the village to select a native for mayor, and to elect a Filipino council, and this was done. The peaceful Filipinos 388 CONTIKUATION OF THE WAE. were much pleased by this concession, and hundreds of the refugees returned to their homes. They were given food supplies of rice and sugar from the insurgent stores which had been captured by Gen- eral Lawton when he seized Baliang, and this policy did much to weaken Aguinaldo's power in this section of the island. There was a hard fight May 8 at San Ildefonso. A reconnoitering party, consisting of one company of Minnesota volunteers and two com- panies from the Oregon regiment, ran into a force of insurgents strongly intrenched at San Ildefonso. A system of heavy earthworks extended from an impenetrable swamp on the left along the ridge fronting the town. Flanking trenches had been thrown up, commanding every ap- proach to the village. The Americans were within short range of the earthworks before they were aware of the presence of the Filipinos. A furious fusillade came from the insurgent stronghold, and the Amer- icans were forced to withdraw. Major Diggles of the Minnesota regi- ment, was shot through the head. A corporal, belonging to one of the Oregon companies, received a bullet wound in the arm. General Mascardo's army, inspired by wine taken from the store- houses of Ba color and by the general's oratory on the evening of May 8, attacked San Fernando. There was tremendous yelling and a great expenditure of cartridges by the natives, but very little result. General Mascardo held the outskirts of Bacolor west of the railroad. In front of his positions were the Kansas and Montana regiments, which occu- pied trenches that the Filipinos had constructed in anticipation of an attack from the direction of the sea. During the afternoon General Mascardo, with a large retinue of offi- cers, rode along the lines, frequently stopping to harangue his warriors. At dusk a detachment of the enemy rushed toward the outposts of the Montana regiment, but were met by a hot fire from the Montana regi- ment's line. The insurgents, from trenches nearly three miles long, responded. Distributed Barrels of Wine. After an hour's firing, during which one private soldier of the Montana regiment was wounded, the insurgents sabsided, although they kept up a scattering fire throughout the night.- Prisoners who were brought into the American lines said that General Mascardo dis- tributed barrels of wine among his soldiers, telling them that he ex- CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. 389 pected to capture the city of San Fernando. The trenches undoubtedly saved the Americans from heavy loss, the bullets falling thick about them during the engagement. The "tinclad" gunboats Laguna de Bay and Cavedonga, under com- mand of Captain Grant, steamed up the Rio Grande to Calumpit May 10, clearing the entire country of rebels from the bay upward. When the vessels reached Macabebe about 1,000 of the inhabitants of the place assembled upon the banks of the river, cheering the expe- dition lustily. Captain Grant was given an ovation when he went ashore. Many of the Macabebes said they were anxious to enter the service of the American navy for the campaign against the Tagols. ^ A Message from Aguinaldo. The members of Aguinaldo's cabinet tendered their resignations on May 3. Coupled with the various resignations was the unanimous recommendation that Mabini be retained as secretary of state. The Filipinos claim that the motive of this wholesale resignation was to leave Aguinaldo at liberty to appoint a new cabinet if desired. Aguin- aldo, in answer to the resignations, sent a message to the house of representatives of the so-called Filipino government and said that he was satisfied with the personnel of the present cabinet. Then he followed with a long resume of the situation as it is at present. The following are extracts of the statement which Aguinaldo sent to the Filipino legislature: "You are obliged to inaugurate your difficult task at the moment of greatest anguish to the country; when the guns of the enemy do not respect either life, honor or public interest. "The representative of the American government brought me from Hongkong with promises that he would aid in the reconquest of this country's lost liberty. Fortunately the people, anticipating my desires, had thrown off the yoke of Spanish domination without foreign aid. "Trusting in the honesty of the Americans and recognizing that our easy triumph was partly due to their destruction of the Spanish fleet, I have obtained the friendship of those representatives by assuring them that the Filipinos preferred an alliance with America to any other nation. Unfortunately my efforts encountered their pretension, 390 CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. wMch was as inconceivable as it was firm, that I should be subservient to their orders. My negative answer induced them to decline to recog- nize our government." Accuses WasMngton Officials. Aguinaldo, in continuing his address to the legislature, accuses the authorities at Washington of precipitating the present hostilities with- out warning or without declaring war, because President McKinley be- lieved the sentiment of the people in America was going rapidly against the acquirement of the Philippines. He acknowledged the superiority of arms, of discipline and of the numbers of the American forces. The Filipino soldiers received warm praise in the address for their bravery in maintaining the unequal struggle, as follows: "I am deeply moved by such an exhibition of virtue and patriotism. I am convinced that I should not be permitted to abuse the generous sentiment of these unfortunate people any longer or continue to extend the strife and their sacrifice unless it were absolutely necessary. "I have solicited the members of the American Philippine commis- sion for a temporary but general suspension of hostilities. I did this in order to secure time in which to allow the Filipinos to consider the sad situation and debate upon the guaranty of liberty which might be offered by our enemies, but the Americans refused to consider with- out previous unconditional submission to their orders. Our efforts were all against any such plan, which would oblige us to recognize their sov- ereignty, with no guaranty except their promise of liberty. "I am now fully convinced that our arms constitute tlie sole means of gaining our aspirations. I believe this because for the fulfillment of the promises made by the American government it is necessary that a formal agreement be drawn up between the Filipinos and the Amer- icans. This agreement must be approved by the American congress. No such document exists, nor will the Americans give the Filipinos time to draft one conformable with our desires and customs. There- fore it is evident they desire to fulfill the promises they have made only when it is convenient to them. Must Keep up the Struggle. "It would be cruelty for us to submit with such indiscretion and abandon our defenseless people to the merciless foreign guns and can- CONTINUATION OF THE WAR, 391 non, which would vomit their greatest abuses upon us after we had relinquished our arms. You will understand that there is no other recourse for me than to maintain this struggle till death. I rest with the assurance that we will achieve a final triumph, which will be the more brilliant on account of the terrible obstacles we will have over- come. Providential events unforeseen may change the outcome of this struggle in a single instance." Twenty American scouts under command of Captains Case and B'erkheimer, with two companies of the Minnesota and Oregon volun- teer regiments, flanked the insurgents at San Ildefonso on the morn- ing of May 13 and captured that place. The natives were so terrorized that, although they fired over 20,000 rounds of ammunition, they only wounded one scout. The Americans killed one insurgent officer and wounded six soldiers. The insurgents retreated to San Miguel, six miles north of San Ildefonso. Records that were captured indicated that one-fifth of the opposing insurgent force has been killed and wounded since General Lawton's advance began on May 1. Spaniards and Natives Battle. General Rios, Spain's military representative in Manila, informed General Otis that the inhabitants of Zamboanga, on the island of Mindanao, demanded arms from General Montei'o for defense against the American forces, but their request was refused. The natives' at midnight then opened fire on the Spaniards with the machine guns and rifles stolen from Spanish gunboats. The natives were repulsed with great loss. General Montero, a major of engineers, and Captain Builea, were seriously wounded, Lieutenant Granado was slightly injured, one private soldier was killed and three wounded. The na- tives cut off the water supply and other resources of the Spaniards at Zamboanga. The Filipinos resumed the attempt to induce the Americans to dis- cuss the situation. Reyes, a young lieutenant on the staff of General Gregorio Del Pilar, came to General Lawton on May 13 under a flag of truce. He was accompanied by a barefooted bugler. The two were escorted to Manila by Captain Sewall of General Lawton's staff. Reyes told Major General Otis that Aguinaldo desired passes for a 892 CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. military commission to come to Manila to confer with the American- Philippine commissioners. General Otis replied that passes would not be necessary, as unarmed commissioners could enter the American lines. He would leave the matter, he said, in General Lawton's hands. Lawton Occupies San Isidro. On the morning of May 17 Colonel French, with the Twenty-second regiment, the Thirteenth Minnesota volunteers and a battalion of the Oregon regiment, advanced from Balnaste and at 9 o'clock reached the Filipino lines in front of San Isidro. Contrary to expectations, slight resistance was offered by the insurgents. When the main body of General Lawton's command came up the forces of Colonel French had invested the town. This village was re- garded as one of the most important points occupied by the Filipinos, and its capture was a decisive blow a^ninst the insurrection. On May 18 General Otis cabled the war department at Washington as follows: "Manila, May 18. — Adjutant-General, Washington: Representative insurgent cabinet and Aguinaldo in mountains twelve miles north of San Isidro, which abandoned 15th inst., will send in commission to- morrow to seek terms of peace. "Majority of force confronting MacArthur at San Fernando has retired to Tarlac, tearing up two miles railway ; this force has decreased to about 2,500. Scouting parties and detachments moving to-day in various directions, Kobbe with column at Candava on Rio Grande. "Great majority of inhabitants of provinces over which troops have moved anxious for peace, supported by members insurgent cabinet. Aspect of affairs at present favorable. OTIS." Major Kobbe's brigade took Candoba on the morning of May 18 without opposition. Captain Grant, with the gunboat Laguna de Bay, steamed up the river ahead of Major Kobbe's command, and, on reach- ing the town, found white flags flying from all the windows. A Fili- pino school-teacher, who spoke English, hurried down to Major Kobbe and offered to surrender the town. The insurgent governor and the majority of the native inhabitants had fled from the village. Major Kobbe sent a messenger after them with the assurance that they would be treated kindly, and a large number returned. CONTINUATION OP THE WAR. 393 Admiral Dewey Homeward Bound. The cruiser Olympia, with Admiral Dewey on 'board, left Manila on its homeward journey to the United States on the afternoon of May 20. "Happy?" said Admiral Dewey, half an hour before sailing. "Happy? When I am going home after thirteen months this day? Happy? I cannot find words to express my joy. I shall go first to Montpelier. I am sorry I could not cross the continent, but I did not feel equal to the strain." It was a magnificent scene in Manila harbor when the Olympia, with Admiral Dewey on board, started on the long voyage. Anchor was weighed promptly as eight bells sounded. Just as the Olympia started, its jackies scrambled up the rigging, manning the yards, and presenting a spectacle that made the blood tingle. As the Olympia passed the Oregon the crew of that battleship gave nine cheers for the Olympians, who responded by throwing their caps so high that dozens of them were left bobbing in the wake of the cruiser. Then followed the noisiest half hour known in this harbor since the battle which linked its name with that of Dewey. The din of guns and brass bands echoed through the smoke and the fleet of steam launches shrieked their whistles, the musicians of the Baltimore played "Home, Sweet Home," her flags signalled "Good-by," and those of the Oregon said "Pleasant voyage." The merchant vessels dipped their flags, the women on the decks of the vessels of the fleet waved handkerchiefs, and the great, black British cruiser Powerful, which lay the furthest out, saluted the Olympia. The latter's band played "God Save the Queen," and to this the crew of the Powerful responded with hearty cheers for the Olympia. The last music heard from Admiral Dewey's ship was "Auld Lang Syne," while the guns from the forts at Cavite and from the Monterey, on guard off Paranaque, too far to be audible, puffed white clouds of smoke. The Olympia was disappearing past Corregidor Island, when a battery before the walled city spoke Manila's last word of farewell. Progress up the Eio Grande, Colonel Kobbe's expedition up the Eio Grande River met with no resistance except at the outskirts of San Luis, where several hundred 394 CO:NTmUATION OF THE WAR. Filipinos were intrenched on the banks of the stream. '±h.e rebels re- treated beyond Candaba and the gunboats steamed ahead, all the way training their Gatling guns upon the banks and dropping shells wher- ever uniforms appeared on the shore. The gunboats dispersed the insurgents before San Luis. After they had passed sharpshooters in trees across the river, a hundred yards distant, harassed the Seventeenth infantry, which was marching by fours along the narrow wooded road, from which the troops were unable to see the enemy. The members of one battalion lay on their faces in the road for a quarter of an hour trying to locate the riflemen and return their fire. The road wound close to the stream, and was in a thickly settled district. It was a picturesque march. Many groups of hundreds of natives were clustered under the trees on the opposite banks, display- ing white shirts, towels, sheets, or anything white on. poles. Some shouted welcomes to the American soldiers, but most of them main- tained a sullen silence. An old man in a carriage met the troops two miles outside of the town. He said: "I have lived in England, and I have told the people that the Americans are like the English and that they need not be afraid." Captain Grant, in command 6f the gunboats, landed before the troops arrived, and met with a "Porto Rican" welcome. The natives, who had assembled on the shore, crowded about the Americans with fulsome expressions of friendship, apparently half afraid that they would be massacred. Captain Grant quickly distributed the men from the gunboat Laguna de Bay to guard the town, and the natives sent a messenger to tell the people who had taken refuge in the swumps to return. Hun- dreds of the natives thereupon returned timidly, a man with an impro- vised flag of truce flying from a bamboo pole preceding each party. Leaders Terrify Natives. A Capuchin priest, one of the few whom the Filipinos had not imprisoned, was found at Candaba. He said it was useless to try to convince the natives that the Americans had not come to oppress them, as they believed their leaders, who had strongly impressed this belief 2 -Si pa D a. -::--■; [-/:' ^ ■■:.'■ \ 'f'i^: ^ ^ ■ " ? ' jy ;■■■■ ■/^^■■,tt;''-V.-'-iv;,i4;; ^•■'' "'' .- ''•''■ s» |:>;i ^'k' ■ J I I. N ii » 1. |P M|jii mssm i! f 'fii^i ^n^^ilaM feir- 3* 1 - 1 «r'T,.55:.-*.v-'»«S?»«8» ;■■ * ; H "■: ' ■. '•, ■'■:'^:s '''■ U ■''f CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. 397 upon them. The walls of the towns were placarded with reports of the slaughter of Americans, hundreds of whom were said to have been taken prisoners. As soon as Colonel Kobbe reached San Luis the natives raided the insurgents' rice stores. All day a stream of half-naked people emerged from the storehouse, in the manner of ants, rushing to their homes with bags of rice on their heads. Terms Proposed to Filipinos. On May 22, Professor Schurman, head of the United States Philip- pine commission, submitted the following written propositions to the Filipinos: "While the final decision as to the form of government is in the hands of the congress, the President, under his military powers, pend- ing the action of congress, stands ready to offer the following form of government : "A governor-general, to be appointed by the President; a cabinet, to be appointed by the governor-general; all the judges to be appointed by the President; the heads of departments and judges to be either Americans or Filipinos, or both; and also a general advisory council, its members to be chosen by the people by a form of suffrage to be here- after carefully determined upon. "The President earnestly desires that bloodshed cease, and that the people of the Philippines at an early date enjoy the largest measure of self-government compatible with peace and order." The United States conunission prepared the scheme, and the Presi- dent cabled his approval of the form of the document. The Filipinos made no definite proposition, except for a cessation of hostilities until they can present the question of peace to the people. Professor Schurman told the Filipinos they bad no means of gathering the people together, as the Americans control most of the ports. He also reminded them that a liberal form of government was offered them, and pointed out that it was better than the conditions existing under Spanish rule. Gozaga, president of the Filipino commission, replied that nothing could be worse than Spanish rule, and admitted that the form of gov- ernment proposed was liberal. The civilian members of the Filipino 398 CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. commission declined to co-operate with the other members of that com- mission, as the former considered Aguinaldo's latest demand to be preposterous, after Major-General Otis' refusal of an armistice, refer- ring to his wish for time in order to consult the Filipino congress. Filipinos Fight Hard. \ Thirty Filipinos were killed and over sixty wounded in a battle which took place on the morning of May 24 between the American forces and the insurgents at Santa Arita, one mile north of San Fer- nando. The Americans lost one man. Twelye of our troops were wounded. The insurgents made the attack. About nine o'clock the Filipinos opened fire upon the outposts of General MacArthur's command. The American scouts fought bravely, and held the natives back until they were re-enforced by troops from San Fernando. General MacArthur at the head of two battalions of the Montana regiment and General Funston leading two battalions of the Kansas regiment, two guns from the Utah battery, one Hotchkiss and one Gatling gun hurried to the assistance of the outposts. The insurgents were occupying the trenches which they had pre- viously vacated at the fall of San Fernando. The Kansas troops de- ployed to the right, while the Montana soldiers went to the extreme left. The artillery was left in the center of the line. The Filipinos made an obstinate resistance. Finally they attempted to retreat, but found themselves flanked by the Kansas troops. Gen- eral Funston charged his men, and drove the insurgents right over into the fire of the Montana volunteers. Finally they escaped from this fearful fire, but they left their dead and wounded where they had dropped on the battlefield. Besides the killed and wounded, ninety were made prisoners, while over one hundred stands of arms were captured, having been dropped by the natives in their wild flight from the Americans' fire. Fire on San Fernando. The insurgents made a daring attack upon San Fernando early in the morning of May 26. This attack was one of the few in which the Filipinos assumed the aggressive where the American troops had a force of any size. COITTINUATION OF THE WAR. 399 They had crept back to the trenches from which they had been driven by Generals MacArthur and Funston, and made this attacli on the city, which once was Aguinaldo's capital. The Montana regiment, under General MacArthur, immediately left San Fernando and formed a skirmish line along the railroad. This quick move surprised the insurgents, who fell back, but all the time of the retreat returning fully as heavy a fire as the advancing Ameri- cans poured into them. Two companies of the Kansas regiment were rushed to the support of the Montanas. The insurgents crossed the tracks to the north of the position taken by the American troops and made a final stand. Their line extended on both sides of the railroad tracks. They poured a heavy fire into the Montanas. A battalion of the Kansas regiment, under Major Watson, formed on the left flank along the railroad, while the South Dakotas re-enforced the outpost under Colonel Frost. General Hale, at the head of the Iowa regiment, swung around to the right. The insurgents were thus surrounded on three sides. The fight was fast and furious for an hour. General MacArthur was ready to bring the artillery into play when General Funston reported that the Filipinos were retiring. They broke their way out of the semi- circle of American soldiers to the woods and broke up in small squads. When daylight broke it was ascertained that the insurgents had carried many of their wounded with them to the woods while still protected by the darkness. A Victim of Treachery. On May 27 the cable ship Recorder, which was engaged in picking up the broken cable connecting the islands of Negros and Cebu, entered the harbor of the town of Escalante. Captain Tilly, who was on the Recorder for the purpose of observing the work of the signal corps in repairing the broken cable, and a party of the ship's officers went ashore in the launch. A flag of truce was hoisted by the natives on shore, and the Americans, thrown off their guard, sailed boldly to the shore and disembarked. The insurgents waited until the entire party had landed, and then treacherously poured a murderous volley into the little party. Captain Tilly and the second mate threw themselves into the water, 400 CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. hoping to escape from the bullets. The commander, heedless of the great danger, reached the launch again and put off from the bank. He thus saved it from being captured. In the meantime the bullets fell like rain about the fugitive Americans. The second officer was picked up by the launch just as he was sink- ing from exhaustion, but Captain Tilly sank before aid could reach him and was drowned. Memorial Day in Manila. Memorial day was celebrated at Battery Knoll, where Scott's guns were planted against the Filipino trenches in the first day's fighting at Manila. Nearly three hundred soldiers lie buried there on a black mound, surrounded by rice fields, rough boards marking the graves, which are ranged in five unbroken rows. Beyond these are Spanish blockhouses and bamboo hedges, which were mown by shells from the American guns. The few soldiers who could be spared from the trenches came to Battery Knoll dusty and bronzed, bearing flowers with which to strew their comrades' graves. A silk flag was placed above each mound. The day was as mild as a New England spring day. Just before sunset a few hundred Americans gathered in a circle around Battery Knoll in blue and brown uniforms. Among the soldiers were groups of Amer- ican ladies, and brown-faced natives peering curiously at the unwonted spectacle from points near by. The guns of the monitor Monadnock, bombarding Paranaque, boomed a significant reminder of the nearness of war. Just as the Sixth artillery band began a dirge, the thunder of the Monadnock's guns ceased, while taps sounded from the bugle. Colonel Charles Denby, of the United States Philippine commission, presided at the exercises. He spoke briefly of the peculiar solemnity of the day to Manila. The chaplain of the British cruiser Powerful offered up an invocation. Chaplain Pierce, of the Twenty-third infantry, and Chaplain Cressey, of the Minnesota volunteers, delivered orations, and the soldiers sang appropriate hymns. After taps had been sounded, soldiers took the flags from the graves to send to relatives of the dead. Similar services were held over the dead in the Paco cemetery. Colonel Denby was the orator on this occasion. The graves were decor- ated with a vast number of flowers. CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. 401 High mass for the dead of the Roman Catholic communion was cele- brated at the Paco cemetery in the morning. Orations were delivered by Fathers McKinnon and McQuade and Chaplain Stevenson of the Idaho regiment, a Methodist, and Peter McQueen, a Congregational clergyman of Boston. Most of the business places in Manila were closed in observance of the day. The American and many foreign flags were displayed at half- mast. The graves of soldiers and sailors buried at Cavite and Iloilo were also decorated. Battle Near Manila. General Hall's column, consisting of a part of the Fourth cavalry, the Oregon and Wyoming volunteers, the Ninth infantry, and guns of the First and Sixth artillery, crossed the San Mateo river early in the morning of June 3, and about noon easily repulsed a large band of Filipinos about twelve miles east of Manila, between Mariquina and Antipolo. A running fight was in progress all the afternoon. A Filipino out- post first attacked a few American scouts, whereupon the Fourth cav- alry formed a long skirmish line and easily drove the insurgents into the hills. Then the Oregon regiment moved across a wet, soggy rice field, in extended order, toward the hills, where it was believed a large force of the enemy had concentrated. When the Oregonians were within about a mile of the position the Filipinos opened a heavy fire, the Americans replying and pressing forward more rapidly. After a few volleys the insurgents were seen scattering over the crest of the hills in every direction, and their panic was increased when the artillery opened upon them and the shells began to explode all around them, undoubtedly causing great loss of life. The bombard- ment by the batteries and the musketry was maintained for nearly half an hour, after which not a Filipino could be seen on the hills and not a shot came from the position. The heat was intense, and the troops suffered greatly, but they con- tinued on the trail taken by the fleeing enemy in the hope of driving them toward the lake. Colonel Wholley, with two battalions of the First Washington regi- ment, a battalion of the Twelfth infantry, two guns of Scott's battery and a party of scouts under Major Jeisenberger left San Pedro Macati, 402 CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. and, after fording the river Pasig, advanced northeast upon Oainia, while General Hall approached the town from the opposite direction, the gunboats Napidan, Covadonga and Ceste co-operating in the river. This important movement was kept so secret that the public thought the plan was to send General Ovenshine's lines forward against the in- surgents, who are intrenched south of the city. Found Taytay Deserted. General Hall's column, in the movement upon the Morong penin- sula, completed a circuit of twenty miles over rough and mountainous country, having two engagements with the insurgents, one of them severe, and keeping up an almost constant fire against scattered bands of rebels for nearly twenty-four hours from four o'clock Saturday morn- ing, when the column left the pumping station. The Filipinos were driven in every direction and the country through which General Hall passed was pretty thoroughly cleared. At ten o'clock the column reached a point a few miles from Taytay, where General Hall was met by General Lawton, who had already entered the town and found it deserted. General Hall's objective point was Antipolo, ten miles off, and there was desultory firing all along the line of march. The gunboats could be heard shelling the hills in advance of the column. The column, after driving the rebels from the foothills near Maria Chino, about noon yesterday,' with a loss of but two or three slightly wounded, proceeded with all possible haste toward Laguna de Bay, the Fourth cavalry in the lead, the Oregon regiment next and the Ninth infantry last. At five o'clock those three regiments fought their second battle of the day, and it resulted, like the first, in the complete rout of a large Filipino force located in the mountains and having every advantage of position. In this fight the American loss was four killed — three of the Fourth cavalry and one Oregonian — and about fifteen wounded. The Filipino loss could not be ascertained, but the terrific fire which the Americans poured into them for half an hour must have inflicted severe punishment. In this engagement our troops made one of the most gallant charges of the war, and the enemy was forced to flee in the greatest disorder. C©NTINUATION OF THE WAR. 403 It was the intention to press on to Antipolo, but this was found impossible, owing to the two fights and the constant marching for more than twelve hours, with nothing to eat since morning and no supply train in sight. The troops, moreover, suffered from the intense heat, many being prostrated and all greatly exhausted. Consequently they bivouacked for the night on the second battlefield. 'to^ Terrific Hail of Bullets. The cavalry, the Oregonians and two companies of the Ninth in- fantry had just crossed a small creek and entered upon a sunken road, from which they were emerging upon a small valley, surrounded on all sides by high and heavily wooded hills, when the rebels, concealed in the mountains on the three sides of the plain, opened a hot fire and sent showers of bullets into the ranks of the Americans. The latter deployed immediately in three directions. Then followed a charge across the rice fields and ditches and up the hillsides, from which the shots came all the time pouring in a terrific hail, while the air resounded with the constant rattle of musketry. , The cavalry, being in front, suffered the severest loss when the attack opened, two of their killed being sergeants and the other a private. The Oregonian killed was a private. The natives were unable to stand the vigorous firing of the Amer- icans long, and at the first sign of their wavering the cavalry, Ore- gonians and Mnth infantrymen broke into wild cheers and charged still faster up the hillside, pouring in volley after volley, until the enemy left the places where they were partially concealed by the thicket, fled over the summit in the wildest confusion and disappeared in the surrounding valleys. After the fight was over the firing was continued by the Americans for more than an hour in clearing out the bush and driving away strag- gling Filipinos. The troops, after camping for the night on the battlefield, started early the following morning for Antipolo, where it was expected a strong resistance would be made. Antipolo is a place far up in the mountains which the Spaniards had said the Americans could never capture. It has cost Spain the lives of three hundred troops. 404 CONTINUATION GF THE WAR. The progress of the column was considerably delayed while passing up the steep mountain grade by a small band of insurgents, but these were effectually routed by the Fourth cavalry, which was in advance, and the troops reached Antipole in a few hours. Our lines were immediately thrown around on three sides of the town, and then the final advance was made. But it was found unneces- sary to fire a shot Not a rebel was visible, and the town was entirely abandoned. Hall's Advance is Delayed. When General Hall reached the top of the mountain beyond An- tipolo his command could plainly see many natives, evidently in- surgents, moving rapidly in single file across the valley toward the northeast. The difficulty and delay in getting his wagon train across the mountain prevented General Hall from moving forward that day. He camped at Teresa Sunday night in consequence of this delay. That town was fully occupied by natives, who professed to be friendly to the Americans. The march next morning was delayed until the heat of the sun be- came terrific, and the troops in consequence suffered greatly. When the advance over nine miles of mountain road began the country ap- peared deserted, and throughout the three hours the brigade was on the road not a single shot was fired and not an insurgent was seen. The suffering of the troops was pitiable; many were overcome by the heat and dropped out of the ranks before Morong was reached. In the meantime Colonel Treumann, with the North Dakota volun- teers and one battalion of the Twelfth infantry, was advancing on the other side of the peninsula for the purpose of trapping the insurgents and capturing the shore battery which was posted there. However, his movement frightened the insurgents away on Sunday, they retreat- ing northward, evidently being those who were seen by General Hall from the mountain top making their way across the valley below. Their shore battery of two guns was also successfully carried away on carts. The natives at Binangonan told the Americans Monday that armed in- surgents to the number of two hundred had retreated to San Mateo, north of Mariquina. CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. 405 Sick and Wounded Exposed in Storm. Colonel Wholly and the Washington regiment returned by water from Morong to Pasig Monday, but were overtaken on Laguna de Bay by a torrential storm and were compelled to remain on their cascoes all night exposed to a cold rain, which caused much distress to their sick and wounded. All the men of this command disembarked safely at Pasig, June G. When General Hall and Colonel Treumann joined in the Morong ex- pedition their Whole object was to trap the insurgents on the small pen- insula. They failed in this purpose, but the insurgents were driven northward from a large district around Morong, Antipolo and Taytay. The American losses in the expedition were seven killed and twelve wounded. The insurgent loss is unknown, though the Washington regi- ment found many dead natives at Morong. Hall's brigade found the bodies of four dead insurgents north of Antipolo. Native Army Flees. An American force four thousand five hundred strong, in a brilliant advance through jungle ahd morass, cleared the country from San Pedro Macati south to Paranaque, between the bay of Manila and Bay lake, of insurgents on June 10. Fierce fighting marked the movement, the United States forces losing two officers killed and twenty-one soldiers wounded. In one engagement the natives left fifty dead behind them when they fled for cover. Many wounded Filipinos were picked up by the Americans and given medical attention. The overpowering heat made the day's work more difficult, fully forty per cent, of the force being exhausted when a halt was called at noon. Many prostrations were reported. Four American warships, including the monitor Monadnock, shelled Paranaque, driving the in- surgents out. The movement took the natives by surprise, the American column leaving at daybreak and pressing forward with all possible haste dur- ing the early honrs of the dayi Generals Lawton, Wheaton and Oven- shine commanded the United States forces, which by noon were within a few miles of Paranaque, their objective point. 406 CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. Natives Shoot from the Jungle. General Lawton's force consisted of two battalions each of the Twenty-first and Ninth infantry, six companies of the Colorado volun- teers and a detachment of artillery. The Nevada cavalry was under General Wheaton and the Thirteenth and Fourteenth infantry, the Fourth cavalry and a detachment of light artillery were under General Ovenshine. It was scarcely dawn when the troops in a, long, silent procession wound up the hillside behind the American trenches and formed a skirmish line. Concealed in the jungle, the advance insurgent outposts fired a few shots before being seen. The opposing forces occu- pied two ranges of crescent-shaped hills. General Wheaton's advance over barren country was slow and ac- companied with great suffering to the men. The land traversed was high and hilly, devoid of vegetation, and the blazing sun made the sandy soil terrible to march over. Besides, the insurgents constantly harassed the soldiers from trenches located on the crests of the hills, from which they fired on the Americans and inflicted considerable loss. The Colorado volunteers led the advance of General Wheaton's brigade. Their march was a constant succession of gallant charges up the hillsides in the face of a galling fire, only to find each time that the insurgents had retreated to the next hilltop before the Colorado men reached them. These tactics were repeated time and again. Filipinos Play a Clever Trick. In one instance the Filipinos resorted to a clever deception. The Americans were lured into the trap, and as a consequence were sub- jected to a severe cross-fire for a time. The insurgents had placed a lot of damp straw in what the Americans supposed was a trench along one of the hilltops. The straw was set on fire and the thin line of smoke fooled the Americans into thinking that the trench was full of Filipinos and that the smoke came from their rifles. The Americans made a dash for the supposed trench and poured volley after volley into the position. In the meantime the Filipinos, hidden in another trench, were subjecting the Americans to a galling fire. When the Americans discovered the hoax and started for the trench in which the insurgents were hidden, the Filipinos retreated in safety. During the advance before the conjunction of the two brigades many CONTINUATION OF THE WAR 401 insurgents succeeded in passing through the American lines. They sub- sequently attacked the stragglers and the signal corps in the rear of the general adyance and caused much annoyance. The Fourteenth infantry, of General Ovenshine's brigade, met with strong opposition from a band of Filipinos which was in a large and strongly constructed trench. The Americans were repulsed in their first and second attempts to capture this trench, but the third day they dashed up to the breastwork and gained possession of it, but most of the insurgents succeeded in making their escape. The, most exciting incident of the day was the flank attack upon General Wheaton's troops. The Americans were approaching Manila bay about a half mile south of Las Pinas for the purpose of completing the semicircle inclosing Las Pinas and Paranaque. General Lawton and General Wheaton, with their respective staffs, were in advance. In the following column were a troop of Fourth cavalry, the Colorado vol- unteers and the Ninth infantry. On approaching Zapote river the ad- vance guard met with a sudden and fierce fire from across the stream. The Colorado men hurriedly formed a skirmish line along the bank of the river. While attention was thus directed to the force across the river, the American officers were amazed to observe that the insurgents had thrown out a long skirmish line six hundred yards to the left. The Fillipinos were advancing across an open field toward the American lines. A battalion of the Ninth infantry deployed and advanced in skirmish order toward the Filipinos, who were thrown out in the same formation. As soon as the American line began its advance the in- surgents opened with a fierce fire. The American line was between two fires, because all this time the rebels across the river were keeping up an incessant firing upon our troops. Two guns from the artillery, were hurried out. They began to shell the insurgent lines, and the Filipinos who had made the flank attack retreated. They ran toward the lake, thus escaping from the semicircle of American troops which had been drawn around Las Pinas and Paranaque, and also keeping in apposition where they would be able to attack the Americans from the rear. Troops Bivouac in a Storm. The river opposed further advance and the troops bivouacked there Saturday night, sleeping on their arms in an open field. During the 408 CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. night a fearful rainstorm came up. The Americans were shelterless. All night long the insurgent bugles could be heard in Las Pinas. Those shrill blasts marked the departure of the Filipinos from the village before the only avenue of retreat was cut off. A big band of insurgents in the rear of the American lines began a derisive yelling about mid- night. Frequently above the other din could be heard the shouts of "Viva los republica Filipina!" ("Hurrah for the Filipino republic!") Early the following morning the troops effected a crossing over the Zapote river and marched into Las Pinas. Hundreds of the inhabi- tants were found there peaceably attending to their affairs, and all professedly friendly to the Americans. There were scores of young men of soldier age but in civilian dress who watched in silence the Americans enter the town. They offered no resistance, and being i^pparently friendly were not molested. The Monadnock assisted the soldiers by shelling Paranaque before the troops entered the village. A native priest said that the Filipino troops, numbering two thou- sand, commanded by General Norils, had withdrawn toward Bacoor the day and evening before. A scouting party advanced to Paranaque and found the same state of affairs existing there. In that village were hundreds of men professing themselves friendly to the Americans and declaring that they were noncombatants. The insurgents had con- structed magnificent earthworks at Paranaque, but these were aban- doned. They were afraid that the Americans would surround them and starve them out, so they made no stand there. General Luna Assassinated. The relations between Aguinaldo and General Luna had been strained to the breaking point because of Luna's attempts to assume control of affairs, and the final rupture was forced by Aguinaldo issuing secret orders to the provincial governments. Luna thereupon demanded from his chief copies of the documents. He received the curt reply that Luna was General of the army, and that the civil government did not concern him. Luna, on opening the reply at his headquarters in the presence of his officers, exclaimed, hotly: "He will be dead to-morrow." One officer, who was friendly to Aguinaldo, hastened to warn him, and Aguinaldo called together twenty trusted soldiers, fellow-towns- men of his, and stationed them around his house, with instructions to CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. 4O9 kill any one attempting to enter, regardless of rank. This was on the 5th of June. Luna appeared the next day and saw Aguinaldo at the window. A member of the guard said: "Aguinaldo has gone to inspect the troops." Luna then exclaimed, "You are a liar," drew his revolver, struck the guard and tried to force an entrance into the house. Before he could use his revolver one of the guards bayoneted him, another shot him in the back and others stabbed him. In all he had twenty wounds. Luna's aid-de-camp was killed in the same way. Death of Captain Nichols. Captain Henry Nichols, the commander of the United States monitor Monadnock, died from sunstroke on Saturday, June 10, and was buried at Cavite the next day with appropriate naval ceremonies. The oflflcers of the fleet were present, and the flags on all the vessels Avere half-masted. The sudden death of Captain Nichols was particularly sad, because it occurred just at the moment when the result for which he had hoped and worked for months was about to be realized — namely, the capture of Paranaque and its occupation by the American forces. The Monadnock has been lying off Paranaque for two months past, under fire from the rebels almost daily. The heat here has been in- tense and the officers and men of the Monadnock suffered greatly. The commander-in-chief offered to retire the Monadnock from this trying duty and replace her by another ship, but Captain Nichols preferred to remain, declaring that he did not want to leave his post until Paranaque fell and the coast from there to Cavite was cleared of rebels. The heat on Saturday was most severe and the monitor was engaged all day in shelling the trenches at Paranaque and the rebels fleeing south through Las Pinas, and also watching the American troops clos- ing in upon the towns. Captain Nichols was overcome by the heat at noon and retired to his cabin, where he received frequent reports of the operations and gave directions for several hours. He became much worse at 3 o'clock, lost consciousness and expired at 5 in the afternoon. Several hours before his death he expressed gratification at the way events were pro- gressing, remarking to an officer: "We have got the rebels there at last." 410 CONTINUATION OF THE WAE. Many Americans Killed. One of the most vicious attacks from the insurgents during the entire campaign was made at the Zapote river in the province of Cavite on Tuesday, June 13. Almost to the day a year previous the insurgents in this province fought the greatest engagement of the Spanish-Fili- pino vpar at the same place, defeating a strong force of Spaniards, which had been sent from Manila against them. Their successful defense of the bridge at that time doubtless inspired them with greater courage than they otherwise would have shown. The insurgents of Cavite province are the most warlike of any in the island of Luzon. This is the province of Aguinaldo, and the men who were met and defeated by General Lawton's troops were those who did the severest fighting against the Spaniards under the direction of Aguinaldo and his immediate lieutenants. Early Tuesday morning a battalion of the Fourteenth infantry, which was doing outpost duty, was fired on from the bamboo thickets in its front. Thereupon Lieutenant Donovan led 150 men from com- panies F and I of the Twenty-first infantry to make an armed recon- noissance among the river bayous to locate the enemy. A native was found who volunteered to conduct the Americans along a practicable passage through the marshes. The Americans were formed in a long column, and advanced along a narrow strip of land lying next to Manila bay, and in this march they passed far beyond the insurgent trenches at the Zapote river. Then they struck inland, crossing dikes and broad ditches, and keeping at all times a sharp lookout for the enemy. Americans Nearly Overwhelmed. Suddenly they stumbled on the insurgents' flank, and straightway the enemy poured a terrific fire into them, which created consternation. The center of the American column broke under this attack and re- treated. The two ends of the column, however, stuck to their positions and fought manfully against an overwhelming force. The insurgents rushed through the broken center, cutting off the American soldiers at the right end of the column from the rest of the troops. Thus hemmed in by enemies on all sides, except in the direction of the bay, the soldiers retreated to the beach, where they made a stand and fought CONTINUATION OP THE WAR. 411 for their lives. Eighteen of the American party were wounded under this attack, including Lieutenants Donovan and Connolly, and two were killed, their bodies being left on the field. One of those killed was the native guide. The condition of the remnant, caught and sur- rounded by the natives, would have been desperate had it not been for the warships in the bay. The commanders of the monitor Monad- nock and the gunboat Helena sent 100 sailors ashore in three boats with a Colt's rapid-fire gun, and these, forming with the soldiers, strongly re-enforced them. Lieutenant Connolly, who had been wounded, was conveyed to a ship in the bay. The sailors, on landing and forming for action, directed an enfilad- ing fire on the strong line of earthworks guarding the passage of the Zapote river. General Lawton hurried forward a battalion of the Ninth infantry to the assistance of the soliders and sailors in their fight. It took position along a little ridge on the beach. The Monadnock, Helena, Manila, Albay and Callao began shelling the beach, and these combined forces of army and navy soon drove the insurgents back into the jungle. Attack on the River Defenses. About 2 o'clock in the afternoon an advance of the left of General Lawton's forces was ordered. The Twelfth and Fourteenth infantry, with the mountain battery under Lieutenant Kenly, attacked the in- surgents who were entrenched beyond the river. The enemy fought with courage and intelligence, holding their fire until the Americans had come within close range and then pouring forth terrific volleys. The Americans advanced, as usual, by short rushes, doing splendid work and never faltering in the face of the withering fire. They charged across the open country and over the bridge into the trenches of the enemy, which until then had been swept by the guns of the warships. The insurgents were driven out of the trenches almost at the muzzles of the Americans' guns. Kenly's battery had advanced to the very river bank, losing men constantly. After the assault a cor respondent counted twenty dead insurgents in the trenches, and seven wounded Filipinos were captured here. The bridge was carried at 3:15 o'clock, after -several hours of close- range fighting. Many recruits, Who had recently joined the ranks of the 412 CONTINUATION OF THE WAE. regulars, saw their first fight in this encounter, and showed their valor, never flinching even in the hottest part of the engagement. The second fight began at 5:20 o'clock near Bacoor and quickly developed to serious proportions. The Ninth infantry had moved from the beach along a system of dykes until it came to a road bordered by a thick jungle one mile from Bacoor and on the right of our lines. The enemy suddenly opened a heavy cross fire from the woods to the left. Immediately two guns of the Sixth artillery were sent forward and the Fourteenth and Twenty-first infantry advanced at double quick, coming to the rescue of the Ninth in a long skirmish line, soon driving the insurgents further back into the woods. Work of the Regulars. By this desperate battle the insurgents lost a district which they believed to be invulnerable against any attack of their enemies, it hav- ing been the scene of many former victories against the Spaniards. Aguinaldo was born near by and the people hold him in superstitious reverence. The American forces engaged were all regulars of the Ninth, Twelfth, Fourteenth and Twenty-first infantry, and all of them showed magnificent valor. The sailors who were landed undoubtedly saved the detachment on the beach from destruction or capture, and the hearty co-operation shown by these and by the men at the guns of the warships has caused the soldiers here to feel the warmest gratitude and affection for the men of the navy. The official report of the American losses was ten killed and forty- one wounded. Of the 4,000 Filipino troops engaged, over one-third were killed, wounded or captured, and those who escaped were demora- lized by the terrible defeat. Many of them threw their rifles into the river during their retreat, and sought hiding places in the mountains. Insurgents Driven Back. The Filipinos made an attack on the American outposts at San Fernando, thirty-five miles north of Manila, on the morning of June 16. Their presence near the American lines had been discovered by accident early the day before. The telegraph operator at San Fernando, having found that com- CONTINUATION OP THE WAK. 413 munication with Manila was interrupted, started out alone southward to discover the cause. He soon encountered a strong force of insurgents, who fired upon him. Returning to San Fernando, the operator reported the presence of the enemy to General MacArthur, who immediately prepared for the threatened attack. At 5 o'clock in the morning the insurgents, who had formed a solid line around the city to the west, north and south, advanced, in skirmish formation, to the attack, intending apparently to capture the city by assault. The line reached from the railway bridge southward to Santa Tomas, and extended around to the west and north for several miles. It is estimated that there were 4,000 insurgents in the assaulting lines. The fight began with great spirit and continued for three hours. General Funston's brigade, consisting of the Twentieth Kansas volun- teers and the Montana regiment, and General Hale's brigade, the Iowa volunteers and the Seventeenth infantry, did the fighting. Two companies of the Kansas volunteers awaited the insurgents in a small ravine where they were well concealed from the enemy. They held their fire until the insurgents were very close, and then opened upon them with deadly volleys which did great execution in their ranks. This move made the insurgents more cautious. The Iowa and Sev- enteenth infantry came up on the double-quick and joined in the battle and inflicted severe punishment. The insurgents fought desperately, but finally were driven away beyond the trenches about the city which they had thrown up in the night At 3 o'clock in the afternoon. General MacArthur, who com- manded the troops engaged in the defense, telegraphed to General Otis in Manila that fifty dead insurgents had been found and buried and that other dead bodies were still being discovered. The American loss was one killed and thirteen wounded. A Desperate Battle. Members of the First battalion of the Fourth infantry fought for their lives on June 19. The 300 Americans who formed Major Bubb s command found themselves almost surrounded by 1,000 Filipinos, when fully six miles from re-enforcements. In order to make the anmhUa- 414 CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. ' tion of the Americans more certain, the insurgent commander sent 1,000 more Filipinos to make a flank movement on the left of Major Bubb's little band. The battle began at noon near Perezdasmarinas, about six miles south of Imus, which was the American base. Major Bubb with the First battalion of the Fourth infantry, and Lieutenant Koeper with one piece of artillery, had been sent from Imus to take possession of Perezdasmarinas. The American officers had received reports that the enemy had deserted the village. The alcalde of the town came to Imus, formally surrendered and urged that a force be sent to prevent the insurgents from looting the place. As Major Bubb's men advanced they noticed that the houses along the road were filled with amigos (friendlies), who pretended to welcome them. The battalion advanced confidently until within three-quarters of a mile of Perezdamarinas, when Major Bubb discovered that the enemy was paralleling the road for a long distance on both sides of the bat- talion. The Americans were practically surrounded. When they had reached a place in the roadway sunk beneath the rest of the country the insurgents opened fire. Their volleys were augmented by the insur- gents hidden in the houses along the road, who poured a murderous fire into the rear of our troops. Major Bubb's men immediately went into action, and, while engag- ing the force to the right side of the road, another equally strong force appeared on their left. They received with cheers the news that they were being flanked, and a part of the battalion turned upon the enemy in the new direction and met the attack with steady volleys. The fight began at noon. The enemy's fire was silenced by the Americans in an hour. Major Bubb, in retiring, discovered that he had been surrounded. He sent skirmish lines which crowded the Filipinos back toward Imus. The outflankers were under a fire from both the right and the left. The rear guard was fighting desperately to hold the enemy's rushes in check. There was an incessant and galling fire down the main road. Men were falling everywhere. The ambulance was filled with the wounded. Carts were pressed into the service, loaded with the wounded and c^^^ad and dragged by prisoners whom our troops had captured. CONTINUATION OF THE WAR. 415 General Wheaton to the Rescue At 3 o'clock it looked as if nothiug could save the battalion. Our men had been forced to leave two of our dead behind. At 4 they had pressed the enemy off to the right, and were at last behind them. Fif- teen minutes later Captain Hazard, an aid of General Wheaton's, pushed through alone with the news that Wheaton was coming to the relief. The men cheered wildly, and went for the Filipinos again. When General Wheaton arrived he found the enemy, 1,000 strong, moving to intercept the road which runs at right angles to that lead- ing to Imus. He opened with shrapnel and mowed down the insurgents until the left wing of our troops was cleared of the enemy. Then he advanced rapidly, and at 4:30 o'clock had the enemy in full rout. The insurgents fought desperately. Finally, after an hour's con- stant firing, they began slowly to retreat. The Americans followed up their advantage, giving the Filipinos fearful punishment. General Wheaton made the following statement: "I am glad to say that in today's reconnoissance the Fourth infantry, who held back 2,000 insurgents three hours, our troops acted gallantly and with the courage and coolness of veterans. Major Bubb, the com- manding officer, and every other officer in the field, should receive con- gratulations for heroism. The manner in which they handled a handful of men against an overwhelming force of the enemy was a movement which averted a contemplated attack on Imus by the entire Filipino army in Cavite province." . . . F^OBIVLS . . . OF DEWEY AND THE PHILIPPINES OUR HERO. DEWEY! Dewey! Dewey! Is the hero of the day. And the Maine has been remem- bered In the good, old-fashioned war — The way of Hull and Perry, Decatur and the rest — When old Europe felt the clutches Of the Eagle of the West; That's how Dewey smashed the Spaniard In Manila's crool:ed bay, And the Maine has been remem- bered In the good, old-fashioned v.ay. Dewey! Dewey! Dewey! A Vermonter wins the day! And the ilaine has been remem- bered In the good, old-fashioned way. By one who cared not whether The wind was high or low As he stripped his ships for battle And sailed forth to find the foe. And he found the haughty Spaniard In Manila's crooked bay, And the Maine has been remem- bered In the good, old-fashioned way. Dewey! Dewey! Dewey! He has met the Don's array, And the Maine has been remem- bered In the good, old-fashioned way — A way of lire and carnage. But carnage let it be, \^'llen the forces of the tyrant Block the pathway of the free! So the Spanish ships are missing From Manila's crooked bay. And the Maine has been remem- bered In the good, old-fashioned way. Dewey ! Dewey ! Dewey ! Crown with victor wreaths of May ; For the Maine has been remem- bered In the good, old-fashioned way; And flags that ware triumphant In far off tropic seas, With their code of symboled color Fling this message to the breeze: "We have routed all the Spaniards From Manila's crooked bay, And the Maine has been remem- bered In the good, old-fashioned way." POEMS OF DEWEY AND THE PHILIPPINES. HOL' DEM ISTAH DEWEY, yo's all right, ^ Hoi' dem Philuppines ! Made yo' point an' won yo' fight. Hoi' dem Philuppines! If dem natives get too gay Make dem walk the Spanish way; Show dem dat yo's come to say, Hoi' dem Thiluppines! Doctah Dewey, doan' yo' care. Hoi' dem Philuppines! Let dat German ge'man swear. Hoi' dem Philuppines! Reckon dat yo' saw dem first, Just yo' 'say to wienerwurst: "Come en take dem, if yo' durst!" Hoi' dem Philuppines! PHILUPPINES. Fesser Dewey, you is wa'am, Hoi' dem Philuppines ! Eeckon yo' can ride de storm. Hoi' dem Philuppines ! Tell him dat yo' will not grieve If old Diederichs should leave — Keep dat razar up your sleeve. Hoi' dem Philuppmes! A'm'al Dewey, watch yo' kyards, Hoi' dem Philuppines! Folks all sen' yo' best regyards, HoF dem Philuppines! Make dem fo'iners lay low, If dey 'sist to pester so, Make dem take dah clothes and go. Hoi' dem Philuppines! — George V. Hobart. THE BATTLE OF MANILA BAY. AT break of dawn Manila Bay A sheet of limpid water lay, Extending twenty miles away. Twenty miles from shore to shore. As creeping on a squadron bore As squadron never moved before. Majestic in its hidden might. It passed Corregidor at night. Inspired to battle for the right. And grandly on the Flagship led. Six ships — Olympia e'er ahead — . With battle flags at each masthead. The Baltimore and Raleigh true. The Petrel, Boston, Concord, too. Their flags of glory proudly flew. As early daylight broke upon The bay — before the rise of sun^- Was seen the flash of opening gun! Then every second heard the roar Of shell and shrapnel bursting o'er Our brave, undaunted Commodore! "Hold our fire!" he calmly said, As from the bridge he bravely led To death or glory on ahead! And from his lips or from his hand But one direction, one command, "Follow the flagship by the land." Full twenty minutes slowly crept Ere lightning from our turrets leapt, And pent-up hell no longer slept! The Spanish fleet, a dozen strong, Was now in range, and haughty wrong Was swept by awful fire along. Explosions wild destruction brought 'Mid flames that mighty havoc wrought, As either side in fury fought. So back and forth in angry might. The Stars and Stripes waved on the fight, 'Mid bursting shells in deadly flight! The Spanish decks with dead were strewn, Their guns on shore were silenced soon, Their flags were down ere flush of noon. POEMS OF DEWEY AXD THE PHILIPPI]N'ES. Theiv ships, theii' batteries on the shore Were gone to fight again no more — Their loss, a thousand naen or more! Dawned on the fleet that Dewey led A miracle, while Spaniards bled; For on our side was not one dead! The battle of Manila Bay Prom mind shall neTer pass away — Nor deeds of glory wrought that day; For 'mid that battle's awful roar The Spanish pride, to rise no more, Was humbled by our Commodore. — Corwin P. Ross. DEWEY'S COMING. THEY say that Dewey's comin'; that's the word from lips to lips! I'm talkin' 'bout the feller that sunk all the Spanish ships In the far Manila harbor! An', good folks, when Dewey comes, There'll be blowin' of the bugles, there'll be beatin' of the drums! They say that Dewey's comin'; he's the feller that we like! He knew when all the tempest told the lightnin' where to strike! He knew the very moment when the thunder beat its drums. And we'll blow the sweetest bugles when Mister Dewey comes! THE HERO OF MANILA. GOD of our country, Thee we sing: We thank Thee for the mighty day AVhich saw the fall of Ca,vite: Our humble gratitude we bring. Thy lavish hand we praised and knew. So laid our trust in Heav'n; But this, Thy latest bounty giv'n, Hath made our trustful hearts more true. Up with the dawu our lads arose And breathed two thousand pray'rs to Thee. For Dewey, Home, and Victory, A man could fight a hundred foes. Over the hidden hell beneath The squadron came and filled the bay, That the devil might have his lawful pay And the lamb be saved from the jackal's teeth. And he who rode the Eastern main, Nor paused the Why or How to ask,' Dewey, our son, knew duty's task And loosed the awful fiaming rain. Then burst the proud foe's swollen pride ; His vanquished fleet beneath the wave. His fort a silent gaping grave — Remorse was born : Resistance died. In sleeping Asia's spreading sea. On that great morn of May's first day. Boomed the loud note at Cavite That hailed an infant Liberty. Grod of our country, God of the world. Our pray'r that we may work thy plan And do Thy will toward Asian man — The cause Thy cause, our flag un- furled. POEMS OF DEWEY AND THE PHILIPPINES. WHO WILL CARE FOR MOTHER NOW? During one of our late battles, among many other noble fellows that fell, was a young man who had been the only support of an aged and sick mother for years. Hearing the surgeon tell those who were near him that he could not live, he placed his hand across his forehead, and, with a trembling voice, said, while burning tears ran down his fevered cheeks: "Who will care for mother now?" WHY am I so weak and weary? See how faint my heated breath, All around to me seems darkness- Tell me, comrades, is this death? Ah! how well I know your answer, To my fate I meekly bow. If you'll only tell me truly. Who will care for mother now? CHORUS. Soon with angels I'll be marching, With bright laurels on my brow, I have for my country fallen, Who will care for mother now? Who will comfort her in sorrow? Who will dry the fallen tear, Gently smooth the wrinkled fore- head? Who will whisper words of cheer? Even now I think I see her Kneeling, praying for me! how Can I leave her in her anguish? Who will care for mother now? Let this knapsack be my pillow. And my mantle be the sky; Hasten, comrades, to the battle, I will like a soldier die. Soon with angels I'll be marching. With bright laurels on my brow ; I have for my country fallen. Who will care for mother now? WHEN DEWEY COMES BACK. THEY say that Dewey's coming back To take a short vacation. And when he does there'll surely be A lot of jubilation. For everybody in the land, From youngest to the oldest. Will rush to see the hero who Is reckoned as the boldest. They want to see the man who led His fleet where dangers bristled. And who was coolest when he stood Where Spanish missiles whistled; The man who bravely sailed where Dons Had big torpedoes scattered, Who banged away until their ships To pieces he had battered. Yes, he's the man they want to see. And far they'll go to meet him; They'll strain their eyes as he draws near. And joj'fully they'll greet him. The women, too, will all turn out. The matrons and the misses, And all th^ pretty girls will try To favor him with kisses. Upon him then will be conferred The freedom of the cities, And every band in every town Will play its choicest ditties. Each orator will hail him with Most eloquent expressions. And all the citizens will join In forming big processions. Long pent up joy will then break loose. And like a flood go sweeping, And on Manila's hero then All honors we'll be heaping. Yes, when brave Dewey comes back home There'll be a grand ovation, For he's the darling and the pride Of all this mighty nation. POEMS OF DEWEY AJSTD THE PHILIPPINES, THE BAND PLAYED ON. (As the Calif ornians, under Colonel Smith, came up the beach, their band played the national air, accompanied' by the whistling of Mauser bullets, and during the sharpshoot- ing continued to encourage the men with inspiring music. — Dispatch from Manila.) FORWARD!" the Colonel sharply said. With eager eye and steady tread They crossed the strip of shining sand In rhj'thm with their pulsing band. Up from the bay the great guns roared, High o'er their heads the swift shells soared, But true and steady rose the drum Above the battle's growing hum. And wild and strident shrilled the horn. As if it shrieked in loyal scorn. The bullets whistled o'er the strand; A crimson stain was on the sand. "Fire!" shrieked the Colonel, and a roar Went booming down Manila's shore. And while its echoes died away. The fearless band in steady play, As on parade, so calm, so free, Poured forth the song of freedom's key. It roused those dauntless Yankee hearts; They felt the thrill the song impa rts, In rhythm with the horn and drum, Each lip the dear old words did hum. They fought like brave men, good and true, They pressed ahead where bullets flew. And till they'd conquered every doa The band played on. — Cleveland Plain Dealer. THE JOLLY OLD FLAG. THAR'S somethin' in the ripple of the flag that 'pears to me Means that Old Glory's confident, — she's wavin' "Victory!" The winds aroun' her sing it wing it overhead — Thar's a kinder jubilation in rumpled stripes o' red! an' her Thar's somethin' in the ripple of the flag that 'pears to me Says: "You jest keep the country and Dewey'll hold the sea!"' The winds aroun' her sing it to countryside an' town — Thar's a kind of jubilation in the red stripes ripplin' down! Somethin' in it, people! I never seen her so Peart-like an' tickled, when the wind makes up its mind to blow ! I yell "Hurrah!" She answers from the flagstaff on the shed With a reg'lar jubilation in her rumpled stripes o' red! —Frank L. Stanton. THE SONG OF DEWEY'S GUNS. w HAT is this thunder music from the other side of the world. That pulses through the severing seas and round the planet runs? 'Tis the death song of old Spain floating from the Asian main ; There's a tale of crumbling empire in the song of Dewey's gimsl POEMS OF DEWEY AND THE rHlLIPPlNES. 'Tlie hand that held the sceptre once of all the great world seas, And paved the march with dead men's bones 'neath all the circling suns, Grew faint with deadly fear when that thunder song grew near. For the dirge of Spain was sound- ed by the song of Dewey's guns! There is music in a cannon, yet, for all Sons of Peace — Yes, the porthole's belching an- them is soft music to her sons When the iron thunder song sings the death of ancient wrong — And a dying wrong was chanted by the song of Dewey's guns. — Sam. Walter Foss. THE FLAG. Inscribed to Admiral Dewey. Tune: "Lauriger," ROLL a river wide and strong, Like the tides a-swinging, Lift the joyful floods of song. Set the mountains ringing. Eun the lovely banner high, — Crimson morning-glory ! — Field as blue as yonder sky. Every star a story. Darling flag of Liberty! Law and love revealing. All the downcast turn to thee For thy help appealing. In the front for human right. Plash thy stars of morning. All that hates and hides the light, Flies before thy warning. Let the people, heart and lip. Hail the gleaming splendor! Let the guns from shore and ship Acclamation render! All ye oceans, clap your hands! Echo plains and highlands, Speed the voice thro' all the lands To the Orient islands. By the colors of the day, By the breasts that wear them, To the living God we pray For the brave that bedr them! Run the rippling banner high; Peace or war the weather, Cheers or tears, we'll live or die Under it together. — M. W. Stryker. IN MANILA BAY. ON the broad Manila Bay The Spanish cruisers lay, In the shelter of their forts upon the shore; And they dared their foes to sail Thro' the crashing iron hail Which the guns from decks and battlements would pour. All the harbor ways were mined, And along the channel blind Slept the wild torpedoes, draam- ing dreams of wrath. Yea! the fiery hates of hell Lay beneath the ocean's swell, Like a thousand demons ambush- ed in the path. Breasting fierce Pacific gales, Lo! a little squadron sails, And the Stars and Stripes are floating from its spars. It is friendless and alone, Aids and allies it has none, But a dauntless chorus sing its dauntless tars: POEMS OF DEWEY AND THE PHILIPPIKES. "We're ten thousaud miles from home; Ocean's wastes and wave and foam Shut us from the land we lore so far awav. We have ne'er a friendly port For retreat as last resort, But we'll beard the ships of Spain in their own bav. There, half-way round the world, Swift and straight the shots were hurled, And a handful of bold sailors won the day. Never since earth was begun Has a braver deed been done Than when Dewey sailed into Ma- nila Bav "They have mines beneath the sea, They have forts upon their lee, They have everything to aid them in the fray; But we'll brave their hidden mines. And we'll face their blazing lines; Yes! We'll beard the ships of Sj)ain in their own bay. God made for him a path Thro' the mad torpedoes' wrath. From their slumbers never wak- ened into play. When dawn smote the east with gold, Spaniards started to behold Dewey and his gallant fleet within their bav. "If we're worsted in the fight. We shall perish in the right — Xo hand will wipe the dews of death away. The wounded none will tend, For we've not a single friend; But we'll beard the ships of Spain in their own baA'. Then from forts and warships first Iron maledictions burst. And the guns with tongues of flame began to prey; Like demons out of hell The batteries roar and yell, While Dewey answers back across the bav. "No ironclads we sail, Only cruisers light and frail. With no armor plates to turn the shells away. All the battleships now steer In another hemisphere, But we'll beard the ships of Spam in their own ba^'. O Gods! it was a sight, Till the smoke, as black as night, Hid the fire-belching ships from light of day. When it lifted from the tide, Smitten low was Spanish pride, And Dewey was the master of their bav. "Hoi Eemember now the ilaine! Up! And smite the ships of Spain! Let them not forget for years this first of May! Though hell blaze up from beneath, Forward through the cannon's breath, When Dewev leads into Manila Bav." Where the awful conflict roared, And red blood in torrents poured, There the Stars and Stripes are waving high to-day. Dewey! Hero strong and grand! Shout his name thro' every land! For he sunk the ships of Spain in their own bay. — Charles Wadsworth, Jr.